Loading...
SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY - 12-0017-UT SECTION 006215 CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANT14-LU COMPLEE'TION Project: 1,,,,'E WRF —Screw Lift '34ation IJ rales Owner: City of Cleanvater Owner's Contract No.: _13-0017-UT, Contractor: VrhaTton Smith, inc. Project 14-001 Engineer's Project No,: 03720-045-021 This Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to.. Z All Work tinder the Contract Documents: EJThe following specif cd portions of the Work: With exception of Change Order to install New Automatic Transfer Switch. June 23, 2015 Date of Substantial Completion The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby declared and is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below. A list of items to be completed or corrected ected is attached hereto. This list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security,operation,safety, maintenance, heat, utilities, insurance and warranties shall be as provided in the Contract Documents except as amended as follows: D Amended Responsibilities Not Amended Owner's Amended Responsibilities: - None Contractor's Amended Responsibilities: - None REV 9 09 00625-1 CERTIFICATE 0F SUBS TANTIALCO M,F LET 10 N The following Jocurnents are attached to and made part of this Ccrkificate,: Notice: 11= accordance with Specification 01800-1 I, L 17, A, I l: Ala 7 7 r -t3, , e- ng aid M a in-emamce PeTsonne I Nvas comp I etcd- on June 23, 20 '5 This Certificate doe,-.s not coristitiqe an acceptance of Wcrk not in accordance with the Contract Docaments rior is it a release of Contractor's Obligation to complete the,Work in ac�cordunce with the ContTact Docuincats. 71- bad Engineer"" Date" z W N2v F, .......... Accepteatontractor Date 12 Accepted by Owner Date RE "O9 DOW-2 FER,7TrCA E OF SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (#12-0017-UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS CONFORMED DOCUMENTS These specifications and drawings have been modified where feasible to reflect changes that were made via addenda during the bidding process. Contractor is responsible for reviewing addenda and confirming incorporation into the project. Any discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Owner and Engineer immediately. Prepared for LL touter Prepared by: N %IM/11O111117 ."�#G' C,ARRO�� e'"�a oQ e.•6F N SF `••.CCA 1•'' ° f Jones Edmunds & Associates, Inc. 324 South Hyde Park Avenue, Suite 250 Tampa, Florida 33606 Jones Edmunds Project No. 03720 - 045 -01 Certificate of Authorization #1841 MARCH 2014 A, nn •'` * „IFSsi0Nt ��,�� % I WHART-1 OP ID: AE '`�� °p CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE 04 /04 /201YY) 04/04/2014 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS RTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES LOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED PRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER Phone: 407 - 660 -8282 Brown & Brown of Florida, Inc. Fax: 407 - 660 -2012 2600 Lake Lucien Dr., Ste. 330 Maitland, FL 32751 -7234 Tom D'Avanzo, CPA, CPCU NAOMNEACT Amy Manor FAX �AIC.NE Ext): (A/C, No): E -MAIL ADDRESS: amanor @bborlando.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A : Amerisure Insurance Company 19488 INSURED Wharton- Smith, Inc. P.O. Box 471028 Lake Monroe, FL 32747 INSURER B : Starr Indemnity & Liability Co 38318 INSURER C : 04/01/2015 INSURER D : $ 1,000,000 INSURER E : $ 300,000 INSURER F : $ 10,000 • REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE IANSR WVD POLICY NUMBER (MM/ DIYYYY) (MM% D //YYYY) LIMITS A GENERAL X LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY X GL2036108 PRODUCTSICOMPLETED OPS CONTRACT LIAB PER GL FORM 04/01/2014 04/01/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 300,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 10,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 X X XCU Not Excluded GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 Broad Form PD PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE POLICY X LIMIT APPLIES PRO- PER: LOC Emp. Ben. $ 1,000,000 AUTOMOBILE X X LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS O CA2036107 04/01/2014 04/01/2015 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ Comp /Coll $ 1,000 Ded B X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE 1000020846 04/01 /2014 04/01/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 20,000,000 AGGREGATE $ 20,000,000 Excess of $ GL/AL/WC DED RETENT ON$ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR /PARTNER/EXECUTIVEY /N OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below N I A WC2036109 04/01/2014 04/01/2015 X WC STATU- TORY LIMITS OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,00 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, If more space is required) RE: Job# 14 -011 Screw Lift Station Upgrades Northeast Water Reclamation Facility City of Clearwater, Owner, officers and employees required by written contract are granted additional insured status by the General Liability policy with regard to the operations of the named insured when required CITYCL2 City of Clearwater Municipal Services Building 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 -5520 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ,; ACORD 25 (2010/05) -2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD NOTEPAD INSURED'S NAME Wharton - Smith, Inc. WHART -1 OP ID: AE PAGE 2 DATE 04/04/14 Primary $5,000,000 Excess Liability Starr Indemnity & Liability Co. Excess $15,000,000 Excess Liability Liberty Insurance Underwriters Policy # 1000084336 -01 NOTEPAD: HOLDER CODE CITYCL2 INSURED'S NAME Wharton - Smith, Inc. WHART -1 OP ID: AE PAGE 3 DATE 04/04/14 by written contract or agreement. • • City of Clearwater, Florida SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (12- 0017 -UT) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer Cover.doc Page II 8/6/2013 ADDENDUM NO. 1 for NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW UFT STATION UPGRADES Project Number 12- 0017-UT DATE: February 4, 2014 SUBJECT: Addendum #1 TO: Approved Contractors and Others Concerned The jadaggEdigtagig is being rescheduled for Tuesday, February 11, 2014, at 1 :30 PM. The last dale to submit Requests for information will be Thursday, February 6, 2014, by 5:00 PM (EST). Responses will be issued via addendum by end of day Friday, February 7, 2014. A complett addendum will not be released today, but should be available tomo END OF ADDENDUM #1 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA .61;i6MMEILLBSIUMA City Manager ADDENDUM NO. 2 F o r NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES Project Number 12-0©17 -UT DATE: February 5, 2014 SUBJECT: Addendum 2 TO: Approved Contractors and Others Concerned Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. Bids, to be submitted On the specified bid date, shall conform to the 30 additions, deletions and revisions listed herein. A. IN THE SPECIFICATIONS IN SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS. 1. Article 1.1, SCOPE DESCRIPTION CONTRACT : PERIOD: 270 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS CONTRACT PERIOD: SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: 306 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS FROM NTP FINAL COMP ETION: 335 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS FROM NW IN SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS, DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: . Section 01200, Meastmement and Payment : In its entire RintiValdh: Section 01200, Measurement and Payment, included, in Attachment 2. Section 01815, Maintenance of Plant Operation and Sequence of C In its entirety. �.Rl�LIel��t�ttr: 01815, Maintenance of Plant Operation and Sequence of Constro€rn, in Attachment 3. IN SECTION IYa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATICSIS FIN Section 09900, PAINTING AND COATING: Part 2, Article 2.01, Painting Coatings Sym Index: Systems No. 31, 32, and 33 in their entirety. B. Part 2, Article 2.01, Paragraph C: In its entirety. C. Part 3, Article 3.04: t In its entirety. Part 3, Article , Paragraph A.4 In its enti IN SECTION IYa EQUIPMENT: PPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICAT Section 11310, OPEN SCRE Paragraph C: The last sentence: "Nameplate information for the adjustable speed drives shall include the manufacturer's name and serial number, input speed, voltage, current and frequency, and horsepower at full load." IN SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS,' DIVISION 15-- MECHANICAL: 1. Section 151198, Electric Motor Actuators for Valves, Part 2: 2.07 WORM GEAR SEAL AND GREASE REPLACEMENT A. The Contractor shall replace the seals and grease on the existing worm gears for each of the existing 36 -inch internal recycle plug valves. The replacement seal size, type, and material and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and installed in strict accordance with their written instructions. The existing worm gear is manufactured by Auma, Model Number GS- 250. 2. Section 15220, Sluice Gates: Part 2, Article 2.02, Paragraph A.2.a: fie: In its entirety. ReMace- with: a. Guides shalt be styled for wall mounting or in- channel mounting as shown in the Drawings. The frame and guides shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel. The guide frame will have a 3/8-x- 2-inch-deep slot and shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. All guides shall be factory- assembled. The corner shall be capable of withstanding a torque of 300 foot- pounds pull applied parallel to the gate slot in either direction. Part 2, Article 2.02, Paragraph B.1.a: Delete In its entirety. a. The gate shall be constructed from a reinforced rigid ; compOsite plastic material, having a minimum thickness of 1/8- inch, and shall meet the following minimum physical ;properties: Tensile strength 15,400 psi. Flexural Modulus 1,497,000 psi.. Flexural strength 28,000 psi Impact Strength 9.65 ft-lb /in Water absorption <0.09% (in 24 hrs) Part 2, Article 2.02, Paragraph B.2.a: Delete In its entirety. Reulace with: The frame and guides shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel. IN SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1. Section V, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: Mete: In its entirety. Rce. with: Section V, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, included in Attachment 4. IN THE DRAWINGS. 1. Drawing M -2, SCREW PUMP STATION PLAN AND SECTIONS, Note 4: : In its entirety. RaokEe w - 4. IF NECESSARY, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CUT OPENINGS IN EXISTING PUMP COVER PANELS AS PART OF ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 5. ATTACHMENT 1 ATTACHMENT 2 ATTACHMENT 3 ATTACHMENT.4 ATTACHMENTS RESPONSES TO BIDDERS' QUESTIONS SECTION 01200, MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT SECTION 01815, MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION - AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION SECTION V, CONTRACT DOCUMENTS END OF ADDS DUN NO.2 THE CITY OF CLEARV ATER PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA. }r /sJWiI#iat� B H .J1 City Mares RESPONSES TO BIDDERS' QUESTIONS Q1. The new gating and beams at the tip of the screw pumps, this is supposed to be in Additive Alternate 3, Correct? What about the handrail? A1. Section 01200, Measurement and Payment, has been revised for clarity. See Addendum No. 2. Q2. The gates in the top channel, is it correct that they will need cofferdams c sides, if bypassing is used? A2. If Additive Alternate 3 Is chosen, temporary cofferdams on the quotation and downstream sides of sluice gates SG-6A and SG4B will be required dining the installation, regardless of whether Additive Alternate 4 ` for bypass ;morphia is selected, due to the weir elevation and water level in the on ditches. Q3. Cleaning the IR Pump Station, could a bid item be added for removal of sand and grit, by the CY? Section 01200, Measurenumt and Payment, Section 01915, Maintenance of Plant Operation and Sequence of . Construction, and the Bid Form have been revised to address this question. See Addendum No. 2. Time, substantial completion is 240 days from NW, 8 Months. According to Lakesice's proposal in the specifications, shipment of the first pump can be made 18 to 19 weeks after receipt of approved drawings,-end then every 3 weeks after that This leaves a total of 31 weeks or 7.15 months for the last pump delivery with 3 weeks to install the last pump. This does not allow any time for submittal or review of drawings from Lakeside, or for no work that has to be completed after the installation of the last pump, Please advise? Section IV, 1.1 SCOPE. DESCRIPTION has been wised to modify completion time for the project. See Addendum No. 2. 05. ° Where is painting or coating called for? Don't have anything on drawings but specifications cover everything, concrete? All. Section 09900, PaIntiing and Coating, has been revised to address this question, See Addendum No. 2. To clarify, all newly installed Items under this project shall be coated as described in Section 09000, Paragraph 3.12. 15220 Sluice Gates.! wou t eng eer rr lre -these changes to the spec. We have sal s in most of the plants the Tampa, the # rages t v dal to: be ru de so that all continue : to rx that they have purchased in the past and hold competitors tors ►' th 1.07 Wenanty B. At the end of the parafpaph, add °no exams °. Othet r are w tjr- r nty. , r Under Part 2 Products X 42 A '2, 8. Frames and,G es . for F' in tf ..fin. It s as B, 2 A. Does not al /for :egnai liidciing or Tyr hie. thI nes ,should at a minimum 5/16 °. Tire 'rt# 15,t? gis rlus 1,7 ,1 psi Flexural nth. 28, Uttsi' Flexure/ Modulus 1,497,(XX) psi Compressive 30,E psi 9.65 fig -kin tip % scatfcm 1.72 ►iavr7h► 1.6x 10 per C t 8t1.a�gr+ C ASTM D648 .xp rnsnxr!i t D" ion Post 11 toot i aensti ve Low Tentur+e ExoJlent Impact Class 1 Spread of Flame, Rating BS476. P N t et ity 1' 1953 itodnguish ; ASTM D635 - 51 erg C1r,Moline, Ozone (Ito 3 PP,I A6. Sect on # 1,. Raraged tt 1A7 does not allow for alp Section 15220 has been rimed to require Type 316 'stainless steel frames and guides for both fiberglass reinforced plastic gates and cwlastix gates. The material properties for coplastix gates that are listed Section 15220, Paragraph 2.02.0.14 have been revised. See. Addendum No. 2. Q7. Are ' we to 'replace the each of the (5) screw pump MCC 'cabinets' or only, the internals (leaving the cabinets-k? pJgce): Al. Design intent is to re-use the existing MCC cabinet enclosures and replace the interior components. Q11 If the each starter 'cabinet' is to be replaced thfr entire MCC will need to be off- line (mud all (5) screw pumps). if that is the case, how long can the MCC be de-energized? Can yew help describe the process of replacing these starters? A8. The Contractor shall provide temporary power to the System as necessary to maintain plant operations in accordance with Specification 10401 1.01.0. The Contracto shall coordinate suer installation with the manufacturer representative to Install equipment according to manufacturer's requirements. Q9. There will be (7) new 3" conduits installed in the MCC room. There is very limited space in the MCC ro m to accommodate these conduits. Can you he t with some direction on haw these are to be,installed? A9. Install conduits along available space on walls and ceiling in accordance with the Contract ` _ and in accordance with. the NEC. Q10 Are the existing concrete embedded feeder conduits at the lift station for the new screw pumps and new oiler pumps (between the large existing pull box loco ed on the west side of the lift station to the pump local disconnects) to be re -used or replaced. A10. Design indent is to re-use the existing concrete embedded conthdts at this location. Q11. If new feeder conduits, can you help us with the actual routing and support concept? All. See Answer A10 above. Q12.: Can ftie bid dab be extended for 1 week? Due to the we would tike a few 117t days added for the Contractor to titer._ Al2. The bid . 3. Q13. Per. Specification Section 01204 Bid Item 3, the contrr and dcJtafgre pag, clean the wet is and all ink co G-7 shows the o t n, And a general pi ling `ctv the contractor expect any "debris" to b East of t e screw lift stater of any ttie interior wet wells, channels, etc. A13. Section 01 td t and Pament, :Sect 01 5, Pte# .4pprn and of Ccarwfion, and the been I.Sse A ndran No. 2. Q14. Specification Simon 02220-1/1.01-a tells the contractor to dispose" of existing screw, pumps, motors, sluice gates, valves, Speer Section 0135511.32-A, gives the Engineerll)wnei to the above fom tentioned items. Please clarify who has salvage tights, as this will dra tf ttte ieque►d:enaen of said screw pumps and as; Q15. Regarding the Two- 36" Plug Valve Actuators, does the City want the existing Auma GS250 Gearboxes serviced while being fitted with new actuators? This service includes new Seal kits and grease. A15. ;Yee. Section 15119, Electric Motor Actuators for Valves, has bee `revised to address this question, See Addendum No. 2.= Q16 I think the GC's are requited to provide a base bid for the replacement of (4) screw pimps and associated equipment with an alternate bid for the fifth pump. Is that also true for the electrical quote? Thia information will be very he#rful since IT need to let my suppliers know the answer to this question. A16. See Section 01200, Measurement and Payment, Base Bid Item 3. The electrical and communication components for all five screw pinups are covered under this item. Q17. In the mandatory Pl a =.Bid Meeting the Contract lime for SC was defined as 240 days from NW and for FC was defined as 270 days from NW Lakeside's proposal commis to provide shop drawings 7 weeks after receipt of . an order (from the City) and after field dimensions (from the Contractor) and also commits to ship the first pump :19 weeks after approval and 3 weeks later for each successive pump. The following is a rough schedule for procurement of the screw pumps. 1. NTP'- WEEK fl 2. FIELD MEASURE AND ISSUE ORDER - WEEK 1 (7 days) 3: LAKESIDE PREPARE AND SUBMIT WEEKS 2 -:8 (56 days) 4: OWNER / ENGINEER ,REVIEW AND APPROVE - WEEKS 9 - 11 (77 days) 5. MANUFACTURE FIRST PUMP WEEKS 12 - 30 (210 days) 6. SHIP AND DELIVER FIRST PUMP - WEEK 31(217 days) 7. SECOND PUMP - WEEK 34 (238 days) 8. THIRD PUMP- WEEK 37 (259 days) 9. FOURTH PUMP - WEEK 40 (280 days) 10. FIFTH (ALTERNATE 1) PUMP - WEEK 43 (310 days) Since the Fourth Pump will not be delivered until 'NTP + 40 weeks (280 days) there is not adequate time allocated to the project Keep in mind that the pumps will need to be installed, started -up, tested, etc Also, if the Fifth Pump is chosen, more lime would be required. Please must the co rte to a more appropriate duration. A17. See lu swsr A�4 abo Q18 The last sentence h .11310.2.Q1.0 reads, "Nantgp e` adjustable- speeed chives shah include ... " while Table 11$1Q -1 j Type of Drive is 'Constant Speed" We are not aware of any d& Please Ciatify. Al 8, 'Th 2. Section 11310 Q19. :Uri. Bidder: P , t, appears that the 0,000 ink tars s shores have been i .. ® in -lterrr No. 4 To Please review and A19. The Bidder's Proposal has art revised. See Added 1 .: � a Q20. On the Bidder's Proposal form Item 8c refers to the "Screw Ptirn>tas pr y er td "S r Pump Covers. " Please=review►- €rrrri p + A20. The Pr posal has been revised. See Addandtis► No. 2. Q21. There ( s not appear to be an adequate provision for ma nufac n in the ti on (11310 -4) and in the Lakeside del to phased consiniction of the project Lakeside includes five iJ r which would be wiequate if all of the pumps were beer.: bear tested simr aneously, but since only two pumps can be r id a likely that more days and hips will be requireri. Please review t r for manufacturer's services acrd consider increasing the requrt, to provide. A21. The Lakeside ° dal es hem the mini n manufacturer's services for this project. Each Bidd additional manufacturer's service thneas it desires. Q22. Sheet M-1 Demolish F.xistr Grating carder Alternate #3. This is listed cm: the bid form for "Aititional Improvements.* Please verify why bid work is to be classified under Modifying and installing new grating and structural spror# pump discharge ctuarn s are part of A didve At 3.Ti Measurement and Paymerst, has been revised for clarity. See Q23. Sheet M -2 note 4 indicates the modification of the screw pump covers as part of Alternate #4. Alternate #4 is Bypass Pumping and doesn't relate to the modifications. Please clarify which bid item the modification of existing covers is to be placed. A23. Drawing M-2 has been revised to address this question, See Addendum No 2. Q24. Under specification section 01200 Measurement and Payment in the `Additional Work" pay item there ° is mention of taking down the Internal Recycle Pump Station and cleaning all the piping, wet wells, and interior components. Them is no detail-of the "Internal Recycle pump Station ": on the drawings. Please indicate . a quantity of possible soli& in the pump station, size of lift station, quantity of lift stations, etc. A24. See Answer A3 above. Q25. Can flows be diverted from this station to other stations to lessen the amount of flow needing to be bypassed for this project? A25. No. The plant shall maintain operation as specified in Section 01815, Maintenance of Plant Operation and Sequence of Construction. Q26. For the bypass, can suction be from one location (first anoxic tank east) for the duration of project A26. No. Bypassing around the screw lift station or the IRPS shall not be performed Q27.. On the discharge side of the IRPS Vault there is a 30" blind flange passed the pumps and check valves. Can this be used for a tie in point for discharge of bypass flow? A27. No. Bypass pumping into this location shall not be performed. Q28. When . bypassing flows for project, do we need to bypass screw lift station all together? A28. No. See Answer A26 above. Three screw lift pumps shall remain in service at all times as described in Section 01815, Maintenance of Plant Operation and Sequence of Construction. Q29. Discharging bypass taws into oxidation reactor #1 or #2. Does it need to discharge into a certain location in the reactor? Can we discharge over the east wall of reactor #2? A29. Bypassing pumping, if selected by the Owner, shall only be performed for the replacement of sluice gates SG-6A and SO-6B and shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. Liquid convey from (*skean of the eastern sluice gate shall be discharge to the eastern oxidation ditch in the outside channel opposite of the effluent weir boX.. Liquid convey from upstream of the western sluice gate shall be discharge to the western oxidation ditch in the outside channel opposite of the effluent weir box. Q30. In regards to budget for the project What if the bypass system was put on a standby rates and rental only applied to when the system was activated? A30. Bypass pumping wNl only be performed if selected by the Owner, and payment shall be as described in Additive Alternate 4, ADDENDUM NO 3 For NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY SCREW UFT STATION UPGRADES Project Number: 124X/17-UT DATE February 7, 2414 SUBJECT: Addendum 3 TO Approved Contractors and Others Concerned . February 11. 2014, at 140 PM. Bidders' on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. Bids, to be submitted on the speolied bid date, shall conform to the additions, deletions aild revisions listed herein. IN THE DRAWINGS: Drawing S-2, SCREW LIFT STATION SECTIONS RAW In its entirety. iteuhrce wN#: Drawing S -2, SCREW LIFT STATION SECTIONS, included in Attachment 2. Drawing M-3, SLUICE GATE DETAIL 1 a. Header FRAME HEIGHT in SLIDE GATE DATA TABLE Re ,31d : Healer MINIMUM FRAME HEIGHT in SLIDE GATE DATA TABLE • b. MI NOTE 6: FRAME HEIGHT SHALL BE AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE FULL OPENING OF GATE. ATTACHMENT 1 RESPONSES TO BIDDERS' QUESTIONS ATTACHMENT 2 DRAWING S-2, SCREW LIFT STATION SECT JNS ;1 ATTACHMENT 3 2003 RECORD DRAWINGS (seven pages) ATTACHMENT 1 RESPONSES TO BIDDERS' QUESTIONS RESPONSES TO BIDDERS' QUESTIONS Q1. The detail show g a fabricated screw pump bearing block on sheet 5 -2 is not correct The correct bearing block is concrete, as shown on sheet M-2. Al. The support for the lower bearing assembly shall be stainless steel as shown on Drawing S-2. Drawing S-2 has been revised and is inched Addum No. 3. Q2. On the slide gate detail, SG -1A thru SG-5A the gate height is 6' with a frame height of 12'. For the gate to open fully, a frame height of 13' will be needed The frame height of 12' could be okay for the gate not to open fully, depending on the water depth. Please advise which frame height to quote. A2. The height of the frame shall be as needed for a 6-foot vertica l opening from the bottom of the frame. Q3. As mentioned in Addendum #2, we would also eke to request a couple of as -built drawings of the existing Internal Recycle Pump Station. A cut view and a plan view would sufte. A3. The Record Drawings of the Internal Recycle Pump Station are included in Addendum No. 3, Q4. Is the pricing that the Contractor to provide for the By -Pass Pumping (Bid Item Additive Alternate #4) meant to be a Per -Day Price? We would suggest this so that all the Contractors would be bidding the same exact scope for this item. A4. The Bypass Pumping in Additive Alternate 4 shall be lump sum as specified in Section' 01200, Measurement and Payment The bypass ptanpin duration depends on how long the Contractor requires to listen the sluice gates. Q5. There are several references in the description of work such as in the sluicegate replacements scope of work regarding 'concrete repair' Since this would be hard for the Contactor to quantify during the pre -bid process can this be included in the contingency allowance? A5. The Contractor shall only clean and repair concrete surfaces as needed to correctly install each sluice gate. Installation of the sluice gates will require some concrete surface cleaning and repair. This work shall be included in item 1Oa as specified in Section 01200, Measurement and Payment The contingency is reserved for unforeseen work. Can the Owner) Engineer provide a site drawing showing the Site Reclaimed Pump Stabim in relation to the IR Pump S! where we will be required to transfer the flushing water fern SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS • • • SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES 12- 0017 -UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www .myClearwater.com/citvprojects, on TUESDAY, FEBRUARY 11, 2014, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of a Base Bid and five Additive Alternates. The Base Bid generally includes replacing four sole- sourced 84- inch - diameter screw lift pumps including grease pumps, motors, and appurtenances; modifying the existing electrical system including replacing five soft start drives, modifying the controls system, and replacing two valve actuators. Additive Alternate 1 generally includes replacing an additional fifth sole - sourced 84- inch - diameter screw lift pumps including grease pump, motor, and appurtenances. Additive Alternate 2 generally includes replaces the screw pump covers. Additive Alternate 3 generally includes replacing twelve metal sluice gates with non - metallic sluice gates. Additive Alternate 4 generally includes by -pass pumping. Additive Alternate 5 generally includes modifying the existing pump covers. MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on Wednesday January 22, 2014 in the Municipal Services Building, 100 S. Myrtle Ave., Conference Room 130, 1st Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3`d Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, FEBRUARY 6, 2014. The bids will be publicly opened in Purchasing Conference Room 342 and read at that hour and place for Northeast W.RF. Screw Lift Station Upgrades (12- 0017 -UT). A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub - contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre - qualified Contractors in the construction category of Wastewater/Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre - qualification amount of $1,500,000.00. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks /ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. Sectionl.docx Page 1 of 2 3/1/2013 The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida Michael Murray, Purchasing Manager (727) 562 -4633 Sectionl.docx Page 2 of 2 3/1/2013 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS • SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6 CONTRACT TIME 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 5 • 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19 BID PROTEST 8 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 • SectionII i 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders • 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: www .myclearwater.com/cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre - qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre - qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. • • 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirements information is also available on City of Clearwater Website at address: www. myclearwater. com/ gov/ depts/ pwa /engin/Construction/prequal.asp. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical SectionII Page 1 of 9 7/29/2013 Section H — Instructions to Bidders conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified at the pre -bid meeting prior to the date for opening of Sectionll Page 2 of 9 7/29/2013 • Section II — Instructions to Bidders Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the SectionlI Page 3 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5 "x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and SectionII Page 4 of 9 7/29/2013 • • • • • Section II — Instructions to Bidders addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SectionII Page 5 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 162 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. SectionII Page 6 of 9 7/29/2013 • • • • • • (5) Section II — Instructions to Bidders Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5 The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must SectionII Page 7 of 9 7/29/2013 Section 11 — Instructions to Bidders be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. Sectionil Page 8 of 9 7/29/2013 • Section II — Instructions to Bidders 19.3 PRO'T'EST FEE: 410 When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. • • 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction- related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction- related Best Management Practices. References EPA website SectionlI Page 9 of 9 7/29/2013 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS . SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFINITIONS 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 6 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 7 3.1 INTENT 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 . 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2 INSURANCE 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE 11 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 14 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES 15 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 16 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8 PERMITS 17 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 110 6.10 EMERGENCIES 18 6.11 DRAWINGS 18 SectionlII.doc i 7/31/2012 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 20 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 22 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: 23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK 24 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION 24 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 25 7 OTHER WORK 25 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2 COORDINATION 25 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 26 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 27 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK 31 • • 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 • 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 39 SectionlII.doc ii 7/31/2012 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 • 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 41 17 MISCELLANEOUS 41 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2 GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION 42 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 42 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42 19 MATERL&L USED 42 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 42 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 43 22.1 GENERAL 43 • 22.2 EXAMPLE 44 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 44 • 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE 44 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 45 23.3 FIXED SIGN 45 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS 45 23.5 SIGN COLORING 45 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT 45 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE 45 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 46 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 46 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 47 Sectionlll.doc iii 7/31/2012 Section lII- General Conditions DEFINITt0NS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. APprave The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engir to verify hi every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications, The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the See ionfII.doc Page 1 of 50 7/31/2012 Section m — General Conditions Precon� Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acs as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents),\ Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreemenrt. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized admits) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the. Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm -or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Coition Schedule—CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they Mate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty- four (24) hours measured front midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers: to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Aunt, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Sextionm.doc Page 2 of 50 Section DI — General Caoamons Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications: These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the; Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Page 3 of a0 7/31/2012 Section m — General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which intended (or a related propose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFIj An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which, are vecifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontr ictnr for the performance of part oft the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified: part f) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with, the Contract duets, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is ice; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced ' by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The tcnms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with. Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond:' Section! Ldoc Page 4 of 50 7/31/2012 Swan ID - General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2..1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Sectionf Ldoc Page 5 of 50 7/31/2012 Section 111 — General Conditions 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty. (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a reconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among th parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Consltmction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the .preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstm# ion Conference a color Critical Path. Method (GPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver~ to the Owner's Representative at the reconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the reconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as -built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstr'tion conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a Sedion>II.doc Page 6 of 50 7/31/2012 Section 111'- General Conditions look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the cturent meeting to the next meetin, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed hi accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will , be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals orr codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of. their Agents or employees from those °.set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor' discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's' Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the W ork affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. SectionID:doc Page 7 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III — Genera Conditions AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL. CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so fit/Jibbed with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions, and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor ::shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating_ the necessary revisions. 4..3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data Shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data and the cost of all the following will be included in She Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities . shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting , from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. Se ction!Rdoc Page 11 of 50 7/31/2012 Section 111 General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents) Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work. and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability Sectionln.doc • Page 9 of 50 7/31/2012 Section 111 - General Conditions benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary`, personal injury, liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or "indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or deduction of tangible properly wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (1), include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater' and any other persons or entities identified bi the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and ., include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional 'insures; (ii) include, completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued. (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with, respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years, after . finial payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom, a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE SectionIII.doc • Page 10 of So Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $.1,000,000. SectionIII.doc • Page 10 of So Section I11— General Conditions 52.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible, for Purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lonesbore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. Secliantil.dac Page 11 of 50 7;3112012 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible, for Purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Lonesbore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. Secliantil.dac Page 11 of 50 7;3112012 Section 11- General Conditions For ,r Cow: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every-engaloyer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9, of the Act In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required secure the payment of compensation. 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Artic Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Cons and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all loges' and damages cased by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and ants for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable' to the work; and, in addition, waive such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other ptxxons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be Listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor,` Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the compkted Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPON IN1LITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently„ devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor- shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of cansavction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurate Contract Documents. Contractor shall .keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's, Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. ctor. All Sectionln.doc Page 12 of 50 Section III — General Conditions communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours of on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during; regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start -up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contactor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injure. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SectionllLdoc Page 13 of 50 7/31/2012 Section In— General Conditions The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or . submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6A SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all SecdonlII.doc Page 14 of 50 7/31/2012' Section m General Conditions Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing- or fiurnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcon I or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of - -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 64.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. SectionIlLdoc Page 15 of 50 7/31/2012 Section m — General Conditions. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all tunes. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. Ifa particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified ` in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such 'rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: Sectionmdoc Page 16 of 50 7/31/2012 Section II1— General Conditions however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment eligibility, 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the tinge of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement, weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or . injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at ` the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions: The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract SectionllLdoc Page 17 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to SectionlII.doc Page 18 of 50 7/3112012 Section III — General Conditions Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety y expres precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's; review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any .variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will` be backcharged to Contractor at' the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. SectionM.doc Page 19 of 50 7/3112 Section al— Conditions 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS. The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and 'legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As- Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of Project The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As- Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up blueline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior, to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness ofthe As -Built Drawings. 611.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS- BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered' land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 51- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As-Built Survey. a survey performed to obtain 'horizontal /or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also knornv as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As- Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Ovnnr will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey. coordinates. ( northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the ,stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, seetionILLdoc Page 20 of 50 Section TII - General Ccnditions cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as- built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.112.7 Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. SectioalKdoc Page 21 of 50 7/31t2012 Section •III — General Conditions 6.11 3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - lies work and symbols TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.t2 Layer Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways, EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs SectionliLdoe Page 22 of 50 Section III— General Conditions WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format 6.11.32 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5 °, and a text Tight of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1"=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format Acceptable file formats include: DWG, of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e-mail address Thomas,Maixmv@myClearwater.com. 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury , or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Sectionm.dac Page 23 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and won by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptamc of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of 'Contras obligation to perform. the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any nevi and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution deny disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Conte and officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person-- directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any ,person, directly or indirectly employed by any, of them to perform or furnish any of the. work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of darna8es, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub - contra r, Se.doe Samson IIT- General Conditions Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15 'CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified 'in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and reesponsrbility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (ii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided ' hi the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided hi these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. Sectionl Ldoc Page 25 of 50 7/3112 Section HI General Conditions In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article a may Stop the Work. The Article on. Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate servo of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner' shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Worlc The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative ,a construction are set forth m the Contract Documents and shall not be extracted without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or intemetatios of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, at Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent_ with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer Will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAIMNGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Tune. In connection Sectionindoe PaBe 26 of S0 7/31/2012 Section lII - General Conditions with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last ' submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution. Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have . under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, Sec& nlLdoc Page 27 of 50 7/31/2012 Section 111— General Conditions exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of, the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified <indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at . any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed, as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended,' modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article' for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Ann, ndments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; Sectionft.doc Section III — General Conditions changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (inching, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum ' price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT' basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. SectionlII.doc Page 29 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III - General Conditions The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items:... 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor uttnce and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental -rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book. for, Construction Equipment (a.11.a DataQuest Blue Book). T'be rental rate is defined as the full-unadjusted base rental rate fbr the appropriate item of construction evitenent and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor- owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment onstand -by. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (1O%). B. A fixed fee of teen percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other $ eneral expense. 112 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE- ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowanc=e include the cost to Contractor (less ' any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be deliver at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overld profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. SeefionlILdoe Page 30 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions 11.3 UNT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and dentem ining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made . by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii)' there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to .satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data : in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Seetionnidoc Page 31 of 50 7/3112012 Section 111- General Conditions Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be lid to acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contactors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fifes, floods, epidemics,' abnormal weather conditions or acts of God, Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be &mod to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contactor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the / Conract' (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extention of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Ow r be.I to Contractor, any Subcontractor, anY Supplier, any other Person, or to any surety employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (iderldys, by or within the control of Contractor., or (ii) delays beyond,the control of both parties Inc but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or utility owners or other contactors performing other work as contemplated by paagraph Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION; ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative acrd Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required moons, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall . employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to pe all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the , Contract Documents_ The costs for t inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except -as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws- or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part t specifically to be inspect tested or approved by an employee or other representative of s public body including all Owner Building dents and Owner Utility Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspectors,' approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative: certificates of inspectiOn or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract permit and impact fees will be waived. Contactor :shall also be responsible for obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals for Owls and Engineees Wince of materials or equipment to be or of materials, mix signs, or equipment submitted for approval prig to Coi thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is .e Contactor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if rt Owner's Representative, be uncovered' for observation, Uncovering Work as pr paragraph shall be..at Contractor's =Tense unless Contractor has given Owner's and Enghmer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same Representative has not acted with reasonable proneness in response to such notice. Sect:Wm.doe Page 32 of 50 Sect M — General Conditions 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observe by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, direptly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereaf, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for. Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13A CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in Sectionlf.doc Page 33 of 50 7/31/2012 Section M - General conditions accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work convected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item: of equipment is placed in continuous service,:. before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hermmr with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal. replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correctiion or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be ismi ed incogtor ing the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the . amount thereof:, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs ' after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Repre serrtative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's; services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and. Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable SectionM.doo Page 34 of 50 Section 111— General Conditions the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. Ali claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218335 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment` not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the :Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site marked up as- built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents: In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work Sectionladoc Page 35 of 50 7/312012 Section III - General Conditions shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact . or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, math, and furnishes of machinery and parts thereof equipst, power-tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the perfo nn ace of this Contract Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature herei nabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served Wtitirrt notice on said Contra either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Condor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such Iav1 claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all Liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the tams of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to ire any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. hi paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYIEN S The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payer unless the application requires review by an Agent If the Application for payment requhes review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owna's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of and payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any stwli payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the - results of . subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been osquired to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been fled in aumection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, ( iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set - off against the artiount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described is this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay SectionflLdoc Page 36 of 50 Section 111 — General Conditions in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (u) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with. Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially: complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and .substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor Ito complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As- built/Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other Sec tionilldoc Page 37 of 50 7/31/2012 Section ;III — General Conditions evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied , (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the, Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for' final payment, Contractor, shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and . accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the tenns and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment Thereupon, Owner's Representative will . give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall. make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. SectionOLdoc Page 38 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III'- General Conditions 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of fmal payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims, arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after fmal inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under , the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous , written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed, The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is fmished. If unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. SectionfII.doc Page 39 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III General Conditions If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved, by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the .Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Docurnems in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK.OR TERMINATE It through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for &period- of more than ninety (90) .days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally wed to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice, to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner, or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terns as provided in the article for the Owner May Tete. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Prices or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. Sedionifidoc Section III — General Conditions 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement,, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. Se.doc Page 41 of 50 7/31/2012 Section Di— General Conditions 17.6 ':RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the .Engineering Department may be renewed for years, upon mutual consent of bath the Owner and the Contractorf Vendor. All terra, and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specificatican or in the Invitation to bid, Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and mom' agreed to in writing by both parties. All .renewals are contingent upon the availability of lad the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as det nnined by the Department 17.7 ROLL .OFF CONTAINERS ANDIOR DUMPSTERS All City cant ruction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off cons and/or deuiters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) ` 562 -4923 or e Mic l jtsrCa nCCleaty ater cote. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considers d to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line . or street the Contras shall work and order thereof. 19 NlATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise he Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase nem m materials. 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of ` conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary C Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Tee Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER: DIRECT PURCHASE (013P) OPTION The Owner reserves the right, when identified during the bidding process as part of **project' doct rents, to contract with the Contractor to purchase certain portions of materials identified in the project as a sales tax savings option in compliance with Florida Law since the Owner is exempt from payment of sales tax. The Contract price includes Florida sales and other aypl'ieale taxes,, for materials, supplies, and equipment, which will be a part of the Contractor's work„ The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of r cordon materials included in the Contractor's contract. The Owner ping, construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Orderb Additionally, Purchase Onkirs will include Owner's Certificate of Eamon number. SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION for ODP items included in the Cow Documents and the APPENDIX for ODP Documents. SoctionllLdoc Page 42 of 50 Section III`- General Conditions 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contactor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; .possibility of water service disruption>'and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -' by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean ` all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required- to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SectionIlLdoc Page 43 of 50 Section 1II Gaieral Conditions 22.2EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / . / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state ;type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your propat ►. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the .pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction. process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right -of -way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the . contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsrbie for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small try, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right -of -way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within . the right - of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of alive work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of ; and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1-- SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Section 11.doc Page 44 of 30 7/31/2012 Samson 11— General Conditions 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FDCED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4-inch by 4 -inch (4"x4") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24-inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 ` PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting,) and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black.. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of- way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SectionJII.doc Page 45 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions • 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN • • PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) (DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT I CONTRACTOR: COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: rwater 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Sectionlll.doc Page 46 of 50 7/31/2012 Section III — General Conditions Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000:00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in .commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract doc io , at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certificatroi may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a .false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. SedionIadoc Page 47 of SO 7/31/2012 Section 111 — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scnitinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater detentines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or veater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The . City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. SectionlThdoe Page 48 of 50 Section m — General conditions EINACERDECAMMEM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WJTH THE BID FRQ FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIi The affant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the. City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria SectionlJLdoc Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity/Corporation Page 49 of 50 7/31/2012 Section 111 — General Conditions STATE OF COUNTY OF The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of 201_ by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity) personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Sectioal Ldoc Notary Public SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS • SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: SECTION IV i TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS i 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST 1 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 3 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 3 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 3 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA 4 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 4 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 4 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 4 III 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 6 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 6 6 CONCRETE 7 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7 7.1 EXCAVATION 7 7.2 FORMS 7 8 REINFORCEMENT 7 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 8 9 OBSTRUCTIONS 8 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 8 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 9 12 DEWATERING 9 12.1 GENERAL 9 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 9 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL 9 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON- CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY 10 • SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc i 11/26/2013 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 12 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE 12 • 13.2 PRECAST TYPE 12 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) 13 13.3 DROP MANHOLES 13 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS 13 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS 13 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 14 14 BACKFILL 14 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 14 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 14 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 14 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL, REMOVAL 14 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 15 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 15 18 UNDERDRAINS 15 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 15 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 15 19 STORM SEWERS 16 • 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION 16 19.2 TESTING 16 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 17 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 17 20.1 MATERIALS 17 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 17 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 18 20.2 INSTALLATION 18 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 18 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 18 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 18 20.4 TESTING 19 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS 19 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS 19 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 19 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 19 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 19 SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc ii 11/26/2013 • 21 DRAINAGE 20 • 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 20 22.1 BASE 20 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 21 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 21 22.2 SUBGRADE 22 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 22 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 22 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 22 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 22 23.1.1 AGGREGATE 22 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 22 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 23 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 23 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 23 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 24 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 25 23.6.1 CRACKS 25 23.6.2 POTHOLES 25 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 25 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 26 • 23.9 SUPERPAVEASPHALTIC CONCRETE 26 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 27 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT 27 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 27 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 28 25.1 IRRIGATION 28 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION 28 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 29 25.1.3 EXECUTION 33 25.2 LANDSCAPE 37 25.2.1 GENERAL 37 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 42 25.2.3 EXECUTION 45 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 52 26.1 INTENT 52 26.2 PRODUCT AND C ONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 52 26.3 MATERIALS 52 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 53 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 53 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION 53 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 54 • 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 54 26.9 PAYMENT 54 SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc iii 11/26/2013 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS 54 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 54 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 54 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS 55 29 CONCRETE CURBS 55 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 55 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 55 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 55 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 55 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 55 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 56 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT 56 31 SODDING 56 32 SEEDING 56 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 57 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 57 33.2 PRECAST TYPE 57 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 58 34 MATERIAL USED 58 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 58 36 STREET SIGNS 58 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 58 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING 58 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 58 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 58 37.4 EQUIPMENT 58 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO 59 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO 59 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION 59 37.8 LIGHTING 59 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL 59 37.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX 60 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE 60 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 60 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 60 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 60 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 60 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 60 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES 61 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS 61 SectionN_TechnicalSpecs.doc iv 11/26/2013 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WAlERWAYS OR WAlERBODIES 61 • 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 61 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 62 38.9 MAINTENANCE 62 38.10 COMPLIANCE 62 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 65 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 65 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 65 41.1 SCOPE 65 41.2 MATERIALS 66 41.2.1 GENERAL 66 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 66 41.2.3 GATE VALVES 68 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES 68 41.2.5 HYDRANTS 69 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES 70 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 70 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 70 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES 71 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 71 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 71 • 41.3.1 MATERL4L HANDLING 71 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 71 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 73 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 73 41.4 TESTS 74 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS 74 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST 74 41.5 STERILIZATION 74 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT 74 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM 74 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 74 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 75 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS 75 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 75 41.6.1 GENERAL 75 41.6.2 FURNISHAND INSTALL WATER MAINS 76 41.6.3 FURNISHAND INSTALL FITTINGS 76 41.6.4 FURNISHAND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 76 41.6.5 FURNISHAND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 76 • SectionW_TechnicalSpecs.doc v 11/26/2013 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 77 43 TENNIS COURTS 77 • 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 77 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS 77 43.L2 BASE COURSE 77 43.1.3 PRIME COAT 77 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE 77 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE 77 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 78 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 79 43.2.1 GENERAL 79 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 80 43.2.3 SLOPE 80 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 81 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 81 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 81 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER 81 43.2.8 FENCING 82 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS 82 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 82 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE 84 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) 84 43.2.13 CONCRETE 84 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 84 • 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 85 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION 85 43.2.17 WARRANTY 85 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 86 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 86 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 86 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY 86 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 87 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS 87 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS 87 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 87 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 87 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 87 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 88 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 88 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE FRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 88 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 88 45.1 INTENT 88 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 89 45.3 MATERIALS 89 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 89 • 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 90 SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc vi 11/26/2013 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION 90 • 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 90 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 90 45.9 PAYMENT 90 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 91 46.1 MATERIALS 91 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 91 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 91 46.1.3 SAMPLES 91 46.1.4 REJECTION 91 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS 91 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 92 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE 92 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS 92 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING 92 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE 92 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 92 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS 92 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION 92 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS 93 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER 93 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES 93 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED 93 • 46.4.7 BACKFILLING 94 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR 94 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS 94 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 94 47.1 SCOPE 94 47.2 MATERIALS 94 47.3 PIPE 94 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM 95 47.5 FITTINGS 95 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 95 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT 95 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE 95 48.3 COMPOSITION 95 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS 96 48.5 MATERIALS 96 48.6 WATER 96 48.7 REINFORCEMENT 96 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 96 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION 97 48.10 PROPORTIONING 97 48.11 MIXING 97 • 48.12 APPLICATION 97 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 98 SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc vii 11/26/2013 48.14 SURFACE FINISH 98 48.15 CURING 98 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION 98 48.17 INSPECTION 99 48.18 EQUIPMENT 99 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 100 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT 100 49.2 PAYMENT 100 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 100 49.3.1 MATERIALS 100 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 101 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 101 49.4.1 MATERIALS 102 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL 102 49.6 GROUTING MIX 102 49.7 LINER MIX 102 49.8 WATER 103 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS 103 49.10 EQUIPMENT 103 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 103 49.11.1 PREPARATION 103 49.11.2 MIXING 104 49.11.3 SPRAYING 104 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING 104 49.11.5 CURING 104 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 105 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 105 49.12.1 SCOPE 105 49.12.2 MATERIALS 105 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 107 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 109 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 109 51.1 SCOPE 109 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 110 51.2.1 ASPHALT 110 51.2.2 CONCRETE 110 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX 110 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 110 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE 111 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 111 51.6 PLAYING LINES 111 51.7 GENERAL 111 51.8 LIMITATIONS 111 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 112 SectionWV_TechnicalSpecs.doc viii 11/26/2013 • • • 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 112 • 53.1 MATERIAL 112 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 112 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: 114 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE 115 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 115 53.2 PERFORMANCE 115 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 116 54.1 SCOPE 116 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK 116 54.3 WORK METHODS 117 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING 117 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT 117 54.4 LITTER 117 54.5 VISUAL CHECK 117 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING 117 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) 117 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL 117 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL 118 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY 118 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION 118 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA 118 • 54.13 MULCH CONDITION 118 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR 118 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL 118 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION 118 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION 119 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE 119 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK 119 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 119 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 119 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 120 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 120 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 120 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 121 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 121 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 121 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 121 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING 121 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 122 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 122 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT 122 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 122 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 122 • 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 122 SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc ix 11/26/2013 57 RIPRAP 122 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 122 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 123 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY 123 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL 123 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR'1'RAINING 123 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 123 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 124 60 SIGNING AND MARKING 124 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 124 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING 124 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 124 62 TREE PROTECTION 125 62.1 TREE BARRICADES 125 62.2 ROOT PRUNING 125 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING 126 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 127 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN 127 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 127 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 127 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS 128 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS 128 63.6 POSTING 128 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES 128 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 128 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS 128 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 128 SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc x 11/26/2013 • • • 1 SCOPE OF WORK • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: Screw Lift Station Upgrades Project Number: 12- 0017 -UT Scope of Work: The project generally consists of, but is not limited to, a Base Bid and five Additive Alternates. The Base Bid generally includes replacing four sole- sourced 84 -inch- diameter screw lift pumps including grease pumps, motors, and appurtenances; modifying the existing electrical system including replacing five soft start drives, modifying the controls system, and replacing two valve actuators. Additive Alternate 1 generally includes replacing an additional fifth sole - sourced 84- inch - diameter screw lift pump including grease pump, motor, and appurtenances. Additive Alternate 2 generally includes replacing the screw pump covers. Additive Alternate 3 generally includes replacing twelve metal sluice gates with non - metallic sluice gates. Additive Alternate 4 generally includes by -pass pumping. Additive Alternate 5 generally includes modifying the existing pump covers. The Contractor shall refer to Section 01100 — Summary of Work, Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment, and Section 01815 — Maintenance of Plant Operation and Sequence of Construction, for details. The Contractor shall provide 1 Fixed project signs as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's schedule of work, which will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. List ODP Items to be included in the Contract Document: 1. Four screw lift pumps and appurtenance as part of the Base Bid. 2. One screw lift pump and appurtenance as part of the Additive Alternate 1. 3. Five screw lift pump covers as part of Additive Alternate 2. CONTRACT PERIOD: SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: 305 CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS FROM NTP FINAL COMPLETION: 335 CONSECUTIVE DAYS FROM NTP 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: Screw Lift Station Upgrades Project Number: 12- 0017 -UT SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 1 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: l XI Scope Of Work 2.1 a Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 L Definition Of Terms 4 '1 Order And Location Of The Work 5 ❑ Excavation For Underground Work 6 ❑ Concrete 7 ❑ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 ❑ Reinforcement 9 ❑ Obstructions 10 ❑ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ❑ Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 ►1 Dewatering 13 ❑ Sanitary Manholes 14 ❑ Backfill 15 ❑ Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ❑ Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 ❑ Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ❑ Underdrains 19 ❑ Storm Sewers 20 ❑ Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 ❑ Drainage 22 ►1 Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 r Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ❑ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 ❑ General Planting Specifications 26 ❑ Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ❑ Plant Mix Driveways 28 ❑ Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 ❑ Concrete Curbs 30 ❑ Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 /1 Sodding 32 .1 Seeding 33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ❑ Material Used 35 /1 Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ❑ Street Signs 37 Audio/Video Recording Of Work Areas 38 r Erosion And Siltation Control 39 ❑ Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 ■ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 ❑ Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 ❑ Gas System Specifications 43 ❑ Tennis Courts SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 2 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 44 /1 Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ❑ Cured -In -Place Pipe Lining 46 ❑ Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ❑ Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ❑ Gunite Specifications 49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 /1 Project Information Signs 51 ❑ In -Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ❑ Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses 54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ❑ Milling Operations 56 ❑ Clearing and Grubbing 57 ❑ Riprap 58 0 Treatment Plant Safety 59 ❑ Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ❑ Signing And Marking 61 ❑ Roadway Lighting 62 ❑ Tree Protection 63 ❑ Project Web Pages 64 ❑ Overhead Electric Line Clearance 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs. doc Page 3 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers Sectionl V_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 4 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code ( SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 5 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling SectionN_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 6 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5 ", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry ". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M -86 requirements. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 7 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2 ", if over 6 ", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 8 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 1111 Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre - construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL • Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. • 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 9 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562 -4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMITOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non - contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. TABLE 1 SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 10 of 129 11/26/2013 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/I PH, standard units 6.0 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631E 0.012 mil 0.025 µg /l Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg /1 9.3 µg/1 SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 10 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg/1 2.9 µg /1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg /I 5.6 µg /1 Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 1.1g/1 86.0 pg /l Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 tg /1 Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC yalues that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration SectionW_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 11 of 129 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications of less than 1500 mg/1, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg/l. In accordance with Rule 62- 302.500(1)(a -c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62- 621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 12 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Index #302 Sheets 1 and 2 of 2. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with l/2 -inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214 -351 Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 13 of 129 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction ofAASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off - site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. SectionN_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 14 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT • The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. • • 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly - chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub -drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 15 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of the 2013 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19i TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The work under this Section shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the City with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the City, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1) An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2) The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3) The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S -1 to S -2). SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 16 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 4) Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430 -4.8 of the 2013 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re -laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re -laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re- inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20 -feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 17 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12 -inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 18 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. Sectionw_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 19 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 20 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 -7 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330 -11 and for soil cement per Section 270 -5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), SectionN_TechnicalSpecs. doc Page 21 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160 -7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S -Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 22 of 129 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications • 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. • • Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330 -11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330 -13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 'A" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330 - 15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of 1/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 23 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE THICKNES S (Inches) LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) Type S —I Type S —I with Type S —III Top Layer Type S —III FC -3 Type S —III with FC -3 Top Layer Type S —I with FC -3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2n1 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1' /2 1'h 2 11/4 3/4 * 1 1 21/2 11/4 11/4 11/2 1 11/2 1 3 11/2 11/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S -III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S —III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S —III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC -3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 24 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 25 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be 'A" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 26 of 129 11/26/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67 -22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. • 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index ". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850- 414 -4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. • 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 27 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf /landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance star with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 28 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. • • B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 29 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2'/2" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 2001b. O.W.G 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 251.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 30 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section N — Technical Specifications pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low - density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7 ". SectionN_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 31 of 129 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 32 of 129 11/26/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 33 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than 1/2 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 34 of 129 11/26/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6 ") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE • A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 35 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 36 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section N — Technical Specifications 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.11 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 37 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non - compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1- 800 - 432 -4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SectionlV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 38 of 129 11/26/2013 • C. W: Section IV — Technical Specifications Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST TR.: MIN.: GAL.: O.C.: DIA.: LVS.: Straight trunk. Minimum. Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. On center, distance between plant centers. Diameter. Leaves. • D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4 -1/2 feet above grade. • CAL.: B &B: PPP: FG: STD.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner 's Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 39 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 40 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 41 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well- developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. Sectionly TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 42 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade `B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre- emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than 1/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs_doc Page 43 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1 ". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - 1/2 feet above grade. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 44 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM • A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. • • 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 45 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 46 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each 'h" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. Sectionlv_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 47 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1 -1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 48 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon -acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 49 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 50 of 129 11/26/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications • 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. • • 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 51 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft -lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c =0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 52 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Liner shall be marked at 5 -foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1- 800 - 344 -3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed- circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 53 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. WIren finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 54 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 55 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 56 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 57 of 129 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre - construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre - construction color audio -video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 58 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO • Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. • 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. SectionW_TechnicalSpecs_doc Page 59 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 60 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES • Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. • • 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter /siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs. do c Page 61 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 62 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence 2nd occurrence 3rd occurrence 4th occurrence Warning $32 Re- inspection Fee $80 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562 -4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562 -4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562 -4750. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 63 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3 -701 (DIVISION 7 — EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re- inspection Fee $80.00 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562 -4741 ENGINEERING /CONSTRUCTION 727 562 -4750 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionlV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 64 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications • 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING • • The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6 -inch x 3 -inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4 -inch X 2 -inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 65 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 66 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8 -inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4 -inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18- inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 12- inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4 -inch through 16 -inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSUAWWA C153 /A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSUAWWA C 153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSUAWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSUAWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 67 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4- inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 -inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 -inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16 -inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSUAWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be a- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SectionlV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 68 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL/FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2 -inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. • 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1 -1/2 -inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6 -inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5 -1/4 -inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2 -1/2 -inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. • SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 69 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4 -inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4 -inch main shall be 1 -1/2 -inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6 -inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 70 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4 -inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30- inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 71 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSUAWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionN_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 72 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18- inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10 -feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 73 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48 -hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron ". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. Sectionly TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 74 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. • • 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SectionlV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 75 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA C110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SectionlV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 76 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications anchorage, 6 -inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut -back Asphalt Grade RC -70 or RC -250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction ". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will Sectional TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 77 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 78 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section N — Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 degrees, Fahrenheit and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub - surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub - surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionWV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 79 of 129 1 1/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub -grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub -grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub -grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB -GRADE The sub -grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub -grade elevation. The sub -grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. Sectionlv_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 80 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub -grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one - quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one - quarter (2 -1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub - surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one - quarter (1/4) to one -half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one - eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo -tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub - surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 81 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT -25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2 -1/2" Ameristar HT -25 pipe; top rails 1 -5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1 -3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom -type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger -bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size, non - lift -off type, and offset to permit 180- degree gate opening. Provide one and one -half (1 -1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high - density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty -two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty -three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven - eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 82 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications the net a height of forty -two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one -half (2 — 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride -on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR -I Roller, automatic forward- neutral - reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3 -horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction - driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six -foot length aluminum. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 83 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" — 8'long x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1 -inch maximum size aggregate, 3 -inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re- aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE -LAMP The Contractor shall re -lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight -(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887 -0770 fax (336) 887 -0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 84 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w /existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 85 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB - SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub - surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs ". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction Sectionw_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 86 of 129 11/26/2013 • Section IV — Technical Specifications 102 -5 Traffic Control: 102 -5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562 -4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 87 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24 -hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24 -hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SectionN_TechnicalSpecs. doc Page 88 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305- 979 -0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 454 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 89 of 129 11/26/2013 Section W — Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed - circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight -hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 90 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications • 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS • • 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Philips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of they same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 91 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15 -inch existing sewer. 16 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18 -inch existing sewer. 18 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21 -inch existing sewer. 211/2-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24 -inch existing sewer. 28 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30 -inch existing sewer. 34 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36 -inch existing sewer. 42 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48 -inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 92 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12 -hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 93 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre- fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right -of -ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right -of -ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 94 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 95 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 -day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 96 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION • Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an air /water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. • • 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 97 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45- degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed comers by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 5062 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. Sectionlv_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 98 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. • • 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 99 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 100 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION • Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. 4IlSet the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1 /2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. • 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 101 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.11 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C -952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs. doc Page 102 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 -51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65 % -75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 103 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 104 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE • Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. • 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and/or b. Hydrophilic gel - injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi Page 105 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength Elongation Bonding Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 250 -300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole -to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density Tensile Strength Elongation Shrinkage Toxicity 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal 150 psi 250% Less than 4% Non Toxic ASTM D -3574 ASTM D- 412 ASTM D -3574 ASTM D -1042 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to ASTM (to be given) Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 Calcium Aluminate Cement 1,200 1,800 psi 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1x10 llcm /sec to 7.6x10 cm /sec at 100% RH at50 %RH 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days SectionIV_TechnicalSpccs.doc Page 106 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astor C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 107 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 108 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 4912.3.6 CEMENT LINING • 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24 -hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. • 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE • 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In -Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 109 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In -line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80 -100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer Water (Clean and Potable) Sand (60 -80 mesh) Liquid Yield 55 gallons 20 -40 gallons 600 -900 pounds 112 -138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non - coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti -Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix Section V_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 110 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04 -.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In -Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50 °F or more than 1 40 °F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 111 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In -line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70 °F with 60% relative humidity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In -Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ- W -461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A -641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A -90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B -6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1- minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A -239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 % inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 1/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger -Tite SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 112 of 129 11/26/2013 • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A -313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A -641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D -2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D -142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D -412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D -746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D -2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B -117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D -1499 and ASTM G -23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 113 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D -2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1- T104), maximum loss 12% SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 114 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC S Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D -2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. • 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 115 of 129 11/26/2013 Section N — Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SectionIV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 116 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 117 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid - February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 118 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man -hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. • • 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 119 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his/her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S -Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 120 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562 -4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 121 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand - cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand - cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 122 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT • The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand- cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. • • 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre - construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub - contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SectionWV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 123 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 124 of 129 11/26/2013 • Section N — Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two- thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two -inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four -inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SectionN_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 125 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562 -4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18 ". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. SectionlV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 126 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion - tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 127 of 129 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Upto50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 SectionlV TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 128 of 129 11/26/2013 • • • Section IV — Technical Specifications Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. SectionIV_TechnicalSpecs.doc Page 129 of 129 11/26/2013 fb SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVA SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01290 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01300 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 01310 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION 01320 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01330 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 01350 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES 01355 SPECIAL PROVISIONS 01450 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01650 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 01720 FIELD ENGINEERING • 01730 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING 01740 FINAL CLEANING 01755 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP 01770 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01780 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01785 RECORD DRAWINGS 01815 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION 01820 TRAINING 01830 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS • DIVISION 2 -SITE CONSTRUCTION 02220 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS 02240 DEWATERING 02305 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES 03720 - 045 -01 i TABLE OF CONTENTS December 2013 DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03300 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03610 GROUTING -NON- SHRINK EPDXY MACHINERY GROUT 03930 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE DIVISION 5 -METALS 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 9- FINISHES 09900 PAINTING AND COATING DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT 11000 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS 11310 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT DIVISION 13- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13300 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL 15075 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15110 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES 15119 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS FOR VALVES 15220 SLUICE GATES DIVISION 16- ELECTRICAL 16401 LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ATTACHMENTS ATTACHMENT A MANUFACTURER'S QUOTE 03720 - 045 -01 ii TABLE OF CONTENTS December 2013 • • • • DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • SECTION 01000 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work to be done consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. The summary of the Work is presented in Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Work Included: 1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, and means of construction necessary for proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary local building permits. The Contractor shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all Work and pay all costs incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. 2. The cost of incidental work described in these Project Requirements for which there are no specific Contract Items shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. 3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the Work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials, and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding. 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -1 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 C. Public Utility Installations and Structures: Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, vaults, manholes, and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies, or privately owned by individuals, firms, or corporations used to serve the public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water, or other public or private property which may be affected by the Work shall be deemed included hereunder. 1. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make his own investigations to inform himself fully of the character, condition, and extent of all such installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations. 2. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the Work. Access across any buried public utility installation or structure shall be made to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. 3. Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body which are shown on the Drawings to be removed, relocated, replaced, or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various Contract Items. No separate payment shall be made therefor. 4. Where public utility installations of structures owned or controlled by the Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the Work and are not indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications, and when, in the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement, or rebuilding is necessary to complete the Work under this Contract, such Work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such Work may be ordered, in writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously, and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, 03720- 045 -01 01000 -2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • • replacement, or rebuilding as required. If such work is accomplished by the Contractor, it will be paid for as extra work as provided in the Agreement. 5. At all times in performance of the Work the Contractor shall employ acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of public utility installations and structures and shall at all times in the performance of the Work avoid unnecessary interference with or interruption of public utility services and cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end. 6. The Contractor shall give written notice to the Owner and other governmental utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the location of his proposed construction operations at least 48 hours in advance of breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the Work. 7. The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation, or rebuilding of public utility installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein provided, shall be done by methods approved by the owners of such utilities. • 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -3 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 1.10 DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL A. Drawings: When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions and large -scale drawings in preference to small -scale drawings. B. Supplementary Drawings: 1. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the Work to be done or to illustrate the Work further or to show any changes which may be required, the Engineer will prepare drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining to such Drawings, and the Contractor will be furnished one complete set of reproducible black line prints (24 inches by 36 inches) and one reproducible copy of the specifications. 2. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the Contractor with the same force as the Contract Drawings. Where such Supplementary Drawings require either less or more than the estimated quantities of Work, credit to the Owner or compensation therefor to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of the Agreement. C. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data: 1. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities, and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications, or other data received from the Engineer, and shall notify the Engineer of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts, or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction, or improper operation resulting therefrom, nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer should such errors or omissions be discovered. 2. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility or the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of materials and equipment included in Work to be done under the Contract. D. Specifications: The Technical Specifications each consist of three parts: General, Products, and Execution. The General part of a Specification contains General Requirements which govern the Work. The Products and Execution parts modify 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -4 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • and supplement the General Requirements by detailed requirements for the Work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. • • E. Intent: 1. All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the Work is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described. 2. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used. The interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: 1. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request and at the Engineer's option that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract. 2. Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type, or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the same manufacturer. B. Delivery: 1. The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the Work so as to complete the Work within the allotted time. 2. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in or impediment of the progress of the work of any related Contractor. 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 C. Tools and Accessories: 1. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall furnish with each type, kind, or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably marked high -grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain, or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with good -grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 2. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified herein and as recommended by the manufacturer necessary for the operation of the equipment, not including materials required for routine maintenance. 3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight, and principal rate data. D. Service of Manufacturer's Engineer: 1. The Contract Prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer and shall help the Contractor, when required, install, adjust, test, and place in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, the engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer to prove that the equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 1.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: 1. For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests, and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Five copies of the reports shall be submitted and authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment. 2. If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, the Engineer ascertains that the material or equipment does not comply with the 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -6 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • • • Contract Documents, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable material without cost to the Owner. 3. Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be conducted in accordance with the recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during testing and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment before the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof. B. Costs: 1. The Contractor shall provide all inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract, unless otherwise expressly specified. 2. The Contractor shall bear the cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents, and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. 3. The Owner may test materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent to those specifically named in the Contract for compliance. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in making such tests of materials and equipment which are rejected for non - compliance. C. Certificate of Manufacture: 1. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with authoritative evidence in the form of a certificate of manufacture that the materials to be used in the Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar products of the manufacturer. D. Shop Tests: 1. Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function, or special requirements are specified 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -7 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 shall be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Five copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company and/or independent laboratory, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 3. The Contractor shall bear the cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment. E. Start-up Tests: 1. As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make start-up tests of equipment. 2. If the start-up tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract which does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before demonstration tests, make all changes, adjustments, and replacements required. The furnishing contractor shall assist in the start-up tests as applicable. F. Demonstration Tests: 1. Before the Contractor's request for a Substantial Completion inspection, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to demonstration tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water, and all other materials, equipment, and instruments necessary for all demonstration tests at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the demonstration tests as applicable. 1.13 LINES AND GRADES A. Grade: 1. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings or as given by the Engineer. The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the Contractor. 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -8 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • • • 2. The Engineer will establish bench marks and provide coordination points. Reference marks for lines and grades as the Work progresses will be located by the Contractor to cause as little inconvenience to the prosecution of the Work as possible. The Contractor shall place excavation and other materials so as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions he places contrary to this provision. B. Surveys: 1. At his own expense the Contractor shall furnish and maintain stakes and other such materials. 2. The Contractor shall check such reference marks by such means as he may deem necessary and, before using them, shall call the Engineer's attention to any inaccuracies. 3. At his own expense the Contractor shall establish all working or construction lines and grades as required from the reference marks set by the Engineer and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy of these lines and grades. He shall, however, be subject to check and review by the Engineer. C. Safeguarding Marks: 1. The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments, and bench marks made or established on the Work, bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes, and marks. 2. The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, monuments, and marks adjacent to but not related to the Work and shall bear the cost of re- establishing them if they are disturbed or destroyed. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01000 -9 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, the Work must be performed in accordance with best modern practice, with materials and workmanship of the highest quality to the satisfaction of the Owner. A. The Project title is Screw Lift Station Upgrades, Northeast Water Reclamation Facility. B. The Specification divisions and Drawings are an integrated part of the Contract Documents and, as such, will not stand alone if used independently as individual sections, divisions, or drawing sheets. The Drawings and Specifications establish minimum scope of work and standards of quality for this project. They do not purport to cover all details entering into the design and construction of materials and equipment. 1.02 PROJECT DESCRIPTION The work for this project generally includes but is not limited to the following: A. Base Bids items generally including the following: 03720 -04 -01 December 2013 1. Replace four existing open screw pumps with four sole- sourced Owner - direct purchased open screw pumps, grease pumps, motors, and appurtenances as required by the Contract Documents. 2. Replace eight existing mud valves located adjacent to the replaced screw pump as required by the Contract Documents. 3. Replace two existing valve actuators on two existing 36- inch - diameter internal recycle plug valves and modify the two hatches for the two existing valve vaults as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Modify the existing electrical system including replacing the five screw pump soft start drives as required by the Contract Documents. 5. Replace the existing programmable logic controllers in CP -21 and CP -22 with Ethernet - compatible programmable logic controllers as required by 01100 -1 SUMMARY OF WORK the Contract Documents. Modify the existing controls system as required by the Contract Documents. B. Additive Alternate 1 items generally including the following: 1. Replace an additional fifth existing open screw pumps with a sole - sourced Owner- direct purchased open screw pumps, grease pumps, motors, and appurtenances as required by the Contract Documents. 2. Replace two existing mud valves located adjacent to the replaced screw pump as required by the Contract Documents. C. Additive Alternate 2 items generally include the following: 1. Replace five existing fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) screw pump covers as required by the Contract Documents. D. Additive Alternate 3 items generally include the following: 1. Replace 12 existing sluice gates in the receiving and discharge channels of the screw lift station as required by the Contract Documents. E. Additive Alternate 4 items generally include the following: 1. Provide by -pass pumping to allow for replacement of two sluice gates. F. Additive Alternate 5 items generally include the following: 1. Modify the five existing screw pump covers as required by the Contract Documents if Additive Alternate 2 is not selected and Additive Alternate 3 is selected. 1.03 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.04 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.06 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to herein shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Specification Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 03720 -04 -01 December 2013 01100 -2 SUMMARY OF WORK • • • • • • A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Formerly (AASHO) B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) F. American Standards Association (ASA) G. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) H. American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM) I. American Water Works Association (AWWA) J. American Welding Society (AWS) K. Anti- Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA) L. Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA) M. Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) N. Federal Specification (FS) O. Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Latest English Edition (Standard Specifications) P. FDOT Roadway and Traffic Design Standards Latest English Edition (FDOT Index) Q. Geosynthetics Institute (GSI) R. National Bureau of Standards (NBS) S. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) T. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) U. Portland Cement Association (PCA) V. Occupational Safety and Health Act (Public Law 91 -596), U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA) W. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) X. Southern Standard Building Code (SSBC) Y. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Z. United States of America Standards Institute (USASI) AA. Regulations of Florida Industrial Commission Regarding Safety BB. All local, state, county, or municipal building codes requirements of the Owner's Insurance 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 03720 -04 -01 December 2013 01100 -3 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.10 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.11 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. Workdays shall consist of ten (10) hours maximum, between 6:00 am and 6:00 pm, Monday through Friday, excluding holidays. Owner inspection services are between 7:30 am and 3:30 pm, excluding weekends and holidays. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection services required outside normal work hours. 1.13 REIMBURSEMENT FEES A. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the charges of the Engineer and Engineer's Consultants as a result of the following actions: 03720 -04 -01 December 2013 1. Services due to Contractor's working beyond regular working hours as defined in the General Requirements. 2. Evaluation of substitutions. 3. Costs generated as a result of more than two submittals of any one Shop Drawing or Sample being required for evaluation due to rejection for noncompliance of the original submittal or for lack of information required by the Contract Documents. 4. Additional field observations, engineering analysis, correspondence, meetings, or other work due to non - complying or defective construction, materials, or equipment performed or furnished by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. 5. All costs due to work not being ready for tests and/or inspections when the Contractor has notified Engineer that work is ready for tests and/or inspections. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for all failed tests and subsequent retests. Partial payments payable to Contractor shall be distributed, first to reimburse the Owner for such charges, with the 01100 -4 SUMMARY OF WORK • • • • balance distributed to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The Owner's reimbursement for the charges shall be a deduction from the Contractor's partial payment(s). C. The following rates shall be applied as the Owner's reimbursement of the Engineer's fee to be paid by the Contractor for expenses defined above. 1. Senior Field Representative (Construction): $ 90.00/hour 2. Senior Construction Administrator: $ 100.00/hour 3. Engineering Consultant (Senior Project Manager): $ 170.00/hour 4. Administrative Assistant: $ 60.00/hour PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 03720 -04 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 01100 -5 SUMMARY OF WORK SECTION 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL. 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section covers methods of measurement and payment for items of work under this Contract. B. The total Contract Price shall cover all work required by the Contract Documents. All cost in connection with the proper and successful completion of the work, including furnishing all materials, equipment, and tools and performing all necessary labor and supervision to fully complete the work shall be included in the unit price and lump -sum Bid prices All work not specifically set forth as a pay item in the Bid Form or Bid Schedule shall be considered a subsidiary /ancillary obligation of the Contractor and all costs in connection with these subsidiary/ ancillary obligations shall be included in the Bid(s) to provide a complete and functional Project. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 03720- 045.01 Muth 2014 01200 -1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.10 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND CLEARING A. Except where otherwise specified, the unit price or lump -sum price bid for each item of work which involves excavation, trenching, clearing, grubbing, or disposal of cleared and grubbed materials shall include all costs for such work. No direct payment shall be made for clearing, grubbing, disposal of cleared or grubbed materials, excavation, trenching, disposal of surplus excavated material, handling water (and groundwater) and purchasing andJ auling of required fill material. All excavation and trenching shall be unclassified as to materials which may be encountered; in addition, trenches shall be unclassified as to depth, unless otherwise stated. 1.11 LUMP SUM A. For lump -sum items, payments shall be made to the Contractor in accordance with an acted Progress Schedule of Values on the basis of actual work completed and accepted by the Owner at the final completion of the Project. 1.12 UNIT PRICE A. For unit price items, payment shall be made based on the actual amount of work accepted by the Owner and for the actual amount of materials in place at the final completion of the Project, as confirmed by the final measureme. B. After the work is completed and before final payment is made, the Engineer will make final measurements, with all required assistance from the Contractor, to determine the quantities of various items of work accepted as the basis for the final unit price payment. 1.13 PAYMENT FOR INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES A. When alterations in the quantities of unit price work not requiring a Change Order(s), as herein provided for, are ordered and performed, the Contractor shall accept payment in full at the Contract unit price multiplied by the actual quantities of work constructed and accepted by the Owner at the completion of the project. B. The actual percentage of each lump sum bid item completed by the Contur . accepted by the Owner at the final completion of the Project will be paid to the Contractor. 03724045-01 01200 -2 ME4$UREMENT Mardi 2014 1.14 DELETED ITEMS A. Should any items contained in the Bid Schedule(s) be.found unnecessary for the proper completion of the work contracted, the Engineer may eliminate such items from the Contract. This action shall in no way invalidate the Contract and no financial allowance or compensating payment for anticipated profit, overhead, etc., will be made for items so eliminated in making final payment to the Contractor. 1:15 PARTIAL PAYMENTS A. Partial payments shall be made monthly as the work progresses. Partial payment shall be made subject to the provisions of the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.16 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIAL DELIVERED TO THE PROJECT A. When requested by the Contractor and at the discretion of the Owner, payment may be made for all or part of the value of acceptable materials and equipment to be incorporated into bid items, which have not been used, and which have been delivered to the construction site or placed in storage places acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide receipts for all stored material items requested for reimbursement which clearly identify the stored material item, where it is to be constructed, the unit cost of the item, as well as the total cost of the delivered item(s), the quantity of the item, the brand name of the item, and the supplier. Note that there are additional documentation requirements and storage requirements within the Contract Documents that must also be met before the Contractor can be reimbursed for these stored materials. B. No payment shall be made for fuels, supplies, installation or connection hardware, lumber, false work, or other similar materials or on temporary structures or other work (items) of any kind which are not a permanent part of the Contract. Items having a value of less than $2,500 shall not be compensated for as a stored material item. 1.17 FINAL PAYMENT A. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall field verify all quantities in dispute by using visual observation, taped measurements, or other methods designated by the Engineer. The field verification shall be made in the presence of the Engineer and agreed to by both the Engineer and the Contractor. The Engineer will prepare a final adjusting Change Order which will adjust the final quantities of the project Bid Schedule to reflect the actual work accepted by the Owner and for which the Contractor will be compensated. 03720-045-01 01200 -3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Match 2014 1.18 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. A schedule of values for the lump-sum bid items the unit price bid items as required by the Engineer shall be submitted in accordance with this Section and Section 01290, Schedule of Values, and accepted before the first pay request is approved by the Engineer. The schedule of values shall be based on the prices bid in the Bid Schedule(s). Prices bid in the Bid Schedule(s) cannot be changed in the schedule of values; they can only be broken down into more detail so that the Engineer can more accurately review and approve the Contractor's pay application for the completed work. 1.19 MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION ITEMS A. The Contractor shall take a precautions necessary to proteet existing utilities, roads, and miscellaneous items from damage during construction. B. The Contractor shall repair, relocate, or replace existing utilities, roadways, and miscellaneous items to pre-construction conditions. C. All repairs, relocations, and replacements necessary are considered incidental to the work and will be at the Contractor's cost, with no cost to the Owner. PART 2 PAY ITEM DESCRIPTIONS 2.01 BID The descriptions provided in the following Paragraphs are to be used by the Bidder in preparing the Bid Schedule(s). They generally indicate how the major workscope items and their respective costs are to be separated into the line items listed in the Bid Schedule(s). These descriptions are not fully representative nor all inclusive of the work required to complete the project in accordance with the Contract Documents, It is the Bidder's responsibility to include all required costs within the most appropriate line item(s). BASE BID Item 1. Mobilizanor' I/Demobilization and General Conditions (not to exceed 5% of the Base Bid)—This item shall include and cover the costs for performing construction, preparatory, and overhead operations, including but not limited to movement of personnel and equipment to and from the site, sanitary facilities, project administration and management, insurance, bonds, Owner and Engineer indemnification, temporary utilities, and all other similar activities and facilities necessary for executing this project This item shall not exceed 5% of the Base Bid amount The Contractor will be paid 20% of this item.apon completion of mobilization and 10% upon demobilization; the remainder will be prorated equally over the construction period. • • 03720-045-01 Match 2014 012004 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Item 2a. Owner- Direct Purchase of Four Screw Pumps —This item includes the Owner- direct purchase of four sole - sourced screw pumps, shop painting, submittals, spare parts, appurtenances, manufacturer's warranty and their delivery to the site. Item 2b. Screw Pumps Sale Tax This item is for the -sales tax associated with the Owner- direct purchase of the four sole- sourced screw pumps. At project completion, this item will be deducted from the final contract amount. Item 2c. Coordination. Installation, Testing. and Contractor Warranty of Screw Pumps--Under this item the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, etc. necessary for the coordination of screw pump submittals, coordination of delivery, scheduling with manufacturer, unloading, temporary storage, installation, testing, startup and performance testing, Contractor warranty, and required items shown in the Drawings and Specifications to provide a complete screw pump system. This Bid item covers all costs associated with finishing labor, material, equipment, etc. not included in Bid Item 2a but that are necessary to provide a complete screw pump system. This includes placing into service and achieving final acceptance of the four Owner- direct purchased screw pumps, including but not limited to: • Install coffer dams, pump -down equipment, piping, valves, power, instrumentation and controls, etc. necessary to individually isolate each of the four screw pumps to be replaced and pump down and maintain dry conditions in their individual compartments. The Contractor shall assume that the existing sluice gates leak or do not work and shall not count on the existing sluice gates to be suitable for isolating purposes. • Remove four existing screw pumps and all associated supports, lubrication systems, and appurtenances. • Demolish, modify, and prepare four existing screw pump troughs. • Demolish associated electrical connections. • Load, transport, and dispose of demolished materials in an approved disposal facility in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Construct new concrete fillets for four screw pump troughs. • Unload the four screw pumps and properly store them before installation (as necessary). • Install the four screw pumps, all associated supports, lubrication systems, and appurtenances. A copy of the manufacturer's quote is included' in Attachment A. The Bid item includes any anchor bolts, equipment, components; field painting, etc., necessary to place into service the replacement screw pumps that are not specifically included in the manufacturer's quote. • Demolish eight existing mud valve and appurtenances and install eight replacement mud valves, extension stems, floorstands, and operators for drain valves in the receiving and discharging channels for the screw lift station. 03720-045-01 01200 -5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT March 2014 • Provide all required warranties not provided by the screw pump manufacturer. • Perform manufacturer's installation certification, performance testing, and startup certification. During the Work, no interruption of the plant operations other than that approved in writing by the Owner shall be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any permit violation related to the Work. AlI work; shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of bid -item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification. Item 3. Additional Improvements —This item includes all costs for all other labor, material, equipment, and items not included in other Bid items. The Contractor shall famish all labor, materials, equipment, and services associated with the project, including but not limited to: • Demolish, required :electrical, mechanical, structure, communication, etc. components in accordance with the Contract Documents:: • Load, transport, and dispose of demolished materials in an approved disposal facility in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Construct working platforms and handrails around the upper bearing and drive assesnblies on all five screw pumps. • Furnish and install all new electrical and communication equipment (e.g., the five soft starters, required PLCs, etc a, components, conduits, conductors, communication cables, and instruments. Modify all existing electrical- and communication equipment, components, conduits, conductors, communication cables, and instruments necessary to complete, the work. • Create new And modify existing control programming required to complete the work. • Remove existing electric actuators and the existing metal access covers and supports on the two internal recycle valves and vaults and any associated appurtenances. • Install new beveled gears, extension stems, floorstands, including replacing the seals and grease in the existing worm gears, and electric actuators on the two internal recycle valves, including all electrical and controls work required for valve operations. • Install new metal access covers and structural supports for the two internal recycle valve vaults. Take the existing Internal Recycle Pump Station offline and out of service including cleaning the inlet and discharge piping, cleaning the wet wells and all interior components, transporting of reclaimed water to the wet wells as !descriibed in Section 01815; and performing any associated electrical and instrumentation work., 03720045-01 March 2014 01200.6 MEASUREM T AND PAYMENT Provide all required warranties. Perform testing and startup During the Work, no interruption of the plant operations other than that approved in writing by the Ovvner shall be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any permit violation related to the Work. All work shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of bid -item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification. Item 4. Testing Allowance —This allowance is for paying for invoices for geotechnical in- place density testing of soils and concrete cylinder testing and other testing as required by the Engineer and as specified in the Contract Documents, Only the amount properly documented by the Contractor and authorized by the Engineer will be paid to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not request any additional payment above the approved geoteclmical laboratory's invoice amounts. If the Contractor has any cost associated with this Bid item, it shall be included in the other (non - allowance bid item) Bid items. Failed tests will not be compensated for Payment for this item will be in accordance with the allowance sections of General and Supplementary Conditions. Item 5. Record Drawings—The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and services for composing and providing Record Drawings for the entire project in accordance with the Contract Documents, including but not limited to updating the electronic copy of the Drawings, identifying items that were revised during the project or addenda, having all Drawings signed and sealed by Florida - certified professional land surveyor, and providing signed-and-sealed paper copies of the Record Drawings. Once the Record Drawings have been determined by the Engineer to be complete according to the Specification requirements, the entire lump sum will be paid to the Contractor. Item 6. Removal of Debris from the Internal Recycle Pump Station —The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services for removing the debris from the internal recycle pump station. The Contractor shall be paid on a unit price basis per cubic yard of actual debris removed and properly disposed of. Item 7. Owner's 10% Contingency —The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in the other Bid items that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of approved work. 03724045-01 01200 -7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT March 2014 ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 1 The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the Owner. Item 8a. ,elc P+ce of,ew Puma No. 2 —This item includes the OWner- direct purchase of one sole- sourced screw pump for replacement of the existing Screw Pwnp No 2, including shop painting, submittals, spare parts, appurtenances, manufacturer's warranty, and delivery to the site. Item 8b. Screw Pumps Sale Tax —This item is for the sales tax associated with the Owner direct purchase of sole - sourced screw pump. At project completion, this item will be deducted from the final contract amount. Item 8c. Under this item the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, etc., necessary for >the coordination of screw pump submittals, coordination of delivery, scheduling with manufachaer, unloading, temporary storage, installation, testing, startup and performance testing, Contractor . warranty, and required items shown in the Drawings and Specifications to provide" a complete screw pump system. This Bid item covers all costs associated with fmishing labor, material,.. equipment, etc., not included in Bid Item 8a but that are necessary to provide a complete screw pump system. This includes placing into service and achieving final acceptance of the 'Owner- direct purchased sercw pump, including but not limited to: • Install coffer dams, pump-down equipment, piping, valves, power, instrumentation: and controls, etc. necessary to individually isolate each of the screw pump to be rcplac cd and pump down and maintain dry conditions in their individual compartments. The Contractor shall assume that the existing; sluice gates leak or do not work and shall not count on the existing sluice gates to be suitable for isolating purposes. • Remove existing screw pump No 2 and all associated supports, lublication systems, and appurtenances. • Demolish, modify, and prepare one existing screw pump trough. • Demolish associated electrical connections. • Load, transport, and dispose of demolished materials in an approved disposal facility in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local regulations in accordance with the Contract Documents. • Construct new concrete fillets for .screw pump trough.. • Unload the screw pump and properly store it before installation (as necessary). • Install the one screw pump, all associated supports, lubrication systems, and. appurtenances. A copy of the manufacturer's quote is included in Attachment A. The Bid item includes any anchor bolts, equipment, components, field painting, etc., necessary to place into service the replacement screw pump that are not specifically included in the manufacturer's quote. 03720.045 -01 Mardi 2014 • Demolish two existing mud valves and appurtenances and install two replacement mud valves, extension stems, floorstands, and operators for drain valves in the receiving and discharging channels for the screw lift station. • Provide all required warranties not provided by the screw pump manufacturer. • Perform manufacturer's installation certification, performance testing, and startup certification. During the Work, no intemiption of the plant operations other than that approved in writing by the Owner shall be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for any permit violation related to the Work. All work shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of bid-item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification: Item 8d. Owner's 10% Contingency for Replacement of Screw Pump No. 2 —The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in Bid Items 8a, 8b, and 8c that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of approved work. ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 2 The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the Owner. Item 9a. Owner- Direct .Purchase of Replacement Screw Pump Covers —This item includes the Owner- direct purchase of five screw pump covers, manufacturer's warranty, and their delivery to the site. Item 9b Screw Pump Covers Sale Tax —This item is for the sales tax associated with the Owner- direct purchase of the replacement screw pump covers. At completion of the project, this item will be deducted from the final contract amount. Item 9c. Coordination.. Installationjesting and Warranty of Screw Pump Cover Replacements —The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to replace the five existing covers with the Owner - direct purchased covers. This item includes but is not limited to demolishing the existing covers; installing complete screw pump cover systems, supports, and appurtenances; and providing warranties not included in Bid Item 9a in accordance with the Contract Documents. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of bid- item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification. Item 9d. Owner's 10% Contingency. for Screw Pump Covers—The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in the Bid 03720-045-01 01200-9 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT March 2014 Items 9a; 9b, and 9c that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of a roved work. ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 3 • The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the Owner. Item 10a Sluice Cate $eplg a ti- --The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to remove and replace 12 existing sluice gates as required in the Contract Document& This item includes but is not limited to installing any required coffer dams, pump-down equipment, piping, valves, power, controls, etc. necessary to isolate, pump down, and maintain dry conditions-in each work area; removing existing gates, frames, and operators as shown in the Contract Documents; cleaning and repairing concrete surfaces; installing new complete sluice gates; modifying and installing new grating and structural support beams in the pump discharge channels; and testing in accordance with the Contract Documents. For this Bid item, the Contractor shall replace the two sluice gates immediately upstream of tile: two oxidation ditches in a manner that only requires one oxidation ditch to be temporarily out of service at a time. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to determine if the Owner wishes to 1) isolate the east side fermentation and first anoxic tanks while the east side oxidation ditch is temporarily out of service, and 2) isolate the west side fermentation and first anoxic tanks while the west side oxidation ditch is temporarily out of service. The Contractor, with approval, from the Owner, will isolate the fermentation and anoxic basins by operating the existing sluice gates. For non - operating gates, the Contractor is responsible for work to repair and use the gates or other means such as use coffer dams to isolate flow. The Contractor shall receive written authorization from the Owner before isolating an oxidation ditch from service. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of bid -item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification. The Owner may direct the Contractor to provide a temporary by-pass pumping system (see Bid Item 11a) to prevent isolation of the oxidation ditch. Item 10b. Owner's 10% Contingency for Sluice Gate Replacements —The. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in Bid item 10a that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of approved work. ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 4 The following work will be done based on the sole decision: of the Owner. Item 1 l a. the Owner decides not to allow the Contractor to temporarily isolate each oxidation ditch (only one out of service at a time) to allow for installation of the 03720. 015-01 01200 -10 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYM JT Much 2014 sluice gate immediately upstream of each oxidation ditch, the Owner will direct the Contactor to perform by -pass pumping. Under this item, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform by -pass pumping described in Section 01815. The work shall include but is not limited to providing all by -pass pumps, temporary piping, and valves. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of bid -item breakdown, and upon Engineer verification. Item 11b. Owner's 10% Contingency for By-Pass Pumping—The Contractor shall finish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in Bid Item 11 a that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of approved work. ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 5 The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the Owner. Item 12a. Modify Existing Screw Pump Covers —This additive alternate is required if the Owner does not select Additive Alternate for Replacement of Screw Pump Covers (Bid Items 9a, 9b, 9c, and 9d) but does select Additive Alternate for Replacement of Sluice Gates (Bid Items l0a and l0b). The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to modify the five existing covers to allow for the installation of new sluice gates. This item includes all work necessary to modify the existing covers. Payment for this item shall be on a lump -sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of breakdown, and upon Engineer verification. Item 12b. Owner's 10% Contingency to Modify Screw Pump Covers —The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and services to perform unforeseen work not included in Bid Item 12a that may be requested and approved by the Engineer. The scope of work and cost of this additional work shall be agreed on in writing and approved by the Engineer before the work begins. The Contractor shall be paid based on the percent completion of approved work. END OF SECTION 03720-045-01 01200 -11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Mardi 2014 • • SECTION 01290 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section III, General Conditions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. To the Engineer, a proposed Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, in accordance with Section 01000, Project Requirements, and Section 01200, Measurement and Payment. B. Upon request of the Engineer, supporting data which will substantiate the values' correctness. C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. D. An update and resubmittal of the Schedule of Values when Change Orders affect the listing or when the actual performance of the Work involves necessary changes of substance to values previously listed and approved. E. Schedule of Values. 1. Submit typed schedule on EJCDC 1910 -8 -E forms provided by the Engineer. The Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. 2. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 days after the date of Owner - Contractor Agreement. 3. Format — Use the schedule of prices in the Bid Proposal. Show the cost breakdown for each lump -sum item. The lump -sum breakdown shall, at a minimum, use the Table of Contents of this manual outline. Identify each line item with the number and title of the major Specification Section. 03720 - 045 -01 01290 -1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES December 2013 Identify site mobilization and demobilization, bonds and insurance, Record Drawings, photographs, and operations and maintenance manuals, etc. 4. For unit cost allowances, identify quantities taken from the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. 5. Include within each line item a direct proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit. 6. Revise the schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application for Payment. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Allowances — The cost of the product to the Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts and applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in the Allowance, But Included in the Contract Price — Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage and labor for installation and finishing. 03720 - 045 -01 01290 -2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES December 2013 • C. Contractor Responsibilities: • • 1. Execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. 2. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 3. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. D. Differences between allowance amounts and actual costs will be adjusted by Change Order before final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 01290 -3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES • • • SECTION 01300 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section sets forth some of the general project requirements. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with revised progress schedules with each Application for Payment in addition to the number required by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with required photographs to accompany each Application for Payment. C. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with five copies of the Application for Payment. D. At Contract closeout, the Contractor shall transmit Record Documents and samples with cover letter to the Engineer listing the following: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. 4. Number and title of each Record Document. 5. Signature of Contractor or authorized representative. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01300 -1 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 FORMAT (NOT USED) 1.11 SCHEDULE CONTENT (NOT USED) 1.12 REVISIONS TO SCHEDULES (NOT USED) 1.13 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. The Owner and Engineer will organize and conduct progress meeting at least once a month to discuss the progress of the Work. The Contractor and any subcontractors the Contractor deems necessary shall attend these meetings. At the Engineer's discretion, the frequency of the meetings may be increased if the progress of the Work is not satisfactory or if coordination problems should arise. 1.14 RECORD DOCUMENTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall employ a competent photographer to take construction record photographs during the Work. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 01300 -2 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION • • • SECTION 01310 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall coordinate Work with that of other construction projects as needed. B. Before starting Work and from time to time as the Work progresses, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall examine the work and materials installed by others as it applies to its own work and shall notify the Engineer immediately in writing if any conditions exist which will prevent satisfactory results in the installation of the system. Should the Contractor or subcontractor start work without such notification, it shall be construed as an acceptance of all claims or questions as to the suitability of the work of others to receive its Work. The Contractor shall remove and/or replace, at its own expense, all work under this Contract which may have to be removed on account of such defects or omissions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01300, Contract Administration. C. Section 01320, Progress Schedule. D. Section 01770, Project Closeout. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. The Contractor shall ensure that all drawing, product data, and samples comply with Contract Documents and field dimensions and clearances. B. The Contractor shall submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents in a timely fashion to ensure there are no disruptions with the Work as scheduled. Obtain instructions through the Engineer to resolve all queries. C. Process requests for substitutions and Change Orders through the Engineer. D. Deliver close -out submittals to the Engineer. 03720 - 045-01 01310 -1 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION December 2013 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Contractor shall submit a preliminary Progress Schedule, in accordance with Section 01320, Progress Schedule, to the Engineer. After review the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the Progress Schedule to comply with requested revisions. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION The Contractor shall do the following: A. Cooperate with the Owner in allocating mobilization areas on site for field offices and sheds, access, traffic, and parking facilities. During construction, the Contractor shall coordinate the use of the site and facilities through the Engineer. B. Comply with the Engineer's procedures for intra - project communications: submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities /conflicts. C. Comply with the Engineer's instructions for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. D. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Engineer. E. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of Contract Documents to ensure the efficient and orderly sequence of installation of 03720 - 045 -01 01310 -2 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION December 2013 • construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. F. Coordinate the sequence of Work to accommodate the Owner occupancy as specified in the Contract Documents. G. In addition to Progress Meetings specified in Section 01300, Contract Administration, hold pre - construction conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to ensure coordination of Work. The Engineer shall be informed of such meetings and shall be allowed to attend. H. Coordinate the Work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing equipment, connecting equipment, and placing such equipment in service. Coordinate the use of project space and the sequence of installing civil, architectural, mechanical, structural, instrumentation, systems, and electrical work. Follow practicable routings for pipes, ducts, and conduits, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Use space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, maintenance, and repairs. J. Coordinate Work at existing facilities to minimize disruption of the Owner's operations. K. Assemble and coordinate close -out submittals specified in Section 01770, Project Closeout. 1.11 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall provide information required by the Engineer for preparing coordination drawings. B. The Contractor shall review drawings before submitting them to the Engineer. 1.12 CLOSE -OUT PROCEDURES The Contractor shall do the following: A. Notify the Owner when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. B. Comply with the Owner's instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion. 03720 - 045 -01 01310 -3 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION December 2013 C. Notify the Owner when Work has reached Final Completion. D. Comply with the Owner's instructions for completing items of Work found incomplete in the Engineer's final inspection. E. Comply with Section 01770, Project Closeout. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All vehicles on the property or easement must be operative. B. All personnel on the property or the easement are to be informed of line voltage and necessary changes. 3.02 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall coordinate the activities of all utility companies with equipment in the construction area with the Contractor's and Subcontractor's Work. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. No cutting and patching of new Work will be accepted. All Work must be new and continuous in its final form. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01310 -4 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION December 2013 • • • • SECTION 01320 PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. All work of this Contract shall be scheduled and monitored by the Contractor using the Critical Path Method (CPM) and shall use the Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) of scheduling. The Contractor shall prepare all schedules and all monthly updates described in this Section. The Contractor will prepare revisions of the schedule to reflect changes in the Contractor's plan of performance or changes in the Work and submit these revisions to the Engineer for acceptance. The Engineer's acceptance of the scheduling documents is to ensure that all CPM Scheduling documents prepared by the Contractor are in conformance with the Contract Documents and Specifications described herein. This acceptance will not impose on the Engineer or Owner the responsibility for the schedule or for the sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor will the acceptance interfere with or relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for the schedule and the means, methods, procedures, and sequence of construction. B. The Contractor shall use the latest version of Primavera Scheduling software, or an approved equal, for all CPM Scheduling applications. C. The Engineer or Owner may retain the professional services of a CPM Scheduling Consultant to assist in the review and acceptance of the CPM Scheduling documents prepared by the Contractor. Therefore, any reference to the Engineer or Owner within this Section may also indicate the involvement of the Engineer's or Owner's CPM Scheduling Consultant. D. The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a detailed progress schedule throughout the construction of the Project. The schedule shall be the Contractor's working schedule and be used to plan, organize, and execute the Work, record and report actual performance and progress, and show how the Contractor plans to complete the Work. The schedule will be in the form of an activity- oriented network diagram (Critical Path Method). E. When the Contractor prepares the CPM Schedule and the schedule is accepted by the Engineer, it shall become part of the Contract Documents and will be used by Contractor and Engineer to monitor the progress of the Project. The CPM Schedule may be revised to show changes in the Contractor's method or manner 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 01320 -1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE of performance; delays, or authorized changes in the Work. All changes to the schedule will be made in accordance with Article 1.15 of this Section. F. The Contractor acknowledges that free float belongs to the Owner. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. To help prepare the detailed CPM Schedule, the Contractor shall engage at his own expense a Consultant who is skilled in the time- and -cost application of network techniques for construction projects. If the Contractor has qualified personnel on staff, the Contractor can perform the required scheduling within his own organization. B. The person performing the CPM scheduling shall have a minimum of 3 years of CPM scheduling experience within the past 5 years on projects of similar size and complexity. C. Before engaging a Consultant or using in -house staff personnel and within 5 calendar days after Award of Contract, the Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer: 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 01320 -2 PROGRESS SCHEDULE • • • • 1. The name and address of the proposed Consultant or employee who will prepare the CPM schedule. 2. Sufficient information to show that the proposed Consultant or employee has the above qualifications including a list of prior construction projects of similar size and complexity, along with selected network samples, which the proposed Consultant or employee has performed. These network samples must show complete project planning similar to that required under this Contract. D. The Engineer shall have the right to approve or disapprove employment of the proposed Consultant or the performance of the requirements herein by the Contractor's employee and will notify the Contractor of the decision within 7 calendar days from receipt of the information. If the proposed Consultant is rejected, the Contractor shall resubmit another name within 7 calendar days for renewed consideration. Such approval or disapproval does not release the Contractor from his obligations under this Contract. E. If the Owner or Engineer has reasonable objections to the qualifications of the Contractor's nominated scheduling personnel, the Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the Owner, employ a scheduler whose qualifications comply with the requirements of this Section or employ a qualified subcontractor, subject to review of his qualifications by the Engineer and the Owner. 1.10 PRELIMINARY 90 -DAY CPM SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall develop a 90 -Day CPM Schedule within 10 days after the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. This schedule shall be a computerized CPM Schedule showing only the early start, early finish of each work activity. The 90 -Day Schedule shall contain work activities over the first 90 days, and the estimated durations for each work activity shall be 15 workdays or less. The balance of the job shall be shown in summary log. The 90 -Day Schedule shall include but not be limited to site work, hazardous material removal, demolition, key procurement activities (i.e. submissions, approvals, fabrication, and delivery), equipment, mechanical, electrical, and plumbing coordination and any other work that will occur during the first 90 days. This 90 -Day Schedule shall become part of the Detailed CPM Schedule. 1.11 DEFINITIONS The following terms used in this Section shall have the following meanings: A. Activity -A fundamental unit of work in a CPM Schedule establishing the time and resources required for performing or furnishing a part of the Work or a requisite 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 01320 -3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE step. Each Activity has defined geographical boundaries, time duration in days, and a detailed estimate of resources required to construct the task. Each activity is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity code, and a dollar value. B. Record Schedule. The Record Schedule will have actual start dates and actual finish dates for all work Activities and Milestones necessary to complete the Work. C. Baseline Schedule. The Engineer- accepted Proposed Baseline Schedule. The Baseline Schedule is the Contractor's plan which has been approved by the Engineer for completion of the Work in compliance with the Milestones listed in the Contract Documents and within the Contract Time. The Baseline Schedule may be revised only by the Engineer's approval of a Contractor- produced adjusted Baseline Schedule. The Baseline Schedule for the Work is the sole basis for (a) the monitoring of the Contractor's progress against Milestones and the Contract Time; (b) calculating Total Float or Contract Float; and (c) the evaluation and reconciliation of extensions in Contract Time, if any. The first Baseline Schedule shall be designated by all parties as the Baseline Schedule, Rev. 0. When Baseline Schedules are adjusted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, they shall be designated as Baseline Schedule, Rev. 1, 2, 3, etc. (as appropriate) and shall replace the previously approved Baseline Schedule. D. Contract Float. Workdays between the Contractor's anticipated date for early completion of the Work, or specified part, and the corresponding Contract Time. E. CPM Network. The structure of the computerized schedule. The CPM Network accounts for the entire Work and defines the construction logic in terms of all of the Activities with their logical dependencies. F. Critical Path. A series of Activities linked by dependencies that determine the shortest possible time to complete the Work. G. Early Dates. The early start dates and early finish dates, i.e., the dates each Activity will start and finish if each is started at the earliest end of the range of dates that the CPM indicates the Activities can be performed. H. Excusable Delay. An unforeseeable delay, beyond the control of the Contractor, experienced due to no fault or negligence by the Contractor, its subcontractors, or suppliers. I. Free Float. The amount of time that any Activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the following Activity. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01320 -4 PROGRESS SCHEDULE • • • • J. Fragnet. A predefined or individual segment of a network which represents a specified sequence of the Work. Fragnets shall be submitted which include all Activities, required resources, and costs and shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval of all Change Orders before their incorporation into the Baseline Schedule by the Contractor. A Fragnet shall be submitted before approval of any proposed logic changes. Fragnets are banded Activities representing a revised portion of the Baseline Schedule and shall be logically connected and constrained by previously existing predecessor and successor Activities, as applicable. K. Late Dates. The late start dates and the late finish dates; i.e., the dates each Activity will start and finish if each is started at the latest end of the range of dates that the CPM Network indicates the Activities can be performed and still achieve the Milestones and Contract Time. L. Milestone. A point of progress designated for the purpose of establishing start or finish times for a key aspect of the Work. M. Predecessor Activity. An Activity which precedes another Activity (to which it is logically tied) in the CPM Network. N. Preliminary Schedule -The Contractor's Baseline Schedule for the first 180 days of the Contract. O. Proposed Baseline Schedule. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall represent the Contractor's plan for completion of the Work in compliance with Milestones listed in the Contract Documents and within the Contract Time. It represents the Contractor's first complete planned schedule submitted for review and approval by the Engineer. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall take into account all foreseeable activities to be accomplished by any separate contractors, utility owners, or the Owner's operations. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall anticipate all necessary manpower and resources to accomplish activities within the durations set forth in the Proposed Baseline Schedule. The Proposed Baseline Schedule shall address and indicate all submittals required by the Contract and indicate the times allowed for review, resubmittal, and approval of submittals. Upon approval by the Engineer, the first Proposed Baseline Schedule shall become the Baseline Schedule, Rev. 0. P. Resource Loading. The allocation of work force and equipment necessary for the completion of an Activity as scheduled. Q. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 Six -Week Schedule. A detailed progress schedule taken from the Working Schedule, which discloses the plan for the next 6 weeks' Work and the actual schedule for the previous 6 weeks' Work. 01320 -5 PROGRESS SCHEDULE R. Successor Activity. An Activity which follows another Activity (to which it is logically tied) in the CPM Network. S. Total Float. The number of workdays by which a part of the Work in the Baseline Schedule or Revised Baseline Schedule may be delayed from its Early Dates without necessarily extending the Contract Time. T. Working Schedule. When the Proposed Baseline Schedule (or a subsequent adjustment is made by the Contractor to the Baseline Schedule) is accepted by the Engineer and becomes the Baseline Schedule, Rev. 0, 1, 2, 3, etc., it shall be duplicated and become the Working Schedule. The Contractor shall update the Working Schedule monthly with a Data Date designated by the Engineer. The Working Schedule shall be updated monthly to reflect actual progress only and shall be the basis for determining monthly progress payments and the Contractor's performance in relation to the most recently approved Baseline Schedule. The Final Working Schedule shall be the Record Schedule. 1.12 DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE A. The Detailed Network Diagram shall provide sufficient detail and clarity of form and technique so that the Contractor can plan, schedule, and control his work properly and the Engineer can readily monitor and follow the progress for all portions of the Work. The Detailed Network Diagram shall comply with the Contract Times of the Agreement and various limits imposed by the Contract Documents, including required sequencing of portions of the Work described in the Summary of Work section. The degree of detail shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, but the following factors shall have a bearing on the required depth of activity detail: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. The structural breakdown of the Project. 2. Project Phasing and/or Milestones. 3. The type of work to be performed and the labor trades involved. 4. All purchase, manufacture, and delivery activities for all major materials and equipment. 5. Maintenance of Facilities in Operation. 6. Submittal and approval of shop drawings and material samples. 7. Plans for all subcontract work. 8. Crew flows and sizes. 9. Assignment of responsibility for performing all activities. 10. Access and availability to work areas. 11. Identification of interfaces and dependencies with preceding, concurrent, and follow -on subcontractors and contractors. 12. Testing and start-up of systems. 13. Planning for phased takeover by the Owner. 01320 -6 PROGRESS SCHEDULE • • • • B. Activities shown shall be in workdays and shall have a maximum duration of 5 days, except in the case of non - construction activities such as procurement of materials and delivery of equipment. All durations shall be the result of definitive manpower and resource planning by the Contractor. C. The Detailed Network Diagram shall be prepared using a computer plotter. 1.13 COMPUTERIZATION OF THE DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE A. The mathematical analysis of the Detailed Network Diagram shall be made by computer, and a tabulation for each activity shall include the following: 1. Unique event numbers. 2. Activity descriptions. 3. Durations in workdays for each activity. 4. Earliest start date (by calendar date). 5. Earliest fmish date (by calendar date). 6. Latest start day (by calendar date). 7. Latest finish day (by calendar date). 8. Slack or total float in workdays. 9. Percentage of activity completed. B. The following computer outputs shall be prepared as part of the initial schedule submission and each update thereafter: 1. Activity file sort. 2. Eight -week "Look Ahead" detailed bar chart. 3. Summary bar chart. 4. Additional computer sorts as required by the Owner. 5. CDs of all computer files. 6. Items 1 through 4 above, submit seven (7) copies of each. 1.14 COMPLETION REQUIREMENT A. The 90 -Day Schedule shall be completed within 10 calendar days after the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. B. The Detailed CPM Schedule shall be prepared within 30 calendar days after the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. C. If the Contractor fails to provide the required CPM scheduling documents to the Engineer within the time prescribed and/or revisions of the scheduling documents within the required time, the Contractor shall be in default of the Contract 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01320 -7 PROGRESS SCHEDULE requirements and the Engineer may withhold approval of progress payments until such time as the Contractor submits the required information. D. Notwithstanding the implementation of the Progress Schedule, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time of completion required by the Contract. 1.15 UPDATINGS A. The 90 -Day CPM Schedule shall be updated monthly until the Engineer accepts the Detailed CPM Schedule. B. The first update of the Detailed CPM Schedule shall take place 60 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed with subsequent updates performed monthly at the jobsite for the duration of the contract. C. The Contractor shall update the Detailed CPM Schedule monthly, using a cutoff/data date agreeable to the Contractor and the Engineer. This cutoff /data date shall be consistent from month to month. The update information shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Actual start dates. 2. Actual completion dates. 3. Activity percent completion. 4. Remaining duration of activities in progress. D. The Contractor shall update all the scheduling documents and submit these documents to the Engineer within 5 workdays of the cutoff /data date. E. The Contractor shall submit seven copies of the CPM schedule and one electronic copy of the CPM schedule on a CD. F. As part of the normal CPM update, the Contractor shall prepare a written narrative report highlighting the progress during the past update period. The written narrative report shall include but not be limited to the following information: 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 1. Summary of work accomplished during the past update period. 2. Milestone Comparison Chart. 3. Analysis of Critical Path(s). 4. Analysis of Secondary Critical Path(s). Secondary Critical Path is defined as float within 10 workdays of Critical Path. 5. Analysis of time lost/gained during the update period. 6. Identification of problem areas. 01320 -8 PROGRESS SCHEDULE • • • • 7. Identification of change orders and/or any delay that is impacting /delaying the project schedule. 8. Solutions to current problems. G. The Contractor is required to attend and participate in a CPM update review meeting with the Engineer. Attendance is mandatory. This meeting will take place 7 workdays after the cutoff/data date, or during progress meetings as decided by the Owner and the Engineer. The purpose of this meeting is to review past progress, current status, problem areas, and future progress. The Contractor's narrative report will be reviewed at this meeting. H. All schedule update information outlined above will be reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. 1.16 RECOVERY SCHEDULE A. If the Contractor fails to achieve the planned progress, as indicated in the approved/updated detailed CPM Schedule, and the Contractor's lack of progress delays the Critical path and/or an intermediate milestone by more than 10 workdays (monthly or cumulatively), the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and acceptance a proposed Recovery Schedule indicating how the Contractor will recover the time lost. B. If the Contractor fails to submit a Recovery Schedule and/or fails to cooperate with the Engineer in the Recovery Schedule process, the Owner can immediately order the Contractor to accelerate completion of the late activities which have been delayed by whatever means necessary without any additional costs to the Owner. The Owner can withhold future progress payments until the Contractor's progress is in compliance with the Contract Schedule or until the Owner has approved by Change Order proposed adjustments to the contract milestones, extension of contract time, or modification of_the Contract Schedule. 1.17 CHANGE ORDERS, DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME A. When proposed Change Orders, approved Change Orders, or any delays are experienced and the Contractor believes the Change Order/Delay is causing delay to an intermediate contract milestone or to the project completion, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Time Impact Analysis, explaining the influence of each Change Order/Delay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare a "Fragnet" (network analysis) of each Change Order/Delay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The analysis will demonstrate the time impact based on the date the change is given to the Contractor, the status of construction at that point in time, and the event time computation of all affected activities. The event times used in the analysis shall be 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01320 -9 PROGRESS SCHEDULE those included in the latest updated copy of the detailed CPM Schedule closest to the time of delay or as accepted by the Engineer. B. For the Contractor to be entitled to an extension of Contract time to an intermediate contract milestone and/or to the project completion, the Time Impact Analysis must show that the Change Order/Delay impacts the intermediate contractual milestone date and/or the updated CPM Schedule's Critical Path, thereby directly impacting the project completion date. Change Orders/Delays that do not impact intermediate contractual milestones and/or the critical path and impact activities with float will not be considered as a delay to the project and no extension of time will be granted. C. The Contractor must submit a written analysis within 7 calendar days after a delay occurs or authorized change in work is given to the Contractor. If the Contractor does not submit a written analysis for specific Change Order(s) or Delay(s) within the specified period of time, then it is mutually agreed that the particular Change Order of Delay has no time impact on the Project CPM Schedule and no time extension is required. D. The Engineer will accept or reject each Time Impact Analysis within 14 calendar days after submission, unless subsequent meetings and negotiations are necessary. Upon the Engineer's acceptance, the Contractor will incorporate fragnets illustrating the influence of the Change Orders and Delays into the Detailed CPM Schedule during the first update after agreement is reached. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 01320 -10 PROGRESS SCHEDULE • • • • SECTION 01330 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall submit documentation that describes the Work to be performed under the Contract as required in this Section. This documentation will be for the Engineer and Owner's review and use. The documentation furnished by the Contractor must enable the Engineer and Owner to verify the Contractor's performance and compliance with Contract requirements. The documentation shall cover all services and deliverables required and secured by the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The Contractor shall prepare documentation and submittals required by other sections of the Contract. The format of documents and submittals required by other sections shall conform to the requirements of this Section. 1. Section III, General Conditions. 2. Section 01785, Record Documents. 3. Section 01820, Training. 4. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 5. All Sections and Divisions that require submittal of documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General —The Contractor shall submit the following: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Project documentation: For the Engineer and Owner's internal use and shall include all information that will be essential for the facility's operations, maintenance, training, and repair of equipment and facilities supplied by the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit all documentation necessary to ascertain compliance with technical /contractual provisions. 2. Shop drawings: Drawings, schedules, diagrams, warrant, and other data prepared specifically for this Contract by the Contractor or through the Contractor by way of subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower -tier contractor to illustrate a portion of the Work. 01330 -1 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 3. Product data: Preprinted materials such as illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate a portion of the Work, but not prepared exclusively for this Contract. 4. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or workmanship that are physically identical to portions of the Work, illustrating portions of work, or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both. 5. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and acceptance to ensure that administrative requirements of the project are adequately met but not to ensure directly that work is in accordance with the design concept and in compliance with Contract Documents. 6. Mockups: Before installing work requiring mockups, the Contractor shall build mockups for each form of construction and finish required using materials indicated for the completed Work, as follows: a. Build mockups in the location and of the size directed by the Engineer. b. Notify the Engineer 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. c. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. d. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. e. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. f. Demolish and remove mockups when directed by the Engineer. B. Coordination 1. Submittals and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the Work of all trades involved before they are submitted and shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings or schedules submitted without this stamp of approval shall be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. C. Start of Work 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Within 30 calendar days after the notice to proceed for the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Contract Data Requirements List 01330 -2 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE • • • • that defines all data to be submitted under this Contract. Included in this list shall be the names of all proposed manufacturers furnishing specified items to the extent known. Review of this list by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor from providing materials, equipment, systems, and structures fully in accordance with the Specifications. D. General Requirements 1. The Contractor shall prepare, assemble, and submit all documents as described herein. The Contractor shall submit certification that the documents prepared conform to the Contract requirements and will result in a complete and operable project. The Engineer and Owner shall review the Contractor's documents for conformance to the Contract requirements and may comment on the documents. 2. The Contractor shall approve and certify all project documents. The Contractor's failure to certify the documents or failure to provide documents that demonstrate conformance to the Contract requirements are grounds for rejection. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs for proceeding with any part of the Work that fails to meet the Contract requirements. 3. Submittal of documents for the Engineer's review shall in no way relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing a complete, safe, reliable, operating, and coordinated Work (system/equipment /facilities) that is in compliance with these Contract documents. E. Requests for Substitution 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. All requests for substitution shall clearly and specifically indicate any and all differences or omissions between the products specified as basis of design and the product proposed for substitution. Data shall include but not be limited to differences as follows for both the specified and substituted products: a. Principle of operation. b. Materials of construction or finishes. c. Thickness or gauge of materials. d. Weight of item. e. Deleted features or items. f. Added features or items. g. Changes in other work caused by the substitution. h. If the substitution contains differences or omissions not specifically called to the attention of the Engineer, the Engineer 01330 -3 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE reserves the right to require equal or similar features to be added to the substituted product at the Contractor's expense. F. Submittal Requirements and Procedures 03720 -045 -01 December 2013 1. Drawing Formats and Requirements a. Drawings —All Drawings and Shop Drawings shall be prepared on 22 -x -34 -inch paper and shall have a blank area of 3 x 4 inches in the lower right hand corner above the title block. Each Drawing shall indicate the following information in the title block: (1) Title and Drawing Number. (2) Date of Drawing or Revision. (3) Name of Building or Facility. (4) Name of Contractor or subcontractor. (5) Drawing contents and locations. (6) Specification Section and Subsection Numbers. b. Required Copies —All drawings submitted shall have a minimum of eight copies distributed in the following way: (1) 2— Owner. (2) 4 —Jones Edmunds. (3) 2— Returned. 2. Product Data a. Requirements— Product data shall include all catalog cuts, performance surveys, test reports, equipment lists, material lists, diagrams, pictures, and descriptive material. All product data shall be submitted on either 8.5 -x -11 -inch or folded 11 -x -17 -inch size paper of 20 -1b (9.072 kg) weight. The submittal information shall show the standard and optional product features, as well as all performance data and specifications. The manufacturer's recommendation for special tools shall be supplied. 3. Samples —The Contractor shall furnish samples required by the Contract Documents, for review by the Engineer. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. a. All samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to illustrate clearly the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally 01330 -4 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE • • • • related parts and attachment devices. The samples shall show the full range of color, texture, and pattern. • • 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 b. The Contractor shall submit a minimum of four samples of items submitted. All samples shall be marked with required submittal information, as specified above. 4. Color, Texture, and Pattern Charts a. The Contractor shall submit color, texture, or pattern charts of all required finishes. b. A minimum of four charts of each item shall be submitted. 5. Submittal Information Requirements a. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "Submittal Information" shall be considered to mean the following information at a minimum: (1) Contract Name. (2) Contract Number. (3) Location within Facility. (4) Date Submitted. b. Drawings —The Contractor shall mark submittal information on all Drawings in the left half of the 4 -x -3 -inch block as described above. c. Product Data and Manufacturer's Literature The Contractor shall mark all product data and manufacturer's literature with submittal information and note which item is being furnished. The Contractor shall mark the option and supplies to be furnished with the item. At least one original manufacturer product data sheet must be submitted; the balance can be copied. Do not submit the manufacturer's general catalog: submit only items being installed or delivered. When manuals are being submitted, the Contractor shall mark submittal information on both the cover and title page. If manuals being submitted contain more than just one item, each item must be marked and only Contract name and number is to be marked on the cover and title page. 01330 -5 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 6. Training, Operation and Maintenance Manuals a. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and acceptance of manufacturer's installation, operations, lubrication, maintenance, and training manuals for all equipment installed or delivered under this Contract. All manuals shall have submittal information marked on the front cover, title page, and three places inside the manual. If the manual being submitted is for different components, mark the front cover and title page only. Each component section must be marked with the Specification Section and subsection numbers. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to requirements defined in Sections 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manual, and 01820, Training. G. Required Submittals 03720 -045 -01 December 2013 1. Architectural and Structural Submittals a. This Section specifies general procedural requirements for contractual submittals for the following architectural and structural schedules, product data, samples, and manufacturer's certificates. (1) Product Data —The Contractor shall provide product data for all architectural and structural items, options, and other data and provide supplemental manufacturer's standard data for information unique to the Work and installation. The submittals shall reflect all items delivered or installed under this Contract. (2) Samples —The Contractor shall provide all samples required under this Specification including color charts and product samples. (3) Material, equipment, and installation and demolition Specifications. 2. Mechanical and Electrical System Submittals a. This Section specifies general procedural requirements for mechanical schedules, performance data, control diagrams, and other submittal data. 01330 -6 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE • • • b. The Contractor shall submit the following: • (1) Performance Data. (2) Power and Riser Diagrams— Single line riser, power diagrams, and all conduit runs shall be provided for all equipment and facilities. (3) Wiring Diagrams — Elementary controls diagrams and separate wiring diagrams for mechanical and electrical unit/subsystem. Drawing for starting and shutdown of equipment including controls shall be provided, including a comprehensive description of operation. (4) Finished Data — Complete surface preparation and finished data for all mechanical and electrical unit/subsystems shall be provided, including a complete list of cleaning instructions. (5) Factory Testing — Detailed description of factory testing procedures, reporting procedures and criteria for test passing or failing shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical units /subsystems. Testing shall comply with the General Requirements and Technical Requirements Sections. (6) Site (Field) Testing and Acceptance — Detailed description of site testing and acceptance tests including descriptions of procedures, testing equipment, reporting procedures, and criteria for passing or failing tests shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical units /subsystems. Testing shall comply with General Requirements and Technical Requirements. (7) Factory Test Report—After fabrication and testing, the Contractor shall submit the results of tests. No shipment of any mechanical and electrical unit/subsystem shall be allowed without the written certification from the Contractor that the equipment conforms to the Contract requirements. • (8) Site Test and Acceptance Report—Site test and acceptance reports shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01330 -7 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE (9) Operations and Maintenance Manuals —The Contractor shall furnish manuals for all mechanical and electrical equipment specified under this Contract. Each manual shall include the following at a minimum: (a) Description of equipment. (b) Record shop drawing. (c) Operation and maintenance instructions. (d) Part lists. (e) Equipment ratings. (f) Valve list. (g) Lubrication instructions. c. Compliance with this Section does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirements of Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. H. Submittal Review 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 1. The Engineer's review of the Contractor's documents shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for meeting all of the requirements of the Contract nor of the responsibility for correcting the documents furnished. The Contractor shall have no claim for additional cost or extension in time because of delays due to revisions of the documents that may be necessary for ensuring compliance with the Contract. 2. The Engineer will review a submittal or re- submittal once, after which the cost of review shall be borne by the Contractor. The cost of Engineering shall be equal to the Engineer's full cost. 3. No partial submittals will be reviewed. A submittal or re- submittal not complete will be returned to the Contractor for completing and re- submittal. 4. Documents submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer will be returned bearing a project - specific stamp bearing the dated signature of the reviewer and one of four boxes checked: a. NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED —This indicates that the submittal appears to be in compliance with the requirements of the performance specifications and that the Work may proceed. b. MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED —This indicates that the reviewer has added a minor correction to the submission and that the Work 01330 -8 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE • • • • (modified in accordance with the correction comment) may proceed. The Contractor shall accept the responsibility of the modified document and resulting Work with no additional compensation. c. AMEND AND RESUBMIT —This indicates that the submittal will require Contractor modifications based on the reviewer's comments that accompanied the returned submittal. The Contractor will be cautioned that work may not proceed under this review status. d. REJECTED —This indicates that the submittal is not in conformance with the requirements of the performance Specifications and cannot be modified to gain compliance. A new submittal will be required in the instance of a "reject" status and the Contractor will be cautioned that work may not proceed under this condition. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) • 1.07 WARRANTIES • A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Before submitting documents for the Engineer's review, the Contractor shall review the documentation for conformance to the Contract requirements. Submittals shall be complete and comprise a logical division of the Contract Work. 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 01330 -9 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. All documentation submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal and shall be submitted in a sequence that allows the Engineer to have all of the information necessary for checking and accepting a particular document at the time of submittal. C. Each document shall be identified by a document number, Contract number, Contract name, location, Specification Section, subsection numbers, and submittal date. Where a manual/drawing is revised to reflect a change in design or a change for any other reason, each such revision shall be shown by a revision number, date, and subject in a revision block. Indication of official approval by the Contractor's Project Manager shall also be included. To permit rapid location of the revision, additional notation shall be made in the manual opposite the line or area where the change was made and identified by the corresponding revision number. 3.02 DOCUMENTATION CONTROL AND SUBMITTAL SEQUENCING A. The Contract Data Requirements List shall be updated and resubmitted to the Engineer monthly, throughout the duration of the Contract. This list shall identify the Contractor's submittal number, proposed and actual submittal date, Contract Specification Section Number, Paragraph, Item of the Work, and type of document. B. The Contractor shall work with the Engineer to provide a regulated flow of submittals that allows the Engineer to review the submittals in the defined time frame without undue delays. Monthly the Contractor shall provide the Engineer a schedule of the approximate quantities and delivery dates for all submittals due for the next 120 days. 3.03 FINAL RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit the Final Record Drawing Package to the Engineer for review 60 days before Final Completion. The Contractor shall be provided with CADD files, AutoCAD Version 2010. Final Record Drawings shall be printed on 22 -x -34 -inch sheets and on CDs, AutoCAD Version 2010. The Contractor may request to use a different version, but it must be approved by the Engineer. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTAL A. Additional documents, drawings, interface data, and other pertinent project submittal data are listed in specific sections of this Contract. 3.05 RECORD PRINTS A. The Contractor shall submit one set of all record prints before final completion. The record print or project records shall include submittals, catalog cuts, 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01330 -10 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE • • • • • 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 drawings, calculations, test reports, manufacturer's data, maintenance manuals, installation instructions, and operating manuals. All "record prints" shall be delivered to the Engineer in three -ring binders with dividers and shall be placed in order by Specification Section. END OF SECTION 01330 -11 SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE • SECTION 01350 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work covered by this Section consists of furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and performing all work required for the prevention of environmental pollution in conformance with applicable laws and regulations during and as the result of construction operations under this Contract. In this Section environmental pollution is defined as the presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health or welfare, unfavorably alter ecological balances of importance to human life, affect other species of importance to man, or degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic and/or recreational purposes. B. The control of environmental pollution requires considering air, water, and land and involves managing noise and solid waste as well as other pollutants. C. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct all work in a manner that will minimize the erosion of soils in the area of the Work. The Contractor shall provide erosion - control measures such as diversion channels, sedimentation or filtration systems, berms, staked hay bales, seeding, mulching or other special surface treatments that are required to prevent silting and muddying of streams, rivers, impoundments, lakes, etc. All erosion - control measures shall be in place in an area before any construction activity in that area. Specific requirements for erosion and sedimentation controls are specified in Article 38, City of Clearwater Standard Technical Specifications. D. This Section is intended to ensure that construction is achieved with a minimum of disturbance to the existing ecological balance between a water resource and its surroundings. These are general guidelines. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine the specific construction techniques to meet these guidelines. E. All phases of sedimentation and erosion control shall comply with and be subject to the laws of the State of Florida and the Project Environmental Resource Permit. The Contractor shall prepare a sedimentation and erosion - control drawing meeting the requirements of the law and furnish two copies of the approved Drawing to the Engineer. 03720 - 045 -01 01350 -1 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION December 2013 PROCEDURES 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Article 38, City of Clearwater Standard Technical Specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. Before beginning the Work, the Contractor shall meet with the Engineer to establish agreed -upon compliance with these provisions and administration of the environmental pollution control program. B. The Contractor shall remove temporary environmental control features when approved by the Engineer and incorporate permanent control features into the project at the earliest practicable time. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. B. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable Federal, State, and local laws and regulations concerning environmental pollution control and abatement. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 01350 -2 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION December 2013 PROCEDURES • • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide positive means of erosion control such as shallow ditches around construction to carry off surface water. Erosion - control measures, such as siltation basins, hay check dams, mulching, jute netting, and other equivalent techniques shall be used as appropriate. Surface water shall be prevented from flowing into excavated areas. Ditches shall be used around the construction area to carry away water resulting from dewatering excavated areas. At the completion of the Work, ditches shall be backfilled and the ground surface restored to its original condition. 3.02 PROTECTION OF STREAMS AND SURFACE WATERS A. Care shall be taken to prevent or reduce to a minimum any damage to any stream or surface water from pollution by debris, sediment, or other material or from the manipulation of equipment and/or materials in or near such streams. Water that has been used for washing or processing or that contains oils or sediments that will reduce the quality of the water in the stream shall not be directly returned to the stream. Such waters shall be diverted through a settling basin or filter before being directed into streams or surface waters. B. The Contractor shall not discharge water from dewatering operations directly into any live or intermittent stream, channel, wetlands, surface water, or any storm sewer. Water from dewatering operations shall be treated by filtration, settling basins, or other approved method to reduce the amount of sediment contained in the water to allowable levels. C. All preventative measures shall be taken to avoid spillage of petroleum products and other pollutants. In the event of any spillage, prompt remedial action shall be taken in accordance with a contingency action plan approved by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection and the US EPA. The Contractor shall submit two copies of approved contingency plans to the Engineer. D. Water being flushed from structures or pipelines after disinfection with C12 shall be treated with a dechlorination solution approved by the Engineer before discharge. 03720 - 045 -01 01350 -3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION December 2013 PROCEDURES 3.03 PROTECTION OF LAND RESOURCES A. After completion of construction, the Contractor shall restore land resources within the project boundaries and outside the limits of permanent work to a condition that will appear to be natural and not detract from the appearance of the project. All construction activities shall be confined to areas shown on the Drawings. B. Outside of areas requiring earthwork for the construction of the new facilities, the Contractor shall not deface, injure, or destroy trees or shrubs nor remove or cut them without prior approval. No ropes, cables, or guys shall be fastened to or attached to any existing nearby trees for anchorage unless specifically authorized by the Engineer. Where such special emergency use is permitted, the Contractor shall first wrap the trunk with a sufficient thickness of burlap or rags over which softwood cleats shall be tied before any rope, cable, or wire is placed. The Contractor shall in any event be responsible for any damage resulting from such use. C. The Contractor shall protect trees that may possibly be defaced, bruised, injured, or otherwise damaged by the construction equipment, dumping, or other operations by placing boards, planks, or poles around them. Monuments and markers shall be protected similarly. D. Any trees or other landscape features scarred or damaged by the Contractor's equipment or operations shall be restored as nearly as possible to their original condition. The Owner will decide the method of restoration to be used and whether damaged trees shall be treated and healed or removed and disposed of. 1. All scars made on trees by equipment, construction operations, or by the removal of limbs larger than 1 inch in diameter shall be coated as soon as possible with an approved tree wound dressing. All trimming or pruning shall be performed in an approved manner by experienced workmen with saws or pruning shears. Tree trimming with axes will not be permitted. 2. Climbing ropes shall be used where necessary for safety. Trees that are to remain, either within or outside established clearing limits, that are subsequently damaged by the Contractor and, in the opinion of the Owner, are beyond saving shall be immediately removed and replaced. E. The Contractor's storage and other construction buildings required temporarily in the performance of the work shall be located in cleared portions of the job site or areas to be cleared as shown on the Drawings and approved by the Engineer and shall not be within wetlands or floodplains. Preserving the landscape shall be 03720 - 045 -01 01350 -4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION December 2013 PROCEDURES • • • • required in the selection of all sites and in the construction of buildings. Drawings showing storage facilities shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. F. If the Contractor proposes to construct temporary roads or embankments and excavations for plant and/or work areas, the Contractor shall submit the following for approval at least 10 days before the scheduled start of such temporary work: 1. A layout of all temporary roads, excavations, embankments, and drainage to be constructed within the work area. 2. Details of temporary road construction. 3. Drawings and cross sections of proposed embankments and their foundations, including a description of proposed materials. 4. Landscaping drawings showing the proposed restoration of the area. The proposed removal of any trees and shrubs outside the limits of the existing clearing area must be indicated. Locations of guard posts or barriers required to control vehicular traffic and protect trees and shrubs to be maintained undamaged must also be indicated. The drawings shall provide for the obliteration of construction scars as such and shall provide for a natural appearing final condition of the area. Modification of the Contractor's approved drawings shall be made only with the written approval of the Engineer. No unauthorized road construction, excavation, or embankment construction including disposal areas will be permitted. G. The Contractor shall remove all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work areas, structures, foundations of temporary structures, stockpiles of excess waste materials, or any other vestiges of construction as directed by the Engineer. It is anticipated that excavation, filling, and plowing of roadways will be required to restore the area to near natural conditions which will permit the growth of vegetation the roadway areas. The disturbed areas shall be prepared and seeded as approved by the Engineer or Owner. H. All debris and excess material will be disposed of outside wetland or floodplain areas in an environmentally sound manner. 3.04 PROTECTION OF AIR QUALITY A. Burning— Burning will not be permitted at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris. B. Dust Control —The Contractor shall maintain all excavations, embankment, stockpiles, access roads, plant sites, waste areas, borrow areas, and all other work 03720 - 045-01 01350 -5 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION December 2013 PROCEDURES areas within or outside the project boundaries free from dust which could cause the standards for air pollution to be exceeded and which would cause a hazard or nuisance to others. C. An approved method of stabilization consisting of sprinkling or other similar methods will be permitted to control dust. The use of petroleum products is prohibited. The use of chlorides may be permitted with approval from the Engineer. D. To be approved, sprinkling must be repeated at such intervals as to keep all parts of the disturbed area at least damp at all times, and the Contractor shall have sufficient competent equipment on the job to accomplish this. Dust control shall be performed as the Work proceeds and whenever a dust nuisance or hazard occurs, as determined by the Owner. 3.05 NOISE CONTROL A. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize noises caused by the construction operations. Equipment shall be equipped with silencers or mufflers designed to operate with the least possible noise in compliance with Federal and State regulations. 3.06 MAINTENANCE OF POLLUTION - CONTROL FACILITIES DURING CONSTRUCTION A. During the life of this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain all facilities constructed for pollution control as long as the operations creating the particular pollutant are being carried out or until the material concerned has become stabilized to the extent that pollution is no longer being created. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01350 -6 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION December 2013 PROCEDURES • • SECTION 01355 SPECIAL PROVISIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. This Section specifies general work requirements related to the products and execution services included elsewhere in the Contract Documents: 1. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. 2. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 3. Section 11000, General Equipment Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents, all equipment supplied under these Specifications shall be warranted by the Contractor and the equipment manufacturers for 1 year. The warranty period shall begin on the date of Owner acceptance. C. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced in the machine(s) and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -1 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment warranties in accordance with Section 01780 from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the equipment specified under Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16. E. If the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a 1 -year warranty beginning at the time of Owner acceptance, the Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a 2 -year warranty starting at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. This 2 -year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the 1 -year warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equipment. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall take special care to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with particular reference to the pumps and electric drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights after the units' sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the Engineer has approved the foundation alignments, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The Contractor shall further check the alignment of the equipment after it is secured to the foundations and, after all alignments are conformed, shall finally grout the sole plates in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and under no circumstances will "pipe springing" be allowed. B. The Contractor shall furnish all wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to properly align, level, and secure apparatus in place. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven to be exactly so. The Contractor shall perform all grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection. 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., in new construction and furnish and install anchor bolts and other items to be embedded 03720- 045 -01 01355 -2 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • in concrete, as required to complete the Work under this Contract. The Contractor shall perform all cutting, coring, and rough and finish patching required in existing construction for the work of all trades. B. Subcontractors shall furnish all sleeves, inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., required for the execution of their work. Before the work of the Contractor begins, the subcontractors shall be responsible for furnishing the Contractor with the above items and with templates, drawings, or written information covering chases, openings, etc., which they require and to follow up the work of the Contractor as it progresses, making sure that their drawings and written instructions are carried out. If the subcontractors fail to do this, they shall be responsible for the cost of any corrective measures that may be required to provide necessary openings, etc. If the Contractor fails to carry out the directions given him, covering details and locations of openings, etc., he shall be responsible for any cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary corrections. In no case shall beams, lintels, or other structural members be cut without the approval of the Engineer. 1.12 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL A. The Contractor shall furnish all grease, oil, and fuel required for testing equipment with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied under Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16. 1.13 TOOLS A. The Contractor shall furnish any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) which may be necessary for the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of any equipment with the respective equipment. B. Tools shall be furnished in heavy steel tool boxes complete with lock and duplicate keys. 1.14 POWER SUPPLY A. Unless otherwise specified, all motors 1/2 Hp and larger shall be designed for a power supply of 460 volts, three- phase, 60 Hz, and all motors 1/3 Hp and smaller shall be designed for a power supply of 120 Volts, single phase, 60 Hz. 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -3 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 1.15 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS A. All single- and multi -speed three -phase induction motors 5 Hp and larger shall be furnished with factory- provided power factor correction capacitors. B. Capacitors shall be sized by the manufacturers so that over voltage due to self excitation will be prevented and transient torques limited to normal values. The full -load power factor shall be corrected to not less than 0.95 where such correction will not violate the provisions of NEC Article 460. C. Capacitor enclosures shall be compatible with those specified for their respective motors, i.e. dust -tight for indoor installation in non - hazardous areas and weatherproof for outdoor installations. D. Capacitors shall be dry or oil insulated with integral fuse protection and discharge resistor. The insulating medium shall be non - flammable and meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Standards. E. Capacitors shall be installed under Division 16. 1.16 ARCHITECTURAL COATINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain coordination among all sections (windows, window walls, louvers, doors, and frames, etc.) requiring PVF, PVC, or anodic coatings. All coatings shall match to the satisfaction of the Engineer with regard to color and texture. Items rejected by the Engineer shall promptly be removed from the job site. 1.17 PIPE MARKING A. Pipe marking is included in Division 9 under Painting and Coating, but it shall be the Contractor's responsibility, as required by the Engineer, to help identify pipe contents, direction of flow, and all else required for proper marking of pipe. 1.18 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall prepare a valve schedule for all valves required for the Work showing a number, the location, type, function, and normal operating position for each valve. The schedule shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval not less than 120 days before start-up. The Contractor shall coordinate valve identification with Section 15110, Manual, Check, and Process Valves. B. The Contractor shall furnish tags for all valves required for the Work. Valve tags shall be 2 -inch diameter, 19- gauge, brass or plastic, with brass hooks suitable for 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -4 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • attaching the tag to the valve operator. Tags shall be stamped or etched with the valve number and the information on the valve schedule coded in a system provided by the Owner. The Contractor shall submit two samples of the type of tag proposed and the manufacturer's standard color chart and letter styles to the Engineer for approval. C. The Contractor shall install valve tags on all valves required for the Work. 1.19 NOISE LIMITATIONS A. All equipment to be furnished under this Contract, unless specified otherwise in the Technical Specifications, shall be designed to ensure that the sound pressure level does not exceed 85 decibels over a frequency range of 37.8 to 9,600 cycles per second at a distance of 3 feet from any portion of the equipment, under any load condition, when tested using standard equipment and methods. Noise levels shall include the noise from the motor. Mufflers or external baffles shall not be acceptable for reducing noise. Data on noise levels shall be included with the shop drawing submittal. 1.20 SPARE PARTS A. Where spare parts are specified in the Specification Sections, the Contractor shall furnish all spare parts recommended by the manufacturer or system supplier for 1 year of service. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish all spare parts itemized • in each Section. B. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare parts in an area to be designated by the Engineer and shall furnish the Engineer with an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivery cost. C. Spare parts shall be packed in cartons properly labeled with indelible markings with complete descriptive information, including manufacturer, part number, part name, and equipment for which the part is to be used and shall be properly treated for 1 year of storage. 1.21 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN A. Within 30 calendar days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit a Hurricane Preparedness Plan to the Engineer and the Owner for approval. The Plan shall describe in detail the necessary measures that the Contractor will perform, at no additional costs to the Owner, in case of a 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -5 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 hurricane warning. The Contractor shall revise the Plan as required by the Engineer and Owner. 1.22 WEATHER PROTECTION A. In the event of inclement weather, the Contractor shall protect the Work and materials from damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any portion of the Work or materials has been damaged by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor to protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced with new materials and Work to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.23 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION A. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions during construction to minimize the run -off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into the supplies and surface waters of the State. Control measures must be adequate to ensure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by the State or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish unless limits have been established for the particular water. In surface water used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of construction equipment to prevent operations that promote erosion. 1.24 PROVISIONS FOR THE CONTROL OF DUST AND LITTER A. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions during construction to minimize the amount of dust created. Wetting down the Site may be required or as directed by the Engineer to prevent dust as a result of vehicular traffic. Control of blowing litter caused by any regrading by the Contractor shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.25 ON -SITE STORAGE A. The Contractor should note that there may be special storage requirements and possible charges for noncompliance of on -site storage requirements for materials and equipment as specified in Section 01600. 03720 -045 -01 01355 -6 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • 1.26 ELECTRICAL POWER AND TESTING EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish electric power and all equipment and tools required for testing equipment. The cost of this electric power, equipment, and tools shall be included in the prices quoted in the Bid Form. 1.27 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, the Contractor shall provide suitable insulation between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct contact and any resulting electrolysis. The insulating material shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or other approved materials. 1.28 DAMAGE DUE TO HIGH WATER A. The Contractor will be responsible for all damage done to his work by heavy rains or floods and he shall take all reasonable precautions to provide against damages by building such temporary dikes, channels, or shoring to carry off stormwater as the nature of the work may require. 1.29 EMERGENCY PHONE NUMBERS AND ACCIDENT REPORTS A. Emergency phone numbers (fire, medical, police) shall be posted at the Contractor's phone and the phone's location be made known to all. B. Accidents shall be reported immediately to the Engineer by messenger or phone. C. The Contractor shall document all accidents and shall submit to the Engineer a fully detailed written report about the accident after each accident. 1.30 ITEMS SPECIFIED ON DRAWINGS A. Items of material, equipment, machinery, and the like may be specified on the Drawings and not in the Specifications. The Contractor shall provide such items in accordance with the Specification on the Drawings. 1.31 DISINFECTION A. The Contractor shall clean, disinfect, and bacteriologically test and clear, in accordance with Chapters 62 -550, 62 -555, and 62 -560 of the Florida Administrative Code (FAC), all water supply facilities affected by this project which shall come into contact with raw water, water being treated, or treated 03720- 045 -01 01355 -7 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 water before placing the facility in operation. This shall apply to new facilities installed as well as to existing facilities that are to be modified. B. The Contractor shall employ a disinfection method approved by the Engineer and Owner and shall fully satisfy the Owner that adequate disinfection has been achieved before placing a facility on -line. C. The cost of all disinfection work shall be included in the prices quoted in the Proposal. The Owner shall pay for all bacteriological clearance tests. 1.32 SALVAGE A. Any existing equipment or material, including but not limited to valves, pipes, fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of construction under this project may be designated as salvage by the Engineer or Owner and, if so, shall be excavated, if necessary, and shall be cleaned and stored on or adjacent to the Site in a protected place specified by the Engineer or loaded onto trucks provided by the Owner. Any equipment or material not worthy of salvaging, as directed by the Owner, shall be disposed of by the Contractor at a suitable location at the Contractor's expense. 1.33 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL, AND EQUIPMENT A. When a particular product or products are specified or called for, it is intended and shall be understood that the proposal tendered by the Contractor include those products in his bid. Should the Contractor desire to substitute a product or products equal to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the Standard General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all respects, be equal to the product or products specified by name in the Specifications. B. All apparatus, mechanisms, equipment, machinery, and manufactured articles for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products of recognized reputable manufacturers. 1.34 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN A. Bid prices of equipment furnished under Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16 shall include the cost of a competent field service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved manufacturer's operation and maintenance data as specified in Section 01830 shall be delivered to the Engineer before instructing the Owner's 03720- 045 -01 01355 -8 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • personnel. This supervision may be divided into two or more periods as required by the installation program or as directed by the Engineer. • B. After the equipment has been installed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the manufacturers' field service technician shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls. 6. Energize equipment. 7. Deficiency correction. 8. Demonstration of compliance with application performance specification. C. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. D. Upon completion of this operation, testing, and adjustment, the manufacturers' field service technician shall submit to the Engineer, in triplicate, a complete, signed report of the results of the inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner's operating personnel. Training shall not be performed until the requirements of Paragraphs B, C, and D above have been fully satisfied and any specified performance testing completed. Training shall be provided for the number of days specified in each Equipment Section of these Specifications. Training shall be provided on an 8- hour- per -day basis. Partial days (less than 8 full working hours) shall not be credited toward the specified durations. Training shall not be concurrent with on- going testing, debugging, or installation activities but shall be a separate activity 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -9 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 devoted exclusively to the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the manufacturers' equipment. Training shall be performed by qualified representatives of each equipment manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to operation personnel. Training shall provide an overview of operations and maintenance requirements and shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Description of unit and component parts. 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria. 3. Operating procedures. 4. Maintenance procedures 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules. 6. Troubleshooting. 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface as a minimum. The operating and maintenance data to be provided in accordance with Section 01830 shall be used as a basis for training. F. A certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory; that the unit has been satisfactorily tested and is ready for operation; and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before start-up and acceptance by the Owner. The certificate shall indicate date and time the instruction was given and names of the operating personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on the certification sheet included at the end of Section 11000, General Equipment Requirements. G. See the detailed Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the services of the manufacturers' field service technician. H. For equipment furnished under Divisions other than 11, 13, 15, and 16, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, shall furnish the services of accredited field service technicians of the manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over - heating makes such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer 1.35 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Operating and maintenance data covering all equipment furnished shall be delivered directly to the Engineer, for approval, within 60 days before the 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -10 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • facility's start-up. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or stored on- site until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and completeness of the operating and maintenance data. Data shall be prepared and submitted in full conformance with Section 01830. Final approved copies of operating and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the Engineer on the Owner's behalf 2 weeks before scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 1.36 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the entire Work determined by the Drawings, Specifications, and Contract from the date of the starting of the Work until it is accepted as evidence of approval of the Completion Certificate by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for removals, renewals, and replacements due to action of the elements and all other causes except as otherwise provided in the Specifications. The Contractor shall keep the Contract under his own control and it shall be his responsibility to see that the Work is properly supervised and carried on faithfully and efficiently. The Contractor shall supervise the work personally or shall have a competent English - speaking superintendent or representative, who shall be on the site of the project at all working hours and who shall be empowered with full authority by the Contractor to direct the performance of the Work and make arrangement for all necessary materials, equipment, and labor without delay. B. Renewals or repairs required because of defective materials or workmanship or due to the action of the elements or other natural causes, including fire and flood, before the acceptance as determined by the Completion Certificate, shall be done in accordance with the Contract and Specifications at the expense of the Contractor. 1.37 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS AND SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the governmental unit(s) or agency(ies) having jurisdiction over the Work. Wherever there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these Specifications, the more stringent shall apply. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, before submitting his bid, the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantity of materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the character of equipment and facilities needed before and during the execution of the Work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the Work under this Contract. The prices established for the work to be 03720- 045 -01 01355 -11 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 done will reflect all costs pertaining to the Work. Any claims for extras based on substrata, groundwater table, and other such conditions will not be allowed. 1.38 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER A. During inclement weather, all work which might be damaged or rendered inferior by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During suspension of the work from any cause, the Work shall be suitably covered and protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise, and if the Engineer shall so direct, the rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed. 1.39 PERMITS A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable permits not previously obtained by the Owner to do the Work from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies. No work shall begin until all applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. The Contractor shall bear all costs for obtaining all permits. 1.40 PUMPING A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall do all pumping necessary to prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. B. For the duration of the Contract and with his own equipment, the Contractor shall pump out water and wastewater which may seep or leak into the excavations or structures. Galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. The Engineer will determine the extent of pumping required in the tanks, channels, and other non - operating areas. 1.41 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES A. It is assumed that portions of the Work will be completed before the entire work is completed. Upon completion of construction in each individual facility, including testing, if the Owner, at its sole discretion, desires to accept the individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion and acceptance for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership and begin operation of the individual facility on that date and the 1 -year guaranty period shall begin on that date. The Owner has the option of not accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work as a whole when it is completed and tested. 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -12 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • • 1.42 CLAIMS FOR PROPERTY DAMAGE A. Upon notification by the Owner or Engineer, the Contractor shall investigate each claim for property damage and shall file, within 10 days of such notification, a statement with the Owner or Engineer setting forth all facts and details relative to the claim. 1.43 DAILY REPORTS A. The Contractor shall submit daily reports of construction activities, including non- work days. The report shall include the following: 1. Manpower, number of workers by craft. 2. Equipment on the project. 3. Major deliveries. 4. Activities work with reference to the CPM schedule activity numbers. 5. New problems. 6. Other pertinent information. B. A similar report shall be submitted for/by each subcontractor. C. The reports shall be submitted to the Engineer's Field Office within 2 days of the respective report date. Each report shall be signed by the Contractor's Superintendent or Project Manager. 1.44 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate, and prepare for connections to the terminus of the existing systems all as shown on the Drawings or where directed by the Engineer. The cost of this work and for the actual connection of the existing mains shall be included in the bid for the Project and shall not result in any additional cost to the Owner. 1.45 COORDINATION OF WORK A. Because of the nature of this Project, the Contractor should expect other construction to occur in the vicinity of this Project during the Contract. In such instances the Contractor will be required to cooperate fully to eliminate or minimize the creation of conflicts. Adjustments from time to time may be required in the Contractor's work location and/or schedule provided a reasonable notice is given by the Owner or Engineer. B. The Contractor shall afford other contractors and the Owner reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and 03720- 045 -01 01355 -13 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 the execution of their work and shall properly connect and coordinate the Work with such other work. The Contractor shall coordinate his Work with the Owner and other contractors to store his apparatus, materials, supplies, and equipment in such orderly fashion at the site of the Work so that it will not unduly interfere with the progress of the Work or the work of any other contractors. C. If the execution or result of any part of the Work depends on any work of the Owner or of any separate contractor, the Contractor shall, before proceeding with the Work, inspect and promptly report to the Owner in writing any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work of the Owner or of any separate contractor that render it unsuitable for the proper execution or result of any part of the Work. D. Failure of the Contractor to inspect and report any deficiencies shall constitute an acceptance of the Owner's or separate contractor's work as fit and proper to receive the Work, except as to defects which may develop in the Owner's or separate contractor's work after completion of the Work and which the Contractor could not have discovered by his inspection before the Work was completed. E. If the Contractor damages the work or property of the Owner or of any separate contractor on the Project or other work on the Site, or delays or interferes with the Owner's work on ongoing operations or facilities or adjacent facilities or the separate contractor's work, the Contractor shall be liable for damage caused, and, in the case of another contractor, the Contractor shall attempt to settle the claim with the other contractor before the other contractor institutes litigation or other proceedings against the Contractor. F. If a separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage, delay, or interference caused or alleged to have been caused by the Contractor, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend the Owner in such proceedings at the Contractor's expense. If any judgment or award is entered against the Owner, the Contractor shall satisfy the same and shall reimburse the Owner for all damages, expenses, attorneys' fees, and other costs which the Owner incurs as a result of the judgment or award G. If a separate contractor causes damage to the Work or to the property of the Contractor or causes delay or interference with the Contractor's performance of the Work, the Contractor shall present directly to the separate contractor any claims it may have as a result of such damage, delay, or interference (with an information copy to the Owner) and shall attempt to settle its claim against the separate contractor before instituting litigation or other proceedings against the separate contractor. H. In no event shall the Contractor seek to recover from the Owner or the Engineer, and the Contractor hereby represents to the Owner and the Engineer that he will 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -14 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • • • not seek to recover from them, or either of them, any costs, expenses, (including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees) or losses of profit incurred by the Contractor as a result of any damage to the Work or property of the Contractor or any delay or interference caused or allegedly caused by any separate contractor. The Engineer shall determine and adjust any difference or conflict which may arise between the Contractor and other contractors who may be performing work on behalf of the Owner or between the Contractor and workmen of the Owner in regard to their work. If the work of the Contractor is delayed because of any acts of omissions of any other contractor of the Owner, the Contractor shall on that account have no claim against the Owner other than for an extension of time. 1.46 FINAL GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all work for 1 year from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work by the Owner. B. If, within the guarantee period, repairs or changes are required in connection with guaranteed work, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are rendered necessary as the result of the use of materials, equipment, or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall do the following promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to the Owner: 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every way all such guaranteed work and correct all defects in the guaranteed work. 2. Make good all damage to the building or site, or equipment or piping, or their contents, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of the use of materials, equipment, or workmanship which are inferior, defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the contract. 3. Make good any work or material or the equipment and contents of the building, structure, or site disturbed in fulfilling any such guarantee. C. If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed to comply with the terms of this guarantee within 10 days, the Owner may have the defects corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses incurred provided. However, that in case of an emergency where, in the opinion of the Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be started without notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall pay the cost of such repairs. D. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the Work as may be stipulated in the Contract Specifications or other papers forming a part of 03720 - 045 -01 01355 -15 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 this Contract shall be subject to the terms of this Paragraph during the first year of life of each such guarantee. The Contractor shall assemble all special guarantees and manufacturers' warranties, along with a summary list of the special guarantees and warranties, and deliver these to the Engineer before the Work is accepted. 1.47 AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED EQUIPMENT A. Whenever batching or mixing plant equipment is required to be operated automatically under the Contract and a breakdown or malfunction of the automatic controls occurs, the equipment may be operated manually or by other methods for 48 hours after the breakdown or malfunction, provided this method of operation will produce results otherwise meeting the Specifications. 1.48 EQUIPMENT DATA FORMS A. The Contractor shall obtain, prepare, and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance Data Manuals on Equipment Data sheets and the Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation, Testing, and Instruction and the Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance forms, which are included at the end of Section 11000, General Equipment Requirements. 1.49 RIGHTS IN AND USE OF MATERIALS FOUND ON THE WORK A. With the approval of the Engineer, the Contractor may use on the project such stone, gravel, sand, or other material determined suitable by the Engineer as may be found in the excavation and will be paid both for the excavation of such materials at the corresponding Contract unit price and for the pay item for which the excavated material is used. The Contractor shall replace at his own expense, with other acceptable material, all of that portion of the excavation materials so removed and used which were needed for use in the embankments, backfills, approaches, or otherwise. No charge for the materials used will be made against the Contractor. 1.50 OWNER - FURNISHED MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials required to complete the Work. No materials will be furnished by the Owner. 03720- 045 -01 01355 -16 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • • 1.51 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES A. The Contractor's attention is directed to Section 01830 for requirements relative to the submission of operating and maintenance data for the mechanical equipment. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall provide a list including the equipment name, address, and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and/or spare parts can be readily obtained. 1.52 INSTALLATION LISTS A. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or products under Division 11, 13, 15, and 16 shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required Shop Drawings. B. The installation list shall include all installation where identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for at least 1 year. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720- 045 -01 01355 -17 SPECIAL PROVISIONS December 2013 • • • SECTION 01450 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Owner will pay for the costs of all passing laboratory tests required to determine soil density, concrete compressive strength, and bacteriological clearance of water main. The cost of all testing shall be paid for from the Bid Item allowance as stated in the Bid Form. Costs will be determined from direct invoices from the testing laboratory to the Contractor. Failed tests will be back - charged to the Contractor at the time of final payment. All required soil, concrete, and bacteriological water testing shall be coordinated with and scheduled by the Contractor. 1. The Contractor shall cooperate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution of required services. 2. The Owner shall approve the selection of the testing laboratory. 3. Employment of a testing laboratory shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the obligation to perform work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Conditions of the Contract: Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, or approvals of public authorities. B. Respective Sections: Certification of products. C. Each Section listed: Laboratory tests required and standards for testing. D. Testing Laboratory inspection, sampling, and testing are required for but are not limited to the following: 1. Section 02305, Earthwork for Utilities. 2. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3. Articles 22 and 23, City of Clearwater Standard Technical Specifications. 03720 - 045 -01 01450 -1 TESTING AND TESTING December 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Submit to the Engineer for review a list and schedule of all tests to be conducted. C. Describe test procedures along with duration of tests. D. After each inspection and test, the Laboratory shall promptly submit two copies of the laboratory report to the Engineer, one copy to the Contractor, and one copy to the Owner. E. Include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name of field testing technician or inspector. 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 5. Identification of product and Specifications Section. 6. Location in the Project. 7. Type of inspection or test. 8. Date of test. 9. Results of test. 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. F. When requested by the Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E329— Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. 2. ASTM D3740— Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. 03720- 045 -01 01450 -2 TESTING AND TESTING December 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES • • • • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Laboratory is not authorized to do any of the following: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the work. 3. Perform any duties of the Engineer of Record or the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following: 1. Cooperating with laboratory personnel, providing access to work and to manufacturer's operations. 2. Securing and delivering to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. 3. Providing to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other materials mixes which require control by the testing laboratory. 4. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities: a. To provide access to work to be tested. b. To obtain and handle samples at the project site or at the source of the product to be tested. c. To facilitate inspections and tests. d. To store and cure test samples. 5. Notifying the Engineer and laboratory sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for the laboratory to assign personnel and schedule tests. 6. Employing and paying for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling, and testing required for the Equipment Supplier or Contractor's (as applicable) convenience. C. Materials and equipment used in the performance of Work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. Standard requirements for quality and workmanship are indicated in the Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the equipment supplier or Contractor (as applicable) to provide statements or certificates from the manufacturers and 03720 - 045 -01 01450 -3 TESTING AND TESTING December 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES fabricators that the materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing and certification. D. If the test and any subsequent retest results indicate that the materials or equipment fail to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the equipment supplier or Contractor (as applicable) shall pay for the laboratory costs directly to the testing firm and these will not be reimbursable to the equipment supplier or Contractor (as applicable). 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Comply with requirements of ASTM E329 and ASTM D3740. B. Laboratory: Licensed to operate in Florida. C. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full -time Professional Engineer registered in Florida on staff to review the services performed under this project. D. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either Nation Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of natural physical constants. E. Provide qualified personnel at the site. Cooperate with the Engineer and Contractor in performing services. F. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 03720 - 045 -01 01450 -4 TESTING AND TESTING December 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES • • G. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Promptly notify the Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conformance of Work or Products. I. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01450 -5 TESTING AND TESTING December 2013 LABORATORY SERVICES • SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary • Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 RESPONSIBILITY A. This Section specifies the minimum requirements for temporary facilities, utilities, and controls required to provide an adequate and safe work site at every stage during construction of the Project. The Contractor is solely responsible for the requirements set forth in this Section. 1.11 ONSITE TEMPORARY A. Except as otherwise indicated, the Contractor may, at his option, furnish stand- alone utility plants to provide needed services in lieu of connected services from available public utilities, provided such stand -alone plant facilities comply with all governing regulations. Before availability of temporary utility services, the 03720 - 045 -01 01500 -1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS December 2013 Contractor will provide trucked - in/trucked -out containerized or unitized services for start-up of construction operations at the site. 1.12 COSTS A. Except as otherwise indicated, the costs of providing and using temporary utility services are included in the contract sum. 1.13 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. The types of utility services required for temporary use at the project site include the following (other specific services may be required for specific construction methods of operations): 1. Electrical Power Service. 2. Water Service (potable for certain uses). 3. Sanitary. 4. Storm Sewer or Open Drainage/Run -off Control. 5. Gas (fuel) Service. 6. Telephone Service. 1.14 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. The Contractor shall make the necessary applications and arrangements and pay all fees and charges for electrical energy for power and light necessary for proper completion of the Work and during its entire progress up to time of final acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all temporary switches, connections, and meters. 1.15 TEMPORARY WATER A. The Contractor shall make all necessary application and arrangements and pay all fees and charges for water necessary for the proper completion of the Project up to the time of final acceptance. The Contractor shall provide and pay for any temporary piping and connections. 1.16 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall provide adequate sanitary facilities for the use of those employed on the Work. Such facilities shall be made available when the first employees arrive on the site of the Work, shall be properly secluded from public observation, and shall be constructed and maintained during the progress of the Work in suitable numbers and at such points and in such manner as may be required or approved. 03720 - 045-01 01500 -2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS December 2013 • • • • 1.17 CLEANLINESS OF FACILITIES A. The Contractor shall maintain the sanitary facilities in a satisfactory and sanitary condition at all times and shall enforce their use. He shall rigorously prohibit the committing of nuisances on the site of the Work, on the lands of the Owner, or on adjacent property. 1.18 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. At the time the need for a temporary utility service has ended or has been replaced by use of permanent services, or not later than the time of final completion, the Contractor shall promptly remove the installation unless requested by the Engineer to retain it for a longer period. Any work which may have been delayed or affected by the installation and use of the temporary utility, including repairs to construction and grades and restoration and cleaning of exposed surfaces, shall be completed at this time. The Contractor shall replace any work damaged beyond acceptable restoration. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide adequate protection against objectionable noise levels caused by the operation of construction equipment. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against raising objectionable dust clouds caused by moving construction equipment, high winds, or any other cause. 1.21 WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide for satisfactory disposal of surplus water and shall submit a plan to the Engineer for review before initiating and implementing the plan. Prior approval shall be obtained from the proper authorities for the use of public or private lands or facilities for such disposal. 1.22 POLLUTION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against polluting any public or private lands, lakes, ponds, rivers, streams, creeks, and other such areas by the disposal of surplus material in the form of solids, liquids, gases, or from any other cause. 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 01500 -3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.23 ADVERSE IMPACT A. The Contractor shall evaluate and assess the impact of any adverse effects on the natural environment which may result from construction operations and shall operate to minimize pollution of air, ground, or surface waters vegetation, and afford the neighboring community the maximum protection during and up to completion of the construction project. 1.24 STREAMS, LAKES, AND OTHER BODIES OF WATER A. The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or otherwise prevent pollution of siltation of streams, lakes, and reservoirs and to avoid interference with the movements of migratory fish. 1.25 CHEMICALS A. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with instructions. 1.26 EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall not expose by construction operations a larger area of erosive land at any one time than the minimum necessary for efficient construction operations, and the duration of exposure of the uncompleted construction to the elements shall be as short as practicable. Erosion - control features shall be constructed concurrently with other work and at the earliest practicable time. 1.27 STORAGE FACILITIES A. All products, materials, and equipment shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Products subject to damage by the elements shall be stored in weathertight enclosures. Temperature and humidity shall be maintained within the ranges required by the manufacturer's instructions. Fabricated products shall be stored above the ground on blocking or skids. Products which are subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious coatings with adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. Loose granular materials shall be stored in a well- drained area on solid surfaces to 03720 - 045 -01 01500 -4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS December 2013 • • prevent mixing with foreign matter. Any products which will come in contact with water shall be stored off the ground to prevent contamination. • • 1.28 INSPECTION A. Storage shall be arranged in such a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Periodic inspections shall be made of all stored products to ensure that they are maintained under specified conditions and free from damage or deterioration. 1.29 TEMPORARY PROTECTION A. After installation, the Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to installed products to protect them from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Coverings shall be removed when no longer needed. 1.30 ADJACENT TO WORK A. The Contractor shall preserve from damage all property along the line of the Work or which is in the vicinity of or in any way affected by the Work, the removal or destruction of which is not called for by the Plans. Wherever such property is damaged due to the activities of the Contractor, it shall be immediately restored to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 1.31 REMEDY BY OWNER A. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property or make good such damage or injury, the Owner may, after 48 hours' notice to the Contractor, proceed to repair, rebuild, or otherwise restore such property as may be deemed necessary and the cost of such repairs, rebuilding, or restoration will be deducted from any monies due or which may become due to the Contractor under this Contract. 1.32 PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting property in the areas in the vicinity of the Project and for protecting his equipment, supplies, materials, and work against any damage resulting from the elements, such as flooding, rainstorm, wind damage, or other such damage, and shall be responsible for damage resulting from the same. The Contractor shall provide adequate drainage facilities, tie - downs, or other protection throughout the contract period for the protection of his, the Owner's, and other properties from such damage. 03720 - 045 -01 01500 -5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS December 2013 1.33 TRAFFIC REGULATION A. Signs, marking barricades, and procedures shall conform to the requirements of the Florida Department of Transportation Manual on Traffic Controls and Safe Practices for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, and Utility Operations. 1.34 SIGNAGE A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate barricades around open excavations. 1.35 REMOVAL OF SIGNAGE A. On completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all debris, excess materials, barricades, and temporary work, leaving walkways and roads clear of obstructions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01500 -6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS December 2013 • • • • SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This Section includes the minimum requirements for the furnished materials and equipment for this project. The more stringent requirements in the Technical Specification sections shall take precedence over these requirements for any conflicts. A. Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new and shall not have been in service at any other installation unless otherwise approved. They shall conform to applicable specifications approved in writing by the Engineer. B. Manufactured and fabricated products shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. Like parts of duplicate units shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gauges so as to be interchangeable. C. Quantities of items that are identical shall be by the same manufacturer, regardless of the Design Package breakdown. D. Equipment sizes, capacities, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. E. Materials and equipment shall not be used for any purpose other than that for which they are designed or specified. F. Where materials or equipment are specifically shown or specified to be reused in the Work, special care shall be used in removing, handling, storing, and reinstalling to ensure their proper function in the completed Work. G. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work: 1. Shall conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Shall comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 3. Manufactured and fabricated products: a. Rotating machinery shall be designed and fabricated to provide satisfactory operation without excessive wear and without excessive maintenance during its operating life. Rotating parts shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall operate without excessive vibration. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01740, Final Cleaning. C. Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. D. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Work. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the inspection and acceptance of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the site that does not meet the Contract Specifications. 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 • • • • B. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and acceptance before materials are necessary for incorporating in the work. Any delay of acceptance resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claim against the Owner. C. The materials and equipment used in the Work shall correspond to the approved samples or other data. D. If requested, the Contractor shall be required to submit to the Engineer ample evidence that each and every part of the materials, machinery, and equipment to be furnished is of a reliable make and of a type that has been in successful operation within the continental United States. No equipment will be considered unless the manufacturer has designed and manufactured equipment of a comparable type and size for at least 3 years. The Engineer or Owner will not allow any experimental or untried type of material or machinery to be installed. E. The equipment specified shall be carefully designed and installed to ensure that it adequately performs all required functions within the specified degree of precision. Each unit shall operate with each of the other parts of the equipment to provide a completely integrated system that shall operate to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. F. All equipment, machinery, parts, and assemblies of equipment, machinery, or parts entering into the Work shall be tested as specified. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all field and operating tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer or the Engineer's authorized representative. When such a waiver is issued, the Contractor or manufacturer shall furnish sworn statements in duplicate of the tests conducted and the results of the tests to the Engineer. G. The Contractor shall submit copies of welding procedures for all welding. Welders and welding operators shall be selected in accordance with the qualification requirements of the AWS Code. Welders and welding operators for stainless steel shall pass qualification tests using stainless steel filler metal and procedures developed for stainless steel. Procedures, welder, and operator qualifications shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory retained and paid by the Contractor. H. The Contractor shall not start fabrication of the Work until the Contractor receives written acceptance of the proof of welding procedures from the Engineer for each type of weld. I. The Contractor shall submit copies of mill certificate for each type of rolled steel and as required in the Specifications. The Contractor shall not start fabrication of 03720- 045 -01 01600 -3 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 the work until the Contractor receives written acceptance of all mill certificates from the Engineer. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION A. The equipment installation details shall suit the existing and furnished equipment and are subject to acceptance by the Engineer. B. Any changes or revisions made necessary by the type and dimensions of the equipment furnished shall be made at the expense of the Contractor who shall furnish detailed drawings showing such changes or revision for the acceptance of the Engineer. C. The installation of all work shall comply with the manufacturer's printed instructions. The Contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation, including six copies to the Engineer for distribution. One complete set of instructions shall be maintained at the job site during installation and until the Project is complete. D. All products and equipment shall be handled, installed, connected, cleaned, conditioned, and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and specified requirements. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with the manufacturer's instructions, such conflicts shall be called to the Engineer's attention for resolution and revised instructions. E. The Contractor shall perform work according to the manufacturer's instructions and not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless the instructions are specifically modified or the step or procedure exempted by the Contract Documents. 1.12 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT A. The cost of the Work shall include the cost of competent manufacturers' representatives of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. B. A certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the unit has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before Substantial Completion. The Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance and Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation Testing and Instruction are included in Section 11000, General Equipment Requirements. 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 • • C. The Contractor shall furnish the service of competent manufacturers' representatives for Contractor- or Owner - furnished equipment when evident malfunction or over - heating makes such services necessary or as determined by the Engineer. All such equipment shall be installed by skilled mechanics and in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer. D. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with particular reference to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric drives. These units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights after their sole or base plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the manufacturer has approved the foundation alignments, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations. After all alignments are confirmed, the sole or base plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping, and under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. Special installation requirements in the Technical Specifications shall take precedence over the requirements of this Section. E. The Contractor shall furnish all wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to properly align, level, and secure an apparatus in place. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper alignment after erection shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. F. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary materials and construct suitable concrete foundations or pads for all equipment installed by the Contractor, even though such foundations or pads may not be indicated on the Drawings. The tops of foundations shall be at such elevations as will permit grouting. G. In setting pumps, motors, and other items of equipment customarily grouted, the Contractor shall make an allowance of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) for grout under the equipment bases. Shims used to level and adjust the bases shall be steel. Shims may be left embedded in the grout, in which case they shall be installed neatly and so as to be as inconspicuous as possible in the completed work. Unless otherwise permitted, all grout shall be a suitable non - shrinking grout. 1. Grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Where practicable, the grout shall be placed through the grout holes in the base and worked outward and under the edges of the base and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -5 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 form so constructed as to provide a suitable chamber around the top edge of the finished foundation. 2. Where such procedure is impracticable, the method of placing grout shall be as permitted. After the grout has hardened sufficiently, all forms, hoppers, and excess grout shall be removed, and all exposed grout surfaces shall be patched in an approved manner and, if necessary, as required by the Engineer, given burlap- rubbed finish, and painted with at least two coats of an acceptable paint. 1.13 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish two sets of any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment, operations and maintenance, and disassembly, together with instructions for their use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and instructions in good order before completing the Contract. Tools shall be high - grade, smooth, forged, alloy tool steel. Grease guns shall be lever - type. B. Special tools are considered to be those tools which because of their limited use are not normally available, but which are necessary for the particular equipment. C. Special tools shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such special tools until completion of the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner. 1.14 LUBRICATION SYSTEM A. The minimum design criteria for lubricating moving parts of the equipment shall include 1 week of continuous operation during which no lubricants shall be added to the system. B. The system shall be designed to receive lubricants whether in operation or shut down and shall not leak or waste lubricants under either condition. The manufacturer's recommendations of grade and quality and a supply of the lubricants so recommended in quantities sufficient to conduct start-up and testing operations shall be furnished with the equipment. 1.15 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS A. When used in the Contract Documents, "Factory/Fabricating Shop Performance, Evaluation, Certification, and/or Acceptance Tests and Test Reports" shall be considered to mean the corresponding manufacturer's, fabricator's, and/or other 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -6 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 • • • builder's official test and tests reports. Included in these test reports shall be appropriate substantiating documentation/data ascertaining the correct and complete manufacture, fabrication, and "shop performance" (to the greatest extent normally practicable) of the particular material, equipment, system, and/or facilities proposed for eventual delivery. These are subdivided into three significant tests and test report types: 1) Certification Tests and Test Reports, 2) Factory Tests and Test Reports, and 3) Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Test Reports. Minimal requirements are described below. B. Certification Tests and Test Reports 1. Standard specifications, code references, etc. for minimum quality and workmanship levels are indicated in the Contract Documents and Construction Documents. Statements, certificates, and other substantiating reporting data, called "Certification Test Reports" in this Section, of tests conducted on previously manufactured materials or equipment identical to that proposed for use shall be compiled by the Contractor. 2. At a minimum all Certification Test Reports shall contain an official analysis of sufficient material composition or show evidence of meeting or exceeding the specified material standard(s) referenced, e.g., ASTM, ASME, or other designations. All reports shall also indicate from whom the material was /will be purchased. 3. The Contractor shall pay all costs of certification tests and test reports. C. Factory Tests and Test Reports 1. Additional tests and reports performed on material or equipment by the manufacturer or fabricator to ascertain quality or workmanship are referred to here as "Factory Tests and Test Reports." 2. Before the delivery of any Factory Test Report, the Contractor shall first submit for review and approval a detailed description of the proposed testing, including reporting procedure and criteria. Such descriptions shall also be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the first submission of the technical submittal. 3. Materials and equipment used in the performance of the Work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. If Work to be accomplished away from the construction site is to be inspected on behalf of the Owner during its fabrication or manufacture, the Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the place and time where such fabrication or manufacture is to be done. Such 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 notice shall be in writing and delivered to the Engineer not less than 30 days before the Work is to be done so that the necessary arrangements for the particular factory inspection tests can be made. 4. Upon completion of the factory inspection tests and immediately following manufacture or fabrication, the Contractor shall compile a complete Factory Test Report following the approved format above. All such reports shall be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the technical submittal corresponding to such tested material or equipment. D. Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Tests Reports 1. Material and equipment used in the performance of the Work of this Contract are also subject to evaluation and testing after the complete full - scale assembly into major equipment and/or systems. Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests, i.e., tests of simulated startup, steady - state, variable loading, and other normal operating conditions, for such assembled equipment/systems shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the standard testing practices specified or otherwise accepted by the Engineer. 2. Before the delivery of any Shop Performance/Evaluation Test Report, the Contractor shall submit for review a detailed description of the proposed performance /evaluation tests, including anticipated reporting procedures, data reduction, and criteria used. Where appropriate, such descriptions shall also be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of a first or subsequent submission of the technical submittal. 3. Should such performance /evaluation tests be accomplished away from the construction site, the Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the places and times where such tests will be accomplished. Such prior notice shall be in writing and delivered not less than 30 days before such events so that necessary arrangements for the particular tests can be made. 4. The requirements above pertaining to Factory Tests and Test Reports shall be incorporated for shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Test Reports. Unless factory tests are coincident with shop performance tests and vice versa for the same material or equipment, a minimum of 15 days shall be scheduled between such multiple equipment tests where extended travel is required. 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 • • • • • E. Cost of Performance Shop Tests 1. The Contractor shall conduct shop performance full -scale tests at its expense on all equipment as specified. Each piece of equipment shall be tested completely assembled and the shop tests performed by the equipment manufacturer until successful tests are achieved. 2. If the performance tests are conducted outside the continental United States, the Contractor shall pay all transportation expenses incurred by the Owner's representatives in witnessing the tests at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.16 FIELD TESTING A. Field- testing shall be conducted when called for in the Technical Specification Sections and on all completed systems in general. The Contractor shall provide services of a factory- authorized service representative to perform, approve, and certify the field testing specified in this Section. Field testing shall generally consist of performing the pre - startup and startup tests as specified in the Division 11 Specifications and the final mechanical performance test specified in Section 11000. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to perform factory testing on equipment items before the Engineer approves their use for this project. The Contractor shall refer to the Division 11 Specifications regarding equipment shop testing requirements. B. After completing the installation, the Contractor shall test the system in the presence of the Engineer and under actual operating conditions. Tests shall be performed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The Contractor shall include with its bid the services of the equipment manufacturer's field service technician for a period necessary to complete the Work to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. D. This service shall be for the purposes of checkout, initial start-up, certification, and instruction of facilities personnel. E. A written report covering the technician's findings and installation approval shall be submitted to the Engineer covering all inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted. 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -9 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 1.17 ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION A. The Engineer may accept an equipment system installation as ready for Substantial Completion when: 1. The Engineer has accepted all factory tests and all other component testing. 2. The Engineer has accepted all performance shop tests. 3. All components of the system are installed and tested, including without limitation hydrostatic tests, leak tests, continuity tests, insulation resistance tests, phase rotation tests, bump tests, stroke testing, calibration, adjustment for proper operation, and all other component tests as appropriate. 4. Field start-up activities have been completed and approved by the Engineer. 5. The appropriate certificates have been submitted. 6. All equipment has met the performance requirements. 7. The Engineer has accepted integrated system tests and adjustments performed by the Contractor to demonstrate that the system as a whole functions reliably and meets the performance requirements, in manual and automatic modes, without failure, fault, or defect of any component or of the system as a whole. 8. The Engineer has accepted integrated facilities tests performed by the Contractor to demonstrate that the entire Construction functions together reliably as an integrated facility and meets the performance requirements, in manual and automatic modes, without failure, fault, or defect of any component. 9. The Engineer has accepted facilities performance tests which demonstrate that the design criteria and performance criteria are met. 10. The Engineer has accepted the O &M Manuals. 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -10 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 • 11. All required Owner personnel have been trained. 12. All other Contract requirements for Substantial Completion have been satisfied. 1.18 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for start-up and testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment from after initial break -in of the equipment, which shall be no greater than 30 days. 1.19 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. All items of electrical equipment that are furnished with process, heating, ventilating, or other equipment shall conform to the requirements specified under the appropriate electrical sections of the Specifications. Enclosures for electrical equipment, such as switches and starters, shall conform to the requirements specified under the appropriate electrical sections of the Specifications. 1.20 EQUIPMENT DRIVE GUARDS A. Screens, guards, or cages shall be provided for all exposed rotating or moving parts in accordance with accepted practices of applicable governmental agencies. Unless specified otherwise in the technical sections, guards shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel or galvanized woven wires or expanded metal set in a frame of galvanized steel members. Guards shall be secured in position by steel braces or straps, which will permit easy removal for servicing the equipment. 1.21 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous- impregnated felt, heavy - bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers, or other acceptable materials. 03720 - 045-01 01600 -11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 1.22 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Concrete inserts for hangers shall be designed to support safely, in the concrete that is used, the maximum load that can be imposed by the hangers used in the inserts. Inserts for hangers shall be of a type which will permit adjustment of the hangers both horizontally (in one plane) and vertically and locking of the hanger head or nut. All inserts shall be galvanized. 1.23 SLEEVES A. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, openings for the passage of pipes through floors and walls shall be formed of sleeves of standard- weight, galvanized -steel pipe. Each sleeve shall be of ample diameter to pass the pipe and its insulation, if any, and to permit such expansion as may occur. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to be flush at the walls and the bottom of the slabs and to project 2 inches above the finished floor surface. Threaded nipples shall not be used as sleeves. B. Sleeves in exterior walls below ground or in walls to have liquids on one or both sides shall have a 2 -inch annular fin of 1/4 -inch plate welded with a continuous weld completely around the sleeve at about mid - length. Sleeves shall be galvanized after the fins are attached. C. All sleeves shall be set accurately before the concrete is placed or shall be built -in accurately as the masonry is being built. 1.24 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified service representative from each company manufacturing or supplying certain equipment as listed in this Section (or in the respective Technical Specification sections) to perform the duties described in this Section. B. After the listed equipment has been installed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation but before it is operated by others, the representative shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include but not be limited to the following points as applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked, abraded, or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 • • • C. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment is left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. D. On completion of his or her work, the manufacturer's or supplier's representative shall submit in triplicate to the Engineer a complete, signed report of the result of the inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustment made, quantitative results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report also shall include a certificate that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. E. After the Engineer has reviewed the reports from the manufacturer's representatives, the Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when the field acceptance tests are made. F. The Contractor, at a minimum, shall arrange for the service of qualified service representatives from the companies manufacturing or supplying the following equipment and as required in the Technical Specifications: 1. Pumping Equipment 2. Instrumentation and Control Systems 3. Programmable Controllers 4. Sluice Gates 5. Valve Actuators 6. Electric Motors 7. Motor Control Centers PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01600 -13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT December 2013 • SECTION 01650 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies the general requirements for the delivery, handling, storage, and protection of all items required in the construction of the Work. Specific requirements, if any, are specified with the related item. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) • 1.07 WARRANTIES • A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in this Section for storing and protecting the items. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Materials and equipment shall be loaded and unloaded by methods affording adequate protection against damage. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent injury to the material or equipment during transportation and handling. Suitable power equipment shall be used and the material or equipment shall be under control at all times. Under no condition shall the material or equipment be dropped, bumped, or dragged. When a crane is used, a suitable hook or lift sling shall be used. The crane shall be so placed that all lifting is done in a vertical plane. Materials or equipment skid loaded, palletized, or handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against material or equipment already unloaded. 03720 - 045 -01 01650 -1 DELIVERY, STORAGE December 2013 AND HANDLING 2. Material and equipment shall be delivered to the job site by means that will adequately support it and not subject it to undue stresses. Material and equipment damaged or injured in the process of transportation unloading or handling shall be rejected and immediately removed from the site. 3. The Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of all materials, including those furnished by the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper transport, handling, and storing of all materials, and materials shall be protected to ensure their expected performance. Delivery schedules shall be coordinated by the Contractor, in advance, so that the Work will be done in a timely manner. 4. The Contractor shall coordinate deliveries of products with construction schedules to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. The Contractor shall also do the following: a. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in the manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. b. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to ensure compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents and approved submittals and to ensure that the products are properly protected and undamaged. 5. The Contractor shall provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 6. All materials and equipment shall be stored on -site in complete compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather -tight enclosures. 8. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by the manufacturer's instructions. 9. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids to prevent soiling or staining. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, and provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 03720 - 045 -01 01650 -2 DELIVERY, STORAGE December 2013 AND HANDLING • • • • • 10. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be handled and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner that will prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft, or damage of any kind to the material or equipment. 11. All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the Work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. 12. The Contractor shall arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection and make periodic inspections of stored products to ensure that products are maintained under specified conditions, free from damage or deterioration. 13. The Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from traffic damage and subsequent construction operations and shall remove these coverings when they are no longer needed. 14. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract, within 7 days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in the previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may include expenditures for labor, equipment use, administrative, clerical, engineering, and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. 15. Schedule delivery to reduce long -term onsite storage before installation and/or operation. Under no circumstances shall equipment be delivered to the site more than 1 month before installation without written authorization from the Engineer. 16. Coordinate delivery with installation to ensure minimum holding time for items that are hazardous, flammable, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration. 17. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed containers or other packing systems, complete with instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 03720- 045 -01 01650 -3 DELIVERY, STORAGE December 2013 AND HANDLING 18. Unload and place all items delivered to the site in a manner which will not hamper normal construction operation nor that of subcontractors and other contractors and will not interfere with the flow of necessary traffic. 19. Provide necessary equipment and personnel to unload all items delivered to the site. 20. The Contractor shall store and protect products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Follow storage instructions, review them with the Engineer, and keep a written record of this. Arrange storage to permit access for inspection. 21. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well- drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 22. Store cement and lime under a roof and off the ground and keep it completely dry at all times. All structural, miscellaneous, and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Precast concrete shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping, or cracking. Handle and store brick, block, and similar masonry products in a manner to keep breaking, cracking, and spilling to a minimum. 23. Store all mechanical and electrical equipment and instruments subject to corrosive damage by the atmosphere if stored outdoors (even though covered by canvas) in a weathertight building to prevent damage. The building may be a temporary structure on the site or elsewhere, but it must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The building shall be provided with adequate ventilation to prevent condensation. The Contractor shall ensure that temperature and humidity are maintained within the range required by the manufacturer. a. All equipment shall be stored fully lubricated with oil, grease, and other lubricants unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer. b. Moving parts shall be rotated a minimum of once weekly to ensure proper lubrication and to avoid metal -to -metal "welding." Upon installation of the equipment, the Contractor shall start the equipment, at least at half load, once weekly for an adequate period to ensure that the equipment does not deteriorate from lack of use. 03720 - 045 -01 01650 -4 DELIVERY, STORAGE December 2013 AND HANDLING • • • • c. Lubricants shall be changed when installation is complete and as frequently as required thereafter during the period between installation and acceptance. The Contractor shall put new lubricants into the equipment at the time of acceptance. d. Before accepting equipment that has been stored for some time, the Contractor shall have the manufacturer inspect the equipment and certify that its condition has not been detrimentally affected by the long storage period. Such certifications by the manufacturer shall be deemed to mean that the equipment is judged by the manufacturer to be in a condition equal to that of equipment that has been shipped, installed, tested, and accepted in a minimum time period. As such, the manufacturer will guarantee the equipment equally in both instances. If such a certification is not given, the equipment shall be judged to be defective. It shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) • PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01650 -5 DELIVERY, STORAGE December 2013 AND HANDLING • • SECTION 01720 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Provide and pay for the following field engineering services required for the Project: 1. Survey work required in the execution of the Project. 2. Civil, structural, or other professional engineering services specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. B. Retain the services of a registered land surveyor licensed in Florida to do the following: 1. Identify existing control points and property line corner stakes as required. 2. Verify all existing structure locations and all proposed structure corner locations, tank locations, and equipment locations within the Project site. 3. Maintain an accurate location of all buried piping 4 inches in diameter and larger. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. C. Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling. D. Section 01785, Record Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name and address of the registered land surveyor or professional engineer. 03720- 045 -01 01720 -1 FIELD ENGINEERING December 2013 C. On request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit documentation to verify the accuracy of field engineering work. D. At the end of the Project and before final payment, submit the certified drawings listed below with the Surveyor's title block (signed and sealed by the registered land surveyor) of the items listed below. These drawings shall be included with and made a part of the project record documents. 1. Certified site survey at 1 -inch = 10 -foot scale on sheets 24 inches by 36 inches, indicating the building corners, sidewalks, paved areas, and location of all above - ground structures for the project site. 2. Certified drawing showing the location, lines, and grades of all lines buried and exterior to buildings and other buried facilities (e.g., valves, tanks, vaults, etc.) installed as a result of the work. This shall be at the same scale as the Engineer's yard piping drawing and submitted on reproducible tracing paper. 3. Certified drawings showing elevations of all new structures and equipment and existing adjacent structures and equipment. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. All work will be performed in accordance with the Minimum Technical Standards set forth by the Board of Professional Surveyors and Mappers. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on Drawings. B. Locate and protect control points before starting site work and preserve all permanent reference points during construction: 1. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to the Engineer. 03720- 045 -01 01720 -2 FIELD ENGINEERING December 2013 • • • 2. Report to the Engineer when any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. • 3. Require the surveyor to correctly replace project control points which may be lost or destroyed. 4. Establish replacements based on original survey control. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. Registered land surveyor of the discipline required for the specific service on the project, currently licensed in Florida. 1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall establish a minimum of 2 permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points: 1. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Record Documents. B. Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements: a. Improved surfaces. b. Utility line elevations. 2. Building foundation, column locations, and floor levels. 3. Controlling lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical trades. C. From time to time, verify layouts by the same methods. 03720- 045 -01 01720 -3 FIELD ENGINEERING December 2013 D. Maintain a complete and accurate log of all control and survey work as the work progresses. E. As a condition for approval of monthly progress payment requests, update the project record drawings monthly based on the work performed during the month ending at the pay request. The Contractor shall coordinate this monthly with the Owner's representative on the site as part of the pay request. F. Maintain an accurate record of piping changes, revisions, and modifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01720 -4 FIELD ENGINEERING December 2013 • • • • SECTION 01730 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all cutting, coring, fitting, and patching, including attendant excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work or to accomplish the following: 1. Make the Work's several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill -timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Subcontract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routine penetrations of non - structural surfaces for installing piping and electrical conduit. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Division 2, Site Construction. C. Division 3, Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall submit a written request well in advance of executing any cutting or alteration which affects the following: 1. Work of the Owner or any other Contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the Project. 03720- 045 -01 01730 -1 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING December 2013 3. The integrity or effectiveness of weather - exposed or moisture - resistant elements or systems. 4. The efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of elements exposed to view. C. The written request shall include the following: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of affected Work. 3. The necessity for cutting, altering, or excavating. 4. The effect on the work of the Owner or any other Contractor or on the structural or weatherproof integrity of the Project. 5. Description of proposed Work: a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Trades which will execute the Work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. Extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching. 7. Cost proposal, when applicable. 8. Written permission of any other Contractor whose work will be affected. D. The Contractor shall submit written notice to the Engineer designating the date and the time the Work will be uncovered. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 01730 -2 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING December 2013 • • • • • • 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete and grout for rough patching shall be as specified in Division 3. B. Materials for finish patching shall be equal to those of adjacent construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect existing conditions of project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during cutting and patching. B. After uncovering Work, the Contractor shall inspect conditions affecting . installation of products or performance of the Work. C. The Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Engineer in writing and shall not proceed with work until the Engineer has provided further instructions. D. All cutting and coring shall be performed in such a manner as to limit the extent of patching. E. All holes cut through concrete and masonry walls, slabs, or arches shall be core - drilled unless otherwise approved. No structural members shall be cut without approval of the Engineer, and all such cutting shall be done in a manner directed by the Engineer. No holes may be drilled in beams or other structural members 03720 - 045 -01 01730 -3 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING December 2013 without obtaining prior approval. All work shall be performed by mechanics skilled in this type of work. F. Rough patching shall be such as to bring the cut or cored areas flush with existing construction unless otherwise shown. Finish patching shall match existing surfaces as approved. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to ensure the structural value or integrity of the affected portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide protection from elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed by cutting and patching work and maintain excavations free from water. D. Perform coring with an approved non - impact rotary tools with diamond core drills. The size of the holes shall be suitable for pipe, conduit, sleeves, and equipment or mechanical seals to be installed. E. Ensure that all equipment conforms to OSHA standards and specifications pertaining to plugs, noise and fume pollution, wiring, and maintenance. F. Provide protection for existing equipment, utilities, and critical areas against water or other damage cause by drilling operation. G. Following drilling, vacuum or otherwise remove from the area all slurry or tailings resulting from coring operations. 3.03 PERFORMANCE A. Cut and demolish by methods which will prevent damage to other work and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repairs. B. Excavate and backfill by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work. C. Employ the original installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for the following: 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 1. Weather - exposed or moisture - resistant elements. 2. Sight - exposed finished surfaces. 01730 -4 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING • • • • • • D. Fit and adjust products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. E. Cut with a concrete wall saw and diamond saw blades of proper size. F. Control slurry generated by sawing operation on both sides of wall. G. When cutting a reinforced concrete wall, cut so as not to damage the bond between the concrete and reinforcing steel left in structure. Make the cut so that steel neither protrudes nor is recessed from the face of the cut. H. Install adequate bracing of the area to be cut before cutting starts. Check the area during sawing operation for partial cracking and provide additional bracing as required to prevent a partial release of the cut area during sawing operations. I. Provide equipment of adequate size to remove cut panel. J. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Subcontract Documents. K. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. L. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. M. Provide for Proper Pavement Restoration: The Contractor shall restore existing paving, including underdrains if any are encountered and broken into, and shall replace or rebuild the paving using the same type of construction as was in the original. The Contractor shall be responsible for restoring all such work, including subgrade and base courses where present. The Contractor shall obtain and bear the expense of such local or other governmental permits as may be necessary. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01730 -5 CUTTING, CORING, AND PATCHING December 2013 • SECTION 01740 FINAL CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of the Work and at the completion of the Work as required by General Conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) • 1.07 WARRANTIES • A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS A. Cleaning and disposal operations shall comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti - pollution laws. 03720 - 045 -01 01740 -1 FINAL CLEANING December 2013 PART 2 PRODUCTS The Contractor shall do the following: A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by the manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by the cleaning material manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERIODIC CLEANING The Contractor shall do the following: A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site, and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and windblown debris. B. Provide onsite containers for the collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal areas away from the site. 3.02 DUST CONTROL The Contractor shall do the following: A. Clean interior spaces before the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as- needed basis until painting is finished. B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces. 3.03 FINAL CLEANING The Contractor shall do the following: A. Employ skilled workers for final cleaning. 03720 - 045 -01 01740 -2 FINAL CLEANING December 2013 B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. C. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. D. Before final completion or Owner occupancy, inspect interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view and all work areas to verify that the entire Work is clean. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01740 -3 FINAL CLEANING December 2013 • SECTION 01755 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide a competent field services technician of the manufacturers of all equipment furnished under Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16 to supervise installation, adjustment, initial operation and testing, performance testing, final acceptance testing, and startup of the equipment. B. The Contractor shall perform specified equipment field performance tests, final acceptance tests, and startup services. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01830, Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Section 11000, General Equipment Requirements, for Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance form. C. Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16, performance and acceptance testing and startup requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Submit name, address, and resume of proposed field services technicians at least 30 days in advance of the need for such services. B. Submit for review detailed testing procedures for shop tests, field performance tests, and final acceptance tests as specified in the various equipment specification sections. Test procedures shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of the proposed test dates and shall include at least the following information: 1. Name of equipment to be tested, including reference to specification section number and title. 2. Testing schedule of proposed dates and times for testing. 03720 - 045 -01 01755 -1 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP December 2013 3. Summary of power, lighting, chemical, water, sludge, gas, etc., needs and identification of who will provide them. 4. An outline of specific assignments of the responsibilities of the Contractor and manufacturers' factory representatives or field service personnel. 5. Detailed description of step -by -step testing requirements, with reference to appropriate standardized testing procedures and laboratory analyses by established technical organizations (e.g., ASTM, WPCF Standard Methods, etc.). 6. Samples of forms to be used to collect and record test data and to present tabulated test results. C. Submit copies of test reports upon completion of specified shop, performance, and acceptance tests. Test reports shall incorporate the information provided in the test procedures submittals, modified to reflect the actual conducting of the tests and the following additional information: 1. Copies of all test data sheets and results of lab analyses. 2. Summary comparison of specified test and performance requirements vs. actual test results. 3. Should actual test results fail to meet specified test and performance requirements, a description of actions to be taken before re- testing equipment. D. Submit copies of the manufacturer's field service technician's report summarizing the results of the initial inspection, operation, adjustment, and pre - tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions and tabulations of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative results obtained, suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance, and the equipment supplier's Certificate of Installation in the format specified in this Section. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 03720 - 045 -01 01755 -2 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP December 2013 • A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C653— Disinfection for Water Treatment Plants. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C. Water Pollution Control Federation (WPCF) D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field service technicians shall be competent and experienced in the proper installation, adjustment, operation, testing, and startup of the equipment and systems being installed. B. Manufacturers' sales and marketing personnel will not be accepted as field service technicians. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY REQUIREMENTS A. After the equipment has been installed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation but before it is operated by others, the manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points where applicable: 03720 - 045 -01 01755 -3 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP December 2013 1. Soundness (without cracks or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. B. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. C. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall submit a signed report of the results of his/her inspection, operation, adjustments, and tests. 3.02 WITNESS REQUIREMENTS A. Shop tests or factory tests may be witnessed by the Owner and/or the Owner's representatives, as required by the various equipment specifications. B. Field performance and acceptance tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner, the Owner's designated personnel, and/or the Owner's representatives. 3.03 STARTUP AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE TREATMENT PLANT AND RELATED SYSTEMS A. General Requirements 1. Successfully execute the step -by -step procedure of startup and performance demonstration specified in this Section. 2. The startup and performance demonstration shall be successfully executed before Substantial Completion and acceptance by the Owner of the treatment plant and its related systems. 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least 5 working days in advance or as otherwise specified with the Owner and the Engineer. All performance tests and inspections shall be conducted during Monday through Friday, unless otherwise specified. B. Preparation for Startup 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that it is in good working order and properly connected. Preliminary run -ins of the various pumps, compressors, and other remaining equipment shall be 03720- 045 -01 01755 -4 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP December 2013 • • • • made. All systems shall be cleaned and purged as required. All sumps, tanks, basins, chambers, pump wells, and pipelines which are hydraulically checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once the water testing is complete. 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full range. All other adjustments required for proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be made. 3. The Contractor shall perform all other tasks needed for preparing and conditioning the treatment facilities for proper operation. 4. No testing shall be conducted or equipment operated until the Engineer has verified that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is in good working order. 5. No testing shall be conducted or equipment operated until the Engineer has verified that all lubricants, tools, maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved equipment operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished as specified. C. Facilities Startup 1. The startup period shall not begin until all new treatment facilities and equipment have been tested as specified and are ready for operation. The Owner shall receive spare parts, safety equipment, tools and maintenance equipment, lubricants, approved operation and maintenance data, and the specified operation and maintenance instruction before the startup with waste water. All valves shall be tagged before this startup. 2. Demonstrate seven consecutive 24 -hour days of successful operation of the facility as a prerequisite of Substantial Completion and Acceptance. 3. If the facility fails to demonstrate satisfactory performance on the first or any subsequent attempt, the Contractor shall make all necessary alterations, adjustments, repairs, and replacements. When the facility is again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and a new test shall be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer for the specified duration. 4. The Owner will furnish all operating personnel (other than vendor's or subcontractor's service personnel) needed to operate equipment during the final test period; however, these personnel will perform their duties under 03720 - 045 -01 01755 -5 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP December 2013 the Contractor's direct supervision. Until performance tests are completed and units and systems are accepted by the Owner as substantially complete, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the operation and maintenance of all new facilities. 5. The Owner will provide all necessary electricity. However, the Contractor shall provide all necessary personnel of the various construction trades, i.e., electricians, plumbers, etc., and field service personnel of the major equipment suppliers on an 8- hour - per -day basis at the facilities and on a 24- hour - per -day basis locally during the startup period. Major equipment suppliers shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Telemetry, Instrumentation, and Control Equipment b. Treatment Units c. All Pumping Equipment 6. At no time during startup shall the Contractor allow the facility to be operated in a manner which subjects equipment to conditions that are more severe than the maximum allowable operating conditions for which the equipment was designed. END OF SECTION 03720- 045 -01 01755 -6 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP December 2013 • • • • SECTION 01770 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section III, General Conditions. B. Section 01000, Project Requirements. C. Section 01740, Final Cleaning. D. Section 01785, Record Documents. E. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) • 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When the Contractor considers that the Work or designated portion of the Work is Substantially Complete, the Contractor shall submit written notice to the Engineer with a list of items to be completed or corrected. 03720 - 045 -01 01770 -1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT December 2013 B. If the Engineer's inspection finds that the Work is not substantially complete, the Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies. C. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of Substantial Completion. D. When the Engineer finds the Work is Substantially Complete the Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.11 FINAL COMPLETION A. When the Contractor considers that the Work or designated period of the Work is complete, the Contractor shall submit written certification to the Engineer indicating the following: 1. The Contract Documents have been reviewed. 2. The Work has been inspected for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. The Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and deficiencies listed with Certificates of Substantial Completion have been corrected. 4. The Work is complete and ready for final inspection. 5. All required shop drawings, catalog cuts, maintenance manuals, instruction manuals, test reports, samples, operational manuals, and all other submittals have been submitted and reviewed by the Engineer. 6. All deliverables have been delivered or placed as accepted by the Engineer. B. If the Engineer's inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete, the Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing listing observed deficiencies. C. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of Final Completion. D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is complete, the Engineer will consider closeout submittals. 1.12 REINSPECTION FEES If the status of Completion of Work requires more than one re- inspection by the Engineer due to failure of the Work to comply with the Contractor's claims on initial inspection, the Owner will deduct from the final payment to the Contractor the amount of the Engineer's compensation for additional re- inspection services. 03720 - 045 -01 01770 -2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT December 2013 • • • 1.13 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities: 1. Certificate of Occupancy. 2. All required Certificates of Inspection. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Under provisions of Section 01830. C. Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01785. D. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract. E. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 1.14 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to total Contract Price, indicating the following: 1. Original total Contract Price. 2. Previous change orders. 3. Changes under allowances. 4. Changes under unit prices. 5. Deductions for uncorrected Work. 6. Penalties and bonuses. 7. Deductions for liquidated damages. 8. Deductions for re- inspection fees. 9. Other adjustments to total Contract Price. 10. Total Contract Price as adjusted. 11. Previous payments. 12. Sum remaining due. B. The Engineer will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to the total Contract Price not previously made by change orders. 1.15 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of Conditions of the Contract. 03720 - 045 -01 01770 -3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT December 2013 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01770 -4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT December 2013 • • • • SECTION 01780 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Co- execute submittals when so specified. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. D. Submit submittals to the Engineer for review. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: two each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in sequence of the Specifications. Provide completion information for each item as follows: 1. Product or work item. 2. Firm, address, telephone, fax and E -mail number, and name of principal. 3. Scope. 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. 5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. 03720 - 045 -01 01780 -1 WARRANTIES AND BONDS December 2013 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure. b. Instances that might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 7. Contractor, with address, telephone, faxes and E -mail numbers, and the name of responsible principal. D. Submittal of warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts shall be included in submittals for review and before Final Completion with actual dates included. E. The Contractor's obligation to correct defective or nonconforming Work shall run for 1 year (or such longer period may otherwise be specified in the Contract Documents) beginning from the date Substantial Completion is achieved. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and this Section. B. All mechanical and electrical equipment together with devices of whatever nature and all components which are furnished and/or installed by the Contractor shall be guaranteed. C. The guarantee shall be against the manufacturing and/or design inadequacies, materials, and workmanship not in conformity, improper assembly, hidden damage, failure of devices and/or components, excessive leakage, or other circumstances which would cause the equipment to fail under normal design and/or specific operating conditions for 1 year or such longer period as may be shown and/or specified from and after the date of Substantial Completion. D. The Contractor shall replace and install each piece of equipment, device, or component which shall fail within the term specified above of the guarantee with reasonable promptness without increase in the Contract Price. If the Contractor fails to provide timely repairs as specified in this Section, the Owner shall issue a claim against the Contractor's Bond. In some instances, if approved by the Owner, the Contractor may be allowed to repair the equipment. 03720 - 045 -01 01780 -2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS December 2013 • • • 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01780 -3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS December 2013 • SECTION 01785 RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section details the minimum requirements for the Contractor for maintenance and recording of Record Documents. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. The Contractor shall store documents and samples in the Contractor's field office • apart from documents used for construction and shall do the following: • 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. The Contractor shall institute a computerized record control program. C. The Contractor shall make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the Engineer. D. At Contract closeout, the Contractor shall transmit Record Documents and samples with cover letter to the Engineer, listing the following: 1. Date. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contractor's name and addresses. 4. Number and title of each Record Document. 5. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative. 6. Contract Section and Subsection numbers. 7. Location. E. Before assembling and submitting records, the Contractor shall review for completeness the records maintained by its subcontractors. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01785 -1 RECORD DOCUMENTS F. Tracings of all Construction Documents and Shop Drawings made by the Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers of materials or equipment shall be corrected to show the Work as actually completed or installed. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PROJECT RECORD A. The Contractor shall label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with the corresponding Specification Section number. Each document shall be labeled "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Record Documents shall be maintained in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Record documents shall not be used for construction purposes. 3.02 RECORDING The Contractor shall record construction information as follows: A. Record and update daily Record information from field notes on a set of opaque drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 01785 -2 RECORD DOCUMENTS • • • • B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. • • C. Record information concurrently (daily) with construction progress. Work shall not be concealed until required information is recorded. D. Mark Record Drawings to reflect the following: 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original construction drawings. E. CAD Requirements for Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a complete set of Record Drawings in the latest version of AutoCAD format upon completion of the Work. No additional compensation will be allowed for the Contractor to provide the Record Drawings. The Contractor shall use the AutoCAD drawings furnished by the Engineer for this purpose. Record Drawings must be submitted in the AutoCAD format of the contract drawings. No other CAD software or format will be accepted. It is Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure that the Record Drawings conform to the following CAD requirements: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer on CD -ROM. Each CD shall be clearly labeled with the appropriate project number, client name, date, and file names included on each CD. If files are compressed, a description of the compression software must be included along with a copy of the appropriate uncompressing software. 2. All changes to drawings must be done in accordance with the appropriate scale of the drawing revised and shall be delineated by placing a "cloud" around the areas revised and adding a revision triangle indicating the appropriate revision number. 3. Each drawing must have the revision block completed to indicate the revision number, date, and initials of the person revising the drawing. The description of the revision must say "Record Drawing." This procedure 01785 -3 RECORD DOCUMENTS must be followed for every drawing even when no changes are made to the drawing. 4. All revisions to drawings must be put on separate layers with the layer names prefixed Record followed by the appropriate existing layer name. The colors and line types of the appropriate existing layers shall be adhered to when creating new layers. 5. The Contractor shall supply one full set of Record Drawings on reproducible black line prints and five full sets of opaque copies. F. The Contractor shall have the Licensed Land Surveyor certify the Record Drawings as being correct and complete. 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 01785 -4 RECORD DOCUMENTS • • • • SECTION 01815 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The existing water reclamation facility will be maintained in continuous operation by the Owner at all times during the entire construction period. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct his work such that it will not impede any treatment process, create potential hazards to operating equipment and/or personnel, reduce the quality of the plant effluent, or cause odor or other nuisance. B. The Contractor shall schedule his operations to conform to the requirements specified herein and shall include in his construction schedule all events which will impact operation of the existing treatment facilities. C. The Owner will continue to operate the treatment facilities during the construction period and will be responsible for maintaining effluent quality. The Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner, coordinate the construction schedule with the Owner and Engineer, and provide the necessary labor, equipment, and materials to prevent interruption to flow and treatment. The Owner and Engineer reserve the right to modify or expand the schedule during construction to meet prevailing conditions. D. The Contractor shall not make any alterations to affect operation of the treatment facility without giving two weeks prior written notice to the Owner and Engineer requesting authorization to proceed. Except as noted herein, the Owner will perform all operation of existing valves or equipment. E. Operation of valves or equipment by the Owner may be limited on specific occasions because of process limitations or unavailability of personnel. Delays caused by such limitations shall be expected and shall not be the basis for claim of extra costs by the Contractor. F. The work specified in this Section shall be accomplished at such times that will be convenient to the Owner. Night work or overtime work by the Contractor to conform to these requirements shall be considered as normal procedure under this Contract, and the Contractor shall make no claim for extra compensation as a result of this night work or overtime work. G. To maintain continuous treatment facilities operation during construction a phased removal and construction sequence shall be required. Specific constraints are 03720 - 045 -01 01815 -1 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION March 2014 AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION outlined in this Section. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed sequence of construction to complete the work while maintaining plant operation. H. The Contractor shall furnish all temporary materials and equipment, such as flow diversion, bypass pumping, coffer dam, temporary power, etc., that may be required to complete the work of this Contract. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance, for construction schedule. B. Section 02220, Demolition and Modifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Submit a complete description of procedures to maintain plant operation to supplement the construction schedule developed. The description shall include step -by -step procedures, required duration, and specific procedures required to be performed by the Owner's personnel. B. Submit complete plans of temporary systems required as part of this contract to maintain plant operations. The plans shall clearly delineate the intended location of these items, basis of design, and the Contractor's proposed method for phasing from existing to temporary to completed facilities. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 01815 -2 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION March 2014 AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION • • • • PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The following constraints shall be applied to all equipment, treatment units, and appurtenances and utility systems on the plant site. 1. Vehicular access for the Owner's personnel to the plant site and to all operating treatment units shall be maintained at all times. 2. Plant operating personnel shall have access to all areas that remain in operation. 3. Potable water supply to the plant shall remain operational at all times. 4. Sanitary facilities shall remain operational at all times. 5. Electric power and lighting service shall be uninterrupted. 6. If underground piping or utilities not shown on the Drawings are encountered, such piping or utilities shall not be disturbed without prior approval of the Engineer and Owner. 7. Before making a change in existing piping, electrical, or control systems, the Contractor shall inform the Owner and Engineer of such change and assist in instructing operations and maintenance personnel in any new operating procedures. 8. Portions of some pipelines must remain in service while alterations are being made on other portions. Piping systems that must remain in service shall be isolated by placing blind flanges, plugs, or caps on all open ends. 9. Flow to and through the treatment plant shall not be interrupted. 10. If directed by the Owner, provide by -pass pumping system and perform by -pass pumping. 11. Before shutting down a piece of equipment to allow for rebuilding or re- piping, the Contractor shall have on hand all materials required to reconstruct the piping system in its new arrangement. 03720 - 045-01 01815 -3 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION March 2014 AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION 12. All temporary facilities provided by the Contractor must be demonstrated to be operational to the satisfaction of the Engineer before any existing systems can be removed from use. The temporary facilities are critical to the operation of the wastewater treatment facilities. Availability of these facilities must be maintained at all times. The Contractor must respond to requests from the Engineer and Owner for repair and maintenance immediately (7 days per week, 24 hours per day, including holidays). If the Contractor fails to immediately respond to request for repair and maintenance, such repair and maintenance may be performed by the Owner. All costs associated with such repair and maintenance performed by the Owner shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.02 SPECIFIC CONSTRAINTS AND SEQUENCING A. The following constraints shall be applied to the sequencing of construction on the project. These constraints and sequencing do not purport to include all constraints for sequencing required for the construction of the project. The Contractor may propose alternate constraints and sequencing with the details sequence of construction required in Paragraph 1.01G for approval by the Owner and Engineer. The submittal must demonstrate all requirements and the scope of work for this section are met. 1. The Contractor shall replace the two electrical actuators for the two 36- inch - diameter Internal Recycle plug valves and replace and reinforce the associated valve vault access covers before replacing the screw pumps. 2. At least two screw pumps shall remain in service at all times during construction. The Contractor shall provide temporary power and perform any work required to maintain operation of at least two screw pumps during construction. 3. The Contractor shall demolish the existing screw pumps and install, test, and place into service new screw pumps in a prescribed manner. No more than two screw pumps shall be under construction at a time. Screw Pump Nos. 3 and 5 shall be replaced first. Screw Pump Nos. 1 and 4 shall be replaced second. If the Owner selects Additive Alternate 1, Screw Pump No. 2 shall be replaced last. 4. Isolating each screw pump is expected to require installation of coffer dams in the screw lift station receiving and discharge channels because some of the existing sluice gates leak or do not work. After a screw pump has been isolated, the Contractor shall pump down and clean the isolated area. While each screw pump is isolated for replacement, all work within each area (e.g., replacing the two mud valves, constructing the platform 03720 - 045 -01 01815 -4 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION March 2014 AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION • • with hand rail, replacing the two isolating sluice gates if the Owner selects Additive Alternate 3, etc.) shall be completed. 5. The connection of the new MCC to the existing electrical service shall occur at night during the minimum flow period. The Contractor shall supply temporary power the critical components powered by the existing MCC for the duration required to make the electrical connections. The Contractor shall coordinate this work closely with the Owner and Engineer. 6. If the Owner selects Additive Alternate 3, the Contractor shall replace the two channel - mounted sluice gates in the screw lift station discharge channel one at a time. Replacing each sluice gate is expected to require installing a coffer dam on each side of the existing sluice gate. The Owner may allow one downstream oxidation ditch to be taken out of service at a time to accommodate the work. The Contractor shall coordinate these activities with the Owner. The Contractor shall receive written authorization from the Owner prior to isolating an oxidation ditch from service. If directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall perform by -pass pumping to maintain flow to the downstream oxidation ditch while its upstream sluice gate is being replaced. After the area has been isolated, the Contractor shall pump down and clean the isolated area and then replace the channel- mounted sluice gate. The bypass system shall be capable of pumping the plant's current flows as follows: a. Average Day — 24 MGD b. Peak Hour — 35 MGD The Contractor shall verify the flow range with the Engineer and Owner before designing the bypass system. The work shall be completed to minimize bypass time. The Contractor shall submit a bypass plan to the Owner and Engineer for review and approval. 7. Once all screw pumps are installed, tested, and placed into service and all electrical and instrumentation work for the pumps has been completed, the submersible Internal Recycle Pump Station shall be taken out of service and off -line by closing of the sluice gate on the east side of the screw lift station receiving channel. The inlet piping to each wet well compartment shall be drained and the fluid in the wet well shall be pumped out using the existing submersible pumps and additional sump pumps as required to remove the liquid. Once drained, the sluice gates to each of the wet well 03720 - 045 -01 01815 -5 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION March 2014 AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION compartment shall be closed. The interior of the submersible Internal Recycle Pump Station including but not limited to all concrete surfaces, piping, pumps, and associated equipment shall then be pressure washed, and the liquid and debris shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the Contract Documents. The sluice gate in- between the wet well compartments shall then be closed. The discharge piping shall be flushed using reclaimed water. The Owner will provide reclaimed water free of charge to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, conveying and discharging reclaimed water from the on -site reclaimed pump station to each wet well compartment. The Contractor shall fill the wet well compartment containing one submersible pump with reclaimed water to a depth of 5 feet (requires approximately 24,100 gallons), start the pump (full speed), and then stop the pump at the minimum allowable water level (a depth of 3.5 feet). The Contractor shall fill the wet well compartment containing two submersible pumps with reclaimed water to a depth of 6.5 feet (requires approximately 31,300 gallons), start one pump (full speed), and then stop the pump at a water depth of 5 feet. The Contractor shall then start the other pump (full speed), and then stop the pump at the minimum allowable water level (a depth of 3.5 feet). After the discharge piping is flushed, the wet well compartments shall be completely drained using additional sump pumps as required to remove the liquid. All work shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. 8. The Contractor shall be responsible for operating and maintaining all temporary systems during construction. 9. Before taking any channels, pumps, gates, pipes, or other equipment out of service, all temporary systems shall be installed and operational, all flow diversion equipment shall be checked and operable, and the appropriate flow channels shall be cleaned. 10. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and Owner before taking any channels, pumps, gates, pipes, or other equipment out of service. All temporary systems shall be installed and operational, all flow diversion valves shall be checked and operable, and the appropriate flow channel shall be cleaned. END OF SECTION 03720-045 -01 01815 -6 MAINTENANCE OF PLANT OPERATION March 2014 AND SEQUENCE OF CONSTRUCTION • • • • SECTION 01820 TRAINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems supplied and/or installed under this Contract. B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment manuals, and start -up engineering and training assistance. C. Ensure that system suppliers provide a qualified training instructor to help the Contractor train the Owner's employees in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. D. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field, classroom, and hands -on training. E. Furnish training videos and manuals during the training program. F. Include in the total Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training manuals; conducting classroom instructions; performing field, factory, and hands -on training; and coordinating and incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as determined by the Owner. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. C. Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. 03720 - 045 -01 01820 -1 TRAINING December 2013 B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Resumes of Instructors. 2. Training Plans. 3. Training Manuals. 4. Training Videos. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. All factory training programs, if required, shall be completed before start-up of the Owner's system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment. B. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the approved schedule. C. Individuals requiring training shall be trained in small groups during Mondays through Fridays. The Contractor shall coordinate training activities and schedules with the Owner's representative. Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner, each training class shall be duplicated daily with the first training class beginning at 6:30 am and the second training class beginning at 2:30 pm. D. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the Engineer 30 days before the first training event. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be performed by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems installed under this Contract. 2. Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner. B. The Contractor shall furnish resumes, including three outside references, for each instructor to be used in the training program. C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of the resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve, request additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training program. If a 03720 - 045 -01 01820 -2 TRAINING December 2013 • • • • • • proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the resume and references of another candidate within a reasonable time. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 TRAINING PLAN A. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall provide a competent and experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for not less than 3 days to instruct permanent operating personnel in the operation of equipment and control systems. B. At least 30 days before training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a detailed training plan including the following: 1. Title and objectives. 2. Training schedule. 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, operators, maintenance staff). 5. Course description and outline of course content. 6. Duration. 7. Location (e.g., training center or site). 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self - study, demonstration, hands -on). 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 03720- 045 -01 01820 -3 TRAINING December 2013 1.10 FORM OF TRAINING MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare training packages in the form of an instruction manual for use by the Owner's personnel. At least 30 days before the training, the Contractor shall submit the training packages to the Engineer for acceptance. B. Format 1. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inches (21.59 x 27.94 cm). 2. Paper: 20 -1b (9.072 kg) minimum, white, for typed pages. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly word processed including the following: a. Table of contents. b. Pretest. c. Learning objectives. d. General operations, theory, and specific equipment information. 4. Drawings a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages, not larger than 11 x 17 inch (27.94 x 43.18 cm). 5. Cover: Identify each volume with the following: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of separate structure or system as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. d. Locations. C. Binders 1. Commercial quality three -post binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers. 2. Maximum post width shall be 3 inches (7.62 cm). 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the information into related consistent groupings. 03720 - 045 -01 01820 -4 TRAINING December 2013 • • • • • 1.11 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL The Contractor shall do the following: A. Produce or provide video training material subject to approval of the Owner. Audio and video clarity are subject to the approval of the Owner. B. Furnish four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title, the Owner's name, and time on a label in a clear plastic sleeve. C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs. 1.12 INSTRUCTIONS A. At the completion of Work, the Contractor shall provide a competent and experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for a period of time as directed by the Owner to instruct permanent operating personnel in the operation of equipment and control systems. B. The Contractor shall furnish four complete sets of operating instructions applying to each piece of equipment installed in conjunction with this Contract. C. An "As- Installed" diagram of all control wiring and operating instructions shall be mounted in a watertight pocket on the inside door of the control panel of each unit. D. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide engraved metal, plastic tags, or instructions on any valve, switch, control, pipe or other piece of equipment which is not self evident as to its function or mode of operation. This includes, but is not limited to, all exposed piping and all switches. This shall particularly apply to operations which must be manually sequenced. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01820 -5 TRAINING December 2013 SECTION 01830 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall do the following: A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for the Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of the Specifications. The data presented in the O &M Manuals shall be specifically related to this Contract and application. 2. Incorporate maintenance and operation data furnished by the Owner, if any. B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items to supply and deliver to the Engineer O &M Manuals for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. C. Provide O &M Manuals for all equipment, including instrumentation, electrical, and process control system equipment and software for the entire Facility. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000, Project Requirements. B. Section 01785, Record Documents. C. Section 01820, Training. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Manuals shall have individual- component levels containing the following: 1. Storage requirements. 2. Installation instructions. 3. Alignment instructions and tolerances. 03720 - 045-01 01830 -1 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 4. Operating instructions. 5. Troubleshooting instructions. 6. Lubrication requirements. 7. Maintenance instructions. 8. Parts list. 9. Recommended spare parts list and how to obtain same. B. Format: 1. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inch (21.59 x 27.94 cm). 2. White paper: 20 -1b (9.072 kg) minimum. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data or neatly word - processed. 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced, punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than 11 x 17 inches (27.94 x 43.18 cm). c. Place all drawings at the end of each Section and drawing shall be printed on one side only. 5. Provide a blank page for each separate product or each piece of operation equipment. a. Provide a word - processed description of the product and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS," listing the following: a. Title of Project. b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. C. Media 1. Original word - processed CD shall be delivered to the Engineer. 2. All word processing must be done using the latest version of Microsoft Word or as directed by the Engineer. 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -2 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 • • 3. All drawings except control system configuration drawings must be submitted on CD using AutoCAD. • • D. Binders 1. Filled to not more than 75% capacity. 2. When multiple binders are used, arrange the data into related consistent groupings. E. The Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Equipment Manuals —Five copies of the O &M Instruction Manual for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer with delivery of the equipment. O &M manuals will not include the manufacturer's test results and Record specifications. 2. Systems O &M Manuals —Five copies of the systems O &M Manuals, bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer no later than 60 days before the Facility's Phase I start-up. Systems O &M Manuals will be complete except for field results and refinements added as result of demonstrations. 3. Final O &M Manuals —Five copies of the Final Equipment and Systems O &M Manuals, bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer before the Substantial Completion under this Contract. 4. The cost of these Manuals submitted shall be included in the total Contract Price. Copies supplied under Item 2 will not be included under Item 3. F. Any modifications required after final O &M submission shall be made to the manuals by issuance of addenda in the form of change pages to the manual. The addenda will identify where the new data are to be inserted, what data are to be removed, and new index sheets as necessary and list of shop drawings and submittals. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to herein shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Specification Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 A. Florida Administrative Code, 62- 600.410, "Operation and Maintenance of Domestic Wastewater Facilities." 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Data shall be prepared by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintaining and operating the described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Neatly word - processed table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order, to include the following: 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, fax number, and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 • • 3. A list with each product, name, address, fax number, and telephone number of the following: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. A list of each product to be included, indexed to content of the volume. c. Identify area of responsibility of each subcontractor or installer, if more than one. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. e. Manufacturer. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in the Contract Documents. B. Product Data 1. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to achieve the following: a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable information. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. C. Drawings 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate the following clearly: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams. c. Owner Tag Numbers. d. Flow directions in all channels and conduits. 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Record Documents to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings. D. Written text as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 2. Provide a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. 3. Describe how the complete system is to operate. E. Copy of pertinent information related to warranty, bond, and service Contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following information: a. Proper procedures in event of failure. b. Instances that might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. F. Training manuals used in training courses will become part of this Manual. 1.11 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Content, for architectural products, applied materials, and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog number, size, composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for re- ordering special - manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. B. Content, for moisture- protected and weather - exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 • C. Additional requirements for maintenance data as required by other sections of the Specifications. 1.12 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication system, as appropriate: 1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of the control or instrument. 2. A description of the system and its component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for the system, the sub - system, and the component parts. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts. 3. Circuit directories of panel board: a. Electrical service. b. Controls. c. Communications. 4. As- installed color -coded wiring diagrams. 5. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes. a. An electrical schematic for each item. b. A chart listing the controls /instruments in a loop identifying the equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and serial number. 6. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. d. Emergency operating instructions. 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -7 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 7. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly. d. Alignment, adjustment, and checking. 8. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 9. A list of the original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 10. Other data as required under other sections of the Specifications. 11. Abnormal and emergency operations: a. Potential overloads. b. Procedures for equipment breakdown. c. Action to be taken in a power outage. d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct. e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards. 12. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of standard programming. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. d. Model number and name plate data for each piece of equipment. e. Assembly drawings. f. List of all special tools required to service equipment and/or systems including where the tools are stored. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break -in, routine, and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -8 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 • • • • d. Special operating instructions. e. Control settings and ranges. 3. Maintenance procedures: a. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required for each piece of equipment. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly. d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule: a. List of lubricants required. b. Period between lubrications. 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. (This is not to be a generalized catalog of the entire product line.) 6. Description of sequence of operation. 7. The original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance: a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As- installed control diagrams. 9. Each Contractor's coordination drawings. 10. List of the original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 11. Other data as required under pertinent sections of the Specifications. 12. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location and function: a. Reference drawing which shows equipment, instrument, or valve location. b. Manufacturer's model and serial number. c. Valve actuator type (manual, hydraulic, electric, or pneumatic). 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 13. Local services (process water and air, drains, HVAC, natural gas and steam). C. The Contractor shall prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of the Owner's personnel. D. Additional requirements for O &M data required by other sections of the Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 O &M MANUALS A. Binders: The manuals shall be supplied in binders that are the same as those provided in Paragraph 1.03D above. B. Electronic Version: Word - processed portions of the manuals shall also be provided on CDs. The electronic version manuals must be capable of being read, edited, and printed with Microsoft Word or Owner- approved file format at the time of the transmittal of documents. The format will be provided to the Contractor upon request. All drawings shall be generated using personal computer and plotter with the software package program from AutoCAD. PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 01830 -10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS December 2013 • • • • DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION • • SECTION 02220 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and demolish, modify, remove, and dispose of work shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. The work includes but is not limited to demolishing, modifying, and removing existing materials, equipment, or work necessary to install the new work as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section and to connect with existing work in an approved manner. C. Demolition, modifications, and removals which may be specified under other Sections shall conform to requirements of this Section. D. Demolition and modifications include: 1. Removal and disposal of existing screw pumps and motors, sluice gates, valves, concrete supports, pads, piping, electrical equipment, and miscellaneous items as shown on the Drawings. 2. Off-site disposal of excess and unacceptable materials. E. Blasting and the use of explosives will not be permitted for any demolition work. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01100, Summary of Work. B. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. C. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Submit to the Engineer six copies of proposed methods and operations of demolition of the structures and modifications before beginning work. Include in 03720 - 045 -01 02220 -1 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS December 2013 the schedule the coordination of shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility service as required. B. Furnish a detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to ensure the uninterrupted progress of the Owner's operations. The sequence shall be compatible with sequence of construction and shutdown coordination requirements. C. Before beginning demolition work, the Contractor shall complete all modifications necessary to bypass the affected structure. Actual work shall not begin until the Engineer has observed and approved the modifications and authorized beginning the demolition work in writing. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) 1.13 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection 1. The Contractor shall conduct the demolition and removal work to prevent damage or injury to structures, equipment, piping, instrumentation, 03720 - 045 -01 02220 -2 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS December 2013 • • conduit, light fixtures, etc., and occupants of the structures and to adjacent features which might result from falling debris or other causes, and so as not to interfere with the use and free and safe passage to and from adjacent structures. B. Scheduling 1. Carry out operations so as to avoid interference with operations and work in the existing facilities. C. Notification 1. At least 48 hours before beginning demolition or removal, notify the Engineer in writing of the proposed schedule of the demolition or removal. The Owner shall inspect the existing equipment and identify and mark those items which are to remain the property of the Owner. No removals shall be started without the permission of the Engineer. D. Conditions of Structures 1. The Owner and the Engineer assume no responsibility for the actual condition of the structures to be demolished or modified. 2. Conditions existing at the time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by the Owner insofar as practicable. However, variations within a structure may occur before the start of demolition work. E. Repairs to Damage 1. The Contractor shall promptly repair damage caused to adjacent facilities by demolition operation when directed by the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. Repairs shall be made to a condition at least equal to that which existed before construction. F. Traffic Access 1. The Contractor shall conduct demolition and modification operations and remove equipment and debris to ensure minimum interference with roads onsite and to ensure minimum interference with occupied or used facilities. 2. Special attention is directed towards maintaining safe and convenient access to the existing facilities by plant personnel and plant associated vehicles. 03720 - 045 -01 02220 -3 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS December 2013 • 1.14 RULES AND REGULATIONS A. The Florida Building Code or the City shall control the demolition, modification or alteration of the existing buildings or structures. B. No building or structure or any part thereof shall be demolished until an application has been filed with the Building Inspector and a permit issued. The fee for this permit shall be the Contractor's responsibility. 1.15 DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. Salvageable material and equipment shall become the property of the Owner. The Contractor shall dismantle all such items to a size that can be readily handled and deliver them to a designated storage area. B. All other material and items of equipment shall become the Contractor's property and must be removed from the site. C. Storing or selling removed items on the site will not be allowed. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment removed from existing work shall become the property of the Contractor, except for those which the Owner has identified and marked for his/her use. All materials and equipment marked by the Owner to remain shall be carefully removed so as not to be damaged and shall be cleaned and stored on or adjacent to the site in a protected place specified by the Engineer or loaded onto trucks provided by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall dispose of all demolition materials, equipment, debris, and all other items — except those marked by the Owner to remain —off the site and in conformance with all existing applicable laws and regulations. C. Pollution Controls 1. Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the 03720 - 045 -01 02220 -4 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS December 2013 • lowest practical level. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. a. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, and pollution. b. Clean adjacent structures, facilities, and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to conditions existing before starting the work. 3.02 STRUCTURAL REMOVALS A. The Contractor shall remove structures to the lines and grades shown unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. B. All demolition debris shall be removed and taken from the site, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. C. After parts or all of slabs and like work which tie into new work or existing work are removed, the point of junction shall be neatly repaired so as to leave only finished edges and surface exposed. 3.03 DEMOLITION, REPLACEMENT, AND REPAIR A. Structural elements shall not be overstressed. The Contractor shall be responsible for shoring and/or bracing as required and indicated on the Drawings for adequate structural support as a result of work performed. 3.04 CLEAN -UP A. The Contractor shall remove from the site all debris resulting from the demolition operations as it accumulates. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all materials, equipment, waste, and debris of every sort and shall leave the premises clean, neat, and orderly. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 02220 -5 DEMOLITION AND MODIFICATIONS December 2013 • SECTION 02240 DEWATERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section covers the work necessary to complete the dewatering activities. All work in this Section shall be done in accordance with the requirements of the Environmental Resource Permit and Water Use Permit (if required) as issued by the Southwest Florida Water Management District (SWFWMD). B. Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control groundwater flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades. 1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades and permanent structures is prevented. 2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. 3. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed. C. The Contractor shall dewater so as to prevent damage to existing work. The Contractor shall repair or replace damage resulting from the dewatering activities promptly, remedy environmental damage as approved by the Engineer, and pay any and all fines levied to Contractor at no additional cost or time to the Owner. D. The Dewatering Plan shall be signed and sealed by the licensed professional engineer responsible for its preparation. E. The Contractor shall design the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining whatever investigations are necessary, before bidding, to design the dewatering system. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 02240 -1 DEWATERING 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Before construction, the Contractor shall obtain a dewatering permit from SWFWMD as required. At a minimum, the dewatering plan submitted with the dewatering application shall include the following: 1. Duration of dewatering for each area. 2. Number and size of pumps. 3. Method of dewatering each area. 4. Methods for routing /containing the discharge. 5. Methods of isolating dewatering areas. 6. Time dewatering structure will be in place. 7. Proposed discharge points. Five copies of the plan shall be submitted to the Engineer for record purposes only. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining if a Water Use Permit will be required. If a Water Use Permit is required. It is the Contractor's responsibility to obtain the required information from the Engineer and Owner to complete the Water Use Permit application to submit with the Dewatering Plan. If a Water Use Permit is required, the Contractor shall submit five copies of the application to the Owner/Engineer for submittal purposes only. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from any Non - Contaminated Site Activity as set forth in FDEP Rule 62- 621.300(2), FAC. The Contractor shall obtain the required permit form 62- 621.300(2) and the required information from the Engineer and Owner to complete the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from any Non - Contaminated Site Activity application to submit with the Dewatering Plan. The Contractor shall submit five copies of the application to the Owner /Engineer for submittal purposes only. D. Provide photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining properties, facilities, and other construction and site improvements that might be later misconstrued as damage caused by dewatering operations. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 02240 -2 DEWATERING • • • • • E. Submit Record Drawings at Project closeout identifying and locating utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, or mechanical items encountered during dewatering. 1. Note locations and capping depth of wells and well points. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre - installation Conference: Conduct conference at the Project site to present and discuss dewatering means, methods, and monitoring program. C. Identify a person who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the dewatering system being installed for this Project, the referenced standards, environmental and permit requirements, the requirements of this Work, and who shall direct all work performed under this section. D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the water levels before and during the dewatering work. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the dewatering system being installed, the referenced standards, the 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 02240 -3 DEWATERING requirements of this Work, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the water level before beginning excavation and construction. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) 1.13 PRE -BID INSPECTION AND TESTING A. The Contractor is advised that site soil borings may indicate groundwater levels below the levels which may occur in response to normal, seasonal, extreme, or prolonged rainfall. The Contractor is further advised that site soil borings may not necessarily represent soil conditions to be encountered elsewhere on the job site, other than at the specific boring locations. B. Before bidding, the Contractor shall perform a detailed site inspection and, if desired, obtain the Owner's permission to perform site - specific testing as he deems necessary to obtain all required information relative to project dewatering requirements. C. The Contractor shall include as part of his Bid the total cost of all surface and subsurface dewatering as required to construct the Project in complete compliance with the Drawings and these Specifications. 1.14 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless approved by the Owner and Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. B. A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from these data. 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 1. The geotechnical report is included in an Appendix section of these specifications. 02240 -4 DEWATERING • • • 2. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for dewatering. C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a professional land surveyor licensed in Florida to establish exact elevations at fixed points to monitor settlement. Clearly identify monitoring points and reference vertical datum, and benchmarks. Monitor and record existing initial elevations. 1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify the Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction and existing structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEWATERING SYSTEM A. The dewatering system shall be adequate to drain the soils to be excavated to the extent that the piezometric water level in the construction area is a minimum of 2 feet below the bottom of the excavation, side slopes of excavations, or bottom of the footings at all times, or as otherwise required to obtain the specified compaction and installation conditions. Pipeline trenches must be dewatered at least 6 inches below the trench bottom. B. If layered soils are encountered, the hydrostatic head in the zone below the subgrade elevation shall be relieved to prevent uplift. C. Unless otherwise noted and before any excavating below or within 2 feet above the groundwater level, a dewatering system shall be placed into operation to lower water levels to the extent specified previously and then shall be operated continuously 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, throughout the excavation to maintain and protect all work until the work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. Where used, well points shall be installed in an Engineer- approved manner and in sufficient numbers to provide the necessary removal of water as stated previously. Well points and header piping shall be installed so that traffic on public thoroughfares and site access roads will not be impeded. • E. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the arrangement, location, and depths of the dewatering system necessary to accomplish the specified work. The 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 02240 -5 DEWATERING dewatering system shall stay in full operation until not less than 90% of the total building load is applied, as will be determined by the Engineer, or until excavations and trenches have been backfilled and compacted. F. To prevent excessive noise, exhaust from all pumps and engines shall be silenced and muffled. G. Wellpoint or surface water pump discharge shall be controlled to prevent erosion, undermining, and all other damage and be piped to approved locations. H. With the Engineer's assistance, the Contractor is responsible for determining what approvals and permits are required to comply with any and all applicable regulations and permitting requirements relating to dewatering activities. With the Engineer's assistance the Contractor shall obtain all necessary approvals and permits and comply with any and all applicable regulations and permitting requirements concerning all dewatering activities, including pumpage and discharge. The Contactor is solely responsible for all costs associated with the proper implementation of dewatering activities. I. The Contractor shall perform all dewatering work in strict compliance with Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures, and the Contract Drawings. J. Excavations shall be kept free from water during the placing of concrete and for 36 hours after or until concrete forms are removed. K. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by dewatering operations. 1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or groundwater from entering excavations, ponding on prepared subgrades, or flooding the site and surrounding area. 2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation. L. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from the Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 02240 -6 DEWATERING • • • M. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water - bearing strata above and below the bottom of foundations. If excavating through layered soils, relieve any potential groundwater hydrostatic head in the zones below to prevent uplift. 1. Open -sump pumping which leads to loss of fines, subgrade softening, and slope instability shall not be permitted. N. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner that avoids flooding or accumulation on private property. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow - control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.02 OBSERVATION WELLS A. The Contractor shall install observation wells as may be required to record accurate water levels. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all observation wells and observing and recording the elevation of the piezometric water levels daily. C. Wells damaged or destroyed shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.03 CLEANUP A. Upon completing dewatering elsewhere on the Project, the Contractor shall remove all equipment and leave the project site in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition satisfactory to the Owner. Wellpoint holes and excavations shall be adequately backfilled and compacted to prevent settlement. 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 02240 -7 DEWATERING • • • SECTION 02305 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment, labor, and work necessary to completely construct the project in accordance with the Contract Documents. This work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Excavating and removing unsatisfactory materials. 2. Preparing trench foundations. 3. Providing satisfactory material for all trenches as specified and as required. 4. Obtaining, storing, maintaining, and disposing of materials. 5. Dewatering, shoring, and sheeting. 6. Placing, compacting, testing, final grading, and demolishing subgrade. 7. Performing all other work required by the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor is responsible for performing all work so as not to damage existing roadways, facilities, utilities, structures, etc., and shall repair and replace such damage to equal or better than its original undamaged condition without cost to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall examine the site before submitting a bid, taking into consideration all conditions that may affect the work. D. The Contractor shall coordinate all additional subsurface investigations and testing included with this work with the Engineer before performing the excavation and foundation preparation work. In general, if the Contractor finds different and unsuitable /unsatisfactory soil conditions during the work, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the Owner immediately. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01350, Environmental Protection Procedures. B. Section 02240, Dewatering. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -1 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated: 1. Classification according to ASTM D2487 of each onsite and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D1557 for each onsite and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. B. The Contractor shall submit records before the start of this work. The Contractor shall verify that the existing conditions are correct as shown on the plans and mentioned in these Specifications. The Contractor shall note any discrepancies found immediately and notify the Owner and Engineer. The records shall include the following: 1. Location of all existing underground utilities, structures, etc. surrounding the areas to be excavated that may be impacted by the work. 2. Location of test excavations. 3. Location of inspections. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply: A. OSHA Excavation Safety Standards, 29 CFR 1926, Subpart P B. Florida Trench Safety Act (90 -96, Laws of Florida) C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D1556— Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. 2. ASTM D1557— Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- lbf /ft3 (2,700 kN- m/m3)). 03720- 045 -01 02305 -2 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • • 3. ASTM D2937— Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Drive - Cylinder Method. 4. ASTM D2487— Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 5. ASTM D3282— Standard Practice for Classification of Soils and Soil - Aggregate Mixtures for Highway Construction Purposes. 6. ASTM D3740— Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used In Engineering Design and Construction. 7. ASTM D6938— Standard Test Method for In -Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil- Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 8. ASTM E329— Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction Inspection and/or Testing. D. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) 1. AWPA C1 All Timber Products — Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. 2. AWPA C3 —Piles – Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E329 to conduct soil materials and definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D3740. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Ensure that excavations provide adequate working space and clearance for the work to be performed and for installing piping and buried utilities. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut. 2. Ensure that foundation surfaces are clean and free of loose material of any kind when pipelines and buried utilities are placed on them. 3. Excavate, trench, and backfill in compliance with applicable requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Ensure that shoring and sheeting for excavations are designed by a Florida- registered Professional Engineer and are in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Document 2226, Safe Working Practices — Excavating and Trenching. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -3 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 5. Before beginning any excavation or grading, ensure the accuracy of all survey data indicated on the Contract Drawings and in these Specifications and/or as provided. If the Contractor discovers any inaccuracies, errors, or omissions in the survey data, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner so that proper adjustments can be anticipated or ordered. If the Contractor begins any excavation or grading, this shall be considered an acceptance of the survey data by the Contractor, after which time the Contractor has no claim against the Owner resulting from alleged errors, omissions, or inaccuracies of the survey data. 6. Ensure that tolerances for excavation are ±0.10 foot to the required line and to the required grade. Tolerance for compaction of in -place material shall be ±0.10 foot to the required grade. 7. Ensure that all trench materials derived from the project site and imported to this site are examined, tested, and classified by an Engineer- approved soils testing laboratory. 8. Remove unsatisfactory materials and unsuitable materials including muck, silts, peat, and other loose and very loose compressible soils from excavations before placing pipe foundation, bedding, and buried utilities. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: The Contractor shall not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted to do so in writing by the Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to the requirements indicated. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -4 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • • 1. Notify the Engineer not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without the Engineer's written permission. 3. Contact utility- locator service and obtain utility locations for the Project Area before excavating. B. The Contractor shall demolish and completely remove from the site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active. 1.11 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low- strength material used to fill an excavation. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. III2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. B. Base Course: The course placed between the subbase course and hot -mix asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: The course placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off -site for use as fill or backfill. E. Drainage Course: The course supporting the slab -on -grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated. 1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by the Engineer. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to the Contract provisions for unit prices. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 03720 -045 -01 02305 -5 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be without additional compensation. G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades. H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man -made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface. I. Subgrade: The surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. J. Utilities: On -site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. 1.12 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall furnish a soil survey for satisfactory material and samples of materials. B. Testing for source material, for classification, and for prequalification of material (on or off site) shall be performed by an independent testing agency retained by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. C. Testing for in -place compacted fill shall be performed by the same independent testing agency as approved by the Engineer and retained by the Contractor. D. The number and location of the tests shall be as specified in these Specifications and as directed by the Engineer during construction. E. The Contractor shall coordinate activity with the Engineer and the testing agency to permit testing as directed in the presence of the Engineer. F. The cost of all testing to achieve specified requirements shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner for passing field tests. G. The costs of any and all retests due to failure to achieve specified requirements shall be solely borne by the Contractor and are not reimbursable under this contract. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -6 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • • H. All materials proposed for use shall be tested as follows: Material Required Test Min. No. Tests Satisfactory Soil Materials Soil Classification using ASTM D2487 (including all tests contained therein) _ One per source of materials to determine conformance with materials specified in these Specifications; additional tests whenever there is any apparent change. Soil moisture- density relationship using Modified Proctor ASTM D1557 One per source of material or apparent change in material. I. Soil materials shall be tested during construction as follows: Material Required Test Min. No. Tests Satisfactory Field Density For each layer of trench bottom subgrade Soil Material in -place after ASTM D1556 -Sand Cone Method, or before addition of soil materials, refill, bedding, and backfill, and for each 400 lineal compaction ASTM D6938- Nuclear feet of trench or fraction thereof, whichever is Density Method, or ASTM D2937 -Drive greater; two tests for each drainage, manhole, or wet well structure; additional test whenever Cylinder Method there is any change in native soil, groundwater, or soil moisture conditions. J. The approved testing agency shall transmit copies of required laboratory test results as follows: 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. Two copies to the Engineer. 3. Two copies to the Contractor. The laboratory test reports shall include, at a minimum, project title; project location; location of sample; source, time, and date of testing; testing agency's name, address, and telephone number; and test results. Each test report shall be signed and sealed by the Professional Engineer representing the testing agency as specified in these Specifications. K. The approved testing agency shall transmit copies of field testing results as follows: 1. One copy to the Owner. 2. Two copies to the Engineer. 3. Two copies to the Contractor. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -7 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 The field test reports shall include, at a minimum, project title; project location; location of sample(s) tested; time of testing; date of testing; testing person's full name; testing agency name, address, and telephone number; and test results. L. No soil material shall be used until 1) the Engineer has reviewed and approved test reports and 2) the Contractor submits certification that the soil material proposed for construction is clean and meets gradation and other parameters specified in these Specifications. M. At no cost to the Owner, the Contractor shall remove and replace or correct all materials and work which tests indicate do not conform, in the opinion of the Engineer, to the requirements of these Specifications. N. The results of in -place density tests shall be considered satisfactory if the density in each instance is equal to or greater than the specified density. Soil moisture content at the time of testing shall conform to requirements of these Specifications. O. Where the tests reveal unsatisfactory compaction, the Contractor shall re- excavate, backfill, recompact, and/or rework the backfill as required to obtain the required degree of compaction over the entire depth of the excavation. P. The testing agency shall transmit to the Engineer copies of all testing agency invoices submitted to the Contractor for payment. Invoices shall clearly indicate specific services and date and time services are rendered and shall indicate if the invoiced testing cost is an initial test of the Contractor's work or is a re -test required due to the Contractor's failure to initially achieve the specified requirements. 1.13 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL MATERIALS A. Materials used for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and crossbraces, shall be in good serviceable condition. Any timber used shall be sound and free from large or loose knots. B. Pressure - treated timber shall be used where wood sheeting or piling is specified or indicated to be cut and left in place. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -8 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • • • • 2.02 TRENCH SOIL MATERIALS A. Materials used for trench construction shall be free of clumps of clay, rock or gravel, debris, waste, frozen materials, and other deleterious matter as determined by the Engineer and shall be satisfactory soil materials as follows: Area Classification In excavations and trenches Soil Materials Excavated and borrow material that has been sampled, tested, and approved as "Satisfactory Soil Material." B. Satisfactory Soil Materials 1. Soil Classification Groups Satisfactory soil materials for each trench shall be as follows: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 Satisfactory Soil Material (ASTM D3282, Soil Classification Bedding, Haunching, and Initial Backfill Groups) Final Backfill In -situ Foundation SW SP SW SP SW SP 2. Maximum Particle Size Limitations for Satisfactory Soil Materials The maximum allowable particle size for satisfactory soil materials within each trench for each type of utility shall be as follows: Conduit Maximum Allowable Particle Size In -situ Foundation Bedding, Haunching, and Initial Backfill Final Backfill Plastic Pipe (PVC, CPVC, HDPE, etc.) less than 6- inch - diameter See Note 1 1/2 inch 3 inches Plastic Pipe (PVC, CPVC, HDPE, etc.) 6- inch - diameter and Larger See Note 1 3/4 inch 3 inches Concrete Pipe Steel Pipe Ductile Iron Pipe Fiberglass Pipe See Note 1 3/4 inch or three times the wall thickness, whichever is less 3 inches Other Conduit Materials See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 2 (1) There is no requirement when satisfactory undisturbed native soil material is used. Disturbed portions of the foundation and/or unsatisfactory native soil material shall be replaced with satisfactory soil materials meeting all the requirements for Bedding. (2) The maximum allowable particle size shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendation. 02305 -9 EARTHWORK FOR UTILr11mS 3. Additional Requirements of Satisfactory Materials Satisfactory soil materials shall be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, or other deleterious matter. Soils within 4 inches of the exterior surface of the pipe shall be free of gravel, stones, or other materials which may abrade the pipe surface. C. Unsatisfactory Materials Unsatisfactory soil materials shall mean ASTM D2487, Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT and other highly organic soils and soil materials of any classification that have a moisture content at the time of compaction beyond the range of 1 percentage point below and 3 percentage points above the optimum moisture content of the soil material as determined by moisture - density relations test. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall do the following: A. Carefully verify by hand methods the location of all surrounding underground utilities before performing utility excavations and trenches. B. Protect utilities to be left in place from damage. C. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and used by the Owner, except when permitted in writing by the Owner. D. Protect bench marks, survey points, and existing structures, roads, sidewalks, monitoring wells, paving, curbs, etc. against damage from equipment, vehicular or foot traffic, settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and all construction- related activities. E. Repair and replace damage to existing facilities to equal or better than their original undamaged condition without cost to the Owner and to the approval of the Engineer. F. Excavate and trench in ways that will prevent surface water and subsurface water from flowing into excavations and will also prevent flooding of the site and surrounding area. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -10 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • • • • G. Protect excavations and trenching by shoring, bracing, sheet piling, underpinning, or other methods as required to prevent cave -ins or loose dirt from falling into excavations and trenches. H. Do not operate earth- moving equipment within 5 feet of walls of concrete structures for depositing or compacting backfill material. I. Compact the backfill material placed next to concrete walls with hand - operated tampers or similar equipment that will not damage the structure. J. Excavate, fill, backfill, and grade to elevations required by the Contract Documents. K. Pile excavated materials suitable for backfill in an orderly manner a sufficient distance from excavations to prevent overloading, slides, and cave -ins. L. Do not obstruct access ways, roadways, and plant facilities. M. Dewater excavations and trenches in accordance with Section 02240, Dewatering. N. Refer to the Contract Drawings for additional requirements related to earthwork • and protection of existing features. 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Before excavating the trench, the Contractor shall prepare the surface including clearing and grubbing as specified in Article 38 of the City of Clearwater Standard Technical Specifications. B. The Contractor shall be required to fully comply with all applicable OSHA Excavation Safety Standards and to abide by them as covered by the most current version of the Florida Trench Safety Act (90 -96, Laws of Florida). C. The Contractor shall ensure that mechanical equipment used for trench excavation shall be of a type, design, and construction and shall be so operated that conduit/utility, when accurately laid to specified alignment, will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the conduit/utility and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance will not be permitted. D. The Contractor shall not use mechanical equipment in locations where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, other existing property, utilities, structures, etc. above or below ground. In all such locations, the Contractor shall use hand excavating methods. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -11 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 E. The Contractor shall not use blasting. F. The Contractor shall cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable proper installation of services and to allow for testing and inspection. The Contractor shall also trim and shape trench bottoms and leave them free of irregularities, lumps, and projections. Trench width shall be excavated as specified on the Contract Drawings. G. The Contractor shall construct trench walls so as to avoid side wall collapse or sloughing. Trenches shall be either braced or open construction in accordance with the Contract Documents. No separate payment will be made for any special procedure used in connection with the excavation. H. Where sheeting and bracing are not required, the Contractor shall construct trench walls in the bottom of the excavation as vertical as possible to the maximum height allowable by OSHA. Trench walls above this height shall be sloped to guard against side wall collapse or sloughing as specified on the Contract Drawings. I. Where sheeting and bracing are required, the sheeting and bracing system shall meet the requirements in these Specifications. J. Excavations shall be to the design elevations shown on the Contract Drawings or as specified, unless unsatisfactory or unsuitable foundation materials are encountered in the bottom of the excavation. Where unsatisfactory or unsuitable foundation materials are encountered, this material shall be undercut and removed as indicated on the Contract Drawings and replaced with satisfactory soil material meeting all the requirements for Bedding. The lift thicknesses and compaction requirements for the replacement soil shall also meet the requirements for Bedding. K. The Contractor shall be careful not to overexcavate except where necessary to remove unsatisfactory or unsuitable materials, irregularities, lumps, rock, and projections. Unnecessary overexcavation shall be replaced as specified in these Specifications at the Contractor's sole expense. L. The Contractor shall accurately grade bedding soil materials at the bottoms of the trenches to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of conduit/utility at every point along its entire length except where it is necessary to excavate the bedding for conduit/utility bells (e.g., pipe bells), etc. or for proper sealing of conduit/utility joints. Abrupt changes in grade of the trench bottom shall be avoided. 03720- 045 -01 02305 -12 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • M. The Contractor shall dig bell holes and depressions after the bedding has been graded to ensure that the conduit/utility rests on the prepared bedding for as much of its full length as practicable. Bell holes and depressions shall be only of such length, depth, and width as required to make the joint. N. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Pile all excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work or erode the stormwater management facilities or water courses. 2. Avoid obstructing sidewalks, driveways, and plant facilities. 3. Leave hydrants, valve pit covers, valve boxes, or other utility controls unobstructed and accessible. 4. Keep gutters, drainage inlets, natural water courses, and miscellaneous drainage structures clear or make other satisfactory provisions for their proper operation. 0. The Contractor shall keep all satisfactory materials that are suitable for use /reuse in the trench construction separated from unsatisfactory materials. P. Except where otherwise authorized, indicated, or specified, the Contractor shall replace, at the Contractor's own expense, all materials excavated below the bottom of concrete walls, footings, slabs on grade, and foundations with concrete or flowable fill, as directed by the Engineer. Q. The Contractor shall adhere to these Additional Excavation Requirements for piping: 1. Excavate trenches so that the piping can be laid to the lines, grades, and elevations indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. For piping designated to be laid to a minimum cover requirement, grade trenches to avoid high and low points to the extent practical. Record Drawings of such pipes shall present top -of -pipe and grade elevations at all high and low points along each pipe segment, at the end points of each pipe segments, and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet along each pipe segment. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, additional air release and/or vacuum relief valves are required, the Contractor shall install the additional items as directed by the Engineer. 03720- 045 -01 02305 -13 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 3. Except at locations specifically indicated otherwise on the Contract Drawings, the required minimum cover over the top of the pipe from finished grade for various pipe diameters shall be as follows: Continue dewatering operations along each pipe segment until the required minimum cover is provided. During the dewatering operations, the ground water level in the trench shall remain at all times a minimum of 1 foot below bottom of trench excavations. R. The Contractor shall adhere to these Additional Excavation Requirements for Electrical Utilities: 1. Avoid abrupt changes in grade of the trench bottom. 2. The required minimum cover over the top of electrical conduits from finished grade shall be as follows: Pipe Diameter 48 inch or less 66 inch 72 inch 96 inch Minimum Cover 3 feet 4 feet 4.5 feet 5 feet Continue dewatering operations along each pipe segment until the required minimum cover is provided. During the dewatering operations, the ground water level in the trench shall remain at all times a minimum of 1 foot below bottom of trench excavations. R. The Contractor shall adhere to these Additional Excavation Requirements for Electrical Utilities: 1. Avoid abrupt changes in grade of the trench bottom. 2. The required minimum cover over the top of electrical conduits from finished grade shall be as follows: 3. The required minimum clearance from the bottom of mat foundations and/or footings shall be 2 feet. Provide additional cover where necessary to satisfy the minimum clearance requirement. 4. Provide additional cover depth if necessary to avoid interference of other cables, ducts, piping, structures, and other utilities. S. The Contractor shall adhere to this Additional Excavation Requirement for Appurtenances: 1. Ensure that excavations for valves and similar appurtenances shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and the embankment or timber used to hold and protect the walls. 3.03 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Barricade and post excavations with warning signs for the safety of persons. Provide warning lights during hours of darkness. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -14 EARTHWORK FOR UTILI I IBS December 2013 • Electrical Conduits (Lines less than 5 kV) Electrical Conduits (Lines 5 kV and up) Minimum Cover 2 feet 3 feet 3. The required minimum clearance from the bottom of mat foundations and/or footings shall be 2 feet. Provide additional cover where necessary to satisfy the minimum clearance requirement. 4. Provide additional cover depth if necessary to avoid interference of other cables, ducts, piping, structures, and other utilities. S. The Contractor shall adhere to this Additional Excavation Requirement for Appurtenances: 1. Ensure that excavations for valves and similar appurtenances shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between the outer surfaces and the embankment or timber used to hold and protect the walls. 3.03 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Barricade and post excavations with warning signs for the safety of persons. Provide warning lights during hours of darkness. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -14 EARTHWORK FOR UTILI I IBS December 2013 • • 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities immediately adjacent to excavations against damage including loading, settlement, lateral movement, undermining, and washout. B. Conduct topsoil removal operations to ensure the safety of persons and to prevent damage to existing structures and utilities, construction in progress, trees and vegetation to remain standing, and other property. 3.04 SHEETING AND BRACING A. Where sheeting and bracing are required to support the side walls of the excavation, the Contractor shall retain a Professional Engineer, registered in Florida, to design sheeting and bracing. The design shall establish requirements for sheeting and bracing and shall comply with all applicable codes; authorities having jurisdiction; and federal, state, and local regulations. B. The sole responsibility for the design, methods of installation, and adequacy of sheeting and bracing shall be and shall remain that of the Contractor and the Contractor's Professional Engineer. The Contractor shall provide all necessary sheeting and bracing or other procedures as required to ensure safe working conditions and to protect the excavations. C. Sheeting and bracing shall consist of braced steel sheet piling, trench box, braced wood lagging, and soldier beams or other approved methods. D. The Contractor shall immediately fill and compact voids formed outside the sheeting. Where soil cannot be properly compacted to fill the void, the Contractor shall use Class B concrete as backfill at no additional cost to the Owner. E. The Contractor shall install sheeting outside the required clearances and dimensions. Sheeting shall be plumb, securely braced, and tied in position. Sheeting shall be adequate to withstand all pressure to which it may be subjected. The Contractor shall correct any movement or bulging at no expense to the Owner so as to provide the necessary clearances and dimensions. F. The Contractor shall maintain sheeting and bracing in excavations and trenches for the entire time excavations will be open. G. The Contractor shall not brace sheeting against pipe being laid. Sheeting shall be braced so that no concentrated load of horizontal thrust is transmitted to the pipe. 03720- 045 -01 02305 -15 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 H. Sheeting shall not be withdrawn if driven below the spring line of any pipe. The Contractor shall cut off tops as indicated on the Contract Drawings and leave bottoms permanently in place. 3.05 DEWATERING, WATER REMOVAL, AND DRAINAGE MAINTENANCE A. Water shall not be permitted to accumulate in excavations. The Contractor shall provide dewatering systems to convey water away from excavations so that softening of foundations bottoms, footing undercutting, and soil changes detrimental to subgrade stability and foundation will not occur. Dewatering systems and methods of disposal shall be as specified in Section 02240, Dewatering, and as approved by the Engineer before being installed by the Contractor. Groundwater levels shall be maintained a minimum of 1 foot below bottom of trenches or excavations. B. Dewatering systems and equipment shall be in place as required to eliminate water during the excavation period until the work is completed. The Contractor shall provide ample means and equipment with which to remove promptly and dispose of properly all water entering any excavation. This includes the use of sand or gravel as required to maintain adequate flow during the pipe laying or installation of other items of work within the excavation. C. Water pumped or drained shall be disposed of in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent property, to other work under construction, or to roads. Water shall not be discharged onto surface improvements without adequate protection of the surface at the point of discharge. All gutter, drains, culverts, sewers, and inlets shall be kept clean and open for surface drainage. Water shall not be directed across or over pavements except through approved pipes or properly constructed troughs. The Contractor shall obtain permission from the Owner of any property involved before constructing water courses or installing discharge pipe or hose for removal of water and provide for disposal of the water without ponding or creating a public nuisance. D. All pumps used for dewatering shall have noise - reduction features and shall be able to run continuously with minimal attendance. If required by the Owner or Engineer, the pumps shall be enclosed on all sides with a plywood enclosure, with padded material suitable for outdoor conditions on the inside of the enclosure, to further reduce pump engine noise to an acceptable level. All applicable ordinances and codes for noise abatement shall be followed. The Contractor shall maintain pumps at all times, as necessary. When pumps are no longer required, the Contractor shall remove the pumps, wellpoints, pipes, and other apparatus from the area. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -16 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • • • E. It is essential that the discharge of the trench dewatering pumps be conducted to natural drainage channels, drains, or storm sewers. F. Trenches shall be constructed on the upstream side of the traffic way across roadways, driveways, or other traffic ways adjacent to drainage ditches or water to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid. The Contractor shall construct and maintain bridges and other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. After backfilling is completed, the Contractor shall immediately remove all material deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the line of trench and restore the original section, grades, and contours of ditches or water courses. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary. G. Where trenches are constructed in ditches or other water courses, backfill shall be protected from surface erosion. Where the grade of the ditch exceeds 1%, the Contractor shall install ditch checks. Unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings, ditch checks shall be concrete or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. Ditch checks shall extend not less than 2 feet below the original ditch or water course bottom for the full bottom width and at least 18 inches into the side slopes and shall be at least 12 inches thick. 3.06 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION A. The Contractor shall not backfill trenches until required tests are performed. B. Trenches improperly backfilled shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compaction, then refilled and compacted as specified, or the condition shall be otherwise corrected as directed. C. The Contractor shall perform the following steps to ensure compaction at the bottom of the trench or excavation before bedding: 1. Remove disturbed native soil material and/or any soils not meeting the requirement of satisfactory soil material as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Compact the bottom of the trench excavation (undisturbed native subsurface soil) to no less than 95% of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density in accordance with ASTM D1557, before placement of foundation, bedding, piping, and backfill. 03720 - 045 -01 02305 -17 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 D. To backfill below and around pipe to the spring line of the pipe, the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Construct foundation and bedding as indicated on the Contract Drawings before placement of pipe. 2. Install each pipe at proper grade, alignment, and final position. 3. Deposit satisfactory soil material uniformly and simultaneously on each side of pipe in completed course layers to prevent lateral displacement. 4. Compact under pipe haunches and on each side of pipe to the pipe spring line as shown on the Contract Drawings to hold the pipe in the proper position during subsequent pipe backfilling and compaction operations. 5. Construct haunching as indicated on the Contract Drawings. E. To trench backfill above pipe spring line to finished grade, the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Deposit satisfactory soil material around and above pipe in uniform layers as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2. Backfill and compact trenches from the spring line of the pipe to the top of the trench in completed course layers as shown on the Contract Drawings. 3. Use material previously defined in these Specifications as satisfactory soil material. 4. Compact by hand or mechanical tampers. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of waste materials, including excavated material classified as unsatisfactory soil material, trash, and debris from the property at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 03720- 045 -01 02305 -18 EARTHWORK FOR UTILITIES December 2013 • • • • DIVISION 3 CONCRETE • SECTION 03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to design, install, and remove formwork for cast -in -place concrete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. Secure to forms as required or set for embedment as required all miscellaneous metal items, sleeves, reglets, anchor bolts, inserts, and other items furnished under other Sections and required to be cast into concrete or approved in advance by the Engineer. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. B. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. C. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Form release agent. 2. Form ties. B. Samples 1. Demonstrate to the Engineer on a designated area of the concrete substructure exterior surface that the form release agent will not adversely affect concrete surfaces to be painted, coated, or otherwise finished and will not affect the forming materials. 2. Certify that the form release agent is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non -toxic and free of taste and odor). 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 03100 -1 CONCRETE FORMWORK December 2013 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301— Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 318— Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. 3. ACI 347 —Guide to Formwork for Concrete. B. American Plywood Association (APA) 1. Material grades and designations as specified C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) 1.12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Architectural Concrete is wall, slab, beam, or column concrete which will have surfaces exposed to view in the finished work. It includes similar exposed surfaces in water - containment structures from the top of walls to 2 feet below the normal water surface in open tanks and basins. B. Formwork shall be designed and erected in accordance with the requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 318 and as recommended in ACI 347 and shall comply with all applicable regulations and codes. The design shall consider any special requirements due to the use of plasticized and/or retarded set concrete. 03720 - 045 -01 03100 -2 CONCRETE FORMWORK December 2013 • • PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is to establish the standard of quality and general configurations desired. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Forms for cast -in -place concrete shall be made of wood, metal, or other approved material. Construct wood forms of sound lumber or plywood of suitable dimensions and free from knotholes and loose knots. Where used for exposed surfaces, dress and match boards. Sand plywood smooth and fit adjacent panels with tight joints. Metal forms may be used when approved by the Engineer and shall be of an appropriate type for the class of work involved. All forms shall be designed and constructed to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal finishing or repairs. B. Wall Forms 1. Forms for all exposed exterior and interior concrete walls shall be "Plyform" exterior -grade plywood panels manufactured in compliance with the APA and bearing the trademark of that group or an equal acceptable to the Engineer. Provide B grade or better veneer on all faces to be placed against concrete during forming. The class of material and grades of interior plies shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to provide a flat, uniform concrete surface requiring minimal finishing and grinding. 2. All joints or gaps in forms shall be taped, gasketed, plugged, and/or caulked with an approved material so that the joint will remain watertight and will withstand placing pressures without bulging or creating surface patterns. C. Rustication strips shall be at the location and shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings. Moldings for chamfers and rustications shall be milled and planed smooth. Rustications and corner strips shall be of a nonabsorbent material, compatible with the form surface, and fully sealed on all sides to prohibit the loss of paste or water between the two surfaces. 03720 - 045 -01 03100 -3 CONCRETE FORMWORK December 2013 D. Column Forms 1. Rectangular columns shall be formed as specified for wall forms. All corners shall have a 3/4 -inch chamfer unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. E. Form Release Agent 1. Coat all forming surfaces in contact with concrete using an effective, non- staining, non - residual, water - based, bond - breaking form coating unless otherwise noted. Form release agents used in potable water containment structures shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water and shall be non toxic and free of taste or odor. F. Form Ties 1. Form ties encased in concrete other than those specified in the following paragraphs shall be designed so that after removal of the projecting part no metal shall remain within 1 -1/2 inches of the face of the concrete. The part of the tie to be removed shall be at least 1/2 inch diameter or be provided with a wood or metal cone at least 1/2 inch diameter and 1 -1/2 inches long. Form ties in concrete exposed to view shall be the cone washer type. 2. Form ties for exposed exterior and interior walls shall be as specified in the preceding paragraph except that the cones shall be of approved wood or plastic. 3. Flat bar ties for panel forms, if used, shall have plastic or rubber inserts having a minimum depth of 1 -1/2 inches and sufficient dimensions to permit proper patching of the tie hole. 4. Ties for liquid containment structures shall have an integral waterstop that is tightly welded to the tie. 5. Common wire shall not be used for form ties. 6. Alternate form ties consisting of tapered through bolts at least 1 -inch- diameter at the smallest end or through bolts that use a removable tapered sleeve of the same minimum size may be used at the Contractor's option. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance of the system and spacing of ties before ordering or purchase forming. Clean, fill, and seal the form tie hole with non - shrink cement grout. The Contractor shall be responsible for watertightness of the form ties and any repairs needed. 03720- 045 -01 03100 -4 CONCRETE FORMWORK December 2013 • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Forms shall be used for all cast -in -place concrete, including sides of footings. Forms shall be constructed and placed so that the resulting concrete will be of the shape, lines, dimensions, and appearance indicated on the Drawings. B. Forms for walls shall have removable panels at the bottom for cleaning, inspection, and joint surface preparation. Forms for walls of considerable height shall have closable intermediate inspection ports. Tremies and hoppers for placing concrete shall be used to allow concrete inspection, prevent segregation, and prevent the accumulation of hardened concrete on the forms above the fresh concrete. C. Molding, bevels, or other types of chamfer strips shall be placed to produce blockouts, rustications, or chamfers as shown on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. Chamfer strips shall be provided at horizontal and vertical projecting corners to produce a 3/4 -inch chamfer. Rectangular or trapezoidal moldings shall be placed in locations requiring sealants where specified or shown on the Drawings. Sizes of moldings shall conform to the sealant manufacturer's recommendations. D. Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand construction loads and vibration and to prevent displacement or sagging between supports. Construct forms so that the concrete will not be damaged by their removal. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the adequacy of the forming system. E. Before form material is reused, all surfaces to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, all damaged places repaired, all projecting nails withdrawn, and all protrusions smoothed. Reuse of wooden forms for other than rough finish will be permitted only if a "like new" condition of the form is maintained. 3.02 FORM TOLERANCES A. Forms shall be surfaced, designed, and constructed in accordance with the recommendations of ACI 347 and shall meet the following additional requirements for the specified finishes: 1. Formed Surface Exposed to View: Edges of all form panels in contact with concrete shall be flush within 1/16 inch and forms for plane surfaces shall be such that the concrete will be planed within 3/16 inch in 4 feet. Forms shall be tight to prevent the passage of mortar, water, and grout. The maximum deviation of the finish wall surface at any point shall not 03720- 045 -01 03100 -5 CONCRETE FORMWORK December 2013 exceed 1/4 inch from the intended surface as shown on the Drawings. Form panels shall be arranged symmetrically and in an orderly manner to minimize the number of seams. 2. Formed surfaces not exposed to view or buried shall meet requirements of Class "C" Surface in ACI 347. 3. Formed rough surfaces including mass concrete, pipe encasement, electrical duct encasement, and other similar installations shall have no minimum requirements for surface smoothness and surface deflections. The overall dimensions of the concrete shall be plus or minus 1 inch. 3.03 FORM PREPARATION A. Wood forms in contact with the concrete shall be coated with an effective release agent before the forms are installed. B. Steel forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and mill scale and other ferrous deposits shall be sandblasted or otherwise removed from the contact surface for all forms, except those used for surfaces receiving a rough finish. All forms shall have the contact surfaces coated with a release agent. 3.04 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from removing the forms. Forms and shoring for structural slabs or beams shall remain in place in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347. Form removal shall conform to the requirements specified in Section 03300 and a curing compound applied. 3.05 INSPECTION A. The Engineer on site shall be notified when the forms are complete and ready for inspection at least 6 hours before the proposed concrete placement. B. Failure of the forms to comply with the requirements specified in this Section or to produce concrete complying with requirements of this Section shall be grounds for rejection of that portion of the concrete work. Rejected work shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. Such repair or replacement shall be subject to the requirements of this Section and approval of the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 03100 -6 CONCRETE FORMWORK December 2013 • • SECTION 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install all concrete reinforcement complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. B. Furnish only all deformed steel reinforcement required to be entirely built into concrete masonry unit construction. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. C. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Reinforcing steel. Placement drawings shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 315. All reinforcement in a concrete placement shall be included on a single placement drawing or cross referenced to the pertinent main placement drawing. The main drawing shall include the additional reinforcement (around openings, at corners, etc) shown on the standard detail sheets. Bars to have special coatings and/or to be of special steel or special yield strength are to be clearly identified. 2. Bar bending details. The bars shall be referenced to the same identification marks shown on the placement drawings. 3. Schedule of all placements to contain synthetic reinforcing fibers. The amount of fibers per cubic yard to be used for each of the placements shall be noted on the schedule. The name of the manufacturer of the fibers and the product data shall be included with the submittal. 03720 - 045 -01 03200 -1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 B. Submit Test Reports, in accordance with Section 01330, of each of the following items: 1. Certified copy of mill test on each steel proposed for use showing the physical properties of the steel and the chemical analysis. 2. Welder's certification. The certification shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4 when welding of reinforcement is required. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 ASTM A82— Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A184— Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A185— Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. ASTM A496— Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A497— Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. ASTM A615— Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon - Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A704— Standard Specification for Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A706— Standard Specification for Low -Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A767— Standard Specification for Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. ASTM A775— Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars ASTM A884— Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement. 03200 -2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT • • 12. ASTM A934— Standard Specification for Epoxy- Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 13. ASTM A996— Standard Specification for Rail -Steel and Axle -Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 301— Specifications for Structural Concrete. 2. ACI 315— Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ACI 318— Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 4. ACI SP 66—ACI Detailing Manual. C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 1. Manual of Standard Practice. D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.4— Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. 11111 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide services of a manufacturer's representative, with at least 2 years experience in the use of the reinforcing fibers for a preconstruction meeting and assistance during the first placement of the material. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Reinforcing steel shall be substantially free from mill scale, rust, dirt, grease, or other foreign matter. C. Reinforcing steel shall be shipped and stored with bars of the same size and shape fastened in bundles with durable tags, marked in a legible manner with waterproof 03720 - 045 -01 03200 -3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 markings showing the same "mark" designations as those shown on the submitted Placing Drawings. D. Reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground and kept free from dirt, oil, or other injurious contaminants. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be new, of domestic manufacture, and shall comply with the following material specifications. B. Deformed Concrete Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 deformed bars. C. Concrete Reinforcing Bars required on the Drawings to be Welded: ASTM A706. D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. Provide in flat sheets. E. Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A497. F. Welded Plain Bar Mats: ASTM A704 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 plain bars. G. Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats: ASTM A184 and ASTM A615 Grade 60 deformed bars. H. The following alternate materials are allowed: 1. ASTM A615 Grade 60 may be used for ASTM A706 provided the following requirements are satisfied: a. The actual yield strength of the reinforcing steel based on mill tests shall not exceed the specified yield strength by more than 18,000 psi. Retests shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3,000 psi. b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile strength to the actual tensile yield strength of the reinforcement shall not be less than 1.25. 03720 - 045 -01 03200 -4 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 • • c. The carbon equivalency (CE) of bars shall be 0.55 or less. Reinforcing Steel Accessories 1. Plastic Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 1 Maximum Protection. 2. Stainless Steel Protected Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Class 2 Moderate Protection. 3. Precast Concrete Block Bar Supports: CRSI Bar Support Specifications, Precast Blocks. Blocks shall have equal or greater strength than the surrounding concrete. 4. Steel Protected Bar Supports: #4 Steel Chairs with plastic or rubber tips. J. Tie Wire 1. Tie Wires for Reinforcement shall be 16 -gauge or heavier, black annealed wire, or stranded wire. K. Mechanical reinforcing steel butt splices shall be positive connecting taper threaded -type employing a hexagonal coupler such as Lenton rebar splices as manufactured by Erico Products Inc., Solon, OH or equal. They shall meet all ACI 318 Building Code requirements. Bar ends must be taper threaded with coupler manufacturer's bar threader to ensure proper taper and thread engagement. Bar couplers shall be torqued to the manufacturer's recommended value. 1. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, mechanical tension splices shall be designed to produce a splice strength in tension or compression of not less than 125% of the ASTM - specified minimum yield strength of the rebar. 2. Compression -type mechanical splices shall provide concentric bearing from one bar to the other bar and shall be capable of developing the ultimate strength of the rebar in compression. L. Fiber Reinforcement 1. Synthetic reinforcing fiber for concrete shall be 100% polypropylene collated, fibrillated fibers as manufactured by Fibermesh Company of Synthetic Industries Inc., Chattanooga, TN Fibermesh or equal. Fiber 03720- 045 -01 03200 -5 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 length and quantity for the concrete mix shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Engineer. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Bars shall be cold bent. Bars shall not be straightened or rebent. C. Bars shall be bent around a revolving collar having a diameter of not less than that recommended by the ACI 318. D. Bar ends that are to be butt spliced, placed through limited diameter holes in metal, or threaded shall have the applicable end(s) saw cut. Such ends shall terminate in flat surfaces within 1' /2 of a right angle to the axis of the bar. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Surface condition, bending, spacing, and tolerances of placement of reinforcement shall comply with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for providing an adequate number of bars and maintaining the spacing and clearances shown on the Drawings. B. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, the minimum concrete cover of reinforcement shall be as follows: 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3 inches 2. Concrete exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge and/or weather: 2 inches (including bottom cover of slabs over water or sewage) 3. Concrete not exposed to soil, water, sewage, sludge, and/or weather: a. Slabs (top and bottom cover), walls, joists, shells, and folded plate members: 1 inch. b. Beams and columns (principal reinforcement, ties, spirals, and stirrups): 1-1/2 inches. C. Reinforcement which will be exposed for a considerable length of time after being placed shall be coated with a heavy coat of neat cement slurry. 03720 - 045 -01 03200 -6 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 • • D. No reinforcing steel bars shall be welded either during fabrication or erection unless specifically shown on the Drawings or specified in this Section or unless prior written approval has been obtained from the Engineer. All bars that have been welded, including tack welds, without such approval shall be immediately removed from the work. When welding of reinforcement is approved or called for, it shall comply with AWS D1.4. E. Reinforcing steel interfering with the location of other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items may be moved within the specified tolerances or one bar diameter, whichever is greater. Greater displacement of bars to avoid interference shall only be made with the approval of the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduits, mechanical openings, or other items without the prior approval of the Engineer. F. Securely support and tie reinforcing steel to prevent movement during concrete placement. Secure dowels in place before placing concrete. G. Reinforcing steel bars shall not be field bent except where shown on the Drawings or specifically authorized in writing by the Engineer. If authorized, bars shall be cold bent around the standard diameter spool specified in the CRSI. Do not heat bars. Closely inspect the reinforcing steel for breaks. If the reinforcing steel is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. 3.02 REINFORCEMENT AROUND OPENINGS A. Unless specific additional reinforcement around openings is shown on the Drawings, provide additional reinforcing steel on each side of the opening equivalent to one half of the cross sectional area of the reinforcing steel interrupted by an opening. The bars shall have sufficient length to develop bond at each end beyond the opening or penetration. 3.03 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT A. Splices designated as compression splices on the Drawings, unless otherwise noted, shall be 30 bar diameters but not less than 12 inches. The lap splice length for column vertical bars shall be based on the bar size in the column above. B. Tension lap splices shall be provided at all laps in compliance with ACI 318. Splices in adjacent bars shall be staggered. Class A splices may be used when 50% or less of the bars are spliced within the required lap length. Class B splices shall be used at all other locations. 03720 - 045 -01 03200 -7 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 C. Splicing of reinforcing steel in concrete elements noted to be "tension members" on the Drawings shall be avoided whenever possible. However, if required for constructability, splices in the reinforcement subject to direct tension shall be welded to develop, in tension, at least 125% of the specified yield strength of the bar. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset the distance of a Class B splice. D. Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Wire fabric from rolls shall be rolled flat and firmly held in place. Splices in welded -wire fabric shall be lapped in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318 but not less than 12 inches. The spliced fabrics shall be tied together with wire ties spaced not more than 24 inches on center and laced with wire of the same diameter as the welded wire fabric. Do not position laps midway between supporting beams or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset splices in adjacent widths to prevent continuous splices. E. Mechanical reinforcing steel splicers shall be used only where shown on the Drawings. Splices in adjacent bars shall be offset by at least 30 bar diameters. Mechanical reinforcing splices are only to be used for special splice and dowel conditions approved by the Engineer. 3.04 ACCESSORIES A. Determine, provide, and install accessories such as chairs, chair bars, and the like in sufficient quantities and strength to adequately support the reinforcement and prevent its displacement during the erection of the reinforcement and the placement of concrete. B. Use precast concrete blocks where the reinforcing steel is to be supported over soil. C. Stainless steel bar supports or steel chairs with stainless steel tips shall be used where the chairs are set on forms for a concrete surface that will be exposed to weather, high humidity, or liquid (including bottom of slabs over liquid containing areas). Use of galvanized or plastic- tipped metal chairs is permissible in all other locations unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or specified in this Section. D. Alternate methods of supporting top steel in slabs, such as steel channels supported on the bottom steel or vertical reinforcing steel fastened to the bottom and top mats, may be used if approved by the Engineer. 03720 - 045 -01 03200 -8 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 • • • • 3.05 INSPECTION A. In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the installation of the reinforcement, including the size, spacing, and position of the reinforcement has been observed by the Engineer and the Engineer's release to proceed with the concreting has been obtained. The Engineer shall be given ample prior notice of the readiness of placed reinforcement for observation. The forms shall be kept open until the Engineer has finished his/her observations of the reinforcing steel. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 03200 -9 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT December 2013 • SECTION 03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install accessories for concrete joints as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. D. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Standard waterstops: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, splicing methods, and conformity to ASTM standards. 2. Special waterstops: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, location of use, storage requirements, splicing methods, installation instructions, and conformity to ASTM standards. 3. Premolded joint fillers: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Bond breaker: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. Expansion joint dowels: Product data on the complete assembly, including dowels, coatings, lubricants, spacers, sleeves, expansion caps, installation requirements, and conformity to ASTM standards. 03720 - 045 -01 03250 -1 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES December 2013 6. Compressible joint filler: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use, and conformity to ASTM standards. 7. Bonding agents: Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application requirements, and conformity to ASTM standards. B. Certifications 1. Certification that all materials used within the joint system are compatible with each other. 2. Certification that materials used in the construction of joints are suitable for use in contact with potable water 30 days after installation. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A675— Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot - Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties. 2. ASTM C881— Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 3. ASTM C1059— Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. 4. ASTM D1751— Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 5. ASTM D1752—Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD) 1. CRD C572— Specification for Polyvinylchloride Waterstop. 03720 - 045 -01 03250 -2 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES December 2013 • • C. Federal Specifications 1. FS SS- S -210A— Sealing Compound, Preformed Plastic, for Expansion Joints and Pipe Joints. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of the manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is to establish the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. All materials used together in a given joint (bond breakers, backer rods, joint fillers, sealants, etc) shall be compatible with one another. Coordinate selection of suppliers and products to ensure compatibility. Under no circumstances shall asphaltic bond breakers or joint fillers be used in joints receiving sealant. C. All chemical sealant type waterstops shall be products specifically manufactured for the purpose for which they will be used and the products shall have been successfully used on similar structures for more than 5 years. 03720 - 045 -01 03250 -3 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES December 2013 2.02 MATERIALS A. Premolded Joint Filler 1. Premolded joint filler structures: Self - expanding cork, premolded joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1752, Type III. The thickness shall be 3/4 inch unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Premolded joint filler sidewalk and roadway concrete pavements or where fiber joint filler is specifically noted on the Drawings. The joint filler shall be asphalt impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D1751. Thickness shall be 3/4 inch unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. B. Bond Breaker 1. Bond breaker tape shall be an adhesive- backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape which will satisfactorily adhere to the premolded joint filler or concrete surface as required. The tape shall be the same width as the joint. 2. Except where tape is specifically called for on the Drawings, bond breaker for concrete shall be either bond breaker tape or a nonstaining type bond prevention coating such as Williams Tilt -up Compound by Williams Distributors Inc.; Silcoseal 77, by SCA Construction Supply Division, Superior Concrete Accessories or equal. C. Bonding Agent 1. Epoxy bonding agent shall be a two- component, solvent -free, moisture - insensitive, epoxy -resin material conforming to ASTM C881, Type II. The bonding agent shall be Sikadur 32 Hi Mod by Sika Corporation of Lyndhurst, NJ; Concressive Liquid (LPL) by Master Builders of Cleveland, OH, or equal. Acrylic may be used if approved by the Engineer. D. Compressible Joint Filler 1. The joint filler shall be a non - extruded watertight strip material use to fill expansion joints between structures. The material shall be capable of being compressed at least 40% for 70 hours at 68 °F and subsequently recovering at least 20% of its original thickness in the first 1/2 hour after unloading. Compressible joint filler shall be Evasote 380 E.S.P, by E Poxy Industries, Inc., Ravena, NY, Sikaflex 1a by Sika, or equal. 03720 - 045 -01 03250 -4 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES December 2013 • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Construction Joints • 1. Make construction joints only at locations shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Any additional or relocation of construction joints proposed by the Contractor must be submitted to the Engineer for written approval. 2. Additional or relocated joints should be located where they least impair the strength of the member. In general, locate joints within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams, and girders. However, if a beam intersects a girder at the joint, offset the joint a distance equal to twice the width of the member being connected. Locate joints in walls and columns at the underside of floors, slabs, beams, or girders and at tops of footings or floor slabs. Do not locate joints between beams, girders, column capitals, or drop panels and the slabs above them. Do not locate joints between brackets or haunches and walls or columns supporting them. 3. All joints shall be perpendicular to the main reinforcement. Continue reinforcing steel through the joint as indicated on the Drawings. When joints in beams are allowed, provide a shear key and inclined dowels as approved by the Engineer. 4. Provide sealant grooves for joint sealant where indicated on the Drawings. 5. At all construction joints and at concrete joints designated on the Drawings to be "roughened," uniformly roughen the surface of the concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points or side to side) of approximately '/4 inch to expose a fresh face. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces of loose or weakened materials by waterblasting or sandblasting and prepare for bonding. 6. Provide waterstops in all wall and slab construction joints in liquid containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 7. Keyways shall not be used in construction joints unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 03250 -5 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES December 2013 • SECTION 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials required and install cast -in- place concrete complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: 1. Sources of cement, pozzolan, and aggregates. 2. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all concrete components and admixtures. 3. Air entraining admixture. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Water- reducing admixture. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. High -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer). Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, recommended dosage, temperature considerations, retarding effect, slump range, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. 6. Concrete mix for each formulation of concrete proposed for use, including constituent quantities per cubic yard, water - cementitious materials ratio, 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 concrete slump, type, and manufacturer of cement. Provide either a. or b. below for each mix proposed: a. Standard deviation data for each proposed concrete mix based on statistical records. b. The curve of water - cementitious materials ratio versus concrete cylinder strength for each formulation of concrete proposed based on laboratory tests. The cylinder strength shall be the average of the 28 -day cylinder strength test results for each mix. Provide results of 7- and 14 -day tests if available. 7. Sheet curing material. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, and conformity to ASTM standard. 8. Liquid curing compound. Product data, including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application rate, and conformity to ASTM standards. Identify proposed locations of use. B. Samples 1. Fine and coarse aggregates if requested by the Engineer. C. Test Reports 1. Fine aggregates —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substance. 2. Coarse aggregates —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 3. Cements — chemical analysis and physical properties for each type. 4. Pozzolans — chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mixes —compressive strength, slump, and air content. D. Certifications 1. Certify that admixtures used in the same concrete mix are compatible with each other and with the aggregates. 2. Certify that admixtures are suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 03720- 045 -01 03300 -2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • 3. Certify that the curing compound is suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days (non toxic and free of taste or odor). 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C31— Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. ASTM C33— Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. ASTM C39— Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. ASTM C42— Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 5. ASTM C94— Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C143— Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic- Cement Concrete. 7. ASTM C150— Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 8. ASTM C171— Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 9. ASTM C 173— Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 10. ASTM C231— Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 11. ASTM C260— Standard Specification for Air - Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 12. ASTM C309— Standard Specification for Liquid- Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 13. ASTM C494— Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 14. ASTM C618— Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 15. ASTM C 1017— Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 B. American Concrete Institute (ACI). 1. ACI 304R —Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. 2. ACI 305R —Hot Weather Concreting. 3. ACI 306.1 — Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 4. ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete. 5. ACI 350R— Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reinforced concrete shall comply with ACI 318; the recommendations of ACI 350R; and other stated requirements, codes, and standards. The most stringent requirement of the codes, standards, and this Section shall apply when conflicts exist. B. Only one source of cement and aggregates shall be used on any one structure. Concrete shall be uniform in color and appearance. C. Thirty days before placing concrete, the Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer the sources of individual materials and batched concrete proposed for use. Discuss placement methods, waterstops, and curing. Propose methods of hot and cold weather concreting as required. Before placing any concrete containing a high -range water - reducing admixture (plasticizer), the Contractor, accompanied by the plasticizer manufacturer, shall discuss with the Engineer the properties and techniques of batching and placing plasticized concrete. D. If, during the progress of the work, it is impossible to obtain concrete of the required workability and strength with the materials being furnished, the Engineer may order such changes in proportions or materials, or both, as may be necessary to obtain the desired properties. All changes so ordered shall be made at the Contractor's expense. E. If, during the progress of the work, the materials from the sources originally accepted change in characteristics, the Contractor shall, at his/her expense, make new acceptance tests of aggregates and establish new design mixes. F. The Contractor shall furnish testing of the following materials to verify conformity with this Specification Section and the stated ASTM Standards: 1. Fine aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -4 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • 2. Coarse aggregates for conformity with ASTM C33 —sieve analysis, physical properties, and deleterious substances. 3. Cements for conformity with ASTM C150 chemical analysis and physical properties. 4. Pozzolans for conformity with ASTM C618 —chemical analysis and physical properties. 5. Proposed concrete mix designs — compressive strength, slump, and air content. G. A firm providing field testing and inspection services will be approved by the Owner. The cost of such work, except as specifically stated otherwise, shall be paid by the Contractor. The following items shall be tested by the Owner to verify conformity with this Specification Section: 1. Concrete placements —compressive strength (cylinders), compressive strength (cores), slump, and air content. 2. Other materials or products that may come under question. H. All materials incorporated in the work shall conform to accepted samples. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section: A. Cement: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before the next is started. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregate. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -5 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 C. Sand: Arrange and use stockpiles to avoid contamination. Allow sand to drain to a uniform moisture content before using. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. D. Admixtures: Store in closed containers to avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage. Provide suitable agitating equipment to ensure uniform dispersion of ingredient's in admixture solutions which tend to separate. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which could adversely affect their characteristics. E. Pozzolan: Store in weathertight buildings, bins, or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination. F. Sheet Curing Materials: Store in weathertight buildings or off the ground and under cover. G. Liquid Curing Compounds: Store in closed containers. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of the manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance, and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with this Section and any applicable State or local requirements. B. Cement: Domestic Portland cement complying with ASTM C150. Air entraining cements shall not be used. The brand of cement shall be subject to approval by the Engineer and one brand shall be used throughout the Work. The following cement type(s) shall be used: 03720- 045 -01 03300 -6 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • 1. Class A,B,C,D Concrete Type II with the addition of fly ash resulting in C3A being below 5% of total cementitious content, Type III limited to 5% C3A or Type V. C. Fine Aggregate: Washed inert natural sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. D. Coarse Aggregate: Well - graded crushed stone or washed gravel conforming to the requirements of ASTM C33. Grading requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 2 for the specified coarse aggregate size number. Limits of Deleterious Substances and Physical Property Requirements shall be as listed in ASTM C33 Table 3 for severe weathering regions. Size numbers for the concrete mixes shall be as shown in Table 1 in this Section. E. Water: Potable water free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic matter, or other deleterious substances. F. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis (except for those attributable to water). When it is required to use more than one admixture in a concrete mix, the admixtures shall be from the same manufacturer. Admixtures shall be compatible with the concrete mix, including other admixtures, and shall be suitable for use in contact with potable water after 30 days of concrete curing. 1. Air - Entraining Admixture: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C260. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Water- Reducing Agent: The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type A. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3. High -Range Water - Reducer (Plasticizer): The admixture shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F and shall result in non - segregating plasticized concrete with little bleeding and with the physical properties of low water /cement ratio concrete. The treated concrete shall be capable of maintaining its plastic state in excess of 2 hours. Proportioning and mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Admixtures causing retarded or accelerated setting of concrete shall not be used without written approval from the Engineer. When allowed, the admixtures shall be retarding or accelerating water - reducing or high -range water - reducing admixtures. 03720- 045 -01 03300 -7 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 G. Pozzolan (Fly Ash) shall be Class F fly ash complying with ASTM C618 except that the Loss on Ignition (LOI) shall be limited to 3% maximum. H. Sheet Curing Materials. Waterproof paper, polyethylene film, or white burlap polyethylene sheeting all complying with ASTM C171. Liquid Curing Compound. Liquid membrane forming curing compound shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C309, Type 1 D (clear or translucent with fugitive dye) and shall contain no wax, paraffin, or oil. The curing compound shall be approved for use in contact with potable water after 30 days according to NSF 61 (non toxic and free of taste or odor). 2.03 MIXES A. An independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Owner engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor shall develop mix designs and testing. B. Select proportions of ingredients to meet the design strength and materials limits specified in Table 1 and to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance, and other required properties. Proportion ingredients to produce a homogenous mixture that will readily work into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or allowing excessive free water to collect on the surface. C. The design mix shall be based on standard deviation data of prior mixes with essentially the same proportions of the same constituents or, if such data are not available, be developed by a testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and engaged by and at the expense of the Contractor. Mixes based on standard deviation shall be accepted based on the modification factors for standard deviation tests contained in ACI 318. The water content of the concrete mix, determined by laboratory testing, shall be based on a curve showing the relation between water cementitious ratio and 7- and 28 -day compressive strengths of concrete made using the proposed materials. The curves shall be determined by four or more points, each representing an average value of at least three test specimens at each age. The curves shall have a range of values sufficient to yield the desired data, including the specified design strengths as modified below, without extrapolation. The water content of the concrete mixes to be used, as determined from the curve, shall correspond to strengths 16% greater than the specified design strengths. The resulting mix shall not conflict with the limiting values for maximum water cementitious ratio and net minimum cementitious content as specified in Table 1. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -8 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • • TABLE 1 CONCRETE MIX REQUIREMENTS Class Design Strength (1) Cement (2) Fine Aggregate (2 ) Coarse Aggregate (3) Cementitious Content (4) A 2500 C150 Type II C33 57 440 min. B 3000 C150 Type II C33 57 480 min. C 4000 C150 Type II C33 57 560 min D 5000 C150 Type II C33 57 600 min. Class W/C Ratio (5) Fly Ash AE Range (6) WR (7) HRWR (8) Slump Range (Inches) 1 -4 A 0.62 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes * B 0.54 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes * 1 -3 C 0.44 max. 20 - 25% 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3 -5 D 0.40 max. -- 3.5 to 5 Yes * 3 -5 NOTES: (1) Minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days (2) ASTM designation (3) Size Number in ASTM C33 (4) Cementitious content in lbs /cu yd (5) W/C is Water - Cementitious ratio by weight (6) AE is percent air - entrainment (7) WR is water - reducer admixture (8) HRWR is high -range water - reducer admixture * HRWR used at the Contractor's option D. Compression Tests: Provide testing of the proposed concrete mix or mixes to demonstrate compliance with the specified design strength requirements in conformity with the paragraph above. E. Entrained air, as measured by ASTM C231, shall be as shown in Table 1. 1. If the air - entraining agent proposed for use in the mix requires testing methods other than ASTM C231 to accurately determine air content, make special note of this requirement in the admixture submittal. F. Slump of the concrete as measured by ASTM C143 shall be as shown in Table 1. If a high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used, the slump indicated shall be that measured before plasticizer is added. Plasticized concrete shall have a slump ranging from 7 to 10 inches. G. Proportion admixtures according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Two or more admixtures specified may be used in the same mix provided that the admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on the concrete or on the properties of each other. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 03300 -9 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MEASURING MATERIALS A. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures as specified and shall be produced by a plant acceptable to the Engineer. All constituents, including admixtures, shall be batched at the plant except a high -range water - reducer may also be added in the field. B. Measure materials for batching concrete by weighing in conformity with and within the tolerances given in ASTM C94 except as otherwise specified. Scales shall have been certified by the local Weights and Measures official within 1 year of use. C. Measure the amount of free water in fine aggregates within 0.3% with a moisture meter. Compensate for varying moisture contents of fine aggregates. Record the number of gallons of water as batched on printed batching tickets. D. Admixtures shall be dispensed either manually using calibrated containers or measuring tanks or by an automatic dispenser approved by the manufacturer of the specific admixture. 1. Charge air entraining and chemical admixtures into the mixer as a solution using an automatic dispenser or similar metering device. 2. Inject multiple admixtures separately during the batching sequence. 3.02 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING A. Concrete shall be ready mixed concrete produced by equipment acceptable to the Engineer. No hand mixing will be permitted. Clean each transit mix truck drum and reverse drum rotation before the truck proceeds under the batching plant. Equip each transit mix truck with a continuous, nonreversible, revolution counter showing the number of revolutions at mixing speeds. B. Ready mix concrete shall be transported to the site in watertight agitator or mixer trucks loaded not in excess of their rated capacities as stated on the name plate. C. Keep the water tank valve on each transit truck locked at all times. Any addition of water must be directed by the Engineer. Added water shall be incorporated by additional mixing of at least 35 revolutions. All added water shall be metered and the amount of water added shall be shown on each delivery ticket. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • D. All central plant and rolling stock equipment and methods shall comply with ACI 318 and ASTM C94. • • E. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end. Metal or metal lined non - aluminum discharge chutes shall be used and shall have slopes not exceeding 1 vertical to 2 horizontal and not less than 1 vertical to 3 horizontal. Chutes more than 20 feet long and chutes not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into a hopper before distribution. F. Retempering (mixing with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water) of concrete or mortar which has reached initial set will not be permitted. G. Handle concrete from mixer to placement as quickly as practicable while providing concrete of required quality in the placement area. Dispatch trucks from the batching plant so they arrive at the work site just before the concrete is required, thus avoiding excessive mixing of concrete while waiting or delays in placing successive layers of concrete in the forms. H. Furnish a delivery ticket for ready -mixed concrete to the Engineer as each truck arrives. Each ticket shall provide a printed record of the weight of cement and each aggregate as batched individually. Use the type of indicator that returns for zero punch or returns to zero after a batch is discharged. Clearly indicate the weight of fine and coarse aggregate, cement and water in each batch, the quantity delivered, the time any water is added, and the numerical sequence of the delivery. Show the time of day batched and time of discharge from the truck. Indicate the number of revolutions of the truck mixer. I. Temperature and Mixing Time Control 1. In cold weather, do not allow the as -mixed temperature of the concrete and concrete temperatures at the time of placement in the forms to drop below 40 °F. 2. If water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when the temperature of the mixture is greater than 90 °F. 3. In hot weather, cool ingredients before mixing to maintain temperature of the concrete below the maximum placing temperature of 90 °F. If necessary, substitute well - crushed ice for all or part of the mixing water. 03720- 045 -01 03300 -11 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 4. The maximum time interval between adding mixing water and/or cement to the batch and placing concrete in the forms shall not exceed the values shown in Table 2. TABLE 2 MAXIMUM TIME TO DISCHARGE OF CONCRETE Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) Maximum Time 80 to 90 °F (27 to 32 °C) 45 minutes 70 to 79 °F (21 to 26 °C) 60 minutes 40 to 69 °F (5 to 20 °C) 90 minutes Air or Concrete Temperature (whichever is higher) Maximum Time 80 to 90 °F (27 to 32 °C) 45 minutes 70 to 79 °F (21 to 26 °C) 60 minutes 40 to 69 °F (5 to 20 °C) 90 minutes J. If an approved high -range water - reducer (plasticizer) is used to produce plasticized concrete, the maximum time interval shall not exceed 90 minutes. 3.03 CONCRETE APPEARANCE A. Concrete mix showing either poor cohesion or poor coating of the coarse aggregate with paste shall be remixed. If this does not correct the condition, the concrete shall be rejected. If the slump is within the allowable limit but excessive bleeding, poor workability, or poor finishability are observed, changes in the concrete mix shall be obtained only by adjusting one or more of the following: 1. The gradation of aggregate. 2. The proportion of fine and coarse aggregate. 3. The percentage of entrained air within the allowable limits. B. Concrete for the work shall provide a homogeneous structure which, when hardened, will have the required strength, durability, and appearance. Mixtures and workmanship shall be such that concrete surfaces, when exposed, will require no finishing. When concrete surfaces are stripped, the concrete, when viewed in good lighting from 10 feet away, shall be pleasing in appearance and at 20 feet shall show no visible defects. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -12 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • • 3.04 PLACING AND COMPACTING A. Placing 1. The Contractor shall verify that all formwork completely encloses concrete to be placed and is securely braced before placing concrete. Remove ice, excess water, dirt, and other foreign materials from forms. Confirm that reinforcement and other embedded items are securely in place. Have a competent workman at the location of the placement who can ensure that reinforcing steel and embedded items remain in designated locations while concrete is being placed. Sprinkle semi - porous subgrades or forms to eliminate suction of water from the mix. Seal extremely porous subgrades in an approved manner. 2. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Place concrete continuously at a rate which ensures the concrete is being integrated with fresh plastic concrete. Do not deposit concrete that has partially hardened or has been contaminated by foreign materials or on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If the section cannot be placed continuously, place construction joints as specified or as approved. 3. Pumping of concrete will be permitted. Use a mix design and aggregate sizes suitable for pumping and submit for approval. 4. Remove temporary spreaders from forms when the spreader is no longer useful. Temporary spreaders may remain embedded in concrete only when made of galvanized metal or concrete and if prior approval has been obtained. 5. Do not place concrete for supported elements until concrete previously placed in the supporting element (columns, slabs, and/or walls) has reached adequate strength. 6. Where surface mortar is to form the base of a finish, especially surfaces designated to be painted, work coarse aggregate back from forms with a suitable tool to bring the full surface of the mortar against the form. Prevent the formation of excessive surface voids. 7. Slabs a. After suitable bulkheads, screeds, and jointing materials have been positioned, the concrete shall be placed continuously between 03720- 045 -01 03300 -13 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 construction joints beginning at a bulkhead, edge form, or comer. Each batch shall be placed into the edge of the previously placed concrete to avoid stone pockets and segregation. b. Avoid delays in casting. If there is a delay in casting, the concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck off with a straightedge. Bullfloats or darbies shall be used to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. c. Where slabs are to be placed integrally with the walls below them, place the walls and compact as specified. Allow 1 hour to pass between placement of the wall and the overlying slab to permit consolidation of the wall concrete. Keep the top surface of the wall moist so as to prevent cold joints. 8. Formed Concrete a. Place concrete in forms using tremie tubes and taking care to prevent segregation. Bottoms of tremie tubes shall preferably be in contact with the concrete already placed. Do not permit concrete to drop freely more than 4 feet. Place concrete for walls in 12- to 24- inch lifts, keeping the surface horizontal. If plasticized concrete is used, the maximum lift thickness may be increased to 7 feet and the maximum free fall of concrete shall not exceed 15 feet. 9. Underwater concreting shall be performed in conformity with the recommendations of ACI 3O4R. The tremie system shall be used to place underwater concrete. Tremie pipes shall be in the range of 8 to 12 inches in diameter and be spaced at not more than 16 feet on centers nor more than 8 feet from an end form. Where concrete is being placed around a pipe, there shall be at least one tremie pipe on each side of each pipe. Where the tremie system is not practical, direct pumped concrete for underwater placement may be used subject to approval of the system, including details, by the Engineer. B. Compacting 1. Consolidate concrete by vibration, puddling, spading, rodding, or forking so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement, embedded items, and openings and into comers of forms. Puddling, spading, etc, shall be continuously performed along with vibration of the placement to 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -14 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • eliminate air or stone pockets that may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. • • 2. All concrete shall be placed and compacted with mechanical vibrators. The number, type, and size of the units shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of placing operations. No concrete shall be ordered until sufficient approved vibrators (including standby units in working order) are on the job. 3. A minimum frequency of 7000 rpm is required for mechanical vibrators. Insert vibrators and withdraw at points from 18 to 30 inches apart. At each insertion, vibrate sufficiently to consolidate concrete, generally from 5 to 15 seconds. Do not over vibrate so as to segregate. Keep a spare vibrator on the site during concrete placing operations. 4. Concrete Slabs: Concrete for slabs less than 8 inches thick shall be consolidated with vibrating screeds; slabs 8 to 12 inches thick shall be compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds. Vibrators shall always be placed into concrete vertically and shall not be laid horizontally or laid over. 5. Walls and Columns: Internal vibrators (rather than form vibrators) shall be used unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. In general, for each vibrator needed to consolidate the batch at the point of discharge, one or more additional vibrators must be used to densify, homogenize, and perfect the surface. The vibrators shall be inserted vertically at regular intervals through the fresh concrete and slightly into the previous lift, if any. 6. Amount of Vibration: Vibrators are to be used to consolidate properly placed concrete but shall not be used to move or transport concrete in the forms. Vibration shall continue until: a. Frequency returns to normal. b. Surface appears liquefied, flattened, and glistening. c. Trapped air ceases to rise. d. Coarse aggregate has blended into the surface but has not disappeared. 3.05 CURING AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall protect all concrete work against injury from the elements and defacements of any nature during construction operations. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -15 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 B. Curing Methods 1. Curing Methods for Concrete Surfaces: Cure concrete to retain moisture and maintain specified temperature at the surface for a minimum of 7 days after placement. Curing methods to be used are as follows: a. Water Curing: Keep entire concrete surface wet by ponding, continuous sprinkling, or by covering with saturated burlap. Begin wet cure as soon as concrete attains an initial set and maintain wet cure 24 hours a day. b. Sheet Material Curing: Cover entire surface with sheet material. Securely anchor sheeting to prevent wind and air from lifting the sheeting or entrapping air under the sheet. Place and secure sheet as soon as initial concrete set occurs. c. Liquid Membrane Curing: Apply over the entire concrete surface except for surfaces to receive additional concrete. Curing compound shall NOT be placed on any concrete surface where additional concrete is to be placed, where concrete sealers or surface coatings are to be used, or where the concrete finish requires an integral floor product. Curing compound shall be applied as soon as the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water sheen is visible, but not after the concrete is dry or when the curing compound can be absorbed into the concrete. Application shall be in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Specified applications of curing methods. a. Slabs for Water Containment Structures: Water curing only. b. Slabs on Grade and Footings (not used to contain water): Water curing, sheet material curing, or liquid membrane curing. c. Structural Slabs (other than water containment): Water curing or liquid membrane curing. d. Horizontal Surfaces that Will Receive Additional Concrete, Coatings, Grout, or Other Material that Requires Bond to the Substrate: Water curing. e. Formed Surfaces: None if nonabsorbent forms are left in place 7 days. Water cure if absorbent forms are used. Sheet cured or 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -16 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • liquid membrane cured if forms are removed before 7 days. Exposed horizontal surfaces of formed walls or columns shall be water cured for 7 days or until next placement of concrete. f. Concrete Joints: Water cured or sheet material cured. C. Finished surfaces and slabs shall be protected from the direct sunlight to prevent checking and crazing. D. Cold Weather Concreting: 1. Cold weather is defined as a period when the average daily outdoor temperature drops below 40 °F for more than 3 successive days. The average daily temperature shall be calculated as the average of the highest and the lowest temperature from midnight to midnight. 2. Cold weather concreting shall conform to ACI 306.1 and the additional requirements specified in this Section. Temperatures at the concrete placement shall be recorded at 12 -hour intervals (minimum). 3. The Contractor shall discuss a cold weather work plan with the Engineer. The discussion shall encompass the methods and procedures proposed for use during cold weather, including producing, transporting, placeing, protecting, curing, and monitoring the temperature of the concrete. The procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures shall also be discussed. Cold weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 4. During periods of cold weather, concrete shall be protected to provide continuous warm, moist curing (with supplementary heat when required) for a total of at least 350 degree -days of curing. a. Degree -days are defined as the total number of 24 -hour periods multiplied by the average daily air temperature at the surface of the concrete (e.g., 5 days at an average 70 °F = 350 degree- days). b. To calculate the weighted average daily air temperature, sum hourly measurements of the air temperature in the shade at the surface of the concrete taking any measurement less than 50 °F as 0 °F. Divide the sum thus calculated by 24 to obtain the weighted average temperature for that day. 5. Salt, manure, or other chemicals shall not be used for protection. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -17 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 6. The protection period for concrete being water cured shall not be terminated during cold weather until at least 24 hours after water curing has been terminated. E. Hot Weather Concreting 1. Hot weather is defined as any combination of high air temperatures, low relative humidity, and wind velocity which produces a rate of evaporation estimated in accordance with ACI 305R, approaching or exceeding 0.2 lb /sq ft/hr). 2. Concrete placed during hot weather shall be batched, delivered, placed, cured, and protected in compliance with the recommendations of ACI 305R and the additional requirements specified in this Section. a. Temperature of concrete being placed shall not exceed 90 °F and every effort shall be made to maintain a uniform concrete mix temperature below this level. The temperature of the concrete shall be such that it will cause no difficulties from loss of slump, flash set, or cold joints. b. All necessary precautions shall be taken to deliver the concrete promptly, to place the concrete promptly upon its arrival at the job, and to provide vibration immediately after placement. c. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to immediately cover plastic concrete with sheet material. 3. The Contractor shall discuss with the Engineer a work plan describing the methods and procedures proposed for concrete placement and curing during hot weather. Hot weather concreting shall not begin until the work plan is acceptable to the Engineer. 3.06 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Except as otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer, forms shall not be removed before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30% of its specified design strength, nor before reaching the following number of degree -days of curing (whichever is longer): 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -18 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • TABLE 3 MINIMUM TIME TO FORM REMOVAL Forms for: Degree -Days: Beams and slabs 500 Walls and vertical surfaces 100 (See definition of degree -days in Paragraph 3.05D above). B. Shores shall not be removed until the concrete has attained at least 70% of its specified design strength and also sufficient strength to support safely its own weight and construction live loads. 3.07 INSPECTION AND FIELD TESTING A. The batching, mixing, transporting, placing, and curing of concrete shall be subject to the inspection of the Engineer at all times. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of his/her readiness to proceed at least 24 hours before each concrete placement. The Engineer will inspect the preparations for concreting, including the preparation of previously placed concrete, the reinforcing steel and the alignment, and the cleanliness and tightness of formwork. No placement shall be made without inspection and acceptance by the Engineer. B. In compliance with ASTM C31, the Engineer (or inspector) will take sets of field - control cylinder specimens during the work. The number of sets of concrete test cylinders taken of each class of concrete placed each day shall not be less than one set per day, nor less than one set for each 150 cu yd of concrete, nor less than one set for each 5,000 sq ft of surface area for slabs or walls. 1. A "set" of test cylinders consists of four cylinders: one to be tested at 7 days and two to be tested and their strengths averaged at 28 days. The fourth may be used for a special test at 3 days or to verify strength after 28 days if the 28 -day test results are low. 2. When the average 28 -day compressive strength of the cylinders in any set falls below the specified design strength or below proportional minimum 7 -day strengths (where proper relation between 7- and 28 -day strengths have been established by tests), proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to achieve the required strengths. C. The Contractor shall cooperate in testing by allowing free access to the work for the selection of samples, providing an insulated closed curing box for specimens, affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through the operations, and furnishing material and labor required for taking concrete cylinder samples. The cost of taking and shipping specimens will be paid for by the 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 03300 -19 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE Contractor and reimbursed by the Owner under the Concrete Testing Allowance. Curing boxes shall be acceptable to the Engineer. D. In accordance with ASTM C143, slump tests will be made in the field immediately before placing the concrete. If the slump is greater than the specified range, the concrete shall be rejected. E. Air Content: Air content shall be tested for on fresh concrete samples. Air content for concrete made of ordinary aggregates having low absorption shall be tested for in compliance with either the pressure method complying with ASTM C231 or by the volumetric method complying with ASTM C173. If lightweight aggregates or aggregates with high absorptions are used, the latter test method shall be used. F. The Engineer may have cores taken from any questionable area in the concrete work such as construction joints and other locations as required for determining concrete quality. The results of tests on such cores shall be the basis for accepting, rejecting, or determining the continuation of concrete work. G. The Contractor shall cooperate in obtaining cores by allowing free access to the work and permitting the use of ladders, scaffolding, and such incidental equipment as may be required. Repair all core holes. The work of cutting and testing the cores will be at the expense of the Contractor. Work found to be acceptable will be reimbursed under the Concrete Testing Allowance. 3.08 FAILURE TO MEET REQUIREMENTS A. Should the strengths shown by the test specimens made and tested in compliance with the previous provisions fall below the values given in Table 1, the Engineer shall have the right to require changes in proportions outlined to apply to the remainder of the work. Furthermore, the Engineer shall have the right to require additional curing on those portions of the structure represented by the test specimens which failed. The cost of such additional curing shall be at the Contractor's expense. If such additional curing does not give the strength required as evidenced by core and/or load tests, the Engineer shall have the right to require strengthening or replacing those portions of the structure that fail to develop the required strength. The cost of all such core borings and/or load tests and any strengthening or concrete replacement required because strengths of test specimens are below those specified shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor. In such cases of failure to meet strength requirements, the Contractor and Engineer shall confer to determine what adjustment, if any, can be made in compliance with Sections titled "Strength" and "Failure to Meet Strength Requirements" of ASTM C94. The "purchaser" referred to in ASTM C94 is the Contractor in this Section. 03720 - 045 -01 03300 -20 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • • B. When the tests on control specimens of concrete fall below the specified strength, the Engineer will permit check tests for strengths to be made by means of typical cores drilled from the structure in compliance with ASTM C42 and C39. In the case of cores not indicating adequate strength, the Engineer, in addition to other recourses, may require, at the Contractor's expense, load tests on any one of the slabs, beams, piles, caps, and columns in which such concrete was used. Tests need not be conducted until concrete has aged 60 days. C. Should the strength of test cylinders fall below 60% of the required minimum 28 -day strength, the concrete shall be rejected and shall be removed and replaced. 3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. This Section is intended to require quality work, including adequate forming and proper mixing, placing, and curing of concrete so completed concrete surfaces will require no patching. B. Defective concrete and honeycombed areas as determined by the Engineer shall be repaired as specified by the Engineer. C. As soon as the forms have been stripped and the concrete surfaces exposed, fins and other projections shall be removed; recesses left by the removal of form ties shall be filled; and surface defects which do not impair structural strength shall be repaired. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete to the approval of the Engineer. D. Immediately after removal of forms remove plugs and break off metal ties as required by Section 03100. Promptly fill holes upon stripping as follows: moisten the hole with water, followed by a 1/16 -inch brush coat of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately plug the hole with a 1 to 1.5- mixture of cement and concrete sand mixed slightly damp to 'the touch (just short of "balling "). Hammer the grout into the hole until dense and an excess of paste appears on the surface in the form of a spiderweb. Trowel smooth with heavy pressure. Avoid burnishing. E. When patching exposed surfaces, employ the same source of cement and sand as used in the parent concrete. Adjust color if necessary by adding proper amounts of white cement. Rub lightly with a fine Carborundum stone at an age of 1 to 5 days if necessary to bring the surface down with the parent concrete. Exercise care to avoid damaging or staining the virgin skin of the surrounding parent concrete. Wash thoroughly to remove all rubbed matter. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 03300 -21 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 3.10 SCHEDULE A. The following (Table 4) are the general applications for the various concrete classes and design strengths: TABLE 4 CONCRETE SCHEDULE Class Design Strength (psi) Description A 2,500 Concrete fill and duct encasement. B 3,000 Concrete overlay slabs and pavements. C 4,000 Walls, slabs on grade, suspended slab and beam systems, columns, grade beams, and all other structural concrete. D 5,000 Prestressed concrete. END OF SECTION 03720- 045 -01 03300 -22 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE December 2013 • • • • SECTION 03610 GROUTING —NON- SHRINK EPDXY MACHINERY GROUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section contains the requirements for grouting with non - shrink epoxy machinery grout. B. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to prepare metal base and concrete substrate surfaces and to mix, place, and protect non - shrink epoxy machinery grout. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Product Data: Submit the manufacturer's product data and installation instructions /recommendations. B. Certification: Submit certificates of compliance or laboratory test reports which indicate the following: 1. Materials used in the grout do not contain metallic elements and corrosion- producing substances. 2. Materials meet specified shrinkage and compressive strength requirements. 3. The non - shrink epoxy machinery grout complies with the machinery manufacturer's (e.g., the high - service pump manufacturer's) requirements with respect to creep for the particular service application. Creep characteristics shall be based on ASTM C1181 and long -term data. Coordinated certificates of compliance shall be provided by both the grout manufacturer and the machinery manufacturer. C. Documentation of Experience Level. Submit evidence that the Contractor's grouting crew meets the requirements as specified in this Section under Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications. 03720 - 045 -01 03610 -1 GROUTING —NON- SHRINK EPDXY December 2013 MACHINERY GROUT D. Grouting Plan. The grouting plan shall be reviewed and accepted by the high - service pump manufacturer and by the non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer before being submitted to the Engineer. This plan shall include grout installation drawings for the machinery to be grouted and shall list, provide a detailed description of, and present a timeline for all activities necessary to perform the complete work. Activities and items to be addressed shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Surface preparation: a. Curing and developed strength of concrete foundation. b. Clean, roughen, and dry concrete surfaces. c. Clean metal surfaces for optimum bond. 2. Formwork: a. A list of materials to be used for forms, isolation joints, bond prevention, leak prevention/sealant, fasteners to concrete, etc. b. A method for forming chamfers and making formwork watertight. c. The location and size of base anchor bolts and leveling components. Indicate whether each leveling component is to be retained/ encapsulated in the grout. For leveling components to be retained/encapsulated, indicate the minimum rounding radius required on all edges by the grout manufacturer to limit stress concentrations in the grout to acceptable levels and preclude grout cracking. d. The location of and protection for all surfaces not to be bonded to the grout. 3. Environmental protection: a. Maintain a dry work area. b. Shade from sun. 4. Ensure that clearances /dimensional requirements are met for the following: a. Isolation joints and the extent of each pour. b. Grout shouldering height, width, and chamfer angle. c. Air vent holes and grout application holes. d. Form height relative to machinery base. 5. Mixing. 03720 - 045 -01 03610 -2 GROUTING—NON-SHRINK EPDXY December 2013 MACHINERY GROUT • 6. Placement procedures: a. Normal, cold, or hot weather installation procedures, including multiple lifts and isolation joint material removal and subsequent filling. b. List equipment to be used and location/set -up during grouting. c. Adequate grouting crew for continuous work. 7. Pouring. 8. Finishing. 9. Clean Up. 10. Curing: a. Curing and developed strength of the grout. b. Anchor bolt torques and when such torques can be applied. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C307— Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. 2. ASTM C531— Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 3. ASTM C579— Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 4. ASTM C580— Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical - Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 5. ASTM C827— Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures. 6. ASTM C881— Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 03720- 045 -01 03610 -3 GROUTING —NON- SHRINK EPDXY December 2013 MACHINERY GROUT 7. ASTM C882— Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used With Concrete by Slant Shear. 8. ASTM C1181— Standard Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The manufacturer of the non - shrink epoxy machinery grout shall have a quality management system in place and shall be ISO 9001 certified. A written Quality Assurance program shall be required to ensure the quality of their products package -to- package and lot -to -lot. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. The warranty shall extend for 24 months from the Date of Substantial Completion. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Non - shrink epoxy machinery grout shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The Contractor shall not use and shall remove from the job site epoxy grout aggregate that becomes damp or otherwise defective. Liquid components that are found to be defective shall also be removed from the job site. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. The non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer shall have been in the business of manufacturing similar products for over 10 years, maintain a strict quality assurance program, offer technical services, and provide a representative at the jobsite for product training before product installation. B. The Contractor's grouting crew shall be qualified and experienced in working with non - shrink epoxy machinery grout. The grouting crew shall have successfully completed installation of the particular grout to be used at no fewer than two facilities having machinery and associated grouting of comparable size and complexity to that required under this project (e.g., the high - service pumps). 03720- 045 -01 03610 -4 GROUTING — NON - SHRINK EPDXY December 2013 MACHINERY GROUT • • • 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) 1.12 DEFINITION A. Non - shrink Epoxy Grout: A high - strength epoxy grout which does not shrink in the plastic state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened state, and bonds permanently to a clean metal machinery base and concrete substrate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The non - shrink epoxy machinery grout shall provide a highly effective bearing area, permanently maintain alignment of equipment or machinery, and provide proper load transfer to the foundation. 2.02 NON - SHRINK EPDXY MACHINERY GROUT A. Epoxy Machinery Grout shall be non - shrink non - metallic type, 100% solids, three- component system consisting of resin, hardener, and aggregate. Grout shall have 0% shrinkage in the plastic form and 0% expansion in the hardened form in accordance with ASTM C827. Compressive strength shall be 5,000 psi in 24 hours and 12,000 psi in 7 days, in accordance with ASTM C579, Method B. B. Grout shall be a proven product that can be poured or pumped into place to facilitate placement under the bases to be grouted. C. Grout working time shall be at least 30 minutes. D. The grout and the grout manufacturer shall be Five Star® DP Epoxy Grout as manufactured by Five Star Products, Inc., Fairfield, CT.; or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall perform all grouting work in accordance with the non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer's written instructions /recommendations and preparation and placement procedures to achieve the installation as required by the Drawings and as specified in this Section. 03720- 045 -01 03610 -5 GROUTING— NON - SHRINK EPDXY December 2013 MACHINERY GROUT B. The Contractor shall have on hand all Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for products being used. MSDSs shall be quickly accessible before and during placement of grout for reference. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Machinery Base: 1. The Contractor shall clean metal surfaces as recommended by the non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer. 2. Surfaces that are not to be bonded to the grout, such as base anchor bolts and equipment anchor bolts /screws, shall be coated/protected according to the non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer's recommendations to prevent adherence of the grout. B. Concrete: 1. Concrete shall have developed acceptable strength as required by the non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer before any grouting work. 2. Bonding surfaces shall be in accordance with the following: a. Laitance shall be removed by chipping. b. Surfaces shall be clean and free of loose particles, oil, and grease. c. Surfaces shall be clean and dry immediately before grouting. d. The Contractor shall follow all other recommendations by the non- shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer to achieve proper bonding. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Setting and Leveling: 1. The Contractor shall use leveling screws, nuts, wedges, or shims according to the machinery manufacturer's instructions to position and level the machinery at its proper height. Whether or not such components are to be retained/encapsulated in the grout shall be as specified in the machinery manufacturer's instructions. 2. Where leveling wedges or shims are to be retained after grouting, these components shall have full contact with and provide proper load transfer to the foundation. Such wedges and shims shall have edges rounded in 03720 - 045 -01 03610 -6 GROUTING— NON -SHRINK EPDXY December 2013 MACHINERY GROUT • • • • accordance with the requirements specified in the Grouting Plan portion of this Section. • • B. Placement of Grout: 1. Grout temperature and surrounding environmental conditions shall be adjusted and controlled in accordance with the non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Formwork shall be placed in a manner to avoid entrapment of air and resulting voids. Joints shall be sealed to prevent leakage of non - shrink epoxy machinery grout. 3. All leveling wedges and shims which are to be retained shall be encapsulated with non - shrink epoxy machinery grout in accordance with the non -shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Leveling wedges, shims, and screws which are not to be retained shall be removed and the voids filled with non - shrink epoxy machinery grout. 5. No isolation joint materials shall be retained; all such materials shall be completely removed and the resulting spaces shall be filled with non- shrink epoxy machinery grout. 6. The completed grouting work shall be free of voids and shall provide full contact/bearing of the grout against the machinery base and the concrete substrate surfaces. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE A. The manufacturer shall provide field service in accordance with the requirements in Division 1. B. The high - service pump manufacturer's representative shall have certified that the pump installation is ready for grouting before the pump base grouting can begin. The non - shrink epoxy machinery grout manufacturer's representative shall inspect and approve the work just before grouting, observe the placement of grout, and inspect and approve the completed work to ensure that the approved grouting plan has been followed and a proper grout installation has been provided. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 03610 -7 GROUTING— NON - SHRINK EPDXY December 2013 MACHINERY GROUT SECTION 03930 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and cut, remove, repair, or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified in this Section. Work under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing concrete. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03100, Concrete Formwork. B. Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. C. Section 03250, Concrete Joints and Joint Accessories. D. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. E. Section 05500, Metal Fabrications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01330, a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of demolition to be used at each location. C. Submit the manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for use to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's installation and/or application instructions. D. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified in this Section are proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions to the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) L05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a 03720- 045 -01 03930 -1 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM C881— Standard Specification for Epoxy Resin Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 2. ASTM C882— Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer. 3. ASTM D570— Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 4. ASTM D638— Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 5. ASTM D695— Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics. 6. ASTM D732— Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch Tool. 7. ASTM D790— Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 8. ASTM G3— Standard Practice for Conventions Applicable to Electrochemical Measurements in Corrosion Testing. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered until the Engineer so authorizes. B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring and bracing, and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, protect personnel, control dust, and prevent damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown, or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the manufacture of such products and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying, and technically supporting the Contractor's personnel. 03720- 045 -01 03930 -2 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 • C. Contractor Qualifications: The Contractor shall complete a program of instruction in the application of the approved manufacturer's material specified in this Section and provide certification from the manufacturer attesting to their training and status as an approved applicator. D. Furnish a notarized certificate stating that the materials meet the requirements of this Section and have the manufacturer's current printed literature on a specified product. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and batch numbers. C. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 WEATHER CONSTRAINTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local regulations. B. Epoxy Bonding Agent 1. General a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos -free moisture - insensitive epoxy -resin material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the additional requirements specified in this Section. 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -3 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material: (1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8,500 psi minimum at 28 days. (2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4,000 psi minimum at 14 days. (3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 Modulus of Rupture): 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days. (4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5,000 psi minimum at 14 days. (5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 2 -hour boil): 1.0% maximum at 14 days. (6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1,500 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure. (7) Effective Shrinkage: Passes Test. (8) Color: Gray. 3. Approved manufacturers include Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikadur 32, Hi Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH, Concresive Liquid (LPL); or equal. C. Epoxy Paste 1. General a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos -free, moisture- insensitive epoxy -resin material used to bond dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts, dowels, anchor bolts, and all threads into hardened concrete and shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, Grade 3 and the additional requirements specified in this Section. It may also be used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 1/8 inch or less. 03720- 045 -01 03930 -4 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 • • • • 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material: (1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days. (2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break 0.3% minimum. (3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 Modulus of Rupture): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. (4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 days. (5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0% maximum at 7 days. (6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist cure. (7) Color: Concrete grey. 3. Approved manufacturers include: a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikadur Hi Mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Concresive 1438; or equal. b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikadur Hi Mod LV 32; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH, Concresive 1438; or equal. D. Non - Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600. E. Adhesive - capsule -type anchor system shall be equal to the HVA adhesive Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate, and a hardener contained in a separate vial in the capsule. F. Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -5 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive 1. General a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two- component, solvent - free, moisture- insensitive epoxy -resin material suitable for crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being injected. b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy coating approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable water. 2. Material a. Properties of the cured material (1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi minimum at 28 days. (2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 days. Elongation at Break 2 to 5 %. (3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 Modulus of Rupture): 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi minimum at 14 days (injection) (4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. (5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 2 -hour boil): 1.5% maximum at 7 days. (6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist. (7) Effective Shrinkage: Passes Test. 3. Approved manufacturers include: a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikadur Hi Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH, Concresive 1380 or equal. 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -6 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 • • • b. For very thin applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ, Sikadur Hi Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, OH, Concresive 1468 or equal. H. Polymer - Modified Portland Cement Mortar (Vertical and Overhead Surfaces) 1. The polymer - modified Portland cement mortar shall be a two- component, polymer - modified, Portland cement fast - setting, non -sag mortar with a migrating corrosion inhibitor. 2. Component A shall be a liquid polymer emulsion of an acrylic copolymer base and additives. It shall have a particle size of less than 0.1 micron. 3. Component A shall contain an organic, migrating corrosion inhibitor, which has been independently proven to reduce corrosion in concrete via ASTM G3 (half -cell potential tests). The corrosion inhibitor shall not be calcium nitrate and shall have a minimum of 7 years of independent field testing to document performance on actual construction projects. 4. Component B shall be a blend of selected Portland cements, specially graded aggregates, admixtures for controlling setting time, water reducers for workability, and accelerators. 5. The ratio of Component A: Component B shall be 1:5:2 by weight. 6. The polymer - modified Portland cement mortar shall be placeable from 1/8 -inch to 1 -1/2 -inch depth per lift. 7. Aggregate to extend the polymer - modified Portland cement mortar shall be a minus '/2- or 3/8 -inch clean, well - graded, saturated surface dry material having low absorption and high density in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements. 8. Approved manufacturers include Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ — Sikatop 123 plus. I. Polymer - Modified Portland Cement Mortar (Horizontal Surfaces) 1. The polymer - modified Portland cement mortar shall be a two- component, polymer - modified, Portland cement fast - setting, non -sag mortar with a migrating corrosion inhibitor. 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -7 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 2. Component A shall be a liquid polymer emulsion of an acrylic copolymer base and additives. It shall have a particle size of less than 0.1 micron. 3. Component A shall contain an organic, migrating corrosion inhibitor, which has been independently proven to reduce corrosion in concrete via ASTM G3 (half -cell potential tests). The corrosion inhibitor shall not be calcium nitrate and shall have a minimum of seven tests. The corrosion inhibitor shall not be calcium nitrate and shall have a minimum of 7 years of independent field testing to document performance on actual construction projects. 4. Component B shall be a blend of selected Portland cements, specially graded aggregates, admixtures for controlling setting time, water reducers for workability, and accelerators. 5. The ratio of Component A: Component B shall be 1:7:2 by weight. 6. The polymer - modified Portland cement mortar shall be placeable from a 1/8 -inch to 1 -inch depth per lift. 7. Aggregate to extend the polymer - modified Portland cement mortar shall be a minus %z- or 3/8 -inch clean, well - graded, saturated surface dry material having low absorption and high density in conformance with the manufacturer's requirements. 8. Approved manufacturers include Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ — Sikatop 122 plus. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or contraction joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between components on either side of the joint. B. When drilling holes for dowels/bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall stop if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified before drilling using "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to avoid rebar interference. 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -8 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 • 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer shall be done by line drilling at limits followed by chipping or jack hammering as appropriate in areas where concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in -place equipment is not damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be removed shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings or after obtaining written approval from the Engineer. B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting /core drilling and no new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a thickness of 1/4 inch. C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or specified, the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1- inch -deep saw cut on each exposed surface of the existing concrete. D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired by approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by such other methods as may be appropriate. 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas requiring patching, repairs, or modifications as shown on the Drawings, specified in this Section, or as directed by the Engineer. B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond - inhibiting materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, i.e. sandblasting, grinding, etc., as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the areas are not less than 1/2 inch deep. Irregular voids or surface stones need not be removed if they are sound, free of laitance, and firmly embedded into parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection. C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all contaminants, rust, etc., as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch. Reinforcing to be saved shall not be damaged during the demolition operation. 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -9 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the repair. It shall be cut, bent, or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the Drawings and provided with 1 -inch minimum cover all around. E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used where called for on the Drawings, specified in this Section, or as directed by the Engineer. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with water. Brush on a 1/16 -inch layer of cement and water mixed to the consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after applying the cement paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings. 2. Method B: After the concrete surface has been roughened and cleaned, apply an epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond. 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1/4 inch larger than the diameter of the dowel. The hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just before installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with epoxy paste, then dowels/bolts shall be buttered with paste and inserted by tapping. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of 10 bar diameters and smooth bars shall be drilled and set to a depth of 15 bar diameters. If not noted on the Drawings, the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and spacing of dowels. 4. Method D: Combination of Methods B and C. 5. Method E: The capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar, or other embedment item shall be tipped with a double 45° chamfered point, securely fastened into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the capsule -filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical, and overhead positions. 03930 -10 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE • • • • 3.04 CRACK REPAIR A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack sealant into cracks according to the manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less than 1/16 -inch thick they shall be pressure injected. B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack sealant through valves sealed to the surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR AND /OR EXPOSED REINFORCING REPAIR A. All loose, unsound (delaminated), and deteriorated concrete shall be removed by mechanical means. B. Saw cut the perimeter of unsound ( delaminated) concrete to form a rectangle with straight edges to a depth of 3/4 -inch or to the top of the reinforcing, whichever is shallower. Do not cut reinforcing unless otherwise noted. C. Chip concrete substrate to obtain a surface profile with new fractured - aggregate surface. D. The depth of repair shall be not less than the performance criteria of the specific product used. E. Where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is encountered, the procedure shall be as follows: 1. Remove all contaminants and rust from exposed reinforcing steel. 2. When half of the diameter of the rebar is exposed, chip out behind the reinforcing steel, 1 -inch minimum. 3. The distance chipped behind the rebar shall be equal to or exceed the minimum placement depth of the material to be used or as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Bars shown to remain in place which are found to have lost more than 15% class sectional area due to corrosion or which are damaged by the concrete removal process so that their cross - sectional area has been reduced by more than 15% shall be replaced with new bars. 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -11 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 F. Cracks encountered in the substrate in the area of the patch area shall be treated as approved by the Engineer. G. Substrate may be dry or damp but free of standing water. H. Remove dust, laitance, and any foreign particles. I. Spray apply mixed epoxy resin adhesive on the prepared area to receive the Portland cement mortar or concrete in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. J. While the adhesive coat is still wet (before it is tack -free to the touch) apply polymer - modified cement. The edges shall be vertical and straight. K. For applications greater than 1 inch in depth, apply polymer - modified cement in lifts. Score the top lifts of each lift to produce a roughened surface before applying the next lift. Allow the lift to reach final set before proceeding with the next lift. Adhesive coat shall be applied between each lift. 3.06 INSPECTION A. At the completion of all repairs, the Contractor, Engineer, and Installers of the material used on the repairs shall inspect the work. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 03930 -12 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE December 2013 • • • • • DIVISION 5 METALS • SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal ladders. 2. Ladder safety cages. 3. Metal bollards. 4. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 5. Shelf and relieving angles. 6. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 7. Prefabricated steel building columns. 8. Steel channels for overhead door openings. 9. Stair nosings. 10. Loose steel lintels. 11. Gratings. 12. Access hatches. B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete, for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge -type inserts, and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Non -slip aggregates and non - slip - aggregate surface finishes. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Metal nosings and treads. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -1 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 4. Paint products. 5. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and fmish of extruded nosing. D. Mill Certificates: Signed by the manufacturers of stainless -steel sheet certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. E. Welding certificates. F. Qualification Data: Florida Professional Engineering Registration certificate. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to the Project site in time for installation. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete that are specified in this Section but required for work of another Section. Deliver such items to the Project site in time for installation. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -2 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • • • A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI A14.3— Ladders – Fixed – Safety Requirements. 2. ANSUNAAMM MBG 531— Gratings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A27— Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, for General Application. 2. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A47— Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 4. ASTM A48— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 5. ASTM A53— Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 6. ASTM A123— Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 7. ASTM A153— Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 8. ASTM A276— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 9. ASTM A307— Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 10. ASTM A325— Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 11. ASTM A489— Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Lifting Eyes. 12. ASTM A500— Standard Specification for Cold - Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 13. ASTM A563— Standard Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts. 14. ASTM A653— Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy- Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 15. ASTM A666— Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold - Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 16. ASTM A780— Standard Practice for Repair of Damages and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings. 17. ASTM A786— Standard Specification for Hot - Rolled Carbon, Low - Alloy, High - Strength Low - Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. 18. ASTM B108—Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Permanent Mold Castings. 19. ASTM B209— Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Sheet and Plate. 20. ASTM B221— Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum - Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 21. ASTM B633— Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -3 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 22. ASTM C1107—Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic - Cement Grout (Nonshrink). 23. ASTM D1187— Standard Specification for Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 24. ASTM E488— Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 25. ASTM F436— Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers. 26. ASTM F568M— Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners. 27. ASTM F593— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 28. ASTM F594— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 29. ASTM F738M— Standard Specification for Style 1 Stainless Steel Metric Bolts, Screws, and Studs. 30. ASTM F836M— Standard Specification for Style 1 Stainless Steel Metric Nuts. 31. ASTM F879— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screws. 32. ASTM F1554— Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105 -ksi Yield Strength. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME B18.6.3— Machine Screws and Machine Screw Nuts. 2. ASME B18.6.7M—Metric Machine Screws. 3. ASME B18.2.1—Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch. 4. ASME B18.2.3.8M—Metric Hex Lag Screws. 5. ASME B18.6.1 —Wood Screws (Inch Series). 6. ASME B18.22.1—Plain Washers. 7. ASME B 18.22M— Metric Plain Washers. 8. ASME B18.21.1—Lock Washers (Inch Series). 9. ASME B18.21.2M —Lock Washers (Metric Series). D. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.1— Structural Welding Code - Steel. 2. AWS D1.2—Structural Welding Code – Aluminum. 3. AWS D1.3— Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel. 4. AWS D1.6— Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel. E. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) 1. EPA Method 24— Surface Coatings. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -4 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • • • • • F. Federal Regulations (FR) 1. 40 CFR 59 National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer and Commercial Products. G. Society for Protection Coatings (SSPC) 1. SSPC -PA1 —Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. 2. SSPC -SP6— Commercial Blast Cleaning. 3. SSPC -SPIO- -Near -White Blast Cleaning. 4. SSPC -Paint 20 —Zinc -Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type II, Organic). 5. SSPC -Paint 29 —Zinc Dust Sacrificial Primer, Performance- Based. 6. SSPC -Zone IA— Interior, Normally Dry. 7. SSPC -Zone 1B— Exterior, Normally Dry. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code — Steel. 2. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code — Aluminum. 3. AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code —Sheet Steel. 4. AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code — Stainless Steel. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Ladders: The Contractor shall provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. 03720- 045 -01 05500 -5 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 °F, ambient; 180 °F, material surfaces. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: The Contractor shall verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 Articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include but are not limited to manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -6 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • • • 2.02 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.03 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 1. Unless noted otherwise, steel that is not stainless steel shall be galvanized with a G90 coating conforming to ASTM A123/A123M. B. Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A666, Type 316L. C. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A276, Type 316L. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, cold - formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another 411 weight is indicated or required by structural loads. • 2.04 ALUMINUM ALLOY PRODUCTS A. Aluminum Sheet Plates: Conforming to ASTM B209 B. Aluminum Extrusions: Conforming to ASTM B221 ' C. Aluminum Castings: Conforming to ASTM B108 2.05 FASTENERS A. General: For all exterior applications and where fastening aluminum, provide Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners. Provide hot - dipped galvanized fasteners in all other applications in accordance with ASTM A153 unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. High - Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A325 with heavy hex nuts ASTM A563 and hardened carbon -steel washers ASTM F436. C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -7 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 D. Stainless -Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head annealed stainless -steel bolts, nuts, and flat washers; ASTM F593 for bolts and ASTM F594 for nuts, Alloy Group A4. E. Stainless Steel Socket Button and Flat Countersunk Head Cap Screws: ASTM F879. F. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. G. Eyebolts: ASTM A489. H. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). I. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). J. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1. K. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). L. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). M. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining without failure a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ASTM A27/A27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153/A153M. N. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with ability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc- plated to comply with ASTM B633, Class Fe /Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group (A4) stainless - steel bolts complying with ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M) and nuts complying with ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M). 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -8 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9. C. Zinc -Rich Primer: Complying with SSPC -Paint 20 or SSPC -Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 3.5 lb /gal or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Available Products: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer CM18 /19. b. Carboline Company; Carbozinc 621. c. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha -Coat 313. • d. International Coatings Limited; Interzinc 315 Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer. • e. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc -Rich Primer 97 -670. f. Sherwin- Williams Company (The); Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. g- Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme -Zinc 90 -97. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187 E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High- zinc - dust - content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC -Paint 20. F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory- packaged, ferrous- aggregate grout complying with ASTM C1107, specifically recommended by the manufacturer for heavy - duty loading applications. G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory- packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by the manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 03720- 045 -01 05500 -9 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 2.07 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal comers to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces, and straight edges. E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat- head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather so as to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. 03720- 045 -01 05500 -10 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • • • • • • I. Provide for anchorage of the type indicated and coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 inch by 1 -1/2 inches with a minimum 6 -inch embedment and 2 -inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.08 GRATINGS Design floor gratings to withstand a live load of 250 pounds per square foot for the span indicated, with a maximum deflection of L/240. A. Gray Cast Iron - Gratings: Conforming to ASTM A48/A48M. B. Metal Plank Gratings: Non -slip type, aluminum conforming to ASTM B209, 6061 T6, and steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, G90 galvanized. C. Metal Bar Gratings: Conforming to ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531. D. Aluminum grating material shall be aluminum alloy 6063 -T6 with a mill finish. Cross bars shall be attached to the bearing bars with interlocked swaged joints. The grating shall be Type BS by IKG Borden, Houston, TX; Type 19 SG -4 by Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH; Type 1954 by Seidelhuber Metal Products, San Carlos, CA; or equal. 2.09 PATTERNED FLOOR PLATES Design floor plates to withstand a live load of 250 pounds per square foot for the span indicated, with a maximum deflection of L/240. A. Steel Floor Plates: Conforming to ASTM A786/A786M, minimum 14 gauge, and with G90 galvanized coating. B. Aluminum Floor Plate: Conforming to ASTM B209, 6061 T6. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS A. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -11 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 B. Shelf and Relieving Angles: 1. Fabricate from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4 -inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and not more than 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support shelf/.relieving angles from back -up masonry and concrete. Align expansion joints in angles with indicated control and expansion joints in cavity wall exterior wythe. 3. Galvanize shelf angles. 4. Furnish wedge -type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast -in -place concrete or masonry. C. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work. 2. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 3. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in all locations. D. Steel Channels for Overhead Door Openings 1. Fabricate steel door frame channels from structural shapes of size and to dimensions indicated, fully welded together. 2. Galvanize frames and anchors in all locations. E. Cast -Metal Nosings: 1. Fabricate units of material, sizes, and configurations indicated. If not indicated, provide cast -iron units with an integral abrasive finish. Furnish in lengths as required to accurately fit each opening or conditions. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -12 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • • • IIIa. Cast units with an integral abrasive grit consisting of silicon carbide. • • 2. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as standard with the manufacturer. 3. Apply black asphaltic coating to concealed bottoms, sides, and edges of cast -iron units set into concrete. F. Comer Guards: Stainless steel; Thickness: Minimum 1/16 inch. 2.11 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: 1. ASTM A123/A123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A153/A153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc -Rich Primer: SSPC -SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC -SP 10 "Near White Metal Blast Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC -PA 1, Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel, for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -13 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 2.13 STAINLESS STEEL FINISHES A. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. B. Dull Satin Finish: No. 6. C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in -place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -14 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • • • • E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 3.02 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. The Contractor shall clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond - reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean the bottom surface of bearing plates. B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if they are protruding cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use non - shrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non - shrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING The Contractor shall do the following: A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC -PA 1 for touching up shop - painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 9. C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 05500 -15 METAL FABRICATIONS December 2013 • • • DIVISION 9 FINISHES • SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section includes materials for and application of painting and coating systems for the following surfaces: 1. Submerged metal. 2. Exposed metal. 3. Buried metal. 4. Concrete and masonry. 5. PVC, CPVC, and FRP. 6. Metal in contact with concrete. B. It does not include coating steel water tanks and reservoirs. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 03300, Cast -In -Place Concrete. B. Section 11310, Open Screw Pump Equipment C. Section 15075, Process Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. 13. Submit manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information: 1. Percent solids by volume. 2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thickness per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats. 3. Recommended surface preparation. 4. Recommended thinners. 5. Statement verifying that the specified prime coat is recommended by the manufacturer for use with the specified intermediate and finish coats. 03720 -045 -01 09900 -1 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 6. Application instructions including recommended equipment and temperature limitations. 7. Curing requirements and instructions. C. Submit color swatches. D. Submit certificate identifying the type and gradation of abrasives used for surface preparation. E. Submit material safety data sheets for each coating. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A780— Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings. 2. ASTM C501— Standard Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser. 3. ASTM D520— Standard Specification for Zinc Dust Pigment. 4. ASTM D522— Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. 5. ASTM D1002— Standard Test Method for Apparent Shear Strength of Single- Lap -Joint Adhesively Bonded Metal Specimens by Tension Loading (Metal -to- Metal). 6. ASTM D2240— Standard Test Method for Rubber Property — Durometer Hardness. 7. ASTM D2697— Standard Test Method for Volume Nonvolatile Matter in Clear or Pigmented Coatings. 8. ASTM D3734— Standard Specification for High -Flash Aromatic Naphthas. 9. ASTM D4060— Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -2 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • • • 10. ASTM D4138— Standard Practices for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive, Cross - Sectioning Means. 11. ASTM D4258— Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 12. ASTM D4260— Standard Practice for Liquid and Gelled Acid Etching of Concrete. 13. ASTM D4261— Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete Unit Masonry for Coating. 14. ASTM D4263— Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 15. ASTM D4787— Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates. 16. ASTM D6386— Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting. 17. ASTM D7091— Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non - Ferrous Metals. 18. ASTM E84— Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Association of Corrosion Engineers International (NACE) 1. NACE SP0188— Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates. C. Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC) 1. SSPC PA -1 —Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. 2. SSPC PA -2— Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gauges. 3. SSPC SP-1-----Solvent Cleaning. 4. SSPC SP -2 —Hand Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC SP -3 —Power Tool Cleaning. 6. SSPC SP -5 —White Metal Blast Cleaning. 7. SSPC SP -6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. 8. SSPC SP -7 —Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. 9. SSPC SP -10 —Near -White Blast Cleaning. 10. SSPC SP -11 —Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 11. SSPC SP -13— Surface Preparation of Concrete. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -3 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 D. US Department of Defense (MIL) 1. MIL -P- 21035 —Paint High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MOCK -UP (NOT USED) 1.12 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 PAINTING AND COATING SYSTEMS The following index lists the various painting and coating systems by service and generic type: IPAINT COATINGS SYSTEM INDEX No. Title Generic Coating Submerged Metal Coating Systems 4A. Submerged Metal, Raw Sewage 7. Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water Epoxy Exposed Metal Coating Systems 10. Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment High -build epoxy (two - coat system) with polyurethane topcoat 18. Exposed Metal, Organic Zinc Primer for Shop Coating and Field Touch -Up Organic zinc 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 09900-4 PAINTING AND COATING • • PAINT COATINGS SYSTEM INDEX No. Title J Generic Coating PVC, CPVC, and FRP Coating Systems 41. PVC, CPVC, and FRP, Ultraviolet Exposure or Color Coding. Polyurethane Coating Systems for Miscellaneous Metals 51. Insulate Aluminum (Insulation) from Concrete and Carbon Steel Bituminous 52. Exposed Metal, Galvanized Steel and Aluminum Synthetic resin 54. Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Steel Epoxy These systems are specified in detail in the following Paragraphs. For each coating, the required surface preparation, prime coat, intermediate coat (if required), topcoat, and coating thicknesses are described. Mil thicknesses shown are minimum dry-film thicknesses. A. Submerged Metal Coating Systems 1. System No. 4A— Submerged Metal —Raw Sewage: a. Service Conditions: For use with metal pipes or equipment (such as open screw pumps) immersed in raw water (nonpotable) or raw sewage and subjected to abrasive substances. b. Factory Surface Preparation and Shop - Applied Prime Coat: All fabricated carbon steel or cast iron components shall be solvent - cleaned SSPC -SP1. Components for submerged service shall have a near -white blast cleaning SSPC -SP10, and components for non - submerged service shall have a commercial blast cleaning SSPC- SP6. Components shall be factory- primed with a 2.5- to 3.5 -mil dry film thickness coat of Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane Primer. c. Field Touch -Up of Shop - Applied Prime Coat: Surfaces shall be pressure- washed to remove all grease, dirt, and contamination. Rusted and bare surfaces shall be power -tool cleaned per SSPC- SP3 and spot - primed with 3.0 to 5.0 mils dry film thickness coat of Tnemec Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline II. d. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series N69 Hi -Build Epoxoline II at 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT. e. Finish Coat: Tnemec Series 142 Epoxoline modified polyamine epoxy at 10.0 to 14.0 mils DFT. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -5 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 2. System No. 7— Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water: a. Type: Epoxy: 100% sbv Polyamine Epoxy with near "0" VOC. b. Service Conditions: For use with structures, valves, piping, or equipment immersed in potable or nonpotable water. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Abrasive blast per SSPC SP -10, Near Abrasive White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. Coating System: Apply the manufacturer's recommended number of coats to attain the specified minimum coating thickness. Products: Devoe Bar -Rust 233H; Tnemec N140; Sherwin - Williams Tank Clad HS B62 -80 Series/B60V80; Color of topcoat: white. Each coat shall be a different color than the one preceding it. Tnemec Series N140 Pota -Pox Plus Polyamidoamine epoxy at 6.0 to 8.0 mils /coat. Apply two (2) coats. Total system should not exceed 17 mils. B. Exposed Metal Coating Systems 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 1. System No. 10— Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment: a. Type: High -build epoxy finish coat having a minimum volume solids of 60 %, with an inorganic zinc prime coat and a pigmented polyurethane finish coat having a minimum volume solids of 52 %. b. Service Conditions: For use with metal structures or pipes subjected to water condensation, chemical fumes such as hydrogen sulfide, salt spray, and chemical contact. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Abrasive blast per SSPC- SP -10, Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. Prime Coat: Self - curing, two- component inorganic zinc -rich coating recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating with a high -build epoxy finish coat. Minimum zinc content shall be 12 pounds per gallon. Apply to a thickness of 3 mils. Products: Tnemec Series 90 -97; Devoe Catha -Coat 304 or 304V; Sherwin - Williams Zinc -Clad II Plus, B69VZ12/B69VZ13/B69D11 at 2.5 to 4.0 mils DFT; or equal. 09900 -6 PAINTING AND COATING • • • • • • e. Finish Coat: Tnemec Series 104; ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS; Sherwin- Williams Macropoxy 646 B58- 600/B58V600 at 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT; or equal; 5 mils. Film thickness 5.0 to 8.0 mils /coat. Minimum solids by volume should be 82 %. f. Finish Coat: Two - component pigmented acrylic or aliphatic polyurethane, minimum 70% sbv recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating a high -build epoxy coating. Apply to a thickness of at least 2 mils. Products: Tnemec Series 1075 ICI Devoe Devthane 379; Sherwin - Williams Hi- Solids Polyurethane B65 -300 Series/B60V30 at 2.5 to 4.0 mils DFT; or equal. 2. System No. 18— Exposed Metal Organic Zinc Primer for Shop Coating and Field Touch -Up: a. Type: Organic zinc primer having a minimum zinc content of 14 pounds per gallon. b. Service Conditions: For use as a shop- applied primer or field touch -up primer over inorganic zinc prime coatings on exposed metal. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent clean per SSPC -SP1 to remove contaminants from the surface. Abrasive blast per SSPC- SP -10, Near White Metal Blast Cleaning. d. Coating: Coating shall be of the two- or three - component converted epoxy, epoxy phenolic, or urethane type. Products: Tnemec 90 -97; International Interzinc 308; Ameron 68HS; ICI Devoe 313; Carboline 859; Sherwin - Williams Zinc -Clad III HS B69A100/B69D11/B69D11 at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT; PPG DurethaneTM MCZ 97 -679; or equal. Applied to a minimum dry- film thickness of 3 mils. Organic zinc primer shall be manufactured by the prime coat manufacturer. C. PVC, CPVC, and FRP Coating System 1. System No. 41 —PVC, CPVC, and FRP, Ultraviolet Exposure or Color Coding: a. Type: Epoxy primer with minimum volume solids of 54% and a pigmented polyurethane enamel having a minimum volume solids of 66 %. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -7 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 b. Service Conditions: Color coding of PVC or CPVC or FRP exposed to sunlight. c. Surface Preparation: Clean the surface per SSPC SP -1, Solvent Cleaning. Then, lightly abrade the surface with medium -grain sandpaper. d. Prime Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline; ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS; Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646 B58 Series/B58V600 at 5.0 to 8.0 mils DFT; or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 4 mils. e. Finish Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series 1075; ICI Devoe Devran 379; Sherwin - Williams Hi- Solids Polyurethane B65 -300 Series/B60V30 at 3.0 to 4.0 mils DFT; or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 3 mils. D. Coating Systems for Miscellaneous Metals 1. System No. 51— Insulate Aluminum (Insulation) from Concrete and Carbon Steel: a. Type: Bituminous paint having a minimum volume solids of 68% coal -tar pitch based. b. Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs, structural members or aluminum fabrications, in contact with concrete or carbon steel with this system. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam clean in accordance with SSPC SP -1; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast. d. Prime Coat: Apply synthetic resin or epoxy primer to metal surface before finish coats. Products: International Intervinux VTA528/529, or equal. No primer required for Carboline or Tnemec. e. Finish Coat: Tnemec 46 -465; or equal. Apply two coats to a minimum dry-film thickness of 8.0 to 12.0 mils /coat. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -8 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • • • • 2. System No. 52— Exposed Metal, Galvanized Steel and Aluminum: • • a. Type: Synthetic resin or epoxy primer. b. Service Conditions: Coat galvanized steel and aluminum surfaces with this system before applying topcoat. c. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Surfaces shall be flat with no protrusions. Remove high spots and tears in the galvanizing with hand and power grinders. Comply with ASTM D6386, Paragraph 5.2.1. Do not remove the galvanized coating below the specified thickness. Solvent clean galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM D6386, Paragraph 5.3.2. Then sweep blast as in ASTM D6386, Paragraph 5.4.1. Use one of the abrasive materials described in ASTM D6386, Paragraph 5.4.1. Surface preparation for weathered and partially weathered galvanized steel shall be in accordance with ASTM D6386, Paragraphs 6 and 7. Apply prime coating within 1 hour of the surface preparation. d. Surface Preparation of Aluminum: Solvent clean or steam clean aluminum surfaces as specified in SSPC SP -1; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast and follow with a chemical conversion coating per MIL -C -5541, Class 1A. e. Prime Coat: Tnemec Series N69 2.5 to 3.5 mils; ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS; Sherwin - Williams Macropoxy 646 B58 -600 Series/B58V600 at 5.0 to 8.0 mils DFT; or equal. Apply to a minimum thickness of 4 mils. f. Finish Coat: Epoxy and polyurethane as described in System No. 10. Do not include the inorganic zinc prime coat described in that system. 3. System No. 54— Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Steel: a. Type: High - solids epoxy or phenolic epoxy having minimum volume solids of 80% (ASTM D2697). b. Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs, structural members, or aluminum fabrications in contact with concrete or carbon steel with this system. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam cleaning as specified in SSPC SP -1; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -9 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 d. Coating System: Apply three or more coats of Tnemec 135; ICI Devoe Bar -Rust 233H; Sherwin- Williams Macropoxy B58 -600 Series/B58V600 at 5.0 to 8.0 mils DFT; or equal; 30 mils total. Maximum thickness of an individual coating shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. E. Abrasives for Surface Preparation 1. Abrasives used for preparation of ferrous (excluding stainless steel) surfaces shall be one of the following: a. 16- to 30- or 16- to 40 -mesh silica sand or mineral grit. b. 20- to 40 -mesh garnet. c. Crushed iron slag, 100% retained on No. 80 mesh. d. SAE Grade G -40 or G -50 iron or steel grit. 2. Abrasives used for preparation of stainless steel surfaces shall be 20- to 40 -mesh silicon carbide or aluminum oxide. 3. Abrasives used for preparation of copper and aluminum surfaces shall be one of the following: a. Crushed slag, 80 to 100 mesh. b. Very fine silica sand, 80 to 100 mesh. 4. Abrasives used for preparation of concrete and masonry surfaces shall be 16- to 30- or 16- to 40 -mesh silica sand. 5. In the above gradations, 100% of the material shall pass through the first stated sieve size and 100% shall be retained on the second stated sieve size. F. Organic Zinc Primer for Field Touch -Up and Shop Coating 1. Where shop- applied inorganic zinc primers cannot be used because of volatile organic compound (VOC) regulations, the organic zinc primer described in System No. 18 may be substituted for the specified inorganic zinc primers. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -10 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • • • • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Do not paint in the rain, wind, snow, mist, or fog or when steel or metal surface temperatures are less than 5 °F above the dew point. B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity is above 85 %. C. Do not paint when temperature of metal to be painted is above 120 °F. D. Do not apply alkyd, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic paints if air or surface temperature is below 40 °F or expected to be below 40 °F within 24 hours. E. Do not apply epoxy, acrylic latex, and polyurethane paints on an exterior or interior surface if air or surface temperature is below 60 °F or expected to drop below 60 °F in 24 hours. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION PROCEDURES A. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP -1. Use clean cloths and cleaning solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave a film or greasy residue on the cleaned surfaces before abrasive blasting. Powerwashing with a biodegradable degreaser is also acceptable. B. Remove weld spatter and weld slag from metal surfaces and grind smoothly rough welds, beads, peaked corners, and sharp edges including erection lugs in accordance with SSPC SP -2 and SSPC SP -3. Grind 0.020 inch (minimum) off the weld caps on pipe weld seams. Grind outside sharp corners, such as the outside edges of flanges, to a minimum radius of 1/4 inch. C. Do not abrasive blast or prepare more surface area in one day than can be coated in one day; prepare surfaces and apply coatings the same day. Remove sharp edges, burrs, and weld spatter. Prime all areas before rust bloom forms and within the same day. D. Do not abrasive blast PVC, CPVC, or FRP piping or equipment. Do not abrasive blast epoxy- or enamel- coated pipe that has already been factory coated, except to repair scratched or damaged coatings. E. For carbon steel, do not touch the surface between the time of abrasive blasting and the time the coating is applied. Apply coatings within 2 hours of blasting or before any rust bloom forms. 03720 -045 -01 09900 -11 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 F. Surface preparation shall conform to the SSPC specifications as follows: Solvent Cleaning SP -1 Hand Tool Cleaning SP -2 Power Tool Cleaning SP -3 White Metal Blast Cleaning SP -5 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP -6 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SP -7 Pickling SP -8 Near -White Blast Cleaning SP -10 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SP -11 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials by High- and Ultrahigh - Pressure Water Jetting Before Recoating SP -12 Surface Preparation of Concrete SP -13 G. Wherever the words "solvent cleaning," "hand tool cleaning," "wire brushing," or "blast cleaning" or similar words are used in these Specifications or in the paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable SSPC (Steel Structure Painting Council), surface preparation specifications listed above. H. Dust blasting is defined as cleaning the surface through the use of very fine abrasives, such as siliceous or mineral abrasives, 80 to 100 mesh. Apply a fine etch to the metal surface to clean the surface of any contamination or oxide and to provide a surface profile for the coating. I. Brush -off blasting of concrete and masonry surfaces is defined as opening subsurface holes and voids and etching the surface for a coating to bond. J. For carbon steel surfaces, after abrasive blast cleaning, the height of the surface profile shall be 2 to 3 mils. Verify the surface profile by measuring with an impresser tape acceptable to the Owner's Representative. Perform a minimum of one test per 100 square feet of surface area. Testing shall be witnessed by the Owner's Representative. The impresser tape used in the test shall be permanently marked with the date, time, and locations where the test was made. Test results shall be promptly presented to the Owner's Representative. K. Do not apply any part of a coating system before the Owner's Representative has reviewed the surface preparation. If coating has been applied without this review, 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -12 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • • • • if directed by the Owner's Representative, remove the applied coating by abrasive blasting and reapply the coat in accordance with this Specification. • • 3.03 ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING A. Use dry abrasive blast cleaning for metal surfaces. Do not use abrasives in automatic equipment that have become contaminated. When shop or field blast cleaning with handheld nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles. B. After abrasive blast cleaning and before coating is applied, dry clean surfaces to be coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting. Apply the specified primer or touch -up coating within an 8 -hour working day. Do not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces. Reclean any blast- cleaned surface not coated within the 8 -hour period before applying primer or touch -up coating. C. Keep the area of the work in a clean condition and do not permit blasting particles to accumulate and constitute a nuisance or hazard. D. During abrasive blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. Schedule blast cleaning and coating so that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill scale, etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces. 3.04 PROCEDURES FOR ITEMS HAVING SHOP - APPLIED PRIME COATS A. After applying primer to surfaces, allow coating to cure for a minimum of 2 hours before handling to minimize damage. B. When loading for shipment to the project site, use spacers and other protective devices to separate items to prevent damaging the shop - primed surfaces during transit and unloading. If wood spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from the shop - primed surfaces after separation. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure the loaded items and minimize damage to the shop - primed surfaces. C. Cover shop - primed items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit. D. Handle shop - primed items with care during unloading, installation, and erection operations to minimize damage. Do not place or store shop - primed items on the ground or on top of other work unless the ground or work is covered with a protective covering or tarpaulin. Place shop - primed items above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports. 03720 - 045-01 09900 -13 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 3.05 FIELD TOUCH -UP OF SHOP - APPLIED PRIME COATS A. Remove oil and grease surface contaminants on metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP -1. Use clean rags wetted with a degreasing solution, rinse with clean water, and wipe dry. B. Remove dust, dirt, salts, moisture, chalking primers, or other surface contaminants that will affect the adhesion or durability of the coating system. Use a high - pressure water blaster or scrub surfaces with a broom or brush wetted with a solution of tri- sodium phosphate, detergent, and water. Before applying intermediate or finish coats to inorganic zinc primers, remove any soluble zinc salts that have formed by scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush. Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water. C. Remove loose or peeling primer and other surface contaminants not easily removed by the previous cleaning methods in accordance with SSPC SP -7. Take care that the remaining primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. The remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with blast - cleaned edges feathered. D. Remove rust, scaling, or primer damaged by welding or during shipment, storage, and erection in accordance with SSPC SP -10. Take care that the remaining primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. Areas smaller than 1 square inch may be prepared in accordance with SSPC SP -11. The remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with cleaned edges feathered. E. Use repair procedures on damaged primer that protect adjacent primer. Blast cleaning may require the use of lower air pressure, smaller nozzles and abrasive particle sizes, short blast nozzle distance from surface, shielding, and/or masking. F. After abrasive blast cleaning of damaged and defective areas, remove dust, blast particles, and other debris by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming; then apply the specified touch -up coating. G. Surfaces that are shop primed with inorganic zinc primers shall receive a field touch -up of organic zinc primer as specified in System No. 18 to cover scratches or abraded areas. H. Other surfaces that are shop primed shall receive a field touch -up of the same primer used in the original prime coat. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -14 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • • • • • • 3.06 PAINTING SYSTEMS A. All materials of a specified painting system, including primer, intermediate, and finish coats, shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other additives shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the particular coating system. B. Deliver paints to the jobsite in the original, unopened containers. 3.07 PAINT STORAGE AND MIXING A. Store and mix materials only in areas designated for that purpose by the Owner's Representative. The area shall be well ventilated, with precautionary measures taken to prevent fire hazards. Post "No Smoking" signs. Storage and mixing areas shall be clean and free of rags, waste, and scrapings. Tightly close containers after each use. Store paint at an ambient temperature from 50 °F to 100 °F. B. Prepare multiple- component coatings using all of the contents of the container for each component as packaged by the paint manufacturer. Do not use partial batches. Do not use multiple- component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. Provide small quantity kits for touch -up painting and for painting other small areas. Mix only the components specified and furnished by the paint manufacturer. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. 3.08 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. Conform to the requirements of SSPC PA -1. Follow the recommendations of the coating manufacturer, including the selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions. B. Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at a uniform consistency during application. Power mix components. For multiple component materials, premix each component before combining. Apply each coating evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. Use a different shade or tint on succeeding coating applications to indicate coverage where possible. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes. C. Do not use thinners unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. If thinning is allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating material. Stir coating materials at all times when adding thinner. Do not flood the coating material surface with thinner before mixing. Do not reduce 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -15 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 coating materials more than is absolutely necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics and to obtain the specified dry -film thicknesses. D. Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast cleaned surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust to provide good visibility in working area before applying coating. Remove dust from coated surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming before applying succeeding coats. E. Apply coating systems to the specified minimum dry -film thicknesses as determined in accordance with SSPC PA -2. F. Apply primer immediately after blast cleaning and before any surface rusting occurs, or any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Before applying coating, re -clean surfaces that have surface colored or become moist by blast cleaning. G. Apply a brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces before applying the primer and finish coat. Apply the brush coat before and in conjunction with the spray coat application. Apply the spray coat over the brush coat. H. Before applying subsequent coats, allow the primer and intermediate coats to dry for the minimum curing time recommended by the manufacturer. In no case shall the time between coats exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. I. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat completely and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in applied shade or tint of colors. J. Applied coating systems shall be cured at 75 °F or higher for 48 hours. If temperature is lower than 75 °F, curing time shall be in accordance with printed recommendations of the manufacturer, unless otherwise allowed by the Owner's Representative. K. Assembled parts shall be disassembled sufficiently before painting or coating to ensure complete coverage by the required coating. 3.09 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED A. Do not paint the surfaces listed below unless otherwise noted in the drawings or in other Specification sections. Protect the following surfaces during the painting of adjacent areas: 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -16 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • • • • • 1. Concrete walkways. 2. Mortar- coated pipe and fittings. 3. Stainless steel. 4. Metal letters. 5. Glass. 6. Roofing. 7. Fencing. 8. Electrical fixtures except for factory coatings. 9. Nameplates. 10. Grease fittings. 11. Brass and copper, submerged. 12. Buried pipe, unless specifically required in the piping specifications. 13. Fiberglass items, unless specifically required in the FRP specifications. 14. Aluminum handrail, stairs, and grating. 3.10 PROTECTION OF SURFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. 3.11 SURFACES TO BE COATED A. The exact coating to be applied in any location is not designated by the descriptive phrases in the coating system titles such as "corrosive environment," "buried metal," or "submerged metal." Coat surfaces with the specific coating systems as described below: 1. Coat mechanical equipment, such as pumps, blowers, and clarifier mechanisms, as described in the various mechanical equipment specifications. The color of the finish coat shall be coordinated with the Owner. 2. Coat submerged steel and ductile iron piping and piping in wet wells as specified in System No. 7. 3. Coat valves as described below. Aboveground valves, or valves in vaults and structures, shall match the color of the connecting piping. 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -17 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 4. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete as specified in System No. 51. 5. Coat aboveground structural steel or structural steel located in vaults and structures as described with System No. 10. 6. Coat exposed indoor galvanized electrical conduit as specified in System No. 52. Color of finish coat shall be OSHA Safety Orange. 3.12 DRY -FILM THICKNESS TESTING A. Measure coating thickness specified for carbon steel surfaces with a magnetic - type dry-film thickness gauge in accordance with SSPC PA -2. Measure coating thickness specified for stainless steel, aluminum, and copper surfaces with an eddy - current type thickness gauge in accordance with ASTM D7091. Provide certification that the gauge has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past 6 months. Provide dry-film thickness gauge as manufactured by Mikrotest or Elcometer. B. Test the finish coat of metal surfaces (except zinc primer and galvanizing) for holidays and discontinuities with an electrical holiday detector, low- voltage, wet - sponge type. Provide measuring equipment. Provide certification that the gauge has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past 6 months. Provide detector as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor or K -D Bird Dog. C. Measure coating thickness specified for concrete or masonry surfaces in accordance with ASTM D4138. Test the finish coat of concrete and masonry surfaces in accordance with NACE SP0188 or ASTM D4787. Patch coatings at the points of thickness measurement or holiday detection. D. Check each coat for the correct dry-film thickness. Do not measure within 8 hours after application of the coating. E. For metal surfaces, make five separate spot measurements (average of three readings) spaced evenly over each 100 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be measured. Make three readings for each spot measurement of either the substrate or the paint. Move the probe or detector a distance of 1 to 3 inches for each new gauge reading. Discard any unusually high or low reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take the average (mean) of the three readings as the spot measurement. The average of five spot measurements for each such 100- square- foot area shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot measurement in any 100- square -foot area shall be less than 80% nor more than 120% of the specified thickness. One of three readings which are averaged to 03720 -045 -01 09900 -18 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • • • • produce each spot measurement may underrun by a greater amount as defined by SSPC PA -2. F For concrete surfaces, make five separate spot measurements spaced evenly over each 100 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be measured. The average of five spot measurements for each such 100- square -foot area shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot measurement in any 100- square -foot area shall be less than 80% nor more than 120% of the specified thickness. G. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative. 3.13 REPAIR OF IMPROPERLY COATED SURFACES A. If the item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean and topcoat the surface with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage. Sandblast or power -sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint, feathering the edges. Then prime and finish the coat in accordance with the Specifications. The work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections. 3.14 CLEANING A. During the work, remove discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at the end of each day's work. B. Thoroughly clean brushes and other application equipment at the end of each period of use and when changing to another paint or color. C. Upon completion of painting work, remove masking tape, tarps, and other protective materials, using care not to damage finished surfaces. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 09900 -19 PAINTING AND COATING March 2014 • DIVISION 11 • EQUIPMENT • • • • SECTION 11000 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section specifies general work requirements regarding the products and execution services that are specified in the Division 11 Sections incorporated in the Contract Documents. The requirements specified shall apply to all of the Division 11 Sections, unless noted otherwise. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Other Specifications Sections in the Contract Documents contain work that is related to the general work requirements specified in this Section. This related work includes but is not limited to the following Sections: 1. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. 2. Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling. 3. Section 01755, Equipment Testing and Startup. 4. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 5. Division 11, Equipment. 6. Division 13, Instrumentation. 7. Division 16, Electrical. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. The submittal contents for equipment, instrumentation, controls, and appurtenances specified in the Division 11 Sections shall contain the general information listed below. Additional submittal requirements are contained in the Division 11 Sections. 1. A list and description of all deviations from the Contract Documents. 2. A list of equipment and components on each drawing with each product identified by legend reference. Include product name, manufacturer, and model number. 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -1 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 3. Completely dimensioned plan, elevations and cross - sections of system equipment and sub - assemblies. 4. Shop and erection drawings showing details, anchor bolt locations, and field connections. 5. Manufacturer's equipment installation instructions. 6. Descriptive literature, technical bulletins, and catalog data sheets for all equipment and purchased sub - components. 7. Installation, operation, maintenance and start-up procedures. 8. Total equipment weight (while operating). 9. Drive mechanism torque rating and bearing life rating. 10. Motor data and catalog information. 11. Submit complete electrical drawings, schematics, and interconnecting wiring diagrams and schedules for the equipment control system, instrumentation, and control panel(s) showing numbered wiring terminals in the control panel conforming to NEMA ICS -1 -101. Identify field device terminals, wire number, wire sizes, control and power wire types, and interfaced elements. 12. Control panel construction and panel layout drawings. 13. Complete technical literature for all factory- applied paint systems. Clearly indicate the components to be coated and the corresponding paint system. 14. Manufacturers' descriptive literature, product specifications, and published details. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: The Contractor shall comply with construction requirements of State, County, and other local political subdivision 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -2 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • • specifications as may exceed the requirements of the codes, standards, and approving bodies referenced in this Section: 1. NFPA Standards: The Contractor shall comply with requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards referenced in the various Specifications Sections and as directly appropriate to the work and workmanship. 2. Electrical Requirements: The Contractor shall comply with requirements for both the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Listings, Labels, and Approvals and the National Electrical Manufacturers' Associations (NEMA) Stamps or Seals as applicable to electrical equipment or apparatus forming parts of the Mechanical Equipment. B. Certificates and Permits: Upon completion of work and before final payment, the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer formal certification of final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction over the work in this project and secure required permits, if any, from such authorities. Additionally, the Contractor shall prepare any detailed diagrams and drawings that are required by those authorities having jurisdiction over the work of this project at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Source Quality Control: Products used throughout these Specifications and as indicated on the Drawings shall be from companies having established reputations in the manufacture of the particular materials, equipment, or apparatus specified. Such products may be of their own make or products of others for which they assume full responsibility when used in finished products which are not manufactured completely by them and with replacement parts available. D. Products: The equipment specified in Division 11 was based on the latest models that were available from the specified equipment manufacturers at the time the Contract Documents were developed. If any equipment models specified in the Division 11 Sections have been discontinued or will be discontinued within 1 year after the bid date, the Contractor shall furnish and install the latest and most recent equipment model at no additional cost to the Owner. E. For each category of materials and equipment (Products) specified in the Division 11 Sections, the Contractor shall provide Products of the same manufacturer and type. F. Equipment Selection: The Contractor may furnish equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions, capacities, and ratings provided such proposed equipment is approved by the Engineer in writing. Upon receiving the Engineer's approval to provide such equipment, the Contractor shall furnish the 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -3 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 connecting mechanical and electrical services including but not limited to circuit breakers, conduit, increased control panel enclosure size, motors, bases, and any other electrical equipment needed to accommodate the higher electrical characteristics at no additional cost to the Owner. G. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified in Division 11, the Contractor shall furnish and install equipment that meets or exceeds the specified design and commissioning requirements (no exceptions) as determined by the Engineer. H. All the equipment specified in the Contract Documents shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. The manufacturer of each piece of equipment described in the Division 11 Sections shall meet the following requirements, unless noted otherwise: 1. Have a record of operation, manufacturing and servicing the items specified in the Division 11 Sections for a minimum of 10 years before the Bid Date. 2. Have a minimum of five installations of equipment similar to that specified in this Section at municipal wastewater treatment facilities in Florida before the bid date. 3. Have been in business for at least the 10 consecutive years before the Bid Date. 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -4 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • B. If the equipment manufacturer that the Contractor proposes to furnish and install the equipment described in the Division 11 specifications does not meet these qualifications and is not specified in the Contract Documents, the Engineer reserves the right to reject the equipment from this manufacturer for use on this project. Any costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of providing equipment from a manufacturer that does not meet the qualifications described in this Section shall not be incurred by the Owner. C. The Contractor shall furnish documentation that the manufacturer meets these qualifications as part of the submittals specified in Section 01330. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED)' 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts 1. The Contractor shall furnish the spare parts specified in the Division 11 Sections. The Contractor shall also submit a list of recommended spare parts, special tools, and lubricants for each equipment item. The list shall include contact information for local sources for supply of all parts and professional service. 1.12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED) L13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.14 PATENTS AND LICENSES (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS A. All motors identified in Division 11 shall be furnished and installed under Division 11 and in accordance with Division 16. 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -5 GENERAL. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 2.02 CONTROLS A. General 1. All control panels specified in the Division 11 Sections shall be furnished and installed under Division 11 and in accordance with Divisions 13 and 16. 2. The Contractor shall furnish and install controls designed to operate on 120 -volt, single - phase, 60 Hertz electric service unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall furnish and install 120 -volt step -down voltage transformers as specified in Division 16 in each control panel as required. 3. The Contractor shall furnish and install elapsed time meters in each control panel for each piece of motor - driven equipment being controlled by that control panel. All elapsed -time meters shall be furnished and installed in accordance with Division 16. 4. All control panels shall be furnished with a main circuit breaker to enable /disable electric service to the panelboard. 5. All control panels that will annunciate a local and/or remote alarm shall be furnished with an ALARM ACKNOWLEDGE reset pushbutton switch (momentary contact) wired to each alarm contact. 6. All indicating lamps in each control panel shall be furnished in accordance with the color -coded scheme: a. ON indicating lamps: Green. b. OFF indicating lamps: Red. c. Alarm indicating lamps: Amber. d. POWER ON indicating lamp: White. 7. Provide a heater inside of each control panel enclosure to prevent condensation. Heater size shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 8. The face of each control panel shall be installed so it is facing north whenever possible, or provided with a sunshield when not possible. 03720- 045 -01 11000 -6 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • 2.03 FLOAT SWITCHES A. Float switches shall be of the suspended type with polypropylene or PVC body. Units shall have an integral electrical cable with two #19 AWG stranded conductors. Switches shall be pilot duty, normally open or normally closed, as required for application. Switches shall be suitable for use with intrinsically safe circuits. Each switch shall be supported from an AISI Type 316 stainless steel cable support bracket with individual stainless steel Kellems grip strain relief supports. Each switch shall be provided with sufficient cable length to extend from the float switch to the final termination point at the pump control panel with an additional 18 inches of looped cable. The float switch cables shall be bundled to an AISI Type 316 stainless steel cable with heavy -duty nylon strap wire ties. The upper end of the stainless steel cable shall be attached to the cable support bracket and the lower end attached to a 5 -pound (minimum) cable weight. The cable weight shall be firmly attached to the cable and shall be constructed of noncorrosive metal and/or materials. Float switches and cables shall be intrinsically safe when used in classified locations. 2.04 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING SYSTEMS A. All anchoring systems including, but not limited to, expansion anchors, adhesive anchors, anchor bolts, cinch anchors, and screws that are required to install the equipment and appurtenances specified in the Division 11 Specifications shall be AISI Type 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment anchoring systems in accordance with Sections 03930 and 05500. 2.05 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES A. The Contractor shall provide engraved laminated phenolic nameplates with white legend and black field that provides the following information for each piece of equipment described in the Division 11 Specifications. 1. Equipment Description (i.e., Screw Pump No. 1, etc.). 2. Equipment Identification Label No. B. Letter height on each nameplate shall not be less than 3/34 inch. Nameplates shall be factory drilled for fasteners. Secure nameplates to equipment or nearby wall using AISI Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners. The locations of each nameplate shall be coordinated with the Owner and approved by the Owner before their installation. 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -7 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 C. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval for the nameplate information for each equipment item described in the Division 11 Specifications before ordering these nameplates from the manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: The Contractor shall install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and approved submittals at the locations shown on the Drawings. If the equipment locations shown on the Drawings are in conflict with the manufacturer's recommendations or will interfere with the installation or operation of any other item indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall relocate this equipment and provide the necessary appurtenances to install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall not install any equipment at locations not in accordance with the Contract Documents or approved submittals. B. The Contractor shall install equipment, slabs, walls level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. C. The Contractor shall apply an anti -seize compound to threaded fasteners of equipment components that require removal, replacement, or adjustment as part of any maintenance or inspection procedure. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install the required oil and grease for initial operation in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Provide means of oil lubrication for bearings and other metallic parts in sliding contact. Use alemite industrial type fittings except where otherwise specified. The Contractor shall also perform the following work: 1. Locate lubrication points on equipment readily accessible without the necessity of removing covers, plates, housings or guards, or without creating safety hazards at installed equipment elevations. 2. The Contractor shall exhaust pressure - lubricated units to the atmosphere to prevent excessive greasing. 3. The Contractor shall extend grease fittings to locations that are readily accessible to the Owner. The Contractor shall coordinate the location of these grease fittings with the Owner before their installation. 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -8 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • • F. The Contractor shall furnish and apply touch -up paint to any equipment's factory painting finish that is chipped or damaged during installation. All factory- finish touch -up paint shall be mutually compatible with the factory finish on the equipment and shall be furnished by the manufacturer of the equipment to be touched up in the field. G. If equipment mounting heights are not shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall install that piece of equipment to provide the maximum amount of headroom (defined as the distance from the bottom of the structure to the top of finished floor or grade), as possible. In such an instance, the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval for this mounting location before installing that piece of equipment in the field. H. The Contractor shall furnish and install all mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of the equipment components. The Contractor shall connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. 3.02 FIELD TESTING A. General: The Contractor shall provide services of a factory- authorized service representative to perform, approve, and certify the field testing specified in this Section. Field testing shall generally consist of performing the pre - startup and startup tests as specified in the Division 11 Specifications and the final mechanical performance test specified in this Section. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to perform factory testing on equipment items before the Engineer approves their use for this project. The Contractor shall refer to the Division 11 Specifications regarding equipment shop testing requirements. B. The Contractor shall adhere to the following requirements regarding the field testing to be provided for this project: 1. The service representative shall be employed by the manufacturer of the equipment specified at the time field testing is being performed. The service representative shall be authorized by the factory to perform the field testing specified in Division 11. Upon request by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit a letter from a company officer of the equipment manufacturer stating that the service representative performing the field testing is authorized by the manufacturer. 2. Before scheduling each field test with the equipment manufacturer, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and Engineer to obtain a list of dates that both parties would be available to attend the testing. The 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -9 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer of the field testing dates no less than 14 calendar days before the date of the field test. 3. If directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall perform a second pre - startup and/or startup test, in accordance with the procedures specified in the Division 11 Sections, at no additional cost to the Owner if the original pre - startup and/or startup test did not pass because of any work that was deemed by the Engineer to be non - compliant with the Contract Documents and/or manufacturer's recommendations. 4. The Contractor shall only perform startup testing after the Contractor has reached Substantial Completion for the project as defined in the Agreement and General Conditions. 5. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and remove any temporary piping, valves, appurtenances, and equipment necessary to perform the pre - startup and startup testing to the Engineer's satisfaction. 6. All field testing shall be performed Monday through Friday at the project site, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 7. The duration that the manufacturer's representative is required to be onsite to perform the pre - startup and startup training is specified in the Division 11 Sections. C. Operating Costs 1. Costs for Pre - startup and Startup Testing: The Contractor shall include in the Contract Price the following operating costs for satisfactorily completing the Initial Mechanical Performance Tests on equipment being tested: a. Lubricating grease. b. Lubricating oils. c. Such other materials or utilities not specifically identified in this Section, but required to conduct the pre - startup and startup testing. D. The intent of the field testing for each equipment item specified in the Division 11 Sections is provided in this Section. If the individual equipment field testing procedures specified in the Division 11 are not sufficient to obtain a Manufacturer's Certification or to demonstrate compliance with the Contract 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -10 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • Documents, the Contractor shall perform these additional field test procedures at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Pre - startup Testing: Upon the Contractor's completion of the installation and adjustment of the equipment; the Contractor, with his own forces and with the manufacturer's representative(s), shall demonstrate to the Engineer's satisfaction that the equipment has been furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's recommendations. a. The Contractor shall repair any equipment items that do not pass the pre - startup test, as identified by the Engineer and/or manufacturer's representative, to the satisfaction of the Engineer before performing the startup testing for that equipment. 2. Startup Testing: Upon successful completion of the pre - startup testing, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the mechanical performance and controls of each equipment item, when operated in accordance with the design intent indicated by the Contract Documents, are satisfactory to the Owner and Engineer. a. Startup testing shall be performed with each equipment item and associated treatment structure simulated under similar operating conditions as the final mechanical performance testing specified in this Section. For equipment that will operate while being submerged as shown on the Drawings, the Contractor shall fill the respective treatment structure to its maximum water surface with reclaimed water for wastewater systems or potable water for water systems and perform startup testing while that equipment is submerged. The Contractor shall not use wastewater to fill any treatment structures for startup testing. b. After the startup testing procedures specified in the Division 11 Sections have been completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the Contractor shall operate that equipment for one successful continuous 72 -hour period without assistance from the Owner as a condition of startup testing. If the equipment needs to be taken out of service for repair during this 72 -hour period because it not operating in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, this operating period shall cease. A new operating period will not begin until the equipment has been operating in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's recommendations for at least 72 consecutive hours. The Contractor shall furnish any additional supervision or provisions necessary to verify that each 03720- 045 -01 11000 -11 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 equipment item was successfully operated during this 72 -hour operating period. c. Upon completion of the startup test, the Contractor shall dewater each treatment and storage structure in accordance with local and State regulations and in a manner that is satisfactory to the Owner and Engineer. 3. Final Mechanical Performance Testing: The Contractor shall perform final mechanical performance testing of the equipment specified in the Division 11 Sections once the following conditions have been satisfied: a. The Contractor has successfully completed the pre - startup and startup testing requirements specified in the Division 11 Sections. b. The Contractor has performed the training services specified in this Section. c. The Contractor has procured all of the required permits for each building and treatment structure within the project site. d. The Engineer has received and approved all of the manufacturer's certifications of compliance, warranties, and operation and maintenance manuals for all required items as specified in the Contract Documents. e. The intent of the final mechanical performance test is for the entire facility to be operated by the Owner for a continuous 30 -day period while the facility is in operation. During this 30 -day testing period, the Contractor shall furnish personnel who shall be on -site as needed and available at all times 24 hours per day during the final mechanical performance test. Personnel shall be competent in the troubleshooting and repair of the equipment and related electrical and mechanical systems specified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor's electricians and mechanical technicians shall be on -site as needed (minimum 8 hours per week) and available 24 hours per day to assist with this testing. If the final mechanical performance testing needs to be stopped and suspended due to equipment not operating in accordance with the design intent of the Contract Documents as determined by the Engineer, the following conditions shall apply: f. The Contractor shall repair and troubleshoot these items immediately at no additional cost to the Owner. 03720- 045 -01 11000 -12 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • g. The 30 -day period for the final mechanical performance testing will start over (i.e., be reset to zero hours). h. Upon restarting the final mechanical performance testing, the Contractor shall furnish the appropriate personnel defined above on -site as needed and available (minimum 8 hours /week) for 24 hours per day during the 30 -day period at no additional cost to the Owner even though the total duration of the final mechanical performance testing (including restarts), may exceed 30 days. The final mechanical performance test shall end when the Engineer determines that all of the equipment and related systems are operating in accordance with the design intent of the Contract Documents and all deficiencies that hinder the normal day -to -day operation of the facility have been corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor in writing when the final mechanical performance testing has been successfully completed. 3.03 TRAINING SERVICES A. Upon completion of the pre - startup and startup testing and before the final mechanical performance testing, the manufacturer of the equipment specified in the Division 11, 13, and 15 Sections shall provide an authorized representative to train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment. The representative shall provide additional onsite startup and troubleshooting services during this training upon request by the Engineer or Owner while performing these training services. The duration of the training services for each equipment item are specified in the Division 11 Sections. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATIONS OF COMPLIANCE A. Upon successful completion of the pre - startup testing, startup testing, and training services specified in this Section, the Contractor shall obtain the equipment manufacturer's certification that the equipment specified in the respective Division 11 Sections has been installed, adjusted, and tested in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with Manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance and Equipment Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation Testing and Instruction for each specified equipment item before performing the final mechanical performance testing specified in this Section. 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -13 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE OWNER EQPT SERIAL NO: EQPT TAG NO: EQPT /SYSTEM: PROJECT NO: SPEC. SECTION: I hereby certify that the above - referenced equipment/system has been: (Check Applicable) Installed in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Inspected, checked, and adjusted. Serviced with proper initial lubricants. Electrical and mechanical connection meet quality and safety standards. All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed. Comments: System has been performance tested, and meets or exceeds specified performance requirements (when complete system of one manufacturer). I, the undersigned Manufacturer's Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate his equipment, and (iii) authorize the make recommendations required to assure that the equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and operational, except as may be otherwise indicated herein. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate. Date: , 20 Manufacturer: By Manufacturer's Authorized Representative: (Authorized Signature) 03720 - 045 -01 11000 -14 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS December 2013 • • • • EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION TESTING AND INSTRUCTION OWNER City of Clearwater PROJECT Screw Lift Station Upgrades, Northeast Water Reclamation Facility CONTRACT NO. 12- 0017 -UT Jones Edmunds No. 03720 - 045 -01 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION SECTION EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION I , Authorized representative of (Print Name) hereby CERTIFY that (Print Manufacturer's Name) (Print equipment name and model with serial No.) Installed for the subject project has have been installed in a satisfactory manner, has have been satisfactorily tested, is /are ready for operation, and that Owner assigned operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the units on Date: Time: CERTIFIED BY: DATE: (Signature of Manufacturer's Representative) OWNER'S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTION I/We the undersigned, authorized representatives of the and/or Plant Operating Personnel have received classroom and hands on instruction on the operation, lubrication, and maintenance of the subject equipment and am are prepared to assume normal operational responsibility for the equipment: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 11000 -15 DATE: DATE: DATE: GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS • • SECTION 11310 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install, place in operation, and field -test open screw pumps, motors, and control systems as specified in these Specifications. B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required but do not cover all details, which will vary with the requirements of the equipment application. The Specifications are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, shop testing, delivery, complete installation, and field- testing of all materials, equipment, and appurtenances for the complete pumping systems as specified in this Section, whether specifically mentioned in these Specifications or not. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements sections apply to work of this Section. B. Division 3, concrete work and the installation of anchor bolts; however, anchor bolts for these units shall be furnished under this Section. C. Division 13, instrumentation work, except as specified in this Section. D. Division 16, Electrical, except as specified in this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 1. Certified shop and erection drawings showing all important details of construction, dimensions, and anchor bolt locations. The Contractor shall field- verify all elevations, angles, dimensions, clearances, etc., required by 11310 -1 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT the manufacturer and as necessary to complete the work. These measurements shall be included on the certified shop and erection drawings. 2. Descriptive literature, bulletins, and/or catalogs of the equipment. 3. Data on the characteristics and performance of each pump. Data shall include guaranteed performance curves that show that they meet the specified requirements for capacity based on screw diameter, number of flights, angle of inclination, fill depth, efficiency, and horsepower. Curves shall be submitted on 8- 1 /2 -by -11 -inch sheets, at as large a scale as practical. Curves shall be plotted from no flow to the maximum pump capacity. Catalog sheets showing a family of curves shall not be acceptable. 4. Complete master wiring diagrams, elementary or control schematics including coordination with other electrical control devices such as the pump control system, and suitable outline drawings shall be furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture. Provide suitable outline drawings showing such details as are necessary to facilitate interconnections with other equipment. Standard pre - printed sheets or drawings simply marked to indicate applicability to this Contract shall not be acceptable. Refer to the Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings for the control wiring diagrams for the pump motors. 5. A complete total bill of materials of all equipment. 6. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts to be supplied in addition to those specified in Article 1.11, with the manufacturer's current price for each item. Include gaskets, packing, etc. on the list. List bearings by the bearing manufacturer's numbers only. 7. Complete motor and drive data. C. Test Reports to be Submitted 1. Description of test procedures and equipment. 2. Copies of all test results, as specified in Parts 2 and 3 of this Section. D. Complete operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for all equipment specified in this Section in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 03720 -045 -01 March 2014 11310 -2 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • • • E. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's Certificate of Installation, Testing, and Instruction as specified in Division 1. F. If it is impossible to conform to certain details of the Specifications due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all non - conforming aspects. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) B. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings D. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A276— Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes 3. ASTM A325 -10 Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. E. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) F. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. ANSI /AWS D1.1— Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. QC1— Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. G. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) H. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) J. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -3 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. To ensure unity of responsibility, the pumps, motors, and drives shall be furnished and coordinated by the pump manufacturer. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the satisfactory installation and operation of the entire pumping systems including pumps, motors, drives, and controls as specified. 2. The equipment covered by these Specifications shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization having long experience in the production of such equipment. The pumps furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. 3. All equipment furnished under this Specification shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified in this Section for a minimum of 5 years. 4. The manufacturer shall be fully responsible for the design, arrangement, and operation of all connected rotating components of the assembled pumping unit to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur at any speed within the specified operating range. B. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 1. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent and experienced factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper installation, operation, and maintenance of the equipment for no less than two 8 -hour days (exclusive of travel time), in two separate visits, to inspect the installed equipment, perform an initial test run, conduct final performance testing, and provide operating and maintenance instructions to the plant personnel. a. The first visit shall be for checking and inspecting the equipment after it is installed. b. The second visit shall be to perform the initial test run, conduct final performance testing, and provide operator training. 2. At least one of the 2 days shall be allocated solely to the instruction of plant personnel in operation and maintenance of the equipment. This 11310 -4 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • • • instruction period shall be scheduled with the Owner at least 10 days in advance and shall take place before pump station start -up and acceptance by the Owner. The final approved copies of operation and maintenance manuals must have been delivered to the Engineer before the instruction period is scheduled with the Owner. 3. The Contractor shall videotape, in a digital format, all training provided by. the manufacturer's representative. The videotape(s) or other electronic media shall become the property of the Owner. 4. If there are difficulties in operating the equipment due to the manufacturer's fabrication or the Contractor's installation, additional service shall be provided at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. All equipment supplied under this Section shall be warranted for 1 year by the Contractor and the manufacturer. The Warranty period shall begin as outlined in the General Conditions and Division 1. C. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design, and materials. If any part of the equipment fails during the warranty period, it shall be replaced and the unit(s) restored to service at no expense to the Owner. D. The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. E. Refer to the General Conditions and Division 1 for additional warranty requirements. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in the Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. All equipment and parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -5 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT C. Factory- assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the Engineer. D. Finished surfaces of all exposed surfaces shall be protected by wooden blanks, strongly built and securely bolted. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its contents. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practice and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified in this Section for a minimum of 5 years. C. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract price or Time. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Testing shall be performed as specified in Part 2 and Part 3 of these Specifications. 1.11 MAINTENANCE A. Spare Parts 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 1. The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts in accordance with the requirements of Section 01600: a. One set of lower bearing seals. b. One grease -pump pumping element kit. 11310 -6 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • • • 2. Spare parts shall be individually boxed with the project name and part number clearly identified on each individual box. All spare parts shall be shipped in a separate crate and clearly labeled. Spare parts shall be stored indoors by the Contractor in a temperature- controlled environment. B. Special Tools 1. The Contractor shall furnish one set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment. 2. Tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate the equipment for which the tools are intended. 1.12 SYS I'EM DESCRIPTION A. All of the equipment included in this Section is intended to be standard for open screw pump applications. B. The open screw pumps shall be as described in Table 11310 -1 of these Specifications. C. Pumps shall be capable of successful operation without motor overload and without excessive vibration. Table 11310 -1 Screw Pump Design Requirements Number of Units Base Bid: 4 Additive Alternate 1: 1 Type of Drive Constant Speed Pump Capacity 22,153 -gpm Hydraulic Lift') 13.45 -foot Angle of InclinationW'W 30- degrees Pump Diameter 84 -inch Number of Flights 3 Flight Thickness 0.313 -inch Torque Tube Diameter 42 -inch Torque Tube Wall Thickness 0.375 -inch Minimum Lower Bearing Diameter 8.75 -inch Minimum Upper Bearing Diameter 9 -inch Maximum Rotational Speed 31 -rpm Minimum Speed Reducer Torque Rating 315,782- in -lbs Motor Size 125 -hp Electrical Power Characteristics 460V /60Hz/3ph Motor and Solenoid Valve Electrical Classification Non- Hazardous "The Contractor shall field- verify the dimensions as directed by the pump manufacturer and include the dimensions in the shop drawings. 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -7 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT 1.13 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. The manufacturer shall provide Operation and Maintenance manuals for the specific equipment with appropriate model numbers, pump curves, and motor data specific for this project. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. The pumping units required under this Section shall be complete including pumps and motors with proper alignment and balancing of the individual units. All parts shall be designed and proportioned to have liberal strength, stability, and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the service to be performed. Ample room for inspection, repairs, and adjustment shall be provided. B. Pumps and drives shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position. All necessary bolts, nuts, and washers shall be furnished by the Contractor. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be ASTM A276 Type 302 stainless steel. C. Each equipment item shall be furnished with a stainless steel nameplate (with embossed data) securely mounted to the body of the equipment. At a minimum, the nameplate for the pumps shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, rated flow capacity, speed, and all other pertinent data. At a minimum, nameplates for motors shall include the manufacturer's name and model number, serial number, horsepower, speed, input voltage, amps, number of cycles, and power and service factors. D. All working parts of the pumps, motors, and drives, such as bearings, wearing rings, shaft, sleeves, etc., shall be standard dimensions built to limit gauges or formed to templates so that parts will be interchangeable between like units and so that the Owner may, at any time in the future, obtain replacement and repair parts for those furnished in the original machines. All parts shall be properly stamped for identification and location in the machines as shown on the assembly drawings in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals furnished. E. The nameplate ratings of the motors shall not be exceeded nor shall the design service factor be reduced when the pump is operating at any point on its characteristic curve. 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -8 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • F. Mechanical equipment, including drives and electric motors, shall be supplied and installed in accordance with applicable OSHA regulations. • • G. Each screw pump shall be provided with a feature to prevent backspin. 2.02 PUMPS A. General 1. The pumps shall be of the open screw type designed to pump raw wastewater. 2. The pumps shall be as manufactured by the Lakeside Equipment Corporation of Bartlett, Illinois, and shall meet the detailed hydraulic, efficiency, and mechanical requirements specified in this Section. Alternate manufacturers shall not be allowed. B. Performance Requirements 1. When operating at the maximum output speed of the motor, each pump shall have a characteristic performance curve that meets all the minimum conditions listed in Table 11310 -1. The pumps and drive motors shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under the full range of conditions as defined by Table 11310 -1. The primary pump capacity, head, and efficiency defined in Table 11310 -1 shall be the "design point." 2. With the pumping units operating at full motor speed, the maximum brake horsepower required by the pumps shall not exceed the maximum horsepower listed in Table 11310 -1. If the pumping units require more than the maximum horsepower listed in Table 11310 -1 at the motor output shaft at any full motor speed operation point, they will be rejected. 2.03 SPIRAL SCREW A. Spiral screw shall be fabricated of ASTM A36 steel. Each spiral screw shall have an outside diameter as noted in Table 11310 -1 with the number of flights as noted in Table 11310 -1. Flights shall be die formed with a 1:1 pitch -to- diameter ratio and shall have a minimum thickness as noted in Table 11310 -1. Flights shall be helical shaped and continuously welded on both sides to the torque tube. There shall be no more than two flight butt welds per pitch, and all flight butt welds shall be full penetration joints. The screw shall be designed to rotate counter- clockwise when viewed from the lower bearing end up toward the drive assembly. 03720 -045 -01 March 2014 11310 -9 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT B. Each torque tube shall have a minimum diameter as noted in Table 11310 -1 with a minimum wall thickness as noted in Table 11310 -1 so that screw deflection shall not be greater than the bearing center distance divided by 2,000. Calculations for deflection and bearing loads shall be based on the dead weight of the screw plus the full weight of liquid being pumped. Decreased loading from buoyance effects shall not be considered in the design calculations. C. The torque tube shall be sealed watertight with a welded steel plate at each end. All surfaces of the end plates mating with the bolted stub shafts shall be finish - machined while the pump is supported between centers in a lathe after welding to the support tube and after all flight welding is complete to ensure alignment and parallelism. D. A solid steel upper drive shaft and lower stub shaft fitted with machine faced steel plate flange shall be fastened to the upper and lower ends of the fabricated spiral screw with ASTM A325 high - strength bolts. E. The screw shall be placed in a lathe, and the flights shall be ground to a true radius after fabrication. 2.04 LOWER BEARING ASSEMBLY A. The lower bearing assembly shall be a cam -type with a pressure - grease- lubricated bronze sleeve bearing pressed onto the shaft and shall carry the radial load of the screw. Lower bearing nominal diameter shall be as noted in Table 11310 -1. No thrust load shall be carried by the lower bearing. B. The bronze sleeve shall rotate with the lower stub shaft in a bearing housing containing a minimum of two spring - loaded lip seals at the top of the bearing assembly. The seals shall be arranged so that one seal excludes wastewater and contaminants from the bearing and the other holds the grease in the bearing. The use of less than two lip seals shall not be acceptable. The seals shall ride on an AISI Type 304 replaceable wear sleeve. C. The bearing assembly shall permit precise angular (vertical) and lateral (horizontal) field adjustment to eliminate misalignment between the upper and lower bearings without the use of shims. Bearing assembly shall accommodate all static and operating deflections of the screw. Bearings with fixed or rigid shafts and housings shall not be acceptable. D. The bearing assembly shall be supplied with a split non - rotating shield installed between the housing and rotating screw for operation of the shaft and seals. 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -10 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • • • E. The bearing assembly shall accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of the screw within the bearing housing on fully lubricated surfaces not subject to corrosion or seizure. F. The bottom of the bearing housing shall be fitted with an inspection plate that can be removed for inspection of the lower bearing without disassembly of the lower stub shaft or bearing housing. G. The use of roller or ball bearings shall not be acceptable. H. There shall be a flow through grease system with grease entering the lower part of the housing and passing across the full face of the bearing sleeve to the upper seals, then to a grease collection container for confirmation the bottom bearing is receiving grease from the automatic lubrication system. 2.05 UPPER BEARING ASSEMBLY A. The upper stub shaft shall be a one -piece fabricated steel or forged steel design. Two -piece stub shaft designs (shaft and mating flange) shall not be acceptable for this project. B. The upper stub shaft shall extend through a grease- lubricated upper bearing assembly that shall consists of a split housing fitted with dual bearings, lower spring loaded lip seal, bearing spacer, and upper spring loaded lip seal. Upper bearing nominal diameter shall be as noted in Table 11310 -1. C. All of the thrust load from the pump shall be carried by a spherical thrust -type bearing assembly, and the upper screw pump radial load shall be carried by a spherical roller bearing. A single dual - purpose bearing shall not be acceptable. D. The two bearings (radial and thrust) shall be positioned in the bearing housing so that the pressure center of the thrust bearing and radial bearing intersects the axis of the screw at the same point to provide true self - alignment in all planes. E. Both radial and thrust bearings shall be rated at a minimum of 100,000 hours AFBMA L10 theoretical design life, based on the dead weight of the screw plus the full weight of the liquid being pumped. F. Upper stub shaft shall be grooved and positively locked into the upper bearing assembly by a split collar and locking halter ring. Use of threaded nuts to lock bearings and shafts for support of thrust loading shall not be acceptable. 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -11 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT G. A split- bearing housing shall be provided to allow removal of the cover for inspection of the bearings without removing the stub shaft or the entire bearing assembly. 2.06 DRIVE ASSEMBLY A. The drive assembly shall be designed and constructed for a maximum screw rotational speed as noted in Table 11310 -1. The drive assembly shall consist of a parallel -shaft speed reducer, belts, sheaves, motor, and coupling. B. The speed reducer shall be a parallel -shaft, triple reduction, foot - mounted unit suitable for outdoor operation. Speed reducer sizing shall be based on the latest AGMA standards using a minimum 1.5 service factor based on the maximum torque requirements of the screw or a minimum 1.25 service factor based on motor horsepower, whichever is greater. The minimum speed reducer torque rating shall be as noted in Table 11310 -1. C. The speed reducer housing shall be manufactured from high - quality cast iron accurately machined for perfect alignment of all shafts and gearing. The speed reducer housing shall be furnished complete with an air breather, drain plug, dipstick or oil level indicator, and an inspection cover. All casting joints shall be precision ground to ensure an oil -tight and dust -proof housing. D. The gearing shall be high - quality alloy steel, hobbed, and ground for maximum accuracy. All shafts shall be supported by roller -type anti - friction bearings. E. The gearing and bearings shall be automatically splash or force -feed lubricated. Force -feed lubrication systems shall include a shaft - driven oil pump, and all necessary piping integral shall be mounted on the gear reducer. Oil cooling shall be accomplished by convection and shall not require an external cooling source. F. The low -speed and high -speed shafts shall be provided with spring - loaded lip seals suitable for inclined mounting. 2.07 BELTS AND SHEAVES A. Power transmission from the motor to the reducer shall be by means of a set of V -belts and sheaves. Belts and sheaves shall be designed with a 1.5 service factor based on full motor horsepower. B. Sheaves shall be two section units for both drive and driven sheaves and shall consist of a tapered split shaft bushing with three tapped holes to which the sheave is attached by three cap screws. Changing sheaves shall not require a wheel puller. 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -12 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • • • C. Belts and sheaves shall be covered with a fabricated aluminum belt guard in accordance with OSHA standards. 2.08 MOTOR A. Motors shall be designed to accept all loads imposed by the pump during starting and running. B. Motors shall be built in accordance with the latest NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, and AFBMA standards where applicable. C. Motors shall conform to all requirements specified and with the specifications for motors included in Section 16401. D. Each unit shall be driven by an 1,800 rev /min, 1.15 service factor, horizontal, ball bearing, continuous duty, constant speed, Design B, normal starting torque, totally- enclosed fan - cooled, premium - efficiency, foot - mounted motor with leads to gasketed conduit box for outdoor operation. E. Motor size, electrical power characteristics, and electrical environment shall be as noted in Table 11310 -1. F. Motor shall be mounted on a fabricated steel plate, which provides adjustment of belt slack. 2.09 FLEXIBLE LOW -SPEED COUPLING A. The upper stub shaft of the screw pump shall be connected to the drive assembly by a flexible coupling. B. Coupling shall be designed for a 1.5 service factor, based on brake horsepower, and shall be keyed and bored to suit the reducer slow speed shaft and the screw pump upper stub shaft. C. The flexible coupling shall be covered with a removable aluminum guard in accordance with OSHA standards. 2.10 SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE OF UPPER BEARING AND DRIVE ASSEMBLIES A. For each screw pump installation, the Contractor is responsible for coordinating with the pump manufacturer and verifying that the existing concrete support is of sufficient size and strength for supporting the upper bearing and drive assemblies. 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -13 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT B. The existing concrete supports shall be prepared as shown on the Drawings. C. The upper bearing and drive assemblies shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position into to the existing concrete support with epoxy embedded anchor bolts. All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 304 stainless steel and shall be furnished by the pump manufacturer. The size, length, and depth of embedment of the anchors shall be per the manufacturer's recommendations. Expansion -type anchors shall not be acceptable. D. Anchor bolts shall be set by the Contractor. Equipment shall be placed on the foundations, leveled, shimmed, bolted down, and grouted with a non - shrinking grout. 2.11 DEFLECTION PLATES A. A flow deflection plate shall be provided to curve around the upper section on the uptake side of the screw to deflect the liquid as the screw rotates. B. The flow deflection plate shall be fabricated of not less than 3/16 -inch thick AISI Type 304 stainless -steel plate complete with stiffeners where required and stainless steel anchors on 2 -foot centers at the bottom edge. C. The deflection plate top edge shall have adjustable stainless steel anchors at no more than 8 -foot centers. 2.12 AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM A. Each screw pump shall be furnished with a positive pressure, automatic lubrication pump and 3/8 -inch minimum diameter stainless -steel grease line. B. The automatic lubrication pump shall provide grease lubricant to the lower bearing assembly with provisions at the pump to manually charge the grease line. C. Each screw pump shall be furnished with a positive pressure, automatic lubrication pump with stainless steel grease reservoir, and 3/8 -inch minimum diameter stainless -steel grease line. D. Each lubrication pump shall be adjustable and shall provide 6 ounces per day at the minimum setting and 17 ounces per day at the maximum setting (nominal). Grease reservoir shall hold a minimum of 15 pounds of lubricant. E. The lubricant pump shall consist of an eccentric piston pumping element and a check valve and shall have a 1/3- horsepower, TEFC, ball bearing, gear motor connected to the lubricator by a flexible coupling. Grease pump motor shall be 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -14 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • rated for electrical power characteristics and for an electrical environment as noted in Table 11310 -1. • • F A centrifugal switch shall be furnished as an integral component of the grease pump and interlocked with the screw pump drive system. When the screw pump is required to operate, the lubrication pump motor shall switch on. As the lubrication pump motor reaches full speed, the centrifugal switch shall close, energizing the screw pump drive motor. If the grease pump motor stops, the centrifugal switch shall open, de- energizing the screw pump drive motor. The centrifugal switch shall be rated for no less than 3 amps at 120 VAC, resistive. G. The lubrication system shall be factory- assembled on a steel -base plate. The coupling shall have a removable metal coupling guard in accordance with OSHA standards. H. To protect the environment from contamination and to provide visual indication that the lower bearing is receiving a steady supply of lubricant, spent grease that has passed through the lower bearing shall be recovered in a stainless steel collection container with two 1/4 -inch holes located 1 inch from the top of the container to allow liquid to drain out of the container. 2.13 GROUTING MATERIALS A. Equipment manufacturer shall furnish a radius screed for the Contractor to place the finishing grout in the trough with the screw after the unit has been installed. B. Equipment manufacturer shall loan to the Contractor additional sheave(s) and belts as required to operate the screw at a reduced speed for grouting the trough with the screw pump drive. C. The finish grout for the trough shall be as specified in Section 03600. 2.14 SCREW PUMP COVERS (ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 2) A. Screw pump covers shall be designed for durability and to prevent ultraviolet light exposure to the influent screw pumps. The covers shall be of modular construction, be designed to be attached to the concrete walls that form the screw pump trough, and be removable in sections to gain access to the screw pump. They shall extend the full flight length. B. The fiberglass covers shall be constructed of a pultruded fiberglass reinforced composite laminate with a minimum glass loading of 50 %. The composite laminate shall be constructed of polyester resin with UV stabilizers, single -strand fiberglass rovings, continuous strand mat, and surfacing veil. The fiberglass cover 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -15 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT sections shall be standard machinery gray color with pigments that shall be uniform color throughout the laminate. The covers shall be able to be field - painted. C. FRP plank covers shall be a minimum of 0.125 -inch, and the minimum sectional depth shall be 2.00 inches. The weight of each 12 -inch and 24 -inch FRP cover piece shall not exceed 2.6 pounds and 5.1 pounds per linear foot, respectively. D. The existing steel angles anchored to the concrete structure shall be reused. Fasteners to mount the new trough covers to the existing structural supports shall be stainless steel. 2.15 CONTROLS A. Pump instrumentation and controls shall be as specified in Section 13300. 2.16 SHOP SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING A. Before exposure to weather and before shop painting, all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, dry, and free from all mill - scale, rust, grease, dirt, and other foreign matter. B. All exposed portions of the pumps and motors shall be shop- primed in accordance with Section 09900, System 4A. Primer shall be compatible with the finish paint specified in Section 09900. C. Electric motors, speed reducers, and other self - contained or enclosed components shall be supplied with the manufacturer's standard finish coating. D. Rust preventative compound shall be applied to all machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces, which are not to be painted. 2.17 SHOP TESTING A. Pump motor tests as specified in Section 16401 shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer before shipping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations in the locations shown on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required grease for initial operation. The grades of grease 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -16 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall submit a certificate stating that the installation is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and NMAP Millwright standards. C. The Contractor shall submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory; that the equipment is ready for operation; and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of each unit. 3.02 FIELD PAINTING A. The Contractor shall field touch -up the shop - applied primer coat in areas where the paint was damaged during shipping as soon as the equipment arrives on site. The coating shall be as specified in Section 09900, System 4A. B. The Contractor shall apply the intermediate and finish coats as specified in Section 09900, System 4A. C. The primer and paint used in the shop shall be products of the same manufacturer as the field paint to ensure compatibility. D. All nameplates shall be properly protected during painting. E. Before assembly, the Contractor shall coat all stainless steel bolts and nut threads with a non - seizing compound. 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Field tests shall not be conducted until such time that the entire installation is complete and ready for testing. B. Field Pump Tests 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 1. After installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner and Engineer that the installed equipment can perform satisfactorily under actual field conditions. The pumps shall be field- tested to verify mechanical integrity and soundness of construction, installation, and operation. 2. After the equipment has been operated long enough to make all desirable corrections and adjustments, each pumping unit and all associated equipment shall be field- tested to determine that operation is satisfactory, 11310 -17 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT free from excessive vibration and noise, and in compliance with these Specifications. 3. If the pump performance, including vibration levels or natural frequency, does not meet the Specifications, corrective measures shall be taken or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps that satisfy the conditions specified, and the pumps shall be retested. A 24 -hour operating period of the pumps shall be required before acceptance. 4. All pump operating settings, alarms, controls, and shutdown devices shall be calibrated and tested during the field tests. 5. The Contractor shall furnish all power, water, facilities, labor, materials, supplies, and test instruments required to conduct field test. 6. Upon completion of satisfactory testing of the equipment, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer reports as specified in Division 1. C. Field Electric Control System Tests 1. The Contractor shall test - operate each drive and electric control system for proper functioning before the pump mechanical test. The control system shall be checked out using simulated operating signals in accordance with the drive manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Check all drives for correct clearances, alignment, and lubrication before start-up in accordance with the respective manufacturer's instructions. D. Field Motor Tests 1. Megger each motor winding before energizing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found to be low, notify the Engineer. Do not energize the motor. 2. Check all motors for correct clearances and alignment and for correct lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse connections if necessary. 3. Perform all testing requirements as specified in Division 16. E. Field Alarm System Testing 1. Check each alarm and detection device for proper operation. 03720 - 045 -01 March 2014 11310 -18 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • • • 3.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. All structural steel components shall be fabricated in the United States and shall conform to the requirements of the "Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" published by the AISC. Except where specifically indicated otherwise, all plates and structural members shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. B. The equipment manufacturer's shop welds and welding procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of ANSUAWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" published by the AWS. C. Design and fabrication of structural steel members shall be in accordance with AISC and AWS Standards. The manufacturer shall comply with the AWS and AISC most current listed standards and qualifications in 2004 D1.1, the criteria per the requirements of Section 6 — Inspection — Structural Welding Code. Evidence of such AWS and AISC compliance shall be submitted with shop drawing submittals as follows: 1. AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (minimum two on staff) shall conform to all standards, current or previous as listed in Section 6.1.4 AWS QC1, Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. 2. AWS Non Destructive Testing Inspectors (Level I, II, III) for Magnetic Particle and Ultra -Sonic testing (minimum 2 on staff) shall conform to all standards, current or previous as listed in and in conformance with The American Society for Non-Destructive Testing (ASNT- TC -1A). 3.05 INSTALLATION A. The manufacturer shall schedule three trips to the project site for equipment start-up assistance as noted in Paragraph 3.03.B. for the Contractor and for operating training as noted in Paragraph 3.06.A. for Owner personnel. B. After the Contractor has installed the screen and the equipment is capable of being operated, the equipment manufacturer shall furnish a qualified representative for a minimum of 5 days (up to 40 hours) to perform start-up inspection and training of the equipment for the Contractor. 03720 -045 -01 March 2014 11310 -19 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT 3.06 OPERATOR TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide operator training for Owner's personnel after system is operational. Training will take place while manufacturer's representative is at the job site for inspection. 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 END SECTION 11310 -20 OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT • • • • • DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION • • • SECTION 13300 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Work includes engineering, furnishing and placing into operation, instrumentation and control equipment associated with Screw Pump Improvements at the City of Clearwater, Florida's Northeast Wastewater Reclamation Facility (WRF). Upgrade of certain existing control system equipment is also included. B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish complete and fully operable system that reliably performs the specified functions. It is the intent of these Contract Documents that a single entity (henceforth referred to as the System Supplier) have overall responsibility for designing, furnishing, interfacing, adjusting, testing, documenting, and testing the system equipment described in the Contract Documents. C. The work defined in this Specification Section shall be performed by one of the following listed below: 1. Rocha Controls, Tampa, FL 2. Revere Control Systems, Lakeland, FL 3. AECOM 4. Tetra Tech D. The Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Equipment storage and protection until installed following the storage and handling instructions recommended by the System Supplier. Anti- static and winterization requirements shall be per the System Supplier's instructions and the System Supplier shall periodically verify that these instructions are followed. 2. The System Supplier shall observe and advise on the installation of the system to the extent required to certify, with the operational check -out tests, that the equipment will perform as required. E. All engineering development required by the System Supplier shall be in accordance with the Conditions of this Contract. F. Equipment found to be defective prior to system acceptance shall be replaced and installed at no additional cost to the Owner. 03720- 045 -01 13300 -1 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION. A. The existing control system shall be modified, as further defined herein, at the following locations: 1. West Generator Building. At this location a Control Panel (CP -21) contains an Allen Bradley PLC -5 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC). The PLC acquires data from remote I/O drops at two other locations, the East and West Anoxic Tanks, via a hard -wired DeviceNet link. The PLC also interfaces with the control system main data highway which is DH+ protocol over fiber optic. 2. North Generator Building. At this location a Control Panel (CP -22) contains an Allen Bradley PLC -5. The PLC is at the end of the DH+ fiber control system main data highway. The highway runs from here to the next drop at CP -21. 3. Main Control Room. At this location a Control Panel (CP -1) contains an Allen Bradley PLC -5. The DH+ network connection from CP -21 connects here and then continues to other PLC. The PLC also connects to the Human Machine Interface (HMI) subsystem via an Ethernet link with the HMI Ethernet switch. 4. East Anoxic Tank. At this location, there is a Control Panel (NE -106) containing an Allen Bradley Flex I/O rack. This forms the end of the DeviceNet link to the PLC in CP -21. 5. West Anoxic Tank. At this location, there is a Control Panel (NE -105) containing an Allen Bradley Flex I/O rack. This connects DeviceNet link from NE =106 and thence to the PLC in CP -21. B. The existing PLC -5 in CP -21 and CP -22 shall be replaced with new Allen Bradley CompacLogix PLC. The existing I/O for these are listed in Tables 13300 -1 and 13300 -2 respectively. Table 13300 -1 shows signals that will no longer be required stricken through. C. The DH+ data highway network linking CP -1, CP -21 and CP -22 shall be replaced by an Ethernet network. The System Supplier shall provide the Ethernet switches, media converters, etc. to implement the Ethernet network over the existing fiber connections. D. CP -1 shall be equipped with a new Ethernet switch that shall connect with the Ethernet fiber connection to CP -21 (and hence CP -22) instead of the CP -1 PLC. The existing connection from CP -1 PLC to the HMI Ethernet switch shall be relocated to the new CP -1 Ethernet switch. The CP -1 PLC will then connect to the new switch. E. The existing DeviceNet communications adapters in the Flex I/O racks in NE -105 and NE -106 shall be replaced with Ethernet adapters. Network equipment shall be 03720- 045 -01 13300 -2 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • provided in those panels to implement Ethernet communications with the new Ethernet switch in CP -21 (and hence to the CP -21 PLC). F. A new Control Panel (CP -21A) shall be provided and located adjacent to CP -21. CP -21A shall contain a Flex I/O rack that interfaces with the new screw pumps and IR valve operators and interconnects with the new PLC in CP -21 via Ethernet. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish shop drawing submittals covering the items included under this section. B. Submit complete, neat, orderly, and indexed submittal packages. Handwritten diagrams are not acceptable and all documentation submittals shall be made using CADD generated utilities. C. Partial submittals or submittals that do not contain sufficient information for complete review or are unclear will not be reviewed and will be returned by the Engineer as not approved. D. Provide all shop drawing submittals in hard copy and in PDF format. E. Submit the following Field Instrumentation Shop Drawings in a single package: 1. Catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams, and shop drawings on all components of the field instruments, including all miscellaneous electrical and mechanical devices (e.g. surge suppressors, enclosures, etc.) furnished under this section. 2. Complete part numbers for all instruments, including any options, shall be identified. Provide manufacturer's data that correlates to the complete part number. 3. Individual data sheets for all components of the field instruments to supplement the above information by citing all specific features for each specific component (e.g., scale range, materials of construction, special options included, etc.). Each component data sheet shall bear the component name and instrument tag number designation shown in the Drawings and Specifications. 4. Installation details for all field mounted devices to show conformance with the Contract Documents. 5. Configuration documentation for all programmable devices to indicate actual settings used to set the device scale, range, trip points, and other control parameters. F. Provide a single system shop drawing submittal containing the following: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. System interconnect diagram that shows all connections required between component parts of the items covered in this section and between the 13300 -3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM various other systems specified in this Contract. Number all electrical terminal blocks and field wiring. Identify each line at each termination point with the same number. Do not use this number again for any other purpose in the complete control scheme. 2. Bill of Materials: A list of all components. Group components by type and include component model number and part number, component description, quantity supplied, and reference to component catalog information. 3. Descriptive Information: Catalog information, descriptive literature, performance specifications, internal wiring diagrams, power and grounding requirements, power consumption, and heat dissipation of all elements. Clearly mark all options and features proposed for this project. 4. Installation Details. Equipment installation drawings showing external dimensions, enclosure material and spacing, mounting connections, and installation requirements. 5. Loop diagrams covering each monitoring and control loop conforming to ISA -S5.4. 6. A list of, and descriptive literature for, spares and expendables. G. Graphic Screens. Submit color copies of proposed operator graphic screens together with descriptions of interactive functions not readily apparent from the static screens. H. Test Procedures: Submit the procedures proposed to be followed during all system testing. Procedures shall include test descriptions, forms, and check lists to be used to control and document the required tests. I. Test Reports: Upon completion of each required test, document the test by submitting a copy of the signed off test procedures to the Engineer. 1.04 FINAL DOCUMENTATION A. As a part of the final acceptance requirements, submit the system record drawings for each facility. Record drawings shall include, corrected for any changes that may have been made up through Substantial Completion: 1. Panel wiring diagrams. 2. Panel elevations. 3. Interconnection diagrams showing terminal numbers at each wiring termination. B. Record drawings shall be developed or converted to the latest version of AutoCAD. Provide two copies of all AutoCAD files on separate Compact Disks. 03720- 045 -01 13300 -4 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • • • C. Operating and Maintenance (O &M) Manuals: Provide two complete sets of three - ring bound O &M manuals. Include descriptive material, drawings, and figures bound in appropriate places. Include: 1. Cross references to any 3rd party O &M manuals. 2. Additional operating and maintenance instructions in sufficient detail to facilitate the operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibration and maintenance of each component provided with the system. 3. All the submittal data for each component from the approved shop drawing submittals with corrections made on approved as noted items. 4. A Compact Disk containing the shop drawing data in PDF format in the binder sleeve. 5. Final copies of all programming files on Compact Disk. 6. A complete printout, ANNOTATED, of all PLC programs. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. The System Supplier shall be subcontracted by and paid by the Contractor. B. The System Supplier shall meet all of the requirements of these specifications, and, unless specifically stated otherwise, no prior acceptance of any subsystem, equipment, or materials has been made. C. The System Supplier's facility shall be UL certified and used for fabrication of the system. D. All equipment furnished by the System Supplier shall be of the latest and most recent design and shall have overall accuracy as guaranteed by the manufacturer. E. Materials and equipment used shall be U.L. approved wherever such approved equipment and materials are available. F. Component equipment shall be as supplied by one of the manufacturers named or approved equal. The design of the system is based on the first -named manufacturer's equipment if there is a difference. G. To facilitate the Owner's operation and maintenance, products shall be of the same major Manufacturer, with panel mounted devices of the same type and model as far as possible. H. In order to insure the interchangeability of parts and the maintenance of quality, strict compliance with the above requirements shall be maintained. 03720- 045 -01 13300 -5 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM I. The System Supplier shall designate a single point of contact for interface with the Engineer on this project. The Engineer reserves the sole right to approve or reject this point of contact. J. The System Supplier shall provide experienced personnel on -site to coordinate and/or perform installation, termination, and adjustment, on -site testing and startup assistance for the system. 1.06 STANDARDS A. The design, testing, assembly, and methods of installation of the wiring materials, electrical equipment and accessories proposed under this Contract shall conform to the National Electrical Code and to applicable state and local requirements. UL listing and labeling shall be adhered to under this Contract. B. Instrument Society of America (ISA) and National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standards shall be used where applicable in the design of the system. C. Any equipment that does not have a UL, FM CSA, or other approved testing laboratory label shall be furnished with a notarized letter signed by the supplier stating that the equipment famished has been manufactured in accordance with the National Electric Code and OSHA requirements. D. Any additional work needed resulting from any deviation from codes or local requirements shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEES A. The System Supplier shall furnish to the Owner a written one year guarantee commencing with substantial completion, that all equipment and parts thereof, material and/or workmanship are of top quality and free from defects. B. The System Supplier shall guarantee all equipment provided under these specifications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Equipment to be installed in a hazardous area shall meet Class, Group, and Division classification as shown on the Contract Electrical Drawings, or comply with the local or National Electrical Code, whichever is the most stringent requirement. B. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks. C. Electronic equipment shall utilize printed circuitry suitably coated to prevent contamination by dust, moisture and fungus. Solid -state components shall be conservatively rated for their purpose, to assure optimum long -term performance 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -6 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • • • • and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations and 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. The field mounted equipment and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions. D. All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 -Hertz alternating current power source at a normal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, except where specifically noted otherwise. All regulators and power supplies required for compliance with the above shall be provided between power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be supplied. E. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished hereunder shall be new, unused heavy -duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The system shall contain products of a single Manufacturer, insofar as possible, and shall consist of equipment models which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and shall be capable of field expansion through the installation of plug -in circuit cards or additional cabinets. F. The equipment furnished shall be designed to operate satisfactorily between 0 degrees C and 40 degrees C at up to 95 percent Relative Humidity (non- condensing). G. All switches shall have double -pole, double -throw contacts rated at a minimum of 600 volts- amperes (VA), unless specifically noted otherwise. H. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of a power interruption, the equipment specified hereunder shall resume normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored. 2.02 LIGHTNING /SURGE PROTECTION A. Surge suppressors and arrestors meeting the requirements of ANSI Standard C -62.41 (latest revision) shall be provided as further detailed below. B. Single phase AC Power. Lightning and surge protectors for AC power supply lines up to 15 Amps service shall meet the following criteria 1. Serial protection with replaceable fuse 2. Failure indicator 3. Response time of less than five nanoseconds 4. Capable of withstanding up to 10,000 Amps at IEEE /ANSI C -62.41 8 x 20 microseconds combination wave 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -7 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM 5. Manufacturer /model: a. EDCO HSP121BT b. Approved equal C. AC Powered Instruments. Lightning and surge protection shall be provided on both the AC power supply and signal lines. Where instruments are located outdoors, the protector and the instrument/transmitter shall be mounted in an aluminum hood. This equipment shall be prewired by the System Supplier. The protectors shall meet the following criteria: 1. NEMA 4X small case. 2. Response time of less than five nanoseconds. 3. AC Power protection: IEEE /ANSI Std. C -62.41 rated C3 at 330 Volts clamping level. 4. Signal line protection: 10,000 Amp 8 x 20 microsecond surge, clamped at 36 Volts clamping level. 5. Test jacks for low level signal monitoring. 6. Manufacturer /model: EDCO SLAC series or approved equal. D. Loop Powered Instruments. Lightning and surge protection shall be provided on the 4 -20 mA DC signal line. The protectors shall meet the following criteria: 1. Encapsulated in Stainless Steel Pipe nipples for in -line conduit mounting. 2. Response time of less than one nanosecond. 3. Capable of withstanding up to 400 occurrences of 500 Amps at 10 x 1 millisecond. 4. Series resistance of 5 ohms per line. 5. Protection of both lines plus shield. 6. Manufacturer /model: EDCO SS65 or approved equal. E. System Signals. Lightning and surge protection shall be provided on all 4 -20 mA and discrete signal wires entering or leaving the panel. The protectors shall meet the following criteria: 1. 35 mm DIN rail mounted with spring terminals. 2. Response time of less than one nanosecond. 3. Operating signal voltage: as required for signal type. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -8 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • 4. Operating signal current: up to 0.5 A 5. Capable of withstanding 5,000 Amps at IEEE /ANSI C- 62.41 8 x 20 microseconds combination wave. 6. Nominal series resistance of less than 2 ohms each leg 7. Manufacturer /model: • Dehn DCO RK ME • Approved equal. 2.03 CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE A. All PLC shall be based on the use of Allen Bradley's CompacLogix series. No other PLC series will be considered. All PLC modules shall be DIN-rail mounted within the Process Control Panel. Modules shall be selected from the following list: 1. CPU Module. Provide a CPU with built in Ethernet port, Allen Bradley 1769 -L33E or approved equal. 2. Power Supply Module. Provide suitably sized power supply module, Allen Bradley 1769 -PA2 or 1769 -PA4. 3. Input/Output Modules. Furnish input/output modules sufficient to accommodate the inputs /outputs defined herein using the following modules as required: • Discrete Input Module, Allen Bradley 1769 -IQ 16. • Discrete Output Module, Allen Bradley 1769-0B16. • Analog Input Module, Allen Bradley 1769 -IF8. • Analog Output Module, Allen Bradley 1769- OF4CI. B. Remote I/O drop shall be implemented using Allen Bradley Flex I/O modules. 1. Ethernet Communications Adapter, Allen Bradley 1794 -AENT. 2. Input/Output Modules. Furnish input/output modules sufficient to accommodate the inputs /outputs shown on the Contract Drawings plus an additional 15% spare signals fully wired to field termination points using the following modules as required: • 24 VDC Digital 32 point Input Module, Allen Bradley 1794 -IB32. • 24 VDC Digital 16 point Output Module, Allen Bradley 1794-UB16. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -9 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • Current analog 8 point Input Module, Allen Bradley 1794 -1E8. • Current analog 4 point Output Module, Allen Bradley 1794 -0E4. C. Network Equipment. Provide equipment to implement the control system modifications shown in the Contract Drawings and meeting the following requirements: 1. Ethernet Switch. Provide industrial multi -media Ethernet switches with a minimum of one spare 100 Base TX and one spare 100 /100 Base FX port. Provide Allen Bradley Stratix 8000 series or equivalent by N -Tron or approved equal. 2. Media Converter. Media converter shall provide copper to fiber Ethernet conversion. Provide Phoenix Contact or approved equal. 3. Fiber Patch Panels (FPP). FPP shall comprise one or more housings with sufficient quantities of ST compatible adaptor panels to accommodate all fibers terminating within the FPP. This requirement includes all dark fibers. The housing shall be equipped with strain relief for the cables and shall have a lockable access door. Provide Siecor WCH housing with CCH connector panels or approved equal. 2.04 FIELD INSTRUMENTS A. Submerged Pressure Level Measurement System. The level measurement system shall comprise a submerged pressure transducer (Pressure Transmitter, PT), factory attached and sealed interconnecting cable, and junction/termination box with front panel mounted indicator /transmitter (Level Indicating Transmitter, LIT). Within the pressure transmitter, process pressure variations shall be sensed by a barrier diaphragm and transferred via a non - compressible fill liquid to a Wheatstones Bridge strain gage diffused onto a silicon diaphragm. The electronics within the element shall produce an analog signal proportional to the process pressure. The level indicating transmitter shall convert this signal and retransmit an analog signal proportional to the depth of process fluid in the vessel being monitored. 1. Static accuracy of the pressure transmitter shall be less than or equal to 0.25% full scale including the combined effects of nonlinearity, hysteresis and non repeatability, based on a Best Fit Straight Line at 25 degrees C. 2. The pressure transmitter shall be temperature compensated between 0 and 50 degrees C. 3. The shielded and vented interconnecting cable shall be of sufficient length to allow the pressure transmitter to be properly located within the tank, basin, wetwell, etc. being monitored. The cable shall be able to withstand 200 pounds of tensile strength, allowing the transducer to be suspended directly by the cable. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -10 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • • • 4. The cable shall be equipped with a dessicant filter at the surface end of the vent tube. 5. Transducer shall include 304 stainless steel spacers, nuts, and bolts to protect and keep the diaphragm off the tank floor. 6. Transducer shall be provided with a sealed air bag for compensating for atmospheric changes and to insure that no external moisture reaches the internal electronics. 7. Exterior pressure transmitter parts — 316 Stainless Steel and Viton. 8. Fill liquid - NSF approved for use in drinking water applications. 9. Interconnecting cable jacket — Polyurethane. 10. Terminal junction box — 316 Stainless Steel NEMA 4X. 11. Transmitter excitation: Loop powered. 12. Manufacturer: Blue Ribbon Birdcage GP50 Model 311Z or approved equal. B. Level Switch, Float. The level switch shall be a direct acting, weighted float suspended on its own cable. As the liquid level rises the float tilts and actuates a hermetically sealed mercury switch inside the float. The cable shall be terminated within a junction box located outside the tank or basin. For multiple float applications, all cables shall terminate in a single junction box. 1. Float wetted part — Polypropylene 2. Cable — PVC jacketed 3. Junction box — NEMA 4X 316 SS 4. Dry contact rated to 4.5 Amps at 120 VAC 5. Normally open or normally closed as required for the application 6. Provide stainless steel supports /mounting accessories as required 7. Manufacturer: Anchor Scientific, Roto -float type M or approved equal. 2.05 CONTROL PANEL REQUIREMENTS A. General: 1. All conduit entry shall be from the top or bottom. Layout panel as required to permit access for external wiring. 2. The panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus to ground all signal shield connections. 03720 -045 -01 13300 -11 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM 3. The panel shall be equipped with an internal, hand - switch controlled, 40 -watt fluorescent light and 120V, 15 amp, duplex utility receptacle. These shall be serviced through a dedicated breaker. 4. The panel shall be protected from internal corrosion by the use of corrosion — inhibiting vapor capsules. Provide Northern Instruments Model Zerust VC -6 -2, Hoffman, model A-HC15E or approved equal. B. Finish: 1. All front panel openings for panel- mounted equipment shall be cut with counter- boring and provided with trim strips as required to give a neat finished appearance. 2. All steel panel surfaces shall be treated with phosphatized treatment inside and out, and then finished on the exterior with two coats of baked enamel of the approved color. Interiors of panels shall be white, ANSI No. 51. C. Doors: 1. All control panels shall have a continuous piano hinge door for ease of access. A minimum of 80% of the panel interior shall be exposed by doors. 2. The inside of each door shall be equipped with a print pocket. 3. Two -door enclosures shall have a removable center post. D. Nameplates: 1. All front -face panel mounted controls shall be equipped with screw mounted laminated plastic nameplates to completely define their use. The use of adhesive to mount front panel nameplates will not be acceptable. 2. All internal components shall be equipped with identification tags E. Electrical: 1. Main circuit breaker and branch circuit breaker for each branch circuit as required to distribute power from the main power feed. 2. All breakers accessible when the panel door is open. 3. No more than 20 devices on any single circuit. 4. No more than 12 amps for any branch circuit. 5. Panel (or site) lighting, receptacles, heaters, controls, telemetry and fans on separate branch circuits. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -12 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • • F. Wiring: 1. Power wiring shall be 300 volt, type THWN stranded copper, No. 14 AWG size, for 120V service. 2. Discrete wiring shall be 300 -volt type THWN stranded copper, sized for the current carried, but not smaller than No. 16 AWG. 3. Analog signal wiring shall be 300 volt, stranded copper in twisted shield pairs, no smaller than No. 16 AWG. 4. Panel wiring shall be routed within wire troughs or panduits. 5. Hinge wiring shall be secured at each end with the bend portion protected by a plastic sleeve. 6. Analog or do wiring shall be separated from any ac power or control wiring by at least six inches. 7. Each wire shall be uniquely identified at all terminations using machine printed plastic sleeves G. Construction: 1. Minimum metal thickness: 14- gauge. 2. Stiffeners as required to prevent deflection under instrument loading and permit lifting without racking or distortion. 3. When required, removable lifting rings and fill plugs to replace rings after installation. 4. All components and terminals shall be accessible without removing other components except for covers. H. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 1. Battery sized to support all equipment contained within CP -22A for a minimum of 25 minutes duration. 2. Operating Range: 0 -50 degrees C. 3. Automatic weekly self test. 4. Relay contact outputs for "ON BATTERY" and "LOW BATTERY" alarms. 5. High temperature (to 50 degrees C) battery option: Allen Bradley P/N 1609- 500HBAT or approved equal. 6. Should space requirements prevent inclusion of the UPS and batteries within the panel, wall -mount separately nearby. 7. Allen Bradley P/N 1609 or approved equal. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -13 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM The panel shall be a manufactured item, Hoffman Engineering, or equal. 2.06 PANEL DEVICES A. Motor Starters. 1. Motor starters shall be furnished and installed for single -phase motors. 2. Motor starters shall be non - reversing, sized for the horsepower shown on the Contract Drawings. 3. Enclosure type shall be NEMA 1 4. Motor starters shall be as manufactured by Allen Bradley or approved equal B. Selector Switch. Units shall meet the following: 1. Heavy -duty, oil- tight, industrial type selector switches rated for NEMA 4 service. 2. Contacts rated for 120 -volt ac service at 10 amperes continuous. 3. Number of positions and contact arrangements as required. 4. Factory- engraved legend plate indicating position definition. 5. Panel mounting accommodating panel thickness between 1/16 to 1/4 inch. 6. Black knob type operator. 7. Square D Class 9001, Type K, Allen Bradley 800T Series or approved equal C. Pushbutton. Units shall meet the following: 1. Heavy -duty, oil- tight, industrial type push buttons rated for NEMA 4 service. 2. Contacts rated for 120 -volt ac service at 10 amperes continuous. 3. Number of positions and contact arrangements as required. 4. Factory- engraved legend plate indicating function. 5. Panel mounting accommodating panel thickness between 1/16 to '/4 inch. 6. Operator: Red extended head for STOP, green flush head for START, black flush head for other functions. 7. Square D Class 9001, Type K; Allen- Bradley type 800T, or approved equal. 03720- 045 -01 13300 -14 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • D. Indicating Light. Units shall meet the following: 1. Heavy -duty, oil- tight, push -to -test industrial type with integral transformer for 120V AC application. 2. Rated for NEMA 4 service. 3. Screwed on flat -faced lenses in colors shown on the drawings. 4. Factory- engraved legend plates. 5. Square D type K, Allen- Bradley Type 800T, or approved equal. E. Control/Relays: All relays shall meet the following: 1. Compact, general - purpose, plug -in type. 2. Socket mounted. 3. Contacts rated for not less than 10 amperes at 120V. 4. Equipped with neon status lights and test buttons. 5. Permanent, legible identification. 6. Potter & Brumfield series KRPA or approved equal. F. Time Delay Relay. Time delay relays shall meet the following: 1. Available functions: On delay, Off delay, or one shot. 2. Socket mounted. 3. Knob adjustment. 4. Contacts rated for not less than 10 amperes at 120V. 5. Timing range as appropriate for the application. 6. Magnecraft series W211 or approved equal. 2.07 SPARES AND EXPENDABLES A. Provide the following spare parts: 1. Five spare relays of each type provided. 2. Five spare surge suppressors of each type provided. 3. One spare PLC I/O module (including remote I /O) of each type provided. 03720- 045 -01 13300 -15 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM 4. One CPU spare. 5. One power supply card spare. B. Provide the following expendables: 1. Two year supply of corrosion inhibitor capsules (if provided) 2. 5 of each type of fuse supplied. 3. 3 of each type and color indicator light supplied. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prerequisite Activities and Lead Times: Do not start the following key project activities until the listed prerequisite activities have been completed and lead times have been satisfied: 1. Hardware Purchasing, Fabrication, and Assembly: Associated design related submittals completed (no exceptions, or approved as noted). 2. Shipment: Completion and approval of all design related submittals. 3. Startup: Operational Checkout Tests. B. The system shall be assembled as far as possible at the System Supplier's shop. No work, other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage, shall be done on the panels at the jobsite. C. Substantial Completion: The following requirements must be fulfilled before consideration will be given for Substantial Completion of the system: 1. All system submittals have been completed. 2. The system has successfully completed the Demonstration Tests. 3. All spares, expendables, and test equipment have been received by Owner. 3.02 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Adequately pack manufactured material to prevent damage during shipping, handling, storage and erection. Pack all material shipped to the project site in a container properly marked for identification. Use blocks and padding to prevent movement. B. Ship materials that must be handled with the aid of mechanical tools in wood - framed crates. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -16 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • C. Ship all materials to the project site with at least one layer of plastic wrapping or other approved means to make it weatherproof. Anti -stat protection shall be provided for all sensitive equipment. D. Inspect the material prior to removing it from the carrier. Do not unwrap equipment until it is ready to be installed. If any damage is observed, immediately notify the carrier so that a claim can be made. If no such notice is given, the material shall be assumed to be in undamaged condition, and any subsequent damage that is discovered shall be repaired and replaced at no additional expense to the Owner. E. Store and protect equipment until installation following the storage and handling instructions recommended by the equipment manufacturers. Place special emphasis on proper anti - static protection of sensitive equipment. F ESD Protection: Provide for the proper handling, storage, and environmental conditions required for the system components deemed static sensitive by the equipment manufacturer. Utilize anti -stat wrist straps and matting during installation of these items to prevent component degradation. G. Protection During Construction: Throughout this Contract, provide protection for materials and equipment against Loss or damage and from the effects of weather. Prior to installation, store items in indoor, dry locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. Provide covers for panels and other elements that may be exposed to dusty construction environments. Specific storage requirements shall be in accordance with the System Supplier's recommendations. H. Corrosion Protection: Protect all consoles, panels, enclosures, and other equipment containing electrical or instrumentation and control devices, including spare parts, from corrosion through the use of corrosion - inhibiting vapor capsules. Prior to shipment, include capsules in the shipping containers, and equipment as recommended by the capsule manufacturer. During the construction period, periodically replace the capsules in accordance with the capsule manufacturer's recommendations. Replace all capsules just prior to Final Acceptance. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage charges resulting from the handling of the materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install the system in the location indicated on the Drawings and follow manufacturers' installation instructions explicitly, unless otherwise indicated. Wherever any conflict arises between manufacturers' instruction, and these Contract Documents, follow Engineer's decision, at no additional cost. Keep a copy of manufacturers' instructions on the jobsite available for review at all times B. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -17 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM appearance. Coordinate I &C work with the Owner and work of other trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference with operation of the existing plant during construction. C. Provide finish on instruments and accessories that protects against corrosion by the elements in the environment in which they are to be installed. Finish both the interior and exterior of enclosures. Provide extra paint of each color used in the material from the manufacturer for touch -up purposes. D. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. Touch -up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency, and type of surface of the original finish. Clean and polish the exterior of all panels and enclosures upon the completion of the demonstration tests. E. Ground each analog signal shield on one end at the receiver end only. Properly ground all surge and transient protection devices. Coordinate grounding system with Division 16, Electrical. F. For the purposes of uniformity and conformance to industry standard, provide analog signal transmission modes of electronic 4 -20 ma DC. No other signal characteristics are acceptable. G. Fully isolate outputs for transmitted electronic signals between transmitters and receivers, equipment of different manufacturers and between control panels to conform to ISA Standard S 50. 1. 3.04 CONTROL SYSTEM MODIFICATIONS A. Wherever in the descriptions the control strategy refers to a software switch, pushbutton, or potentiometer, it is intended to mean an operator controllable device on the appropriate HMI graphic screen. B. All control strategies shall run within the PLC. Data manipulation (calculated analog values, elapsed time functions, event determination) shall be performed by the PLC for the associated equipment it is monitoring. Any resulting values from these manipulations shall be reported as individual registers. The intent is to avoid using the HMI software for this purpose. C. The control functions described herein are not intended to be complete comprehensive programming logic descriptions. They describe only the general intended control operation required. Provide complete program logic to completely fulfill the functional requirements indicated. This shall be demonstrated via the submittal stage of this work. D. Provide all programming necessary to support the functional requirements of the process graphic screens. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -18 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • E. Transfer all existing control strategies from CP -21 and CP -22 PLC into the replacement PLC. F. Screw Pump Control. Establish a sequence for the screw pumps that may be modified by the operator. Rotate the sequence every 24 hours at midnight. Omit from the sequence any screw pump with its MCC switch not in Auto or with its associated grease pump switch in Off. Proceed as follows: 1. Provide the following operator adjustable settings: Minimum influent channel level (LSL) and maximum influent channel level (LSH). Restrict these settings to time inches above or below the setting of the back -up low and high level float switches respectively. 2. When the influent channel level rises to LSH for a preset time call for the next pump in sequence to start. 3. When the influent channel level falls to LSL for a preset time call stop the longest running pump. 4. If a pump fails to start within a preset time or fails while running, call for the next pump in sequence. 5. If a running pump's associated grease pump fails, stop the screw pump and call for the next pump in sequence G. Individual Screw Pump Control. Provide an operator controllable Hand/Off/Auto software select switch for each screw pump. Proceed as follows: 1. While the switch is in Hand, run the pump. 2. While the switch is in Off, stop the pump and prevent any further control commands. 3. While the switch is in Auto, take start and stop commands from the above Pumping Control strategy. H. Screw Pump Relay Logic Functional Description. The relay logic within CP -22A shown in the Contract Drawings is intended to function as follows: 1. When the PLC issues a command to start a screw pump, the associated grease pump is commanded to start. 2. Once the running status of the grease pump is confirmed via feedback from a current monitor, the screw pump is started. This occurs whether the grease pump is PLC started or placed in HAND. 3. If the grease pump fails while running, the run command to the screw pump is disabled. 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -19 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM 1. IR Valve Control. Provide an operator controllable Close /Open select switch and position potentiometer for each pump. Proceed as follows: 1. While the switch is in Close, shut the valve. 2. While the switch is in Open, open the valve and adjust the setting of the valve position to the vale set by the potentiometer. 3.05 HMI GRAPHIC MODIFICATIONS A. Modify the HMI system database to accommodate any new signals. B. Modify the existing screw pump graphic screen or provide a new one depicting the new screw pump station operation. 3.06 TESTING - GENERAL A. All elements of the system, both hardware and software, shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. As a minimum, the testing shall include shop tests, operational check -out tests, and field acceptance tests. C. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the test shall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system producing the correct result (effect), the specific test requirements will have been satisfied. D. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with, and documented on, prior approved procedures, forms, and checklists. Each specific test to be performed shall be described and a space provided after it for signoff by the appropriate party after its satisfactory completion. Copies of these signoff test procedures, forms, and checklists will constitute the required test documentation. E. Provide all special testing materials and equipment. Wherever possible, perform tests using actual process variables, equipment, and data. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, equipment, and data, provide a suitable means of simulation. Define these simulation techniques in the test procedures. F. The System Supplier shall coordinate all of their testing with the Contractor, the Engineer, all affected suppliers, and the Owner. G. The Engineer reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the approved test procedures. The Engineer's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing. 03720- 045 -01 13300 -20 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • 3.07 OPERATIONAL READINESS TEST (ORT) A. The System Supplier shall fully debug problems in the system as a whole. B. Check the entire system for proper installation, calibration and adjustment on a point by point loop -by -loop and component -by- component basis to ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and the system Specifications. C. The Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented using approved forms and checklists. These shall be developed by the System Supplier and submitted for approval. D. Loop Status Report: Each control loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track its inspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall include the following information and check -off items with spaces for sign -off by the System Supplier: 1. Project Name. 2. Control Loop Number or description. 3. Tag Number or description for each component of the control loop. 4. Check - offs /sign -offs for each component for proper installation, termination, and calibration/adjustment. 5. Check - offs /sign -offs for the control loop for proper panel interface terminations, 1/0 interface terminations, I/O signal operation relative to the computer network, and total loop operation ready. 6. Space for comments. E. Maintain the Loop Status Reports and Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the Engineer at any time. F. Witnessing: These inspections and tests do not require witnessing. However, the Engineer will review the Loop Status Sheets and Component Calibration Sheets and spot -check their entries periodically and upon completion of the Operational Check- out Tests. Correct any deficiencies found. 3.08 FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) A. Once the system has passed the ORT, the System Supplier shall perform a witnessed Field Acceptance Test (FAT) on the complete system. The FAT shall demonstrate that the system is operating and in compliance with the Contract requirements. Each specified function shall be demonstrated on a paragraph -by- paragraph, and site -by -site basis. B. Prior to the FAT, the entire installed system shall be certified in writing by the Contractor that it is ready for operation. 03720- 045 -01 13300 -21 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM C. The FAT shall cover the entire system, including control functions, alarms, and status monitoring. Test procedures used for shop tests may be adopted for these tests if modified as required. D. Provide complete O &M Manuals for the system at the jobsite at least two weeks prior to the FAT. E. Provide at least 2 weeks' notice prior to the start of the test. F. During this test, System Supplier personnel shall be present as required. The System Supplier is expected to provide personnel for this test who have an intimate knowledge of the hardware and software of the system. G. Any malfunction during the tests shall be analyzed and corrections made by the System Supplier. The Engineer and/or Owner will determine whether any such malfunctions are sufficiently serious to warrant a repeat of this test. H. The system shall operate for a continuous 100 hours without failure before this test will be considered successful. Table 13300 -1: CP -21 Existing I/O List 1/0 Description Type Range Off Status Units On Status Digital Input Module #1 1 Fermentation Mixer #2A Run Status DI Stopped Running 2 Fermentation Mixer #2B Run Status DI Stopped Running 3 Fermentation Mixer #3A Run Status DI Stopped Running 4 Fermentation Mixer #3B Run Status DI Stopped Running 5 Anoxic Mixer #2A Run Status DI Stopped Running 6 Anoxic Mixer #2B Run Status DI Stopped Running 7 Anoxic Mixer #3A Run Status DI Stopped Running 8 Anoxic Mixer #3B Run Status DI Stopped Running 9 Oxidation Mixer #2A Run Status DI Stopped Running 10 Oxidation Mixer #2A Oil Level DI Normal Low 11 Oxidation Mixer #2A Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 12 Oxidation Mixer #2A Temperature DI Normal High 13 Oxidation Mixer #2B Run Status DI Stopped Running 14 Oxidation Mixer #2B Oil Level DI Normal Low 15 Oxidation Mixer #2B Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 16 Oxidation Mixer #2B Temperature DI Normal High Digital Input Module #2 1 Oxidation Mixer #3A Run Status DI Stopped Running 2 Oxidation Mixer #3A Oil Level DI Normal Low 3 Oxidation Mixer #3A Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 4 Oxidation Mixer #3A Temperature DI Normal High 5 Oxidation Mixer #3B Run Status DI Stopped Running 6 Oxidation Mixer #3B Oil Level DI Normal Low 7 Oxidation Mixer #3B Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 8 Oxidation Mixer #3B Temperature DI Normal High 9 IR Pump #2 Run Status DI Stopped Running 03720 - 045-01 December 2013 13300 -22 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • • • • • Table 13300 -1: CP -21 Existing 110 List 1/0 Description Type Range Off Status Units On Status 10 IR Pump #2 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 11 IR Pump #2 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 12 IR Pump #2 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 13 IR Pump #3 Run Status DI Stopped Running Auto 14 IR Pump #3 Mode DI Not in Auto 15 IR Pump #3 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 16 IR Pump #3 Leak Status DI Normal Leak Digital Input Module #3 1 IR Pump #5 Run Status DI Stopped Running Auto 2 IR Pump #5 Mode DI Not in Auto 3 IR Pump #5 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 4 IR Pump #5 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 5 Aerator #1 Alarm Status DI Normal Alarm 6 Aerator #2 Alarm Status DI Normal Alarm 7 Aerator #3 Alarm Status DI Normal Alarm 8 Aerator #4 Alarm Status DI Normal Alarm 9 Aerator #1 High Speed Status DI Normal High 10 Aerator #1 Low Speed Status DI Normal Low 11 Aerator #2 High Speed Status DI Normal High 12 Aerator #2 Low Speed Status DI Normal Low 13 Aerator #3 High Speed Status DI Normal High 14 Aerator #3 Low Speed Status DI Normal Low 15 Aerator #4 High Speed Status DI Normal High 16 Aerator #4 Low Speed Status DI Normal Low Digital Input Module #4 1 Aerator #1 Bearing Temp. Status DI Normal High 2 Aerator #2 Bearing Temp. Status DI Normal Hi: 3 Aerator #3 Bearing Temp. Status DI Normal High 4 Aerator #4 Bearing Temp. Status DI Normal High 5 Train #1 Level Status DI Normal High 6 Train #2 Level Status DI Normal High 7 434 Nomai Fettit 8 141 Nuffnei Pettit 9 41 Nefinni Paull 10 Di 11 12 Pi &upped Running 13 141 Stopped Running 14 I4 &topped Rig 15 Pi &upped Running 16 Di 840Of9014 4171+1041g Digital Input Module #5 1 I Iffew 2 PI Nor mai beW 3 Di NOPIOtti bow 4 Ner 5 DI NO1W101 laoW 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 13300 -23 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Table 13300 -1: CP -21 Existing 1/0 List I/O Description Type Range Off Status Units On Status 6 Fermentation Mixer #1 Run Status DI Stopped Running 7 Fermentation Mixer #2 Run Status DI Stopped Running 8 Fermentation Mixer #3 Run Status DI Stopped Running 9 Fermentation Mixer #4 Run Status DI Stopped Running 10 1st Anoxic Mixer #1 Run Status DI Stopped Running 11 1st Anoxic Mixer #2 Run Status DI Stopped Running 12 1st Anoxic Mixer #3 Run Status DI Stopped Running 13 1st Anoxic Mixer #4 Run Status DI Stopped Running 14 Generator Fuel Level DI Normal Low 15 SPARE DI 16 SPARE DI Digital Output Module #1 1 SPARE DO 2 SPARE DO 3 SPARE DO 4 SPARE DO 5 SPARE DO 6 IR Pump #2 Control DO Stop Start 7 IR Pump #3 Control DO Stop Start 8 IR Pump #5 Control DO Stop Start 9 SPARE DO 10 SPARE DO 11 SPARE DO 12 SPARE DO 13 SPARE DO 14 SPARE DO 15 SPARE DO 16 SPARE DO Analog Input Module #1 1 Influent PS Level AI 0 - ? ?? FEET 2 SPARE AI 3 SPARE AI 4 SPARE AI 5 SPARE AI 6 SPARE AI 7 SPARE AI 8 SPARE AI 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -24 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • • • Table 13300 -2: CP -22 Existing I/O List UO Description Type Range Off Status Units On Status Digital Input Module #1 1 Fermentation Mixer #1A Run Status DI Stopped Running 2 Fermentation Mixer #1A Oil Level DI Normal Low 3 Fermentation Mixer #1A Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 4 Fermentation Mixer #1A Temperature DI Normal High 5 Fermentation Mixer #1B Run Status DI Stopped Running 6 Fermentation Mixer #1B Oil Level DI Normal Low 7 Fermentation Mixer #113 Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 8 Fermentation Mixer #1B Temperature DI Normal High 9 Fermentation Mixer #1C Run Status DI Stopped Running 10 Fermentation Mixer #1C Oil Level DI Normal Low 11 Fermentation Mixer #1C Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 12 Fermentation Mixer #1C Temperature DI Normal High 13 Anoxic Mixer #1A Run Status DI Stopped Running 14 Anoxic Mixer #1A Oil Level DI Normal Low 15 Anoxic Mixer #1A Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 16 Anoxic Mixer #1A Temperature DI Normal High Digital Input Module #2 1 Anoxic Mixer #1B Run Status DI Stopped Running 2 Anoxic Mixer #1B Oil Level DI Normal Low 3 Anoxic Mixer #1B Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 4 Anoxic Mixer #1B Temperature DI Normal High 5 Oxidation Mixer #1A Run Status DI Stopped Running 6 Oxidation Mixer #1A Oil Level DI Normal Low 7 Oxidation Mixer #1A Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 8 Oxidation Mixer #1A Temperature DI Normal High 9 Oxidation Mixer #1B Run Status DI Stop • ed Runnin 10 Oxidation Mixer #1B Oil Level DI Normal Low 11 Oxidation Mixer #1B Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 12 Oxidation Mixer #1B Temperature DI Normal High 13 Oxidation Mixer #1C Run Status DI Stopped Running 14 Oxidation Mixer #1C Oil Level DI Normal Low 15 Oxidation Mixer #1C Oil Pressure DI Normal Low 16 Oxidation Mixer #1C Temperature DI Normal High Digital Input Module #3 1 IR Pump #1 Run Status DI Stopped Running 2 IR Pump #1 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 3 IR Pump #1 Drive Run Status DI Stopped Running 4 IR Pump #1 Drive Fault Status DI Normal Fault 5 IR Pump #1 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 6 IR Pump #1 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 7 IR Pump #2 Run Status DI Stopped Running 8 IR Pump #2 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 9 IR Pump #2 Drive Run Status DI Stopped Running 10 IR Pump #2 Drive Fault Status DI Normal Fault 11 IR Pump #2 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 12 IR Pump #2 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 13300 -25 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM Table 13300 -2: CP -22 Existing I/O List 1/0 Description Type Range Off Status Units On Status 13 Influent Pump #1 Run Status DI Stopped Running 14 Influent Pump #1 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 15 Influent Pump #1 Drive Run Status DI Stopped Running 16 Influent Pump #1 Drive Fault Status DI Normal Fault Digital Input Module #4 1 Influent Pump #1 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 2 Influent Pump #1 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 3 Influent Pump #1 JB Leak Status DI Normal Leak 4 Influent Pump #4 Run Status DI Stopped Running 5 Influent Pump #4 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 6 Influent Pump #4 Drive Run Status DI Stopped Running 7 Influent Pump #4 Drive Fault Status DI Normal Fault 8 Influent Pump #4 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 9 Influent Pump #4 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 10 Influent Pump #4 JB Leak Status DI Normal Leak 11 Influent Pump #2 Run Status DI Stopped Running 12 Influent Pump #2 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 13 Influent Pump #2 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 14 Influent Pump #2 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 15 Influent Pump #2 JB Leak Status DI Normal Leak 16 Influent Pump #3 Run Status DI Stopped Running Digital Input Module #5 1 Influent Pump #3 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 2 Influent Pump #3 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 3 Influent Pump #3 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 4 Influent Pump #3 JB Leak Status DI Normal Leak 5 Influent Pump #5 Run Status DI Stopped Running 6 Influent Pump #5 Mode DI Not in Auto Auto 7 Influent Pump #5 Stator Temperature DI Normal High 8 Influent Pump #5 Leak Status DI Normal Leak 9 Influent Pump #5 JB Leak Status DI Normal Leak 10 Generator Fuel Level Status DI Normal Low 11 Gas Bulk Tank Level Status DI Normal Low 12 SPARE DI 13 SPARE DI 14 SPARE DI 15 SPARE DI 16 SPARE DI Digital Output Module #1 1 IR Pump #1 Control DO Stop Start 2 IR Pump #2 Control DO Stop Start 3 Influent Pump #1 Control DO Stop Start 4 Influent Pump #4 Control DO Stop Start 5 Influent Pump #2 Control DO Stop Start 6 Influent Pump #3 Control DO Stop Start 7 Influent Pump #5 Control DO Stop Start 8 SPARE DO 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 13300 -26 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • • • I/O Description 9 SPARE Table 13300 -2: CP -22 Existing 1/0 List Range Units Off Status On Status Type DO 10 SPARE DO 11 SPARE DO 12 SPARE DO 13 SPARE DO 14 SPARE DO 15 SPARE DO 16 SPARE DO Analog Input Module #1 1 IR Pump #1 Speed AI 0 -100 % 2 IR Pump #2 Speed AI 0 -100 % 3 Influent Pump #1 Speed AI 0 -100 % 4 Influent Pump #4 Speed AI 0 -100 % 5 Influent PS Level AI 0 - ? ?? FEET 6 IR PS Level AI 0 - ? ?? FEET 7 DO Level AI 0 - ? ?? PPM 8 Influent PS Inflow AI 0 - ? ?? GPM Analog Input Module #2 1 IR PS Level AI 0 -15 FEET 2 SPARE AI 3 SPARE AI 4 SPARE AI 5 SPARE AI 6 SPARE AI 7 SPARE AI 8 SPARE AI Analog Output Module #1 1 IR Pump #1 Speed Control AO 0 -100 % 2 IR Pump #2 Speed Control AO 0 -100 % 3 Influent Pump #1 Speed Control AO 0 -100 % 4 Influent Pump #4 Speed Control AO 0 -100 % END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 13300 -27 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION December 2013 AND CONTROL SYSTEM • • DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL • SECTION 15075 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes requirements for materials and installation of markers, labels, and signs for pipes and valves; for mechanical equipment; for hazardous materials warnings; and for miscellaneous plant services. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature describing materials, colors, letter size, and size of labels. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 03720 - 045 -01 15075 -1 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND December 2013 VALVE IDENTIFICATION 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LABELS FOR PIPING A. Labels for piping shall bear the full piping system name as shown in the Piping Schedule on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide separate flow directional arrows next to each label. Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Labels for piping inside buildings shall be vinyl cloth: W. H. Brady Co. B -500 vinyl cloth, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal. Labels for piping located outdoors shall be weather- and UV- resistant acrylic plastic and shall be W. H. Brady Co. B -946, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal. B. Alternatively, the Contractor shall provide preprinted, semirigid, snap -on, color -coded pipe markers. Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Label shall cover 360° (minimum). Labels shall be fabricated of weather- and UV- resistant acrylic plastic. Labels shall be Seton Nameplate Corporation SetMark pipe marks or equal. 2.02 LABELS FOR VALVES A. The Contractor shall provide each valve listed on the Tag Number list with an identification tag. The tag shall be 2- inch - square or circular aluminum or 1/16- inch -thick fiberglass: W. H. Brady B -60, Seton Name Plate Corp. Series SVT, or equal. Aluminum tags shall have black - filled letters. 2.03 LABELS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide a label for each pump or other piece of mechanical equipment. The label shall show the equipment name and tag number as shown on the Tag Number list or on the Drawings. Labels shall be 1 -1/2 inches (minimum) by 4 inches (minimum) brass, aluminum, or 1/8- inch -thick fiberglass tags. Provide fiberglass tags for chemical system equipment: Brady B -120 Fiber - Shield, Seton Style 2065, or equal. 03720 - 045 -01 15075 -2 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND December 2013 VALVE IDENTIFICATION • • 2.04 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC WARNING TAPE FOR METAL PIPE A. The Contractor shall provide permanent, bright - colored, continuous - printed plastic tape intended for direct burial service, not less than 6 inches wide by 3.5 mils thick. Provide tape with printing that most accurately indicates the type of service of buried pipe. Provide the following colored tape for the various piping services: Service Color Cable TV Orange Gas Yellow Electric Red Telephone Orange Water Blue Sewer Green Chemical Yellow Reclaimed Water Violet 2.05 UNDERGROUND DETECTABLE METALLIC PIPE WARNING TAPE A. The Contractor shall provide permanent, bright - colored, continuous - printed tape consisting of an aluminum or steel foil sheathed in a plastic laminate, not less than 2 inches wide by 3 mils thick. Provide tape with printing that most accurately indicates the type of buried service. Provide the following colored tape for the various piping services: Service Color Cable TV Orange Gas Yellow Electric Red Telephone Orange Water Blue Sewer Green Chemical Yellow Reclaimed Water Violet PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLING PIPE LABELS A. The Contractor shall provide a label and flow arrow at each connection to pumps or other mechanical equipment, at wall boundaries, at tees and crosses, and at 20 -foot centers on straight runs of piping. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 15075 -3 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION B. On piping having external diameters less than 6 inches (including insulation, if any), the Contractor shall provide full -band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location. C. On piping having external diameters of 6 inches and larger (including insulation, if any), provide either full -band or strip -type pipe markers but not narrower than three times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: 1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe or insulation. 2. Strapped -to -pipe or insulation application of semirigid type with Type 304 or 305 stainless -steel bands. 3.02 INSTALLING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT LABELS A. The Contractor shall attach labels to the valve or piece of equipment with Type 304 or 316 stainless steel chains unless otherwise noted. For sodium hypochlorite and hydrofluosilicic acid use thermoplastic chains to attach labels. B. The Contractor shall attach valve labels to the valve handwheels. If the valve has no handwheel, attach the label to the valve by tying the tag wire or chain around the operating shaft or nut. 3.03 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS A. The Contractor shall attach miscellaneous signs according to the sign manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with OSHA requirements. 3.04 INSTALLING UNDERGROUND PLASTIC WARNING TAPE FOR METAL PIPE A. During backfilling of each exterior underground piping system, the Contractor shall install continuous underground -type plastic line marker directly over buried line at 6 to 8 inches above the top of the pipe. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16 inches, install a single line marker. 03720 - 045 -01 15075 -4 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND December 2013 VALVE IDENTIFICATION • • 3.05 INSTALLING UNDERGROUND DETECTABLE METALLIC PIPE WARNING TAPE • A. The Contractor shall install tape 4 to 6 inches below finished ground surface directly over buried pipelines. Where multiple small pipelines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, install a single marker tape. 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 END OF SECTION 15075 -5 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION • SECTION 15110 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required and install complete and ready for operation all valves as shown in the Drawings and as specified in this Section. All valves shall be complete with all necessary manual actuators, valve boxes, extension stems, and floor stands, which are required for proper valve operation and completion of the work. 1. All valves shall be of the sizes shown in the Drawings. All equipment of the same type shall be from one manufacturer, unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. 2. The valves shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Special types of valves. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. Product technical submittal data shall contain the following information and data: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of standards referenced. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals. 15110 -1 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES 4. Data of valves, actuators, and accessories: a. Pressure and temperature rating. b. Materials of construction, with ASTM reference and grade. c. Linings and coatings. d. Dimensions and weight. e. Flow coefficient. f. Actuators and accessories details. g. Manufacturer's product brochure, cut - sheets, and parts diagrams. B. Dimensions and orientation of valve actuators as installed on the valves. Show location of internal stops for gear actuators. State differential pressure and fluid velocity used to size actuators. For worm -gear actuators, state the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm and state the handwheel diameter. C. The following test reports: Performance Tests; Leakage Tests; Hydrostatic Tests; and Proof -of- Design Tests as applicable or required. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American National Standard Institute 1. ANSI A21.11— Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. ANSI B1.20.1 —Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). 3. ANSI B1.20.7—Hose Coupling Screw Threads (Inch). 4. ANSI B16.1—Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and 250. 5. ANSI B16.5 —Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 6. ANSI B16.10—Face to Face and End -to -End Dimensions of Valves. 7. ANSI B 16.18 —Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 8. ANSI B16.34— Valves Flanged, Threaded and Welding End. 9. ANSI B16.42— Ductile -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Classes 150 and 300. 10. ANSI B16.47—Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 through NPS 60. 11. ANSI B16.101 Control Valve Seat Leakage. 03720- 045 -01 15110 -2 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 12. ANSI B36.10— Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. 13. ANSI B93.10— Static Pressure Rating Methods of Square Head Fluid Power Cylinders Part 1: Pressure Containing Components. 14. ANSI B93.15— Mounting Dimensions for Square Head Industrial Fluid Power Cylinders. 15. ANSI/NSF 61— Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. B. American Petroleum Institute API 1. API 6D— Pipeline Valves (Steel Gate, Plug, Ball, and Check Valves). 2. API 6FA— Specification for Fire Test for Valves. 3. API 591 Check Valves: Flanged, Lug, Wafer and Butt- Welding. 4. API 607 — Testing of Valves – Fire Type- Testing Requirements. C. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A47— Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A48— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 4. ASTM A105— Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Forgings for Piping Applications. 5. ASTM A108— Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold - Finished. 6. ASTM A126— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 7. ASTM A148— Standard Specification for Steel Castings, High Strength, for Structural Purposes. 8. ASTM A181— Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Forgings, for General - Purpose Piping. 9. ASTM A182— Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy and Stainless -Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High- Temperature Service. 10. ASTM A193— Standard Specification for Alloy -Steel and Stainless -Steel Bolting Materials for High- Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications. 11. ASTM A194— Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High - Temperature Service, or Both. 12. ASTM A216— Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion - Welding, for High- Temperature Service. 13. ASTM A240— Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium - Nickel Stainless -Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 14. ASTM A269— Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless -Steel Tubing for General Purpose. 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -3 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 15. ASTM A276— Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes. 16. ASTM A313— Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Spring Wire. 17. ASTM A322— Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Alloy, Standard Grades. 18. ASTM A351— Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure - Containing Parts. 19. ASTM A395— Standard Specification for Ferritic Ductile -Iron Pressure - Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures. 20. ASTM A436— Standard Specification for Austenitic Gray Iron Castings. 21. ASTM A439— Standard Specification for Austenitic Ductile -Iron Castings. 22. ASTM A449— Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Heat Treated, 120/105/90 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use. 23. ASTM A276— Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes. 24. ASTM A479— Standard Specification for Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes for Use in Boilers and Other Pressure Vessels. 25. ASTM A494— Standard Specification for Castings, Nickel and Nickel Alloy. 26. ASTM A516— Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon - Steel, for Moderate- and Lower - Temperature Services. 27. ASTM A536— Standard Specification for Ductile -Iron Castings. 28. ASTM A564— Standard Specification for Hot - Rolled and Cold- Finished Age - Hardening Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes. 29. ASTM A582— Standard Specification for Free - Machining Stainless -Steel Bars. 30. ASTM A666— Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold- Worked Austenitic Stainless -Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 31. ASTM A743— Standard Specification for Castings, Iron - Chromium, Iron - Chromium- Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for General Application. 32. ASTM A744— Standard Specification for Castings, Iron- Chromium- Nickel, Corrosion Resistant, for Severe Service. 33. ASTM A890— Standard Specification for Castings, Iron- Chromium- Nickel - Molybdenum Corrosion - Resistant, Duplex (Austenitic /Ferritic) for General Application. 34. ASTM B16—Standard Specification for Free - Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines. 35. ASTM B21— Standard Specification for Naval Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes. 36. ASTM B61— Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Fittings. 37. ASTM B62— Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 38. ASTM B98— Standard Specification for Copper - Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar and Shapes. 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -4 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 • • 39. ASTM B99— Standard Specification for Copper - Silicon Alloy Wire for General Applications. 40. ASTM B 127— Standard Specification for Nickel - Copper Alloy (UNS N04400) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 41. ASTM B148—Standard Specification for Aluminum - Bronze Sand Castings. 42. ASTM B150—Standard Specification for Aluminum Bronze Rod, Bar, and Shapes. 43. ASTM B 164— Standard Specification for Nickel - Copper Alloy Rod, Bar, and Wire. 44. ASTM A169— Standard Specification for Aluminum Bronze Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar. 45. ASTM B 193 — Standard Test Method for Resistivity of Electrical Conductor Materials. 46. ASTM B371— Standard Specification for Copper- Zinc - Silicon Alloy Rod. 47. ASTM B427— Standard Specification for Gear Bronze Alloy Castings. 48. ASTM B446— Standard Specification for Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Columbium Alloy (UNS N06625), Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Silicon Alloy (UNS N06219), and Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Tungsten Alloy (UNS N06650) Rod and Bar. 49. ASTM B443— Standard Specification for Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Columbium Alloy (UNS N06625) and Nickel- Chromium- Molybdenum - Silicon Alloy (UNS N06219) Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 50. ASTM B462— Specification for Forged or Rolled UNS N06030, N06022, N06035, N06200, N06059, N06686, N06020, N06024, N06026, N08367, N10276, N10665, N10675, N10629, N08031, N06045, N06025, & R20033 Alloy Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, & Values & Parts for Corrosive High- Temperature Service. 51. ASTM B463— Standard Specification for UNS N08020, UNS N08026, and UNS N08024 Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 52. ASTM B472— Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy Billets and Bars for Reforging. 53. ASTM B584— Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 54. ASTM B763— Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for Valve Applications. 55. ASTM D1248— Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable. 56. ASTM D1784— Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 57. ASTM D1785— Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -5 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 58. ASTM D2000— Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. 59. ASTM D3222— Standard Specification for Unmodified Poly (Vinylidene Fluoride) (PVDF) Molding Extrusion and Coating Materials. 60. ASTM D4101— Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 61. ASTM F441— Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80. 62. ASTM F467— Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Nuts for General Use. 63. ASTM F468— Standard Specification for Non - Ferrous Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs for General Use. D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 1. ASME 16.5 —Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Metric/Inch Standard. 2. ASME B16.11—Standards of Pipes and Fittings. 3. ASME B16.24 Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Classes 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, and 2500. E. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE) 1. ASSE 1011— Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. F. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C110— Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings for Water. 2. AWWA C111— Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3. AWWA C115— Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 4. AWWA C207 —Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service, Sizes 4 -Inch through 144 -Inch (100 mm through 3,600 mm). 5. AWWA C500— Metal- Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 6. AWWA C504— Rubber- Sealed Butterfly Valves. 7. AWWA C507 —Ball Valves 6 -Inch through 48 -Inch (150 mm through 1200 mm). 8. AWWA C508— Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 -Inch (50 mm) through 24 -Inch (600 mm). 9. AWWA C509— Resilient- Seated Gate Valves for Water - Supply Service. 10. AWWA C512 —Air Release, Air/Vacuum, and Combination Air Valves for Waterworks Service. 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -6 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 • • 11. AWWA C515— Reduced -Wall, Resilient- Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. 12. AWWA C550— Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants. 13. AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 14. AWWA C800— Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings. G. Fluid Controls Institute (FCI) 1. FCI 70- 2— Control Valve Seat Leakage. H. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) 1. MSS SP-61--Pressure Testing of Steel Valves. 2. MSS SP- 67— Butterfly Valves. 3. MSS SP -68 —High Pressure Butterfly Valves with Offset Design. 4. MSS SP- 81— Stainless- Steel, Bonnetless, Flanged Knife Gate Valves. 5. MSS SP -83 —Class 3000 Steel Pipe Unions Socket Welding and Threaded. 6. MSS SP -108— Resilient- Seated Cast - Iron - Eccentric Plug Valves. I. NACE International (NACE) 1. NACE MR -01— Materials Resistant to Sulfide Stress Cracking in Corrosive Petroleum Refining Environments. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. All valves, unless otherwise directed, shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting, and under no circumstances shall valves be dropped, skidded, or rolled. Valves shall not be stacked or placed under pipe, fittings, or other valves in such a manner that damage could result. 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -7 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 C. Slings, hooks, or tongs used for lifting shall be padded in such a manner as to prevent damage to exterior surface or interior linings and valve components. If any part of the coating, lining, or components is damaged, the repairs or replacement shall be made by the Contractor at his expense and in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before attempting to install such valves. D. Only new valves will be allowed for installation and shall be stored in a manner to prevent damage and be kept free of dirt, mud, or other debris. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. All of the valves shall be products of well - established firms which are fully experienced, reputable, have been selling this product for a minimum of 10 years, and are qualified in the manufacture of the particular product furnished. The valves shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the requirements and procedures of applicable AWWA standards and shall comply with these Specifications as applicable. 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.13 VALVE TYPE CLASSIFICATIONS A. Other Special Types of Valves (Type 1100 series): 1. Type 1120: Mud Valves, 4 Inches through 24 Inches. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Valves are identified in the Drawings by size and type number. For example, a callout of 36V300 refers to a 36 -in- diameter Type 300 valve. A Type 300 valve is a flanged, rubber - seated butterfly valve that is 4 inches through 72 inches for exposed service. 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 15110 -8 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES • • B. All valves shall be complete with all necessary geared actuators, chainwheels and chains, handwheels, levers, valve bonnets, valve boxes, extension stems, operating nuts, and T -handle wrenches, which are required for proper valve operating and completing of the work included under this Section. Renewable parts including discs, packing, and seats shall be of types specified in this Section and acceptable by valve manufacturer for the intended service. All units shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast on the body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached stainless -steel plate in raised embossed letters. All isolation valves shall be suitable for the intended service with bubble -tight shutoff to flow in either direction. C. Bronze or brass components in contact with water shall comply with the following requirements: Constituent Content Zinc 7% maximum Aluminum 2% maximum Lead 8% maximum Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum D. Valves and valve operators shall be factory prepared and primed and field finish coated in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 2.02 VALVE ACTUATORS A. The valve actuator shall be an integral part of a valve. The valve actuator shall be provided, installed, and adjusted by the valve manufacturer. Actuator mounting arrangements shall facilitate operation and maintenance and shall be determined by the valve manufacturer unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. B. All valves shall open counter clockwise as viewed from the top. Unless otherwise required by the Owner, the direction of rotation of the wheel or wrench nut to open each valve shall be to the left (counterclockwise). Each valve body or actuator shall have the word "Open" cast on it and an arrow indicating the direction to open. C. Actuators shall clearly indicate valve position and an adjustable stop shall be provided to set closing torque. All exposed nuts, bolts, and washers shall be AISI Type 304 stainless- steel. Unless noted otherwise, valves shall be equipped with the following manual actuators: 1. Exposed valves 6 inches and smaller: removable lever or handwheel actuators. 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -9 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 2. Exposed valves 8 inches and larger: geared actuators with handwheels. 3. Buried or Submerged Valves 6 inches and smaller: 2- inch - square operating nuts (with valve bonnets, valve boxes, and extension stems as required) and T -handle wrench. 4. Buried or Submerged Valves 8 inches and larger: Geared actuators with 2- inch - square operating nuts (with valve bonnets, valve boxes, and extension stems as required) and wrench. D. Levers or handwheels shall be provided to actuate the valves where the valves are within 6 feet and 7 inches from finished grade or the operating floor. Handwheels shall be constructed of ductile -iron. Levers and handwheels shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. Handwheel diameters for traveling nut actuators shall not exceed 8 inches for valves 12 inches and smaller and shall not exceed 12 inches for valves 20 inches and smaller. E. Chainwheel and guide actuators shall be provided for all exposed valves installed with their centerlines more than 6 feet and 9 inches above finished grade. Chainwheels shall be cast -iron with stainless -steel stem, clip, and pins. The actuating chain shall be AISI Type 304 SS. Stainless -steel chain baskets shall also be provided with these units. Chainwheels shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating. Chainwheels and guides shall be Clow Figure F -5680, DeZurik Series W or LWG, Stockham, or equal. F. Gear actuators for valves 8 inches through 20 inches shall be of the worm -and- gear or of the traveling -nut type. Gear actuators for valves 24 inches and larger shall be of the worm- and -gear type. Gear actuators for motorized valves shall be of the worm- and -gear type, regardless of size. 1. Gear actuators should be designed assuming that the differential pressure across the valves is equal to the test pressure of the connecting piping and assuming a line fluid temperature range of 33 °F to 125 °F, unless otherwise required in the detailed valve specifications. 2. Gear actuators shall be enclosed and oil lubricated with seals provided on shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator. Gear actuators for valves aboveground or in vaults and structures shall have handwheels. The actuators for valves in exposed service shall contain a dial indicating the position of the valve disc or plug. 03720- 045 -01 15110 -10 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 • • • • 3. Traveling nut and worm- and -gear actuators shall be of the totally enclosed design and proportioned to permit operation of the valve under full differential pressure rating of the valve with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the handwheel or crank. Stop- limiting devices shall be provided in the actuators in the open and closed positions. Actuators shall be of the self - locking type to prevent the disc or plug from creeping. Design actuator components between the input and the stop- limiting devices to withstand without damage a pull of 200 pounds for handwheel or chainwheel actuators and an input torque of 300 foot - pounds for operating nuts when operating against the stops. 4. The self-locking worm gear shall be a one -piece design of gear bronze material (ASTM B427; or ASTM B584, Alloy C86200) that is accurately machine cut. Actuators for eccentric and lubricated plug valves may use ductile -iron gears provided the gearing is totally enclosed with spring - loaded rubber lip seals on the shafts. The worm shall be hardened alloy steel (ASTM A322, Grade G41500 or G41400; or ASTM A148, Grade 105 -85) with thread ground and polished. Support worm -gear shafts at each end by ball or tapered roller bearings. The reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. The handwheel diameter shall be no more than twice the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm. Worm -gear actuators shall be Limitorque Model HBC, EIM Series W, or equal. G. For buried or submerged service, provide watertight shaft seals and watertight valve and actuator cover gaskets. Provide totally enclosed actuators designed for buried or submerged service. H. All buried valves shall have non - rising stems. All buried valves 3 feet below grade or deeper as measured at the valve centerline shall be furnished with an operator stem extension to extend the operating nut within 6 inches from the top of the valve box cover. 2.03 VALVE END CONNECTIONS A. Provide valve end connections conforming to connected piping and as shown in the Drawings. Generally, all buried valves shall be mechanical joint type end connectors. Exposed valves shall be screwed -end, socket -weld end, or flanged to conform to adjacent exposed connected piping system. B. Comply with the following standards: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Threaded: ANSI B1.20.1. 2. Flanged: ANSI B16.1 Class 125 unless other noted or AWWA C207. 15110 -11 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES 3. Mechanical (gland) Type: AWWA C111. 4. Soldered: ANSI B16.18. C. Nuts, Bolts, and Washers: Wetted or internal to be bronze or stainless- steel. Exposed to be zinc or cadmium - plated. D. Epoxy Interior Coating: Provide epoxy coating for all interiors of ferrous valve body surfaces in accordance with AWWA C550. Coatings shall be NSF - approved for valves in all potable water piping services. Coatings shall not be required for stainless -steel valve interiors. 2.04 VALVE BOXES (NOT USED) 2.05 EXTENSION STEMS A. Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than 4 feet below grade, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to a point 6 inches below the surface of the ground and/or box cover. Where the valve is submerged, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to 6 inches above the water surface. Extension stems shall be Type 316 stainless - steel, solid core, and shall be complete with 2- inch - square operating nut. The connections of the extension stems to the operating nuts and to the valves shall withstand without damage a pull of 300 foot - pounds. B. Extension stem diameters shall be as tabulated below: Valve Size (inches) Minimum Extension Stem Diameter (inches) 2 3/4 3, 4 7/8 6 1 8 1 -1/8 10, 12 1 -1/4 14 1 -3/8 16, 18 1 -1/2 20, 24, 30, 36 1 -3/4 42, 48, 54 2 C. Provide buried valves or valves located inside manholes or vaults with valve boxes cast in the manhole or vault roof with a valve position indicator designed to fit standard 5 -1/4 -inch valve boxes. The indicators shall show valve position and the direction and number of turns required to fully open (or close). All internal gearing shall be sealed. Ship each unit ready for field installation complete with valve box cast -iron adapter, capscrews, guide bushing, position indicator, flexible 03720- 045 -01 December 2013 15110 -12 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES • • • • washer, centering plate, and 2 -inch AWWA nut. Valve box and indicator shall be provided by the valve manufacturer. Indicators shall be Westran Position Indicator, Pratt Diviner, or equal. 2.06 FLOOR STANDS A. When required by the installations, provide floor stands for the operation of valves. Floor stands shall be of the nonrising stem, indicating type, complete with steel extension stems, couplings, handwheels, stem guide brackets, and special yoke attachments as required by the valves and recommended and supplied by the stand manufacturer. Floor stands shall be cast -iron base type: Clow, Figure F -5515; Bingham and Taylor; Stockham; or equal. Handwheels shall turn counterclockwise to open the valves. B. Provide Type 316 stainless -steel anchor bolts. C. Provide Type 316 stainless -steel extension stems for valves in exposed service. Provide Type 316 stainless -steel stems for valves in submerged service. D. Provide adjustable stem guide brackets for extension stems. The bracket shall allow valve stems to be set over a range of 2 to 36 inches from walls. Provide bushings drilled to accept up to 2- inch - diameter stems. Base, arm, and clamp shall be Type 316 stainless- steel. Bushing shall be bronze (ASTM B584, Alloy C86400 or C83600). Bolts, nuts, screws, and washers (including wall anchor bolts) shall be Type 316 stainless- steel. Provide slots in the bracket to accept 3/4 -inch bolts for mounting the bracket to the wall. Products: Trumbull Industries, Inc., Adjustable Stem Guide or equal. 2.07 BOLTS, NUTS, AND GASKETS FOR FLANGED VALVES A. Bolts, washers, and nuts for flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8, for nuts. B. Form threads for stainless -steel bolts by rolling, not by cutting or grinding. C. Gaskets shall be full face, 1/8 inch thick, Buna -N having a Brinell Hardness of 55 to 65 durometer. Gaskets shall be suitable for a water pressure of 200 psi at a temperature of 250 °F. Gaskets shall have "nominal" pipe size inside diameters, not the inside diameters indicated in ANSI B16.21. Provide Garlock Style 9122 or equal. 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -13 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 2.08 PAINTING AND COATING A. Coat metal valves located aboveground or in vaults and structures the same as the adjacent piping. If the adjacent piping is not coated, coat valves as specified in Section 09900, System No. 7. Apply the specified prime and finish coat at the place of manufacture. The finish coat shall match the color of the adjacent piping. Coat handwheels the same as the valves. B. Coat submerged metal valves, stem guides, extension stems, and bonnets at the place of manufacture as specified in Section 09900, System No. 7. C. Line the interior metal parts of metal valves 4 inches and larger, excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless -steel pieces, as specified in Section 09900, System No. 7. Apply lining at the place of manufacture. D. Coat floor stands as specified in Section 09900, System No. 10. E. Test the valve interior linings and exterior coatings at the factory with a low - voltage (22.5 to 80 volts, with approximately 80,000 -ohm resistance) holiday detector, using a sponge saturated with a 0.5% sodium chloride solution. The lining shall be holiday free. F. Measure the thickness of the valve interior linings as specified in Section 09900. Repair areas having insufficient film thickness as specified in Section 09900. 2.09 OTHER SPECIAL TYPES OF VALVES (TYPE 1100) A. Type 1120 —Mud Valves, 4 Inches through 24 Inches: 03720 - 045 -01 December 2013 1. Mud valves shall be rising stem with flanged end, unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. Materials of construction shall be as follows: Component Material Specification Body Cast -iron ASTM A48 or A126 Stem, nut, disc ring, and seat ring Bronze ASTM B62 or B584, Alloy C83600 Extension stem Stainless steel AISI Type 316 2. Provide extension stem, stem guides, and AWWA operating nut. Mud valves shall be Clow Figure F -3088, Waterman Industries, or equal. 15110 -14 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES • • • • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 JOINTS A. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe run to which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, lubricate threads with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight. B. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight. C. Install lug -type valves with separate hex head machine bolts at each bolt hole and each flange (two bolts per valve bolt hole). 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED VALVES (NOT USED) 3.03 INSTALLING BURIED VALVES (NOT USED) 3.04 INSTALLING EXTENSION STEM GUIDE BRACKETS A. Install extension stem guide brackets at 6- to 8 -foot centers. Provide at least two support brackets for stems longer than 10 feet, with one support near the bottom of the stem and one near the top. 3.05 FIELD COATING BURIED VALVES (NOT USED) 3.06 VALVE LEAKAGE AND FIELD TESTING A. Valves shall show zero leakage. Test valves for leakage. Repair or replace any leaking valves and retest. B. Operate manual valves through three full cycles of opening and closing. Valves shall operate from full open to full close without sticking or binding. If valves stick or bind or do not operate from full open to full closed, repair or replace the valve and repeat the tests. C. Test gear actuators through three full cycles from full -open to full -close without binding or sticking. The pull required to operate handwheel- or chainwheel- operated valves shall not exceed 80 pounds. The torque required to operate valves 03720 - 045 -01 15110 -15 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 having 2 -inch AWWA nuts shall not exceed 150 foot - pounds. If actuators stick or bind or if pulling forces and torques exceed the values stated previously, repair or replace the actuators and repeat the tests. Operators shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations before operating. END OF SECTION 03720- 045 -01 15110 -16 MANUAL, CHECK, AND PROCESS VALVES December 2013 • • • • • SECTION 15119 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS FOR VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section includes materials and installation of electric motor actuators for valves. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. The manufacturer's catalog data showing motor actuator parts and materials of construction referenced by AISI, ASTM, SAE, or CDA specifications and grade. Show motor actuator dimensions and weights and the maximum torque required to open and close each motor - actuated valve. B. Certified factory performance test records. C. Motor data including nameplate data, insulation type, duty rating, and torque output at duty rating. D. Electrical schematic drawings and wiring diagrams showing physical locations of components. E. Submit the manufacturer's recommended factory coating systems to meet the service conditions specified in this Section. Submit catalog data on the coating systems recommended by the manufacturer for the service conditions specified in this Section. Coatings shall be provided for metallic components. F. Certification letters and/or corrosion resistance data for coating systems as required herein. Submit field- applied coatings or indicate in the submittal which coating systems from Section 09900, Painting and Coating, are to be applied in the field as specified herein. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 03720 -045 -01 15119 -1 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS March 2014 FOR VALVES 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1. AWWA C540— Standard for Power - Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates. B. Society for Automotive Engineers (SAE) C. National Electronic Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA 4X— Electronic Component Enclosures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAIN TENANCE (NOT USED) 03720- 045 -01 15119 -2 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS March 2014 FOR VALVES • • • • 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS • • A Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 ACTUATOR IDENTIFICATION A. Motor actuators shall have the name of the manufacturer cast or molded onto the actuator body or shown on a permanently attached plate in raised letters. 2.02 ACTUATOR TAGGING A. The Contractor shall provide identifying tags for electric motor - actuated valves as specified in Section 15075, Process Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification. Show valve actuator tag number, name, or designation as shown on the Drawings and valve size. Attach tags to actuator in accordance with Section 15075, Process Equipment, Piping, and Valve Identification. 2.03 ACTUATOR DESIGNATIONS AND DESIGNS A. Actuator designations consist of a type number (1, 2, or 3) and one or more suffix letters. The number and the letters are intended to be compatible and the actuator shall meet the requirements of all. 03720- 045 -01 March 2014 Suffix Description None (basic design) 15- minute duty cycle (Type 1 actuators); NEMA 4X enclosure (motor, controls, push buttons); open- stop -close operation; 480 -volt, 60 -hertz, 3 -phase power supply (Type 1 actuators) and valve to remain in last position upon loss of control signal. Any of these basic requirements may be modified or superseded by suffixes (described below). N Modulating service; size motors for continuous duty; feedback potentiometer and integral electronic positioner /comparator circuit to maintain valve position; 4- to 20 -mA d -c input signal to control valve in remote or auto position; auxiliary contact that closes when the local - off - remote switch is in the remote or auto position; valve position transmitter that generates 4- to 20 -mA d -c signal proportional to valve position and is capable of driving into loads up to 1,000 ohms at 24 -volt d -c; valve remains at last position upon loss of control signal. Thus, an actuator designated as "Type 1N" would be a Type 1 motorized actuator and have all the requirements described and specified for those suffix letters. 15119 -3 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS FOR VALVES 2.04 ACTUATOR TORQUE REQUIREMENTS A. The rated output torque of the motor actuator shall be at least 1.5 times the maximum torque required to open or close the valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions when subjected to the most severe operating condition including any mechanical friction and/or other restrictive conditions that are inherent in the valve assembly. Do not include hammer -blow effect in sizing the actuator to comply with this torque requirement. The Contractor shall coordinate with the valve manufacturer to ensure that the motor actuator stall torque output does not exceed the torque limits of the valve operating stem or shaft. B. Maximum torque shall include seating or unseating torque, bearing torque, dynamic torque, and hydrostatic torque. Assume that the differential pressure across the valve is equal to the pressure or head rating of the valve. C. Assume a maximum pipeline fluid velocity of 16 fps with the valve fully open, unless a higher velocity is specified in the detailed valve specification. 2.05 DESIGN OF TYPE 1 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS A. Actuators shall comply with AWWA C540, except as modified herein. Output capacity of motors shall be sufficient to open or close the valve against the maximum differential pressure when the voltage is 10% above or below normal at the specified service conditions. Motors shall have Class F or H insulation system. Provide motor with torque output (at duty rating) that exceeds the requirements of the following paragraphs including safety factor. B. Design the actuator to move valves from fully closed to fully open in the time specified in the subsection on "Service Conditions." C. Provide the following integral to the actuator: electro- mechanical reversing starter, three overloads (one in each ungrounded leg) or two motor thermal cutouts, 120 -volt control power transformer, LOCAL /STOP/REMOTE selector switch (maintained), OPEN - STOP -CLOSE pushbuttons, and OPEN /CLOSED status indicator lights. D. Provide dry contact for remote indication of the actuator status and alarm conditions as follows: 1. Mode of operation (LOCAL/REMOTE) 2. Actuator FAIL 3. Valve FAIL 4. OPEN /CLOSE Status. 03720- 045 -01 15119 -4 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS March 2014 FOR VALVES • • • E. The actuator shall operate (i.e., move full open or full closed) upon receipt of a remote contact. The actuator operation shall be mutually exclusive (i.e., operate only upon receipt of a remote OPEN or remote CLOSED command). F. The actuator shall include provisions for Emergency Shutdown (ESD) operation, initiated by a remote contact. ESD operation shall either maintain the existing valve position or position the valve either full OPEN or full CLOSED, as preconfigured. This command shall override any command, local or remote. G. Establish the Actuator FAIL alarm whenever any of the following conditions are active, as a minimum: 1. Battery LOW 2. Loss of Power 3. HIGH Motor Temp H. Establish a Valve FAIL Alarm whenever any of the following conditions are active, as a minimum: 1. Valve Jammed (High torque on stops) 2. Valve Stalled (High torque off stops) I. Do not use external conduit for wiring any components within the actuator. J. Gear actuators shall be totally enclosed and factory - grease packed or oil lubricated. The power gearing shall consist of helical gears of heat - treated steel. Worm gears shall be alloy bronze accurately cut with a hobbing machine. Worm shall be hardened steel alloy. Design gears for 24 -hour continuous service with an AGMA rating of 1.50. K. Position switches shall be integrally geared to the actuator and shall be adjustable and capable of actuation at any point between fully opened and fully closed positions. The position switches shall operate while the actuator is either in manual or in motor operation. Provide motor actuators with position switches capable of being separately used to provide remote indication of end of travel in each direction and to stop motion at the end of travel in each direction. L. Provide two individually adjustable torque switches to protect the valve and motor against overload in the opening and closing directions. To prevent hammering, the torque switch shall not reclose until the valve is made to travel in the opposite direction. 03720 - 045 -01 15119 -5 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS March 2014 FOR VALVES M. Provide a manually operated handwheel that shall not rotate during electrical operation. If electrical power is interrupted, handwheel operation shall be activated by a hand lever attached to the mechanism. While the valve is operated manually, the motor shall not rotate. After electrical power is restored, the handwheel shall automatically disengage. Design the handwheel diameter so that hand operation will not damage the valve. N. The position switch and torque switch contacts shall be capable of interrupting at least 0.2- ampere inductive load at 125 -volt d -c or 6- ampere inductive load at 120 -volt a -c. O. Provide a lost motion device for open/close operation to permit the motor to reach full speed before the load is applied. Provide lost motion action for manual operation also. Do not provide lost motion device for modulating applications. P. Provide minimum 10 -watt space heater mounted in the actuator housing to prevent condensation and maintain the temperature in the actuator housing 5° above the ambient temperature in the structure. Heater shall be on at all times. Q. Motor shall de- energize if a stall occurs when attempting to unseat a jammed valve. R. Provide a time delay to prevent instant reversal of the actuator motor. S. Provide terminal connections for external remote controls fed from an internal 24 -volt or 120 -volt supply. T. Provide a main disconnect NEMA 4X SS rated 15- ampere 3 -pole, 480 -volt non - fused to be mounted remotely, adjacent to the valve vault as shown on the Drawings. U. Electric motor actuators shall be Auma Model SA 14.6 54B, or Engineer approved equal. 2.06 FACTORY PERFORMANCE TESTING OF MOTOR ACTUATOR A. The Contractor shall test each actuator before shipment in accordance with AWWA C540, Section 5.3. The application torque shall be the maximum torque required to open or close the valve at any position including seating and unseating conditions. 03720- 045 -01 15119 -6 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS March 2014 FOR VALVES • 2.07 WORM GEAR SEAL AND GREASE REPLACEMENT A. The Contractor shall replace the seals and grease on the existing worm gears for each of the existing 36 -inch internal recycle plug valves. B. The replacement seal size, type, and material and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and installed in strict accordance with their written instructions. The existing worm gear is manufactured by Auma, Model Number GS -250. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE AND TEMPORARY INSTALLATION BEFORE START -UP The Contractor shall do the following: A. If actuators are stored or installed outside or in areas subject to temperatures below 40 °F or are exposed to the weather before permanent installation, provide the manufacturer's recommended procedures for extended storage. B. Provide temporary covers over the actuator electrical components. C. Provide temporary conduits, wiring, and electrical supply to space heaters. D. Exercise each actuator from its fully open to fully closed position at least once every 7 days. E. Inspect electrical contacts before start-up. 3.02 ATTACHING ELECTRIC ACTUATORS A. The valve manufacturer shall mount the electric motor actuator and accessories on each valve and stroke the valve before shipment. Adjust limit switch positions and torque switches. 3.03 PAINTING AND COATING A. Coating system shall be one of the following: 1. Coat electric motor actuator in the factory with the manufacturer's recommended coating system for the service conditions described below. Corrosive applications indicated below by the suffix "H" following the actuator type designation shall require a special chemical corrosion resistant coating that is recommended for the application. The 03720 - 045 -01 15119 -7 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS March 2014 FOR VALVES manufacturer's standard factory coatings shall be considered acceptable if the manufacturer submits a certification letter stating that the coating is recommended for the specific chemical service as indicated below or sufficiently demonstrates that the chemical resistance of the coating using chemical resistance tables or literature cut sheets provided by the coating manufacturer. 2. Coat ferrous metallic components of the actuator in the factory with a prime coat in accordance with Section 09900, Painting and Coating, System No. 10, for ferrous metals. The Contractor shall apply the intermediate and finish coats for System No. 10, Section 09900, Painting and Coating, in the field. 3. Do not coat non - ferrous metallic components of the actuator in the factory. Instead the Contractor shall apply prime coat using System No. 52, Section 09900, Painting and Coating, followed by the intermediate and finish coats of System No. 10, Section 09900, Painting and Coating, in the field. 4. The Contractor shall be allowed to overcoat the actuator factory coatings with System No. 10, Section 09900, Painting and Coating, intermediate and finish coats to meet the corrosion resistance requirement if the System No. 10 coating manufacturer provides written certification that System No. 10 intermediate and finish coats are compatible with the actuator factory coating. B. Thermoplastic components with UV inhibitors shall be considered corrosion resistant and shall not require additional coatings. 3.04 SERVICE CONDITIONS Valve Tag Number (Valve Size and Type) Actuator Type or Designation Fluid Max. Flow (gym) Max. Diff Pressure (psi) Max. Opening/ Closing Time (seconds) East IR Return Valve (36 -inch Plug Valve) 1N Raw Sewage 39,000 8 180 West IR Return Valve (36 -inch Plug Valve) 1N Raw Sewage 39,000 8 180 03720 -045 -01 March 2014 15119 -8 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS FOR VALVES • • • • 3.05 FIELD INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install the valve and actuator as indicated on the Drawings in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Keep units dry, closed, and sealed to prevent internal moisture damage during construction. Provide additional hangers and supports for actuators that are not mounted vertically over the valve or that may impose an eccentric load on the piping system. 3.06 FIELD TESTING OF MOTOR ACTUATORS The Contractor shall do the following: A. Test motor actuators as installed by measuring the current drawn (in amperes) by each motor for unseating, seating, and running conditions. The measured current shall not exceed the current measurement recorded during the factory performance test. B. If the measured current drawn exceeds the above value, provide a larger motor or gear drive or adjust the actuator so that the measured amperage does not exceed the value. C. Ensure that limit switches are placed at their correct settings. Open and close valves four times and ensure that limit switches function properly and that open and close contact signals are received by the plant -wide control system. D. Demonstrate that the actuator opens and closes the valve in response to the remote control signals. 3.07 CERTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall provide written certification from the electric motor actuator manufacturer that the actuator has been properly installed in compliance with the contract documents and the manufacturer's instructions, and that the equipment is operating in accordance with the contract documents. The Contractor shall make all necessary corrections and adjustments including but not limited to labor, parts, or freight at no additional cost to the County. END OF SECTION 03720- 045 -01 15119 -9 ELECTRIC MOTOR ACTUATORS March 2014 FOR VALVES • • • SECTION 15220 SLUICE GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Section includes provisions for the complete installation of sluice gates, as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. B. Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. C. Section 01770, Project Closeout. D. Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. E. Section 03300, Cast -in -Place Concrete. F. Section 09900, Painting and Coating. 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Make, model, and weight of each equipment assembly. 2. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. 3. Detailed Structural and Mechanical Drawings showing the equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of associated equipment associated therewith. 4. Gate operator and stem calculations for each gate and service condition. 5. Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load. 6. Performance Test Procedures. 7. Painting and Coating data sheets complying with Section 09900. 03720 - 045 -01 15220 -1 SLUICE GATES March 2014 B. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's written/printed installation instructions. 4. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01600, Materials and Equipment. 6. Operation and Maintenance manuals: As specified in Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 7. Service records for maintenance performed during construction. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) B. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall inspect the Owner direct - purchased equipment; take field measurements; and verify that he has all required items, equipment, manufacturer's instructions before proceeding with the installation. B. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required but do not cover all details that may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as provided. They are, however, intended to cover the installation and field testing of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 03720 - 045 -01 15220 -2 SLUICE GATES March 2014 • • • • • • 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. The Manufacturer shall guarantee the sluice gates, when installed and operated as recommended by the Manufacturer with a documented maintenance program, trouble -free operation for 10 years. If the Owner or Engineer is not completely satisfied with the performance of the product, the Manufacturer shall remedy the problem at no cost or refund the materials and installation cost upon the return of the equipment. The Manufacturer shall guarantee the following: 1. Leakage shall be no more than that allowed by the AWWA C563 or AWWA C501 during the guarantee period. 2. Door (disc) shall be free of sticking or binding as judged by the Engineer (move freely via operator provided) with no exercising required. Gate operators are to be warranted by the operator manufacturer. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650, Delivery, Storage, and Handling, for storing and protecting the items specified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall do the following: 1. Store and handle equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Properly protect all equipment and parts so that no damage or deterioration will occur during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. 3. Properly protect all equipment and parts against any damage during a prolonged storage period at the site. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 03720- 045 -01 15220 -3 SLUICE GATES March 2014 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. 1.13 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS A. The sluice gates shall be substantially watertight under the design head conditions. 1. The leakage shall not exceed 0.10 gallon per minute per foot of periphery for the rated seating and unseating head at the maximum seating pressure specified, in accordance with AWWA C563 or AWWA C501. B. For the purpose of these specifications, gate types listed in the schedule shall be defined as meeting the leakage requirements under the head conditions on the table shown on the contract drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Sluice gates and accessories shall be of the fiberglass reinforced plastic or coplastix type and shall be as manufactured by the following, or approved equal: 1. Plasti -Fab, Inc. 2. Ashbrook Simon - Hartley. 3. Engineer- approved equal. B. All sluice gates shall be provided by the same manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Gates 1. Gates a. Structural characteristics for a 1/8 -inch glass mat laminate shall meet the following minimum physical properties: 03720 -045 -01 15220 -4 SLUICE GATES March 2014 • • • • Tensile strength Flexural Modulus Flexural strength Impact Strength Water absorption 14,700 psi 800,000 psi 23,300 psi 9.0 ft -lb /in < 0.13% (in 24 hrs) b. Each gate shall be molded individually to the exact dimensions specified. Sluice gates shall be manufactured of reinforced thermoset plastic containing ultraviolet absorbers. The surface shall be resin rich to a depth of 0.010 inch to 0.020 inch and reinforced with C -glass or polymeric fiber surfacing material. The surface shall be free of exposed reinforcing fibers. The composition of these layers shall be approximately 95% (by weight) resin. The remaining laminate shall be made up of copolymer composite and reinforcing fibers in a form, orientation, and position to meet the mechanical requirements. Structural reinforcing shall be used to attain the necessary stiffness to meet deflection requirements and shall be well- encapsulated with a laminate not less than 1 /4 -inc -thick on each side to ensure against any permeation by water. Type 316 stainless steel stem mounting bracket shall be provided on the gate for mating to the stem. 2. Frames and Guides a. Guides shall be styled for wall mounting or in- channel mounting as shown in the Drawings. The frame and guides shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel. The guide frame will have a 3/8-x-2 - inch deep slot and shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. All guides shall be factory- assembled. The corner shall be capable of withstanding a torque of 300 foot - pounds pull applied parallel to the gate slot in either direction. b. Where guides extend above the operating floor to form a bench stand for the lift mechanism, they must be suitably strong and rigid enough to extend a maximum unsupported length of 3 feet, 6 inches without the use of additional stiffening members. The head rail shall have a maximum deflection of 1/4 inch when subjected to a horizontal force of four times the 40 -pound maximum handwheel pull. c. Where wall mounted guides extend above a concrete wall, the top anchor bolt shall be not more than 6 inches below the top of the wall. Gate inverts shall be flush with the channel bottom. 03720 - 045 -01 15220 -5 SLUICE GATES March 2014 3. Elastomeric Seals a. Seals shall be made of molded or extruded neoprene having a hardness range of 55 to 65 shore A Durometer and conforming to ASTM D2000 having a maximum compression set of 25% and low temperature brittleness to meet suffix F -17 (- 40 °F). Seals, including bottom seals, shall be mounted on gate covers with Type 316 stainless steel cap screws and Type 316 stainless steel or FRP clamping bars thus providing a means of repair and replacement without dewatering the channel. The J -seal shall form a wedge on the gate to ensure tight closure. The seal shall be chemically compatible with the fluid it is in contact with. B. Coplastix Gates 1. Gates a. The gate shall be constructed from a reinforced rigid composite plastic material, having a minimum thickness of 1/8 -inch, and shall meet the following minimum physical properties: Tensile strength Flexural Modulus Flexural strength Impact Strength Water absorption 15,400 psi 1,497,000 psi 28,000 psi 9.65 ft -lb /in <0.09% (in 24 hrs) b. Gate shall have an internal matrix of carbon steel of suitable strength for the specified service. The gate outer surface skins shall be a homogeneous plastic material having extremely high tensile and impact strength, be nontoxic, and be stabilized against ultraviolet light. The plastic material shall be an Aramid fiber from the KEVLAR family of fibers and shall have the minimum properties specified herein and shall be designed to limit the deflection to a maximum of 1 /1000 of the span under design head conditions based on horizontal support members only. 2. Frames and Guides a. The frame and guides shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel. b. The frame shall be structurally reinforced to attain the necessary stiffness to meet deflection requirements. 03720 - 045 -01 15220 -6 SLUICE GATES March 2014 • • 3. Elastomeric Seals a. The sealing arrangement for the sluice gate shall be comprised of sealing faces and side guides constructed of ultra -high molecular weight polyolefin having an extremely low coefficient of friction and backing constructed of highly resilient expanded neoprene. Guides and seating of the gate shall be easily adjustable (minimum 5/8- inch). All moving contact surfaces shall be compatible to each other, thereby minimizing sticking /jamming and making the operation easy. 2.03 LIFTS AND OPERATORS A. Manual operators shall be cast iron with a bronze lift nut. Operators shall be sized to start the gate moving under maximum head pressure with a pull of not more than 40- pounds. A handwheel shall be supplied that is compatible with the lift. 2.04 OPERATING STEMS A. Each sluice gate shall be equipped with a rising operating stem. The stem shall be Type 304 stainless steel and shall be provided with adjustable stop collars to limit upward and downward travel. Stems shall have a maximum slenderness ratio L/r of less than 200. Stem guides with bronze bushings may be used so that the unsupported stem length does not exceed a slenderness ratio L/r of 200. B. Sections of the extension stems shall be joined together by solid couplings, threaded and keyed to the stems. All couplings of the same size shall be interchangeable. C. Stems shall be designed to withstand tensile and compressive loads that occur under maximum operating conditions. Design for compressive loading shall meet AISC code where K =1 with a minimum safety Factor of 2 to 1. D. Stems shall be cold - rolled with a double -start stub acme thread and a finish of 32 microns or less. Stems shall be fixed to the disc by a threaded and keyed assembly into a lifting nut attached to the disc in a lifting bracket, which is bolted to the disc. E. Transparent plastic stem covers shall be provided with vent holes to minimize condensation. The stem covers shall be attached by a threaded connection and shall be marked with "Open" and "Closed" position indicators. 03720 - 045 -01 15220 -7 SLUICE GATES March 2014 2.05 FASTENERS A. All fasteners, anchor bolts, etc. shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All anchor bolts, assembly bolts, screws, nuts, etc. shall be of ample section to safely withstand the forces created by the operation of the gate while subjected to the heads specified. B. All bolts requiring insertion into the existing concrete floors, walls, and slabs shall be epoxy embedded and shall be of the minimum diameter, embedment length, and overall length as recommended by the gate manufacturer for safe anchorage and operation of the gate under maximum head conditions. Expansion type anchors shall not be allowed. 2.06 PAINTING AND COATINGS A. Exposed or submerged metals shall be painted and coated in accordance with Section 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall obtain all installation recommendations directly from the manufacturer. All work shall be performed according to the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mounting of Sluice Gates —The gate shall be mounted directly to the channel wall with stainless steel anchor brackets provided by the manufacturer. C. The sluice gate equipment and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the installation manual furnished by the gate manufacturer. 1. Care should be used in the handling, storage, and installation of this equipment to prevent damage or distortion to the equipment and to ensure proper performance. D. Frames and guides shall be installed plumb in a true vertical plane with 90- degree corners. 3.02 INSPECTION A. The services shall be provided by a factory representative who has knowledge of proper operation and maintenance to inspect the final installation and supervise a test run of the equipment for one full 8 -hour day 03720 - 045 -01 15220 -8 SLUICE GATES March 2014 • • • • 3.03 TESTING A. The completely assembled sluice gate, in the vertical position, shall be shop inspected for proper seating. 1. Seat facings shall be machined and wedges adjusted to meet equipment design tolerances previously specified. 2. The disc shall be fully opened and closed in its guide system to ensure that it operates freely and that the required clearance between the disc tongue and gate guide groove maintained at all times. 3. Floorstands and benchstands shall be shop operated to insure proper assembly and operation. 4. Field test shall be conducted on all gates to verify compliance with all seating tolerances and leakage requirements. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATION A. The manufacturer' representative will review the installation, direct the Contractor to make any required corrective actions, and certify the installation after all corrective actions are complete. These manufacturer services are included in the manufacturer's quote. Should additional manufacturer services be needed due to improper planning or workmanship by the Contractor, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for cost of these services. The reimbursement amount will be deducted from the Contractor's pay application. END OF SECTION 03720 -045 -01 15220 -9 SLUICE GATES March 2014 • • • DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL • SECTION 16401 LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary for a complete corrosion - resistant and operable electrical installation, including all fees, charges, and permits necessary. Work of this Section includes electrical installation requirements for equipment of other sections. This Section is general and may include specifications for materials and equipment not contained within the scope of this project. B. The Contractor shall provide temporary and permanent electrical services of proper voltage and phase as required for the Project. All single -phase temporary receptacle outlets shall be provided with ground fault protection in accordance with NEC Article 590.6 and installed in accordance with NEC 406.8. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of this Section with others involved in • the construction of the project. D. The Contractor shall demolish equipment as indicated on the Plans. All electrical equipment removed from service shall be carefully removed to avoid damage and returned to the Owner in good condition. The Contractor shall document the transfer of all equipment to the Owner in the form of a returned equipment spreadsheet which, at a minimum, describes the equipment, the model number, the serial number, the condition of the equipment when it was removed from service, the date of equipment transfer, and a signature indicating the Owner's receipt of the equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The provisions of all other technical sections of the Specifications are fully applicable to this Section as if incorporated in this Section. B. The City of Clearwater Contract Documents and Division 1 of these Specifications are a part of this Section as if incorporated in this Section. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -1 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01330, Submittals and Acceptance: A. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work to the Owner for review within 30 days after the Award of Contract. B. The list shall include catalog numbers, cut sheets, diagrams, and other descriptive data required to demonstrate conformance with the Specifications. Partial lists will not be acceptable. C. The basis of acceptance shall be the manufacturer's published ratings for the equipment. The manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of products specified. D. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following items of equipment: 1. Wiring Devices 2. Safety Switches. 3. Circuit Breakers. 4. Motors. 5. Motor Starters. 6. Relays. 7. Control Devices. 8. Concrete Posts/Poles. 9. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 10. Concrete Pull Boxes. E. Contents of the shop drawings shall include the following: 1. Details of construction, outline and assembly drawings. 2. Dimensions. 3. Materials. 4. Finish. 5. Ratings. 6. Accessories. 7. Trim. 8. Engineering data. 9. Ladder type schematic control diagrams and wiring diagrams. 10. Calculations for harmonic current and voltage distortion. 11. Test Equipment datasheets and proposed test procedures for testing the grounding system. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -2 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • F. The Contractor shall submit the manufacturer's literature for the equipment listed in Paragraph 1.03.D above to the Owner for review, including the following: 1. Written description of equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. 2. Recommended assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and calibration instructions. 3. Operating instructions. 4. Guide to troubleshooting. 5. Maintenance instructions and timetables. 6. Parts List and an assembly drawing with the parts identified. G. Surge protective device submittals shall include the following: 1. UL 1449 peak let - through voltage documentation. 2. Category C3 peak let - through voltage test results. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCES Reference standards and recommended practices referred to in this Specification Section shall be the latest revision of any such document in effect at the bid time. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Section differs from these documents, the requirements of this Section shall apply. A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1. ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 2. ANSI C12.20—Electricity Meters 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy Class. 3. ANSI C62.41— Guide on Surge Voltages in AC Power Circuits Rated up to 600V. 4. ANSI C62.45— Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low - Voltage (1000V and less) AC Power Circuits. 5. ANSI C80.1— Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC). B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36— Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48— Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -3 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3. ASTM A153— Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 4. ASTM B8— Standard Specification for Concentric - Lay- Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard, or Soft. C. Anti- Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) 1. AFBMA Std 20— Radial Bearings of Ball, Cylindrical Roller, and Spherical Roller Types, Metric Design. D. Federal Specifications and Standards (FSS) 1. FSS A- A- 50552— Fittings for Cable, Power, Electrical and Conduit, Metal, Flexible. 2. FSS A- A- 50553A— Fittings for Conduit, Metal (Thick -Wall (Rigid) and Thin -Wall (EMT) Type). 3. FSS A- A- 50563A— Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies and Entrance Caps, Electrical: Cast Metal. 4. FSS A- A- 55809A— Insulation Tape, Electrical, 600V, Polyvinyl Chloride, Pressure - Sensitive Adhesive. 5. FSS A -A -55810 Conduit, Metal, Flexible. 6. FSS A-A-59213Splice Connectors. 7. FSS A- A- 59541 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation). 8. FSS W- C -375C— Circuit Breakers, Molded Case: Branch Circuit and Service. 9. FSS W- C -375D Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service. 10. FSS W- C- 596G(2) Connector, Electrical Power (General Specification). 11. FSS W- P- 115C— Panel, Power Distribution. 12. FSS W- S- 896F(1 )—Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush- Mounted (General Specification). E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. NEMA ICS 1— Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements. 2. NEMA ICS 6— Industrial Controls and Systems: Enclosures. 3. NEMA MG 1— Motors and Generators. 4. NEMA TC 2— Electric Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. 5. NEMA TC 3— Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 6. NEMA WD 1— General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -4 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 70— National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 101 —Life Safety Code. G. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1. UL 6— Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit – Steel. 2. UL 50— Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 3. UL 83— Thermoplastic- Insulated Wires and Cables. 4. UL 360 — Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 5. UL 467 — Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 6. UL 489 — Molded -Case Circuit Breakers, Molded -Case Switches, and Circuit Breaker Enclosures. 7. UL 498 — Attachment Plugs and Receptacles. 8. UL 508— Industrial Control Equipment. 9. UL 510— Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape. 10. UL 514B— Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings. 11. UL 651— Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. 12. UL 797 — Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel. 13. UL 1449 —Surge Protective Devices. 14. UL 1660— Liquid -Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. H. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 1. IEEE 112— Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 2. IEEE 117— Standard Test Procedure for Evaluation of Systems of Insulating Materials for Random -Wound AC Electric Machinery. 3. IEEE 519— Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranties shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01780, Warranties and Bonds. B. All equipment and materials supplied shall be warranted against defective design, materials, and workmanship for a minimum of 1 year, or as specified in this Section, against normal use. The warranty period shall begin once the total project is accepted by the Owner and shall cover replacement of equipment and /or repair, 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -5 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS including labor, travel time, and miscellaneous expenses at no cost to the Owner for the full warranty period. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. The Contractor shall adhere to the requirements specified in Section 01650 for storage and protection of the items specified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall deliver materials with manufacturer's tags and labels and. UL labels intact. Packaged material shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name, brand, and UL label. Materials and equipment shall be stored in a dry, clean location. Handle and store so as to avoid damage. Items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition shall be removed from the project site immediately and replaced with acceptable items. The Contractor shall provide suitable protection of materials and equipment from dust and moisture. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of materials and equipment until they are accepted by the Owner. 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) 1.11 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED) 1.12 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O &M) MANUALS A. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be in accordance with General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Specification Section 01830, Operations and Maintenance Manuals. B. Before final acceptance of this project, an operation and maintenance manual shall be submitted to the Owner. The manual shall include manufacturer's literature as outlined in Paragraph 1.03.F above, drawings corrected in accordance with shop drawing review comments and including all modifications, and lists of suppliers and/or service shops that can provide parts and accessories and equipment repair for the items of equipment listed in Paragraph 1.03.D above. The lists shall include a contact name, telephone number, and address. C. A test report detailing the results of the grounding system test shall be provided with the O &M Manual. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -6 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • 1.13 CODES, INSPECTIONS, AND FEES A. The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and inspections required for the work of this Section and pay all charges incidental to this work. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner all certificates of inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.14 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS (NOT USED) PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All material and equipment shall be new and listed or labeled for use within the United States by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). Equipment shall be provided with a specific listing, such as UL, when indicated in this Section or in other portions of the Contract Documents. Only products by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of specified units will be acceptable. B. Where two or more units which perform the same function or are of the same class of equipment or materials are required, provide all units from a single manufacturer. C. Provide materials and equipment of suitable composition to perform satisfactorily when exposed to corrosive conditions of the project site. 1. Provide breather and drain fittings in all raceways and enclosures where necessary to prevent condensation or trapping of moisture. 2.02 CONDUIT A. Rigid Metal Conduit: Rigid metal conduit shall be zinc - coated steel and shall conform to UL 6. Fittings shall be cast or malleable iron, zinc - coated, and shall conform to FSS A- A- 50563A and UL 514B. 1. PVC - coated rigid steel conduit, elbows, and fittings shall be coated with a bonded polyvinylchloride which is permanently fused on at the factory. a. Aboveground conduit system PVC coating shall have a minimum thickness of 40 mils. Couplings and condulets shall have overlapping pressure sealing sleeves. b. Below- ground conduit system PVC coating shall have a minimum thickness of 20 mils. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -7 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be polyvinyl chloride compound and shall conform to NEMA TC -2 and UL 651. Conduit shall be sunlight resistant, rated for use with 90 °C conductors. Fittings shall be of the same polyvinyl chloride compound and from the same manufacture as the conduit and shall conform to NEMA TC -3 and UL 514B. Conduit and fittings shall be joined by a solvent cement. The type of cement and the procedure for application shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer. The conduit shall be Carlon Plus 40 and Plus 80, or equal. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Electrical metallic tubing shall be zinc - coated steel and shall conform to UL 797. Fittings shall be compression type and shall conform to FSS A- A- 50553A. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be zinc - coated steel and shall conform to FSS A- A- 55810. Fittings shall conform to FSS A- A- 50552. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be made with galvanized steel flexible conduit covered with an extruded PVC jacket. Fittings shall be compression type specifically designed for use with flexible conduit and shall form watertight connections. Box connectors shall have an "0" ring between the fitting body and the enclosure. F. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be an assembly of a hard PVC spiral completely surrounded by flexible PVC. Conduit shall conform to UL 1660 for use as indicated in Article 351 of the NEC and shall be sunlight resistant. 1. Fittings shall be compression type designed for use with the flexible conduit. Box connectors shall have "0" ring between the fitting body and the enclosure. 2. Conduit shall be "Carflex" manufactured by Carlon, or equal. 2.03 BOXES A. General: Boxes shall be sized as recommended by the NEC or as shown on the Drawings. 1. Boxes shall be nonmetallic or code -gauge galvanized steel, stainless steel, or cast metal, as specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron and shall be gasketed of the type indicated on the Drawings. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -8 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • 2.04 WIRE AND CABLE A. Conductors: All conductors shall be annealed soft drawn copper, conforming to ASTM B8, FSS A- A- 59544, UL 83, and the latest requirements of the NEC. All conductors shall have THW or THWN type insulation, rated at 600 volts, unless specifically noted otherwise. 1. Other types of insulation may be used as permitted by the NEC. The Contractor shall be responsible for change in conduit size and conductor size to maintain the ampacity of the circuit. 2. Wire #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded concentric lay. Wire sizes #14, #12, and #10 AWG shall be stranded for control and motor power and solid for light and receptacle circuits. 3. Conductors shall be as manufactured by Senator Wire & Cable Company, Laribee Wire Manufacturing Company, Inc., Southwire Company, or equal. B. Conductor splices shall conform to FSS A- A- 59213. Acceptable: Scotchcast • Splicing Kit, 3M Company. Plastic tape shall conform to FSS A- A- 55809A. 2.05 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Safety switches shall be NEMA heavy -duty type and UL listed. Switches shall be rated as indicated on the Drawings. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open. Switches shall have permanently attached arc suppressors, hinged or otherwise attached to permit easy access to line -side lugs without removal of the arc suppressor. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum cables and front removable. All current - carrying parts shall be plated by electrolytic processes. 2. Switches shall have a quick -make and quick -break operating handle and mechanism which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Padlocking provisions shall be provided for padlocking in the OFF position only, with at least three padlocks. Switches shall have a dual - cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. B. Enclosures: Switches installed indoors shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general - purpose enclosure with knockouts, unless otherwise specified. Switches located 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -9 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS outdoors shall be furnished in NEMA 4X enclosures or as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Covers on NEMA 1 enclosures shall be attached with butt -type pin hinges. 2. NEMA 4X switches shall be furnished in stainless steel enclosures without knockouts. The means of sealing the cover shall be positive, with 30- through 200 - ampere switches having quick release latches with pin type hinges and gaskets. Enclosures shall be of Code -gauge stainless steel. C. The switch jaws shall be multi - spring type for positive grip of the switch blades. The fuse clips shall be spring- reinforced, positive - pressure type, or electrolytic copper. D. Switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, Cutler - Hammer/Westinghouse, ITE, or approved equal. All switches shall be by the same manufacturer. 2.06 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. The Contractor shall provide molded -case thermal magnetic circuit breakers of the type, size, and electrical characteristics specified or indicated on the Drawings. Circuit breakers used as service entrance disconnects shall be suitable and rated as service entrance equipment. B. Circuit breakers shall be of single -unit construction, and multi -pole circuit breakers shall have trip elements in each pole with common trip bar. Frame size 225 amperes or larger shall have adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip and shall have interchangeable thermal magnetic trip units. C. Shunt trip shall be installed in circuit breakers where required by the Drawings or Specifications. D. Circuit breaker interrupting ratings shall be equal to the available short circuit current at the point of installation with the minimum ratings as follows: Frame Size 240 V 480 V 100 A 18,000 14,000 225 A 25,000 22,000 400 A 42,000 30,000 800 A 42,000 30,000 1200 A 42,000 30,000 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -10 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • E. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures for general duty indoor use. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel for exterior locations unless indicated otherwise. F. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by General Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler - Hammer/Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.07 MOTORS A. Motors shall be provided with the equipment driven by the motor, unless otherwise indicated or specified, and shall conform to the latest requirements of NEMA, IEEE, ANSI, NEC, and Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA) standards, where applicable. 1. Motors shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the driven equipment, under all load and operating conditions, without exceeding 100% of the motor's nameplate horsepower rating, excluding the service factor, and without exceeding the motor's rated temperature limits. 2. Motors shall be furnished with permanent, highly visible stainless steel nameplates. Nameplates shall include all motor ratings, accessories, and special features. B. Motors may be single speed or variable speed as required for the application. 1. Motors for variable -speed applications shall be designed for operation at the rated maximum speed and at reduced speed throughout the variable - speed range without overloading. Motors for variable -speed operation shall be inverter duty rated and compatible with the associated variable - speed control equipment and operating conditions, including the effects of harmonic current and voltage distortion. Motors for variable -speed operation shall be equipped with a normally closed automatic reset winding thermostat in addition to all accessory equipment recommended by the variable -speed equipment manufacturer. Thermostat leads shall be brought to the motor connection box. 2. Motors 100 HP and above shall be equipped with two normally closed automatic reset winding thermostats. Thermostats shall be imbedded in the stator winding, between phases, connected in series, with leads brought to the motor connection box. C. Motors shall be NEMA Design B, unless otherwise indicated or specified, and shall be suitable for continuous duty operation. Motor currents and torque shall be in accordance with NEMA MG1 -12.34 and MG1- 12.37. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -11 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1. Three- phase, single- speed, squirrel -cage induction motors less than 50 HP shall be rated 208 - 230/460 volt for use on 208 -, 240 -, or 480 -volt, three - phase, 60 -Hz systems. 2. Multi -speed motors and motors 50 HP and larger may be single voltage as required for the particular voltage. D. Motors shall be provided with Class F non - hygroscopic insulation system using materials and an insulation system evaluated in accordance with IEEE 117 classification tests. Temperature rise shall be limited to a maximum of 80 °C, by resistance, at a service factor of 1.0 in an ambient temperature of 40 °C. Motors shall have multiple dips and bakes of varnish treatment for additional protection. E. Motors larger than 5 HP shall be provided with locked -rotor current not exceeding NEMA Code letter "G." F. Motors shall be furnished with a minimum service factor of 1.15. G. Motors shall be suitable for full voltage across - the - line -type starting, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. H. Motors shall be equipped with ball, open, single -row, deep - groove Conrad -type bearings conforming to the AFBMA Standard 20. Drive end bearings may be cylindrical roller type for belted drives. 1. Bearing life shall be 17,500 hours minimum for belted applications and 100,000 hours minimum for flexible direct - coupled applications. 2. The bearing identification number shall be stamped on the motor nameplate. 3. The lubrication system shall consist of a capped grease fitting inlet, a relief plug 180 degrees from inlet, and a grease reservoir in bracket and cast inner cap. 4. Bearings shall be greased by the manufacturer with a premium moisture - resistant polyuria- thickened grease containing rust inhibitors and suitable for operation over a temperature range of -25 °C to 120 °C. I. The motor enclosure, including frame with integrally -cast feet and/or vertical P- base mounting, end brackets, bearing inner caps, fan guards, and conduit box and cover shall be ASTM Type A48, Class 25 cast iron or better. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -12 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • • 1. Conduit boxes shall be provided with the number and size of conduit connections, as shown on the Drawings. The conduit box shall allow rotation to accommodate conduit connection Provision for grounding shall be made using a mounted clamp -type lug in the conduit box. 2. Motors shall be equipped with lifting lugs. Motor enclosures shall be equipped with stainless -steel screens for all openings in accordance with NEMA MG 1 for guarded machines. 3. Vertical hollow -shaft motors shall be equipped with non - reverse ratchets to prevent backspin. 4. Motors shall be NEMA MG 1 open drip- proof, weather- protected Type I, totally enclosed fan- cooled, or explosion -proof as specified in other sections of the Specifications or indicated on the Drawings. J. Polyphase motors shall be of an energy - efficient design having a minimum efficiency rating as listed in NEMA MG 1- 12.55, Table 12 -6C. 1. Motor efficiency shall be determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1- 12.54.1 and IEEE 112, Method B. 2. Efficiency rating shall be labeled on the motor nameplate in compliance with NEMA MG 1- 12.54.2. K. Motors shall be capable of the following starts per hour, unless otherwise specified, without overheating or causing damage to the motor. 1. 60 HP and below, six starts per hour. 2. Above 60 HP, four starts per hour. 3. Submersible motors, 10 starts per hour. L. Motors 5 HP and above, except submersible motors, shall be provided with a 120 -volt single -phase space heater. Leads shall be brought to the motor terminal box. 2.08 MOTOR STARTERS A. Manual Motor Starters: Manual motor starters shall be toggle, key, or pushbutton type and shall be equipped with melting alloy overload protection on each pole. 1. Fractional horsepower manual motor starters shall be Square D Class 2510 Type F (or equal) single -unit with handle guard/lock -off feature. The 03720- 045 -01 16401 -13 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS handle shall be toggle type unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Integral horsepower manual motor starters shall be Square D Class 2510 Type M or T (or equal) rated 600 VAC /250 VDC, with lock -off feature and auxiliary contact. Auxiliary contact shall be normally open unless otherwise indicated. Control shall be pushbutton or toggle as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Manual motor starters shall be provided in surface- mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. a. Type F units mounted outdoors shall be in NEMA 4 cast -metal enclosures. b. Type M or T units mounted outdoors shall be in NEMA 4 stainless -steel or cast -metal enclosures. c. Manual motor starters in hazardous locations shall be Class 2510 NEMA 7 and 9, by Square D or equal. B. Magnetic Motor Starters: Magnetic motor starters shall be rated in accordance with NEMA standards, sizes, and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be sized for the horsepower ratings as indicated on the Drawings or required by the driven equipment. Minimum sizes and type of starter shall be as indicated on the Drawings and shall have the following features: 1. Magnetic starters shall be equipped with double -break silver -alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing the starter from the panel or enclosure. 2. Coils shall be of molded construction. All coils shall be replaceable from the front without removing the starter from the panel or enclosure. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting -alloy type with a replaceable control module. Thermal units shall be of one -piece construction and inter- changeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. Three -phase starters shall have overload relays in all three phases. Reset button shall be accessible without opening the door or panel. Visible trip indication for overload phase indication shall be provided. The relay shall have a Form C contact, which operates when the overload relay trips; the contact shall be wired to terminal blocks for remote use. 4. A phase- failure relay shall be provided for all motor starters and shall have solid -state sensing circuitry monitoring all three phases. The relay shall have isolated DPDT contacts and shall protect the motor against the 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -14 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • • • • loss of one of the three phases: voltage unbalance in excess of 10% rated voltage, phase reversal, and undervoltage. Undervoltage shall be adjustable to 75% of rated voltage. The relay shall be Square D Company Class 8430 or approved equal. 5. All motor starters shall have their own control power transformer for individual starter control voltage, except where installed in control panels in which a common control power transformer may be incorporated. Control voltage shall be 120 VAC. Control power transformers shall be sized to include motor space heater load, starter or contactor coil, timers, relays, and other devices as indicated or specified. Primary inputs and the ungrounded secondary output of the control power transformer shall be fused. 6. Starters shall be suitable for adding at least four external electrical interlocks of any arrangement, normally open or normally closed. Starters shall be supplied with a minimum of two interlock contacts. 7. All magnetic starters shall be provided with terminal blocks for wiring devices external to the starter enclosure. The starter shall be supplied in a NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise indicated or specified. 8. The starter shall be capable of starting the motor the number of times per hour stated for motors or as required by the pumping sequence, without causing damage to the starter. 9. Panel - mounted elapsed -time meters shall have six register wheels indicating up to 99,999.9 hours, without a reset knob, and be rated at 115 VAC, 60 Hz. The panel manufacturer shall provide one meter for each motor installed and connect the meter so that the meter will record the time that the motor is energized. 10. Equip all magnetic controllers and/or starters, unless otherwise noted, with a three - position selector switch labeled "Hand- Off - Automatic" or as indicated. Switch in Hand position shall start motor. 11. Equip all magnetic controllers and /or starters with indicating lights as follows: green -power on, red - running. 12. A list of overload relay heater elements installed in each starter shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. The list shall identify the starter by name of equipment and show the type, size, and model number of the heater element. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -15 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS C. Solid -State Reduced - Voltage Starters (SSRV): Solid -state reduced - voltage motor starters shall be equipped with a solid -state soft -start controller designed for reduced voltage starting and stopping of squirrel -cage motors. Starters shall be the combination type with motor circuit protector or fused disconnect and shall be equipped with an isolation contactor and bypass contactor unless otherwise indicated. Contactors shall be NEMA rated. 1. The starters shall be rated 480 volt and be suitable for operation on a 60 -Hz system. Current rating of the soft -start controller shall be based on the applicable motor current. 2. The soft -start controller shall be a microprocessor device which continuously monitors the starter and motor. The controller shall be protected from voltage transients by a MOV. The power module shall be capable of providing starting currents of 300% of full load current for 60 seconds. SCRs shall have a minimum peak inverse voltage of 1,400 V at 480 V. The controller shall use a minimum of six SCRs to limit the effect of harmonics on other equipment. SCRs shall be protected against fault currents with current - limiting fuses. 3. The soft -start controller shall be self - calibrating and shall require no adjustments for various line voltages, frequencies, or currents. 4. The soft -start controller shall provide three modes of starting: a. Soft start — to ramp the motor voltage during an adjustable acceleration period after an initial torque voltage has been applied. The ramp period shall be adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds. b. Current limit — to limit the maximum starting current. The starting current shall be adjustable from 250% to 500% of full load amperes. c. Pump control — to provide controlled acceleration and deceleration of centrifugal pumps to reduce surges in the pumping system during starting or stopping. Starting time shall be adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds. Stopping time shall be adjustable from 2 to 120 seconds. The controller shall not require feedback devices to accomplish the acceleration or deceleration. d. The Contractor shall adjust all times and set points of the controller for the driven equipment. 5. The soft -start controller shall provide protection during the starting and running modes for internal fault, thermal fault, and phase failure. Starting of the controller shall be inhibited or the controller shall be shut down if in operation when any of the fault conditions occur. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -16 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • • 6. All programming /configuration devices, display units, and field control wiring terminals shall be accessible on the front of the control module. Exposure to control circuit boards or electrical power devices during routine adjustments is prohibited. At a minimum, digital indication shall provide the following conditions: a. Soft starter status — ready, starting /stopping, run. b. Motor status — current, torque, thermal state, power factor, operating time, power in kW. c. Fault status — motor thermal overload, soft starter thermal fault, loss of line or motor phase, line frequency fault, low line voltage fault, locked rotor fault, motor under -load, maximum start time exceeded, external fault. serial communication fault, line phase reversal fault. motor overcurrent fault. 7. The soft starter must be preset to the following for adjustment -free operation in most applications: a. Linear (torque - controlled) acceleration ramp of 15 seconds. b. Current limitation to 400% of the motor full load current rating. c. Class 10 overload protection. d. Motor current preset in accordance with NFPA 70 table 430.150 for standard hp motors. 8. A digital keypad shall be used to configure the following operating parameters as required: a. Motor full load amps adjustable from 40 to 130% of the soft starter's rating. b. Current limitation on starting adjustable from 150 to 700% of the motor current rating, not to exceed 500% of the soft starter rating. c. Linear (torque- controlled) acceleration ramp adjustable from 1 to 60 seconds. d. Initial torque adjustable from 10 to 100% of nominal motor torque. e. Torque limit adjustable from 10 to 200% of nominal motor torque. f. Maximum start time adjustable from 10 to 999 seconds. g. Voltage boost adjustable from 50 to 100% of the nominal supply voltage. h. Selection of freewheel, soft stop, or braking. i. Linear (torque- controlled) deceleration ramp time adjustable from 1 to 60 seconds. 03720- 045 -01 16401 -17 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS j. Threshold to change to freewheel from a controlled deceleration ramp to freewheel stop: adjustable from 0 to 100% of the nominal motor torque. k. Braking torque level adjustable from 0 to 100% effectiveness. 9. Auxiliary contacts, one normally open and one normally closed Form C, shall be provided. 10. The mode of operation shall permit starting and stopping the motor using the soft -start controller in a preselected adjustable mode. The starter shall be suitable for continuous operation through the soft -start controller and isolation contactor. The isolation contactor shall be interlocked with the soft -start controller such that it is energized before the SCRs are gated "on" and the SCRs are gated "off' before the isolation contactor is de- energized. An alternate mode of operation shall also be provided for starting the motor using the soft -start controller in a preselected adjustable mode and upon completion of the starting period, shifting the load to the bypass contactor for the running period and, upon a stop signal, shifting the load back to the soft -start controller and a preselected adjustable mode for stopping the motor. The starter shall be operable as a full- voltage magnetic starter with the soft -start control module removed from service. 11. Start-up service shall be provided by a representative of the equipment manufacturer. A factory - trained field service engineer, trained in the maintenance and troubleshooting of the specified equipment, shall inspect the installation and perform start-up of the equipment. The field service engineer shall provide for a minimum of a 1 -hour class which shall include a review of the equipment manuals and instruction in the operation, calibration, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the equipment. 12. The SSRV motor starter shall be Square D ATS 48, or approved equal. D. Combination Starters: 1. All motor starters shall be combination type unless noted otherwise. 2. Combination starters shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest published NEMA Standards. Combination starters shall consist of circuit breaker, a fused disconnect, or a motor circuit protector, as indicated on the Drawings, and a magnetic motor starter as specified above. Combination starters shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the short circuit current available at the line terminals with a minimum rating of 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480 volts. All combination 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -18 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • starters shall be mounted in a NEMA 1, General Purpose enclosure, unless otherwise indicated on the Contract Drawings. 3. The operator and operator arm shall be permanently attached to the handle of the breaker with positive indication of switch position with door either open or closed. The door and switch shall be interlocked to prevent closing the switch when the door is open. 4. The door latch shall be tamper proof with a coin -proof slot in the door handle latch. The door handle shall have double safety interlocking of the operator and door handle to prevent opening of the door when the breaker is in the "ON" position. An interlock bypass shall be provided to allow access to authorized personnel. All exposed parts shall be dead when the switch is in the "OFF" position. 5. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in either the "ON" or "OFF" position with from one to three padlocks with the door open or closed. 6. Combination starters shall be Allen - Bradley, Cutler - Hammer/Westinghouse, Square D, or approved equal. E. Control Devices: 1. Pushbutton control, when indicated on the Drawings, shall be non - illuminated, momentary contact (unless otherwise indicated), oil- tight, pushbutton with no guard. Pushbutton controls shall be Square D Type "K" or approved equal. 2. Selector switch operators, when indicated on the Drawings, shall be two - or three - position, non - illuminated, oil -tight switches with normal return to all positions. Selector switch operators shall be Square D Type "K" or approved equal. 3. Pilot lights shall be 120 -volt LED push -to -test type. 4. Control relays shall be double pole, double throw sealed, plug -in type relays with din rail or panel mount base, rated for 10A current at 120Vac, with internal LED pilot light to indicate relay coil is energized. 5. Provide time delay relays in all motor starters larger than 5 HP to provide a sequenced start-up of motors upon energization. Sequence shall start with largest motor, next largest, etc. The timer shall have a range of 5 to 180 seconds. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2.09 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) A. Secondary SPDs shall be installed on the secondary side of step -down transformers or at the associated panelboards, at control panels, and at motor disconnects or junction boxes as indicated on the Drawings. SPDs at panelboards shall be connected to a 30 -amp multi -pole breaker. All other SPDs shall be fused. 1. Secondary SPDs shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449. SPDs shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Single impulse current rating of 80,000 amperes per phase (8/20 psec. waveform). b. Pulse life rating of 1,000 occurrences with no clamping drift for Category C (8/20 µsec. waveform). c. UL 1449 peak let- through voltage shall not exceed the following: Voltage L -N N -G 120/208 or.120/240 500 500 277/480 800 800 d. The test for Category C3 peak let- through voltage ANSI/IEEE C.62.41 (20 kV- 1.2/50 µs) shall be conducted by an independent testing laboratory. Documentation of the test shall be submitted with the shop drawings. e. Peak let- through voltage measured in UL and ANSI/IEEE testing shall include the effect of 6 -inch leads connected to the complete unit. f. Turn-on and turn -off times shall be less than 1.0 nanosecond. B. Minimum requirements for SPDs: 1. Provide suppression elements between each phase or leg and the system neutral and between the neutral conductor and ground. 2. Each module of modular type suppressors shall be externally fused. The status of each module shall be monitored on the front of the enclosure and on each module. 3. The SPD failure mode shall be of a "fail- short" design. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -20 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • 4. Visible indication of proper connection and operation shall be provided. 5. Modular -type SPDs shall have an internal disconnect and current limiting fuses. Encapsulated suppressors shall have external fuse or circuit breaker protection. 6. Terminals shall be provided for all necessary power and ground connections and shall accommodate #10 to #1 AWG wire sizes. 7. SPDs shall be of solid -state componentry and shall operate bidirectionally. 8. SPDs shall have a warranty guarantee period of at least 5 years. C. All surge protective devices shall be of the same manufacture and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. The mounting position shall be selected to provide the shortest lead possible between the suppressor and the point of connection. D. SPDs shall be as manufactured by Dehn, Inc., or approved equal. 411 2.10 GROUNDING A. Ground rods shall be copper -clad steel, 3/4- inch -x -10 -foot sectional type, with couplings and driving studs for installation. B. The conductor shall be bare, stranded copper, complying with ASTM B8, for main power ground and instrument ground, unless otherwise indicated. Grounding conductors run in conduit shall have green insulation. C. Connection to the ground rod shall be made with exothermic welding kits by Cadweld or approved equal. "Acorn" type clamps are not acceptable. Ground connections to equipment frames, building steel, etc., shall be made with equipment grounding lugs or clamps intended for grounding purposes. 2.11 PLASTIC CAUTION TAPE A. The Contractor shall provide a continuous non - metallic caution tape, 12 inches below finished grade, above each duct or conduit run. The tape shall be 6 inches wide, imprinted to indicate underground electric utilities, as manufactured by Griffolyn, Terra -Tape, or equal. 03720- 045 -01 16401 -21 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT OF CONDUIT AND WIRING SYSTEMS A. The Contractor shall lay out the work and shall be responsible for all necessary lines, levels, elevations, and measurements. The Drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the components. The Contractor shall become familiar with the work of other trades engaged in the construction. The exact routing of raceways and locations of equipment may be governed by structural conditions and obstructions. The Contractor shall coordinate with the details of equipment shop drawings for power and control connections to equipment furnished by others. This is not to be construed as permitting redesigning systems. B. Submit all requests for changes in the proposed layout due to structural features, equipment locations, and similar conditions to the Owner, with the following provisions: 1. Detail the reasons for the changes. 2. Submit requests within 30 days after award of Contract. 3. Make no changes without written approval of the Owner. C. Examine areas scheduled to receive electrical equipment and material for conditions which will adversely affect the execution, permanence, or quality of the work. Determine field conditions by actual measurement. Do not proceed with installation until defects have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NEC, NESC, local codes, and rules and regulations of local agencies having jurisdiction. Coordinate electrical installation of systems and packaged equipment items specified in other sections of these Specifications. 1. Conductors, circuit breakers, motor controllers, and protective devices indicated or specified shall be sized to serve the electrical equipment furnished and shall meet all requirements of the NEC. Voltage drop shall be limited to 3 %, including main service, feeder, and branch circuit. 2. Coordinate protective, control, and signaling devices. B. Grounding and Bonding: The Contractor shall establish a grounding and bonding system that electrically connects metal structural materials, equipment enclosures, conduits, outlet boxes, cabinets, motor frames, fixtures, devices, transformer cases, switchgear enclosures, incoming service neutral conductor, and the earth. The common point of attachment for the grounding and bonding system shall be 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -22 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • at the main service disconnect unless otherwise indicate in this Section or in the Drawings. The grounding and bonding system shall be properly bonded and sized in accordance with NEC. Solidly bond all non - current- conducting metal parts to the electrical installation grounding bus. A green insulated grounding conductor shall be carried with each circuit. 1. Provide common grounds throughout the system. 2. Provide a ground grid consisting of driven copper -clad steel ground rods connected by bare copper conductor at the service entrance and/or as shown on the Drawings. Resistance to remote earth shall be 10 ohms or less before connection to the system. C. Identification: Equipment such as but not limited to disconnect switches, motor starters, control panels, etc., shall be clearly marked. 1. Identify all devices operating at more than 250 VAC phase -to -phase or 125 VAC phase -to- ground with red enamel letters or numerals of appropriate height applied with a stencil. 2. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment shall be marked with engraved nameplates of laminated two -color phenolic plastic having white letters. Attach each nameplate with stainless steel screws. Align nameplates on equipment being marked in the center near the top. 3. Mark equipment mounted remotely from the source of power (such as pumps and fans) with equipment number, source of power, and starter location. Where starters are remotely mounted, marking shall include equipment name, number, and location. 4. Conductors shall be identified at each termination, pull box, junction box, handhole, point of entry to or exit from wireways, panelboards, control panels, and other points of access. Tags or labels shall be securely affixed to the conductor in visible locations. Tags shall be durable plastic with the designation stamped on one side with suitable dies. Labels shall be permanent with legible black characters on white heat - shrink tubing or equivalent identification acceptable to the Owner. a. Power conductors shall be color -coded to identify phases, neutral and switch legs, using plastic, self - sealing tape. Tags or labels shall identify the switchboard, MCC, panel, etc., it is served from and the circuit number. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -23 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS b. The control conductor (including monitor and instrumentation conductors) shall be identified by color coding and tag or label as to wire number (corresponding to the manufacturer's wiring diagram) and equipment name. c. Power wiring and control wiring shall be identified in all handholes with a waterproof permanent tag attached to the cable with plastic cable ties. D. Equipment Connections: Provide complete system with all power and control connections required for proper operation. E. Conduit: 1. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit may be used as follows: a. Exposed in buildings. b. Exposed with PVC coating where indicated on the Drawings. c. Concealed in poured concrete. d. Below grade with PVC coating where indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used as follows: a. Concealed above ceilings, suspended ceilings, and within walls. b. Exposed in buildings with non - corrosive atmospheres where acceptable to the Engineer and the Owner. 3. Rigid non - metallic (PVC) conduit may be used as follows: a. Concealed in walls and floors, Schedule 40. b. Below -grade direct burial, Schedule 40. 4. Burial depth of conduit shall be measured from the top of the conduit to the top surface of finished grade, pavement, concrete, or similar cover as follows: a. 24 inches (minimum) below unpaved areas, b. 30 inches (minimum) below stabilized subbase in paved areas. 5. For concretes slabs on grade and foundations, conduit burial depth shall be measured from the bottom of the concrete slab or foundation as, follows: a. 12 inches (minimum) below concrete slabs on grade or foundations. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -24 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • • • • 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to coordinate the location and depths of all electrical conduits to be installed under this Contract with other trades. Particular attention shall be given to all locations where conduits enter a structure or building from underground. Proper clearances from the top of the conduits to the bottom of slabs and foundations shall be maintained. 7. Where conduits rise through slabs on grade, curved portion of bends shall not be visible above the finished slab. 8. Conduit stub -up to above grade and conduit stub -up out of or from below floor slab shall be rigid galvanized steel from and including the last 90° bend. 9. Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete in wet locations shall be protected by a 20 -mil sheath of PVC at the penetration extending from 2 inches within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete. 10. Stub -ups through concrete slabs for connection of future equipment or conduits runs shall be provided with couplings threaded inside for plugs and shall be set flush with the finished floor or slab. Install screwdriver - operated threaded flush plugs in couplings. Provide pull wire in all empty conduit runs. 11. Avoid bends and offsets, where possible. Make bends and offsets with an approved hickey or conduit bending machine. Install plastic (PVC) coated conduit and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual using tools designed for installing plastic (PVC) coated conduit and fittings. Touch up any and all damaged areas with manufacturer - recommended coating compound. Do not install crushed or deformed conduit. Use expansion fittings or other approved devices where conduit or tubing crosses expansion joints. Prevent dirt or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes, and fittings. Free clogged conduit of all obstructions or replace conduit. 12. Supports: a. Pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers, or ceiling trapeze. b. Use wood screws or screw -type nails for fastening to wood. Use toggle bolts for fastening to hollow masonry units. Use concrete inserts or expansion anchors for fastening to concrete. Use 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -25 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring- tension clamps for fastening to steel work. c. Power - driven threaded studs may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or machine or wood screws where acceptable to the Owner. d. Use threaded C- clamps on rigid steel conduit only. e. Do not weld conduit or pipe straps to steel structures. f. Non - metallic conduit through 1 -inch size shall use one -hole snap - strap clamps and 1 -1/4 -inch through 2 -inch shall use two -hole snap -strap clamps, with maximum spacing between supports as outlined in the NEC based on 50 °C conductor temperature. Clamps shall be manufactured from a nylon compound. 13. Expansion couplings shall be used in all straight lengths of non - metallic conduit in exposed applications. Maximum spacing between expansion couplings shall be 100 feet. 14. Connections: All conduits, where they enter sheet metal enclosures such as panelboards, pull boxes or outlet boxes, shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings, one locknut inside of box with bushing on conduit end and one locknut outside of box for rigid conduit. The locknuts shall be tightened against the box without deforming the box. a. Conduit connections shall use fittings to maintain NEMA rating of enclosures. b. All bushings and conduit box connectors shall have the insulating material permanently fastened to the fittings. c. Grounding bushings shall be used in switchgear and motor control centers. d. Conduit connections exposed in wet locations shall be by watertight threaded hub. Metallic conduit box connections may use a two -piece hub with built -in recessed neoprene gasket such as Appleton Uni -Seal. Non - metallic conduit box connectors may use a neoprene flat washer or "0" ring placed over threads of the fitting between the shoulder of the fitting and the box. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -26 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • • F. Duct Banks: 1. Conduit: Conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC of the number and size as indicated on the Drawings. a. Conduits shall maintain a continuous slope between handholes and shall be sloped toward handholes with a minimum grade of 3 inches per 100 feet, where practical. b. Conduits shall terminate in handholes with end bells. c. Thoroughly clean each conduit after installation. Pass a mandrel not less than 12 inches long with a diameter 1/4 -inch less than the inside dimension through each conduit. d. Conduit shall follow straight lines, as far as possible, with spacing both horizontally and vertically maintained by spacers manufactured by the conduit manufacturer. Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during placement of backfill or concrete encasement. Conduit couplings shall be staggered by rows. Long radius bends shall be used where deviation from straight lines is necessary. e. Concrete encasement, where indicated on the Drawings, shall be constructed to the dimensions shown. Trench bottoms shall be tamped firm and even. Suitably braced side forms shall be employed. Concrete shall be installed in a continuous pour to eliminate joints. f. The high point of conduits between handholes shall have a minimum of 18 inches cover below the finished grade. g- The entire underground conduit/duct system shall be watertight. Seal conduits to exclude moisture at each building or structure. h. Provide plastic caution tape above the duct run 12 inches below finished grade. G. Boxes: 1. The Contractor shall provide outlet, pull, junction, or terminal boxes in wiring or conduit systems wherever required for pulling wires, making connections, and mounting devices or fixtures. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -27 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS a. Indicated locations are approximate only. Coordinate actual location with all work to be performed in the space or area and for the equipment to be served. b. Locate outlets so that fixtures and other items will be symmetrically located according to the space or area layout. c. Outdoor switch and receptacle outlets shall use non - metallic boxes and covers. 2. Outlet boxes in exposed work or wet locations shall be cast metal. Sheet metal boxes shall be concealed in walls or ceiling. Non - metallic boxes shall be used with non - metallic conduit. 3. Supports: a. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to rigid metallic conduit need not be separately supported unless used for fixture support. b. Use wood screws or screw -type nails for fastening to wood. Use toggle bolts for fastening to hollow masonry units. Use concrete inserts or expansion anchors for fastening to concrete. Use machine screws or welded, threaded studs for fastening to steel work. c. Power - driven threaded studs may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or machine or wood screws where acceptable to the Engineer and the Owner. H. Wiring: 1. The Contractor shall provide a complete system of conductors as indicated. 2. Size shall be as required by the NEC and shall be #12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits and #14 AWG minimum for control and alarm circuits. 3. Crimp -on insulated wire terminals shall be used on stranded wire for terminations. 4. Splices shall be in accessible locations only and shall be insulated - pressure type for #10 AWG and smaller wires. For #8 AWG and larger, 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -28 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • use solderless connectors covered with an insulation material equivalent to the conductor insulation. I. Appearance: All items shall be cleaned or touched up as necessary to ensure first - class condition. 3.03 FIELD TESTS AND OBSERVATION A. General: Do not enclose or cover any work until it has been observed, tested, and accepted. 1. Provide all personnel, equipment, and instruments required for observation and testing. 2. Demonstrate that all circuits and devices are in operating condition. Tests shall include the following: a. Megger all motor windings before operation for insulation resistance and, if found low, dry out windings to secure acceptable insulation resistance. b. Check control center components, buses, starters, breakers, relays, alarms, interlocks, etc., and place in service in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Inspect and adjust electrical equipment before energization. c. Megger all power cables and wiring for insulation resistance and record. d. Check all motors for correct lubrication and lubricate, if required, in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. e. Check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse, if necessary. 3. Assemble in binders and turn over to the Owner all instruction bulletins, lubrication schedules, operating instructions, pamphlets, parts lists, prints, etc. accompanying or attached to apparatus and equipment. 4. Notify the Engineer and the Owner 1 week before test date. B. Ground Rod Test: Before any wire is connected to ground rods, test each rod for resistance to ground. 1. The testing instrument shall be a direct reading, single test, portable ground testing megger. 2. The test procedure shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the test instrument used. 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -29 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3. The make and model of the test instrument and a copy of the test procedure shall be submitted to the Owner before the test is conducted. 4. Do not conduct tests within 48 hours after rainfall or during foggy weather. 5. If ground resistance exceeds 10 ohms, additional grounds shall be driven. 6. The grounding test shall be witnessed by the Engineer or other representative of the Owner. A copy of the test results and method shall be included in the maintenance manual. Deliver one copy of the test results to the Engineer and the Owner within 1 week after the test. 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. The Contractor shall remove excess and waste materials from the project site. B. Remove defective work and replace with material that meets Specification requirements or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner. C. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in factory- or shop - finished surfaces. END OF SECTION 03720 - 045 -01 16401 -30 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK — December 2013 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • • • ATTACHMENT A MANUFACTURER'S QUOTE LAKESIDE EQUIPMENT CORPORATION Purification since 1928 1022 E. Devon Avenue 1 P.O. Box 84481 Bartlett, IL 60103 T: 630 - 837 -5640 1 F: 630 - 837 -5647 I E: sales @lakeside - equipment.com www.lakeside-equipment.com DATE: September 18, 2013 TO: City of Clearwater ATTENTION: Mr. Rob Fahey, Project Manager City of Clearwater 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 SUBJECT: City of Clearwater, Florida Replacement Screw Pump Equipment Dear Mr. Fahey: In accordance with the Engineer's plans and specifications, we are pleased to offer the following through our Representative, Fred Trippensee of Trippensee and Company, (PH: 863.382.2101): SECTION 11310 - OPEN SCREW PUMP EQUIPMENT For each of the four (4) 84 -inch diameter open Screw Pumps, Lakeside will furnish the following: 1 - 84 -inch diameter screw with three (3) 0.313 -inch thick continuous ribbon flights, 42 -inch diameter center support tube with 0.375 -inch wall thickness, sealed ends and flanged steel stub shafts for mounting on both ends. Screw is set at a 30 degree inclination with operation at 31 rpm. 1 - Lower cam type, adjustable bearing housing for mounting lower stub shaft, bearing sleeve, lip seals, split bearing housing shield and automatic lubricating system located near drive assembly consisting of grease pump driven by 1/3 hp, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, 460 volt, TEFC gear motor with support plate and stainless steel tubing to bearing. Grease pump will have a 15 lb reservoir. Grease system will be fitted with visual grease flow indicator downstream of the bearing and centrifugal switch for wiring to motor control circuit. 1 - Upper bearing assembly, consisting of split ductile iron housing, separate thrust and radial bearings, spacer, lip seals and bearing mounting plate mounted on a concrete slab. Minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours. 1 - Drive assembly complete with base mounted, triple reduction, helical gear unit in cast iron case, with backstop not less than 1.5 service factor based on brake horsepower, drive and driven sheaves, V -belts and aluminum belt guard. 1 - 125 hp, 1800 rpm, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, 460 volt, TEFC horizontal, normal starting torque, continuous duty motor with gasketed conduit box and adjustable mounting plate for V -belt tightening. City of Clearwater, Florida September 18, 2013 Page 2 of 6 1 - Fabricated stainless steel deflector plate assembly. 1 - Set of anchor bolts, stainless steel, for the lower bearing and the upper bearing plate. Approximate shipping weight of each unit is 22,600 lb. Spare Parts Lakeside will furnish the following specified spare parts: 1 - Set of lower bearing seals. 1 - Grease pump pumping element kit. NOTE: We do not include any conduit or wiring, electrical controls other than motor, nor any tools, grease, grease gun, or oil. We do not include performance, noise or vibration testing materials, labor, or instruments of any type. We do not include field motor test materials, labor, or instruments or any type. Lakeside Equipment shall loan to the contractor additional sheave(s) and belts as required to operate the screw at a reduced speed for grouting the trough with the screw pump drive. There is a $400 charge for grouting sheaves and belts not returned freight prepaid to Lakeside Equipment. Erection Data: The contractor will set the anchor bolts in the influent chamber and for the upper bearing and drive assembly. The screw and bearings must be carefully aligned. We estimate a total of 120 person -hours for installation of the screw and alignment of the screw and bearings for each pump. This does not include the time and manpower required for grouting in the screw pump troughs. SHOP PAINTING: All ferrous metal parts above and below the water level will be grit blasted and receive a shop coat of Tnemec #66 or #161 Primer or Tnemec Series 1 Omnithane Primer. Aluminum and stainless steel parts will not be shop painted. Motors and reducers will receive a shop coat of machinery enamel. Field paint and painting by others. SHOP DRAWINGS: We will furnish eight (8) sets of drawings for the equipment without charge. One (1) set is to be returned to us with the notations or approval stamp of the Engineer. Drawings will require 6 to 7 weeks after receipt of an order and complete information, including plans and specifications, field dimen- sions or verification of field dimensions, which are to be provided at no cost to Lakeside. SHIPMENT: Shipment of the first pump can be made in 18 to 19 weeks after receipt of approved drawings by our home office. Shipment of each successive pump will be made within 3 weeks of the previous pump. Foundation materials can be shipped within twenty (20) days after drawings are approved. EXISTING STRUCTURE NOTE: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for measuring and providing Lakeside with accurate, as built dimensions for all existing structures where Lakeside is furnishing equipment. This information must be made available to Lakeside in a timely manner to avoid delaying the • • • • • • City of Clearwater, Florida September 18, 2013 Page 3 of 6 equipment delivery schedules outlined in this proposal. In the event that dimensions are not provided or the provided dimensions are in error, which result in modifications to either the equipment or the adjacent structures, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for all labor, materials and associated costs to correct the resulting shutdown. INSTRUCTION BOOKS: Eight (8) sets of installation, operation, lubrication and maintenance books will be furnished before shipment of the equipment. SERVICE: Inspection of the installed equipment can be made within ten (10) days to two (2) weeks following notice by the contractor that they are ready for such service. The cost of five (5) days of service in three (3) trips is included in our proposal price. Additional service is available at the rate of $1,000 /day plus living and travel expenses. PROPOSAL PRICE: Includes service as stated above and is F.O.B. our shop with freight allowed to job site. Section 11310: Four (4) Lakeside 84 -inch Diameter Screw Pumps $619,512 Additive Alternate 1: Addition of 5th Screw Pump $154,878 (5th Screw Pump to be purchased and shipped with original order) Additive Alternate 2: Section 11310 -2.14: Five (5) Screw Pump Covers $38,640 PRICE FIRM: For thirty (30) days from bid date. Due to the existing environment of the price increases in steel and the volatility of those prices that exist today, the price shown above is a price based on the present day cost of materials. If an order is received after the 30 day time period, Lakeside reserves the right to adjust the pricing to match the cost of materials at the time the order is received. PAYMENT TERMS: The terms of payment are Net 30 days for material shipped, or when ready for shipment if shipment is deferred by the Contractor. Contractor's payment to Lakeside will not be dependent or contingent upon receipt of payment by you or any other parties. Overdue accounts will be charged 2.0% interest per month. All legal fees or other charges encountered to collect overdue accounts, including service charges, are to be paid for by the purchaser. BOND: Lakeside will require with your Purchase Order a copy of the purchaser's Payment Bond to the Owner. CONDITIONS OF SALE (GIL 91): ACCEPTANCE: This quotation is void at our option unless a purchase order is placed with us within sixty (60) days from date of bid opening or date of written proposal. The order will be subject to written acceptance by our company's executive office. Our quotation is limited to only those technical portions of the Engineer's Mechanical Specifications specifically referred to herein, and to the terms and conditions of sale as outlined in our quotation. We will not be bound by any Terms and Conditions of the prime Contract not specifically included herein. City of Clearwater, Florida September 18, 2013 Page 4 of 6 TAXES & OTHER CHARGES: Unless otherwise indicated, no Sales, Use, Retailers' Occupation, Service Occupation, Service Use, or similar taxes or custom duties, import fees and similar charges, have been included in our prices. The amount of any such taxes or charges which are paid or assessed in connection with this order and which are not specifically stated as being included in the purchase price, shall be paid by you, either directly to the appropriate authorities (in which event you shall furnish us with satisfactory evidence of such payments) or to us if we have paid, or are required to pay, such taxes or charges. If you are tax exempt on this job, you will need to supply us with your exemption certificate. You agree to reimburse our company for taxes we must pay on your behalf. You are responsible for obtaining permits in connection with the sale or installation of our equipment. WARRANTY: Lakeside Equipment Corporation ( "Lakeside ") warrants to Buyer that equipment sold hereunder, of its manufacture, is free from defect in material and workmanship, and is of the kind and quality designated or described herein. This warranty shall run to Buyer and, if applicable, such entity specifically identified in the Primary Contract only, but not to their employees, representatives, agents, customers, assignees, etc., and applies to those technical portions of the Engineer's Specifications only to the extent that they are referred to herein. This warranty shall be in full force and effect at the time of shipment of such equipment for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment. Lakeside will furnish without charge, but will not install, replacements for such parts as it finds to have been defective. The obligation of Lakeside to replace such defective parts shall be the exclusive remedy hereunder. Buyer must give Lakeside notice in writing of any alleged defect covered by this warranty within thirty (30) days of the discovery of such defect during the warranty period. No claim more than thirty (30) days after the warranty period shall be valid. The warranty extends to replaced parts of Lakeside's manufacture for ninety (90) days or the remainder of the original warranty period applicable to the parts being replaced. This warranty shall not apply to: A. Any equipment which has been subjected to misuse, neglect, or accident; B. Any equipment which has been altered, tampered with, or upon which corrective work has been done thereon without Lakeside's specific written consent; C. Any equipment which has been operated or maintained in a manner which in any way deviates from the maintenance schedules, specifications, and parameters set forth in Lakeside's Operator's Manual for such equipment. D. Fuses, lights or other standard wear items. E. Electrical damage due to overvoltage conditions. No allowances will be made for any such alterations or corrective work done without the specific written consent of Lakeside. Conditions caused by improper lubrication, deterioration by chemical action, and wear caused by the presence of abrasive materials, do not constitute defects. Equipment manufactured by others, and included in Lakeside's proposal, is not warranted in any way by Lakeside but carries only that manufacturer's warranty, if any. No representative of Lakeside's has any authority to waive, alter, vary, or add to the items hereof without prior written approval. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES OF QUALITY, WRI'I"I'bN, ORAL OR IMPLIED; ALL OTHER WARRAN PIES, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. SECURITY INTEREST: Until all amounts due hereunder have been paid in full, Seller has a security interest in the equipment and has all rights of a secured party under the Uniform Commercial Code including, without limitation, the right to take possession of the equipment without legal process and the right to require Buyer to assemble the equipment and make it available to Seller at a place reasonably convenient to both parties. At Seller's request, Buyer shall execute any financing statement or statements submitted by Seller in order that Seller's security interest in the equipment may be perfected. PROPERTY INSURANCE -RISK OF LOSS: You shall provide and maintain in responsible insurance companies, at your own expense, insurance against loss or damage to the equipment by fire or other casualty from and after the time of delivery to the carrier at point of shipment. Upon request you will provide certificates evidencing such coverage. Such coverage shall be for the amount of this contract, shall cover the equipment specified herein, and losses, if any, shall be payable to us as our interest may appear, under Union or Standard loss payable endorsements. Irrespective of such insurance coverage, you shall bear the risk of loss resulting from any and all damage or injury to the shipment from and after delivery to the carrier at point of shipment. If you should fail to provide such insurance, we may obtain the same and the cost of the premium therefore shall be added to the purchase price. • • • • City of Clearwater, Florida September 18, 2013 Page 5 of 6 CHANGES & DELAYS: If you cause changes to be made, or delay or interrupt the progress of the work, you will reimburse us for any additional expense resulting from such cause. Any of such changes or delays which may adversely affect the operation of the equipment will nullify our warranty unless we consent in writing thereto. Our proposal is based on present day cost of materials and furnishing our equipment in accordance to our schedule indicated above. If delays greater than 90 -days are experienced for review /approval of shop drawings or if there is delay on release of equipment to go into fabrication, you will reimburse Lakeside for any additional expense that may result from such cause. Shipment must be accepted when ready to avoid storage charges. If refused when ready, storage plus handling charges will be added to the above price. Partial shipments must be accepted when ready and paid for in accordance with terms shown above. DELAYS: We shall not be liable for delay in delivery caused by any reason beyond our control, including but not limited to your delay in promptly submitting all information necessary for us to proceed with the work, your delay in approval of drawings, acts of God, casualty, civil disturbance, labor disputes, strikes, transportation, supply difficulties, any interruption of our facilities, or any of the governmental authorities. The time for delivery specified herein shall be extended during the continuance of such conditions and for a reasonable time thereafter. PATENTS: We agree to indemnify you against any charge of infringement of any presently issued apparatus patent by reason of the use or resale of the equipment sold to you under this contract; provided however, that: A. Such charge relates exclusively to something which we designed or selected, and B. Such charge does not arise as a result of any modification of the equipment by you or the combination thereof of you with equipment furnished by others, and C. We are notified in writing immediately upon receipt of such charge, and D. We are given absolute control of the defense and the right to defend or settle such charge, and E. We are allowed to make such changes in the equipment as we deem necessary for the purpose of avoiding infringement. CLAIMS: Claims for errors or shortages existing prior to our delivery of the equipment to the carrier will be considered only when made to us immediately after receipt of shipment. Claims shall be confirmed in writing. Buyer shall immediately inspect the equipment upon receipt thereof. Seller is not obligated to consider any claim for shortages or nonconformance unless notified thereof by Buyer within twenty (20) days after Buyer's receipt of equipment. Modifications to the equipment furnished by Lakeside to meet OSHA or local safety codes will be by others. Seller will supply only the safety devices, if any, described in the order. LAKESIDE EQUIPMENT CORPORATION assumes no responsibility for any costs, direct or indirect, resulting from disapproval of our tender by the owner. TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE: Unless otherwise noted, the prices shown in this proposal include freight to the destination shown, at lowest available freight rates on a common carrier of our choice. If you require us to ship another way, you will bear any additional expense. In order for our company to insure delivery, it is agreed by you and our company that you will provide us with an access road to and from the job site, which road is capable of supporting our trucks. The responsibility for the protection of equipment will be yours after it is delivered to the job site. Damage to the equipment after delivery which is caused by vandalism, the elements or otherwise, will be your responsibility and not that of our company. LIABILITY: It is expressly understood that our liability, including that for negligence, for our products is limited to the furnishing of such replacement parts, and that we will not be liable for any other expense, injury, loss or damage, whether direct or consequential, including but not limited to loss of profits, production, increased cost of operation, or spoilage of material, arising in connection with the resale or use of, or inability to use, our equipment or products for any purpose except as herein provided. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: If awarded this contract, we will diligently prosecute the engineering and fabrication of the proposed equipment; however, we are unable to accept any liquidated damages or penalty clauses for failure to complete shipment as designated in this proposal. INSTALLATION REPRESENTATIVE: At your request, and subject to our option and availability of personnel at time of requirement, we will provide the services of a competent person to advise you concerning the installation of the equipment covered by this proposal. These services are not supervisory but are advisory only, and are offered subject to the express understanding that our function and responsibility is limited to interpretation of assembly drawings and identification of materials for their proper location in the equipment or system layout. These services are offered on a "no risk" basis by Lakeside Equipment Corporation. City of Clearwater, Florida September 18, 2013 Page 6 of 6 In payment for such services, you will reimburse us at the current rate for each normal working day, or fraction thereof, that such person is absent from our plant on your business. The normal working day shall be eight (8) hours, between 8:00 AM and 4:30 PM, Monday through Friday, exclusive of holidays. All services performed by our representative at your request in addition to a normal working day, as herein defined, shall be classified as overtime work. If circumstances dictate that our representative shall work exclusively during hours other than those of the normal working day, arrangements can be made. The day rate is subject to change to the rate in effect at the time representative is furnished. You will also reimburse us for all transportation and living expenses incurred by our representative while absent from our plant on your business. CANCELLATION: Cancellation or suspension of a contract will be accepted only upon terms that will indemnify Lakeside Equipment Corporation against loss. You agree to reimburse our company for our costs incurred in such cancellation, including overhead and administrative costs. Our company may cancel the order prior to or at the time of receiving the final approved drawings if our company deems itself insecure, or determines that it is commercially unreasonable for us to proceed. CONTRACT: We both agree that this contract contains the complete and final agreement between us and may not be modified, supplemented, explained, or waived by oral evidence, your purchase order, course of dealing, or in any other way, except where made in writing and signed by you and our company's authorized officer. ARBITRATION: Any controversy or claim arising out of or relating to this transaction shall be settled in Chicago by arbitration in accordance with the Rules of the American Arbitration Association, and judgment upon the award rendered by the Arbitrator may be entered in any court having jurisdiction hereof. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION: All information and data herein furnished to Buyer hereunder, relating to price, size, type and design is submitted with the understanding that it is for the Buyer's own confidential use and is not to be shown or otherwise made known or available to any third party at any time without Seller's written consent. • Our Representative, Fred Trippensee of Trippensee and Company, (PH: 863.382.2101), will be available 11 to discuss this offering and assist you throughout this project. Submitted by: LAKESIDE EQUIPMENT CORPORATION Steven G. Eckstein Vice President APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS • • • APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents: OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS • Instructions for Addendum to Agreement • ODP Agreement Form • Addendum to Agreement • Attachment "A" • Attachment "B" • Attachment "C" • Attachment "D" • Procedures for Sales Tax Savings, Requests to Requisition and Receiving /Invoicing • Request to Requisition Form Appendix.doc i 9/27/2010 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS; Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • • INSTRUCTIONS FOR ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 12- 0017 -UT 1. The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the Addendum to Agreement for Construction of the Screw Lift Station Upgrades project. 2. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum. 3. Attachments "B ", "C" and "D" relate to Owner - Furnished Materials that are part of the of a Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's Work. 4. Submit two (2) original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to: City of Clearwater Attention: City of Clearwater Address P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758 -4748 5. If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to: Stephanie Sansome, Senior Accountant Phone: 727 - 562 -4744 Fax: 727 - 562 -4755 E -Mail: Stephanie .Sansome(c�mvClearwater.com Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • • • ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT No. 12- 0017 -UT In reference to contract # dated between City of Clearwater, the Owner, and , the Contractor, it is further AGREED as follows: 1. The Owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. 2. The attachments lettered "A", "B", and "C ", attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub - contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Project as determined by the Owner. 3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used. 4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's authorization process, as outlined in Attachment "D ". 5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner acknowledges that Contractor's Sub -contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax. This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, is made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement. CITY OF CLEARWATER: CONTRACTOR: Date: Date: City Manager /Owner ATTEST: Contractor ATTEST: City Clerk Secretary (City's Corporate Seal) APPROVED AS TO FORM: Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • ATTACHMENT "A" FROM: CITY OF CLEARWATER (OWNER) TO: (CONTRACTOR) OWNER- FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES, #12- 0017 -UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner - purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include Owner's Certificate of Exemption number. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner- Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. 4. As Owner - Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendors invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner - Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. 5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner - Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non - conformities in Owner- Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractors Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractors Work such defective or nonconforming Owner - Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractors incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner- Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractors Work from the stock of Owner- Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner - Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractors possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractors Work. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage - repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner- Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner - Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 10. As invoices are received, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner - Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owners Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option. 12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications. 13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner - Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contractor. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • • • ATTACHMENT "B" FROM (CONTRACTOR) TO (SUBCONTRACTOR) OWNER- FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES, #12- 0017 -UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's contract. Owner - Purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number. 2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner - Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the Owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Subcontractor. 4. As Owner - Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Subcontractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner - Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment "A" of this Contract. 5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner - Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor discovers defective or non -conformities in Owner - Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Subcontractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner - Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages to the owner, resulting from Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of all owner - Furnished Materials it incorporates into Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner - furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any owner- Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or sub - subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner- Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner- Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner - Furnished Materials. 10. As invoices are received, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner - Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during that delivery for use by the Subcontractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Subcontractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within fifteen (15) days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner - Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Subcontractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the Subcontractor's option. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • • • ATTACHMENT "C" From: (CONTRACTOR) To: (SUBCONTRACTOR) Project: SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES, #12- 0017 -UT This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished in the following manner: 1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax. 2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater (owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials. 3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read: To: Supplier For: Material per attached Subcontractor order, 4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) do "Subcontractor" do Contractor. Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same to City of Clearwater (Owner) for payment. 5. City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax. It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each month for payment by the . Those received after the will be processed in the next month's billing cycle. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • • • ATTACHMENT "D" PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB - CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX CREDITS 1. General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see vendor application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount. 2. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and preparation of electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as well as correct account number. 3. Project Manager will then request requisition approval from the Finance Director. 4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order as requested. 5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount of current request, and remaining balance of P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment requests (monthly). 6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be submitted for approval as indicated below: 7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order: Appendix.doc a. General Contractor b. Architect c. Project Manager d. Engineering /City Manager e. Purchasing /for processing only f. Finance/for processing only 9/27/2010 PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO • REQUISITION and RECEIVING /INVOICING CITY OF CLEARWATER SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES, #12- 0017 -UT Contractor: CEI: Addendum to Agreement for Construction: 1. See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement. Process procedures for tax savings: 2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor. 3. Approved by CEI. Approver(s): 4. Original to Owner's Representative for processing of P.O. requisition. 5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is important to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby reducing the amount of changes necessary to Contractor's P.O. Construction contract will not change and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total contract commitment. Before sending to the Purchasing Manager, the schedule will be forwarded to the Owner's Representative, CEI and Contractor's representative for approval. We will need the e-mail address for the Contractor's & CEI's contact person(s) for this process. 6. The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added to the Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary. 7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a change order (Recommendation is that it's done on the final C /O). Process procedures for request to requisition forms: 1. General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc) 2. Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number. 3. In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery instructions. 4. Indicate whether or not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5 %. 5. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices. 6. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to requisition. 7. City staff will complete the charge code line. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal has been received from the ODP supplier: a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of system (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for the addition of the City's charge code. b. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 Attachment should include estimated quantities and types of materials. Cost information is optional. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal is not available: c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier. d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major billing line items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City will add the appropriate charge codes. 8. The requesting official will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. Contractor's authorized procurer(s): 9. The official approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be authorized personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers: NOTE: Any materials ordered by the contractor that are not included on the City's issued purchase order or any amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the City issued purchase order MUST be separately ordered pursuant to a purchase order directly between the supplier and the contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced separately from the materials supplied pursuant to the City issued purchase order. Another option would be to submit an additional Request to Requisition to increase the amount of the ODP purchase order for that supplier. Process procedures for receiving and invoicing: 1. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will verify the materials are in usable condition and the quantity received. 2. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P.O. to send their original invoice to the Contractor to the attention of 3. Contractor must sign off on the invoice to approve the payment and, if no receiving report is attached, must indicate on the invoice that all materials were received in usable condition. Any discrepancies with the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error, it can be corrected by the Contractor before forwarding for payment under the following conditions: a. A corrected supplier's invoice can be paid up to the amount of the originally issued invoice but not in excess of that amount. b. None of the original data on the invoice can be obliterated. If it is the City will return the invoice for replacement by a corrected one from the supplier. c. If the corrections cause the invoice amount to exceed the original billed amount, the excess must be invoiced separately by the supplier and is to have the same support documentation and /or approvals as all other invoices to be paid. 4. Supplier invoices for retainage amounts, if any has been withheld, are not required support documentation but must follow the approval process as all other invoices. 5. After approval the Contractor will forward the original invoice and any attachments to City of Clearwater's Owner Representative: City of Clearwater Utilities Engineering Division Attn: Robert Fahey 100 N. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33755 6. After approval and verification of the materials received the Owner's Representative will forward the original invoice and any attachments to the appropriate City department for payment processing. Appendix_doe 9/27/2010 • • • 7. Steps 1 through 7 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice. 8. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition and at the approval of the Contractor. 9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the appropriate line(s) on Contractor's P.O. Closing of Contractor's P.O.: 1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of the Contractor's P.O. Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • a er • • General Item Description: Vendor: Street Address: City /State /Zip: Engineering Department REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER Phone No: Receiving Location (Ship to): Street Address: City /State /Zip: Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: (City will complete) Line # Quantity Units ($, etc.) Detailed Description (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Price Per Each Total Date: Requesting Official Title and Organization - Contractor Date: Approving Official Title and Organization — C.E.I. Services Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&l. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Appendix.doc Page 1 of 2 9/27/2010 Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER (Continuation page) Line # Quantity Units ($, etc.) Detailed Description (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Price Per Each Total Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C. E.8.1. Firm and to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Page 2 of 2 Appendix.doc 9/27/2010 • SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACTBOND..—__—_----.,..........~....^,,.~,,~,,,,~,,,,,~~,,,,,,,~~,,,~,,^,~~~,,,~,~,.,~~~~~~^,^_,_,,,,,_~^~,~,,~^~, I CONTRACT,.....~...,,...........~............_—._---_—.........^...~,,^.,,,,,.~,~,,,,,,,,,,~'~,,,~,,,,,~,~,,,,,~,,,,,,~~~,_~__3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT................................................................. 7 PROPOSALBOND..----...—,-,..-,..,......~^~.,^...,,,,,^^~~,~,,,_~,,,,,,,,,,,,^,,~_~^,,~_,~,,~,~^,_______._~,,,.,,,~,8 AFFIDAVIT..~~..~.~~........~~~~~~~.~.~~~~^^..,^.^,,^^~,^,~,,.~,,,,,^,^,,,^,^,~^'~,^,,^^,^^^^^^.,^^^^^._^,_^,^^^^^^_, ...................9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ......................................................................................................... t0 PROPOSAL~....~.........~.....__—..—_—,—..~,~.,.~...........^,,,,—,.,,~'^,,~,,,,,,~,,.,,~,,~,,,,~,^~,~,,~,~,~.^_~~,,_~ 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET............................................................................. 14 BIDDER'S PRUOPOSAJL....,...,.,...~...,..~.......~.,.._^___,_~,,,,,~,,~,~,~.,~~,,..,,~^,,.^,^~_,^^^,~^,~,_.,~,,~,~~, 15 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM..................................................................................................................... &7 ScctjonV.docx Page i 7/29/2013 G u I G N A R April 3, 2014 City of Clearwater, Florida 100 South Myrtle Avenue, 3rd Floor Clearwater, FL 33756..5520 Re: Authority to Date Bonds and Powers of Attorney Principal: Wharton-Smith, Inc. Bond No.: 929,588358 Project: Northeast W.R.F. Screw Lift Station Upgrades ,(#12- 0,017-UT) Dear Sir or Madam: Please he advised that as Surety on the above referenced bond, executed on your behalf for, this project, we hereby authorize you to date the bonds and the powers of attorney concurrent with the date of the contract agreement. Once dated, please send a copy of the dated bonds to our office. Best regards, stern Surety, rnparry Alrd bvei' A I torney ;n Forlr.'.' and Florida Uc-ensed Re silent Agent 1904 SOOTHE CIRCLE - LONGWOOD, FL 32750 PH (407) 834-0022 (888) 220-3780 FAX (d O7) 260-1767 (aaa) 220-3228 WWW.CUUGNARD(--OMIPANY.COM *Scrivener ' s Error Public Work F.S. Chapter 255.05 (1)(a) Cover Page BOND NO.: 929588358 PRINCIPAL: Wharton-Smith, Inc. 750 Monroc Road Sanford, FL 32771 (40,7)321-8410 SURETY: Western Surety Company P.O. Box 5077 Sioux Falls, SD 57117-5077 (800) 331-6053 OBLIGEE: City of Clearwater,Florida 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Suite 200 Clearwater, FL 33756-5520 (727) 562-4750 BOND AMOUNT: S1,33-0-,GH.40 *1M2,330,020 00 CONTRACT NO.: (If applicable) 12-0017-UT DESCRIPTION Of-' WORK: Northeast W. .F. Screw Lift Station Upgrades (#12-0017-UT) PROJECT LOCATION/ LEGAL DESCRIPTION: 3290 SR 580 Safety Harbor, FL 34965 FRONTPAGY All other bond page(s)are deetned subsequent to this page regardless of any page number(s)that may be printed thereon. *Scrivener ' s Error BOND NUMBER: 929589358 CONTRACT BOND STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF SEMINOLE KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we WJIARTON-S)4 INC WESTERN SURETY COMPANY as Contractor and address is p.o. B (Surety) whose lit,)Ine __.Q,5077 Sj_�,u�,F P"ID HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida(hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of. THE BASE BID OF $2,181,520.00, AND THE ADDITIVE ALTERNATE BID #4 OF $148,S00.00, FOR A TOTAL OF TWO MILLION, THREE HUNDICED THIRTY THOUSAND, TWENTY DOLLARS (st,330-P00-700) for thp,, ,,,, payment of which we bind ourselves, otir heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns :for the W 02000 faithful perfanuance of a certain written contract, dated the _JQLJ,iL- day of 2014, entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for, NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES (#12-0017-UT) a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for (lids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond,, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said ('),wVl)er against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the pail of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and fuilher, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor., material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Con tct,, 'alid that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things,keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. This bond is given to comply with section 255.05 Florida Statutes,and any action instituted by a clairriant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255,05(2)and 255.05(10),Florida Statutcs. SectionV.doex Pag I of 17 7/29/2013 CONTRACTBOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns,jointly and severally, that they will amply and full), protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of" any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of`any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work donc,- as aforesaid,or otherwise, And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns,jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any hen for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications, IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of 2014. W HARTON-S MITH,INC CON By: 2- Ronald F.Davoli,President/CE0 AT T,kST: Devon A.Lewis,Corporate Secretary WES N SURE Y C "P S ET' WITNESS: B E N'-FAc'r &I'lorida Licensed Resident Agent April L.Lively JCOIIJNkT ,VRSIGNED: Inquiries:(407)834-0022 -NZA SectionV.doex Page 2 of 17 7/29/2013 Wester r et�/ Company POWER OF ATTORNEY APPOINTING INDIVIDUAL ATTORNEY-IN-F'AC'T Know All N'len By These Presents,"'hat WESTERN SURETY COMPANY.,a South Dakota corporation,is a dUIV organized arid existing corporation having its principal office in the City of Sioux Falls.arid State of South Dakota, and that it does by virtue of the sigila'ture and sea] herein affixed Iterell4 make.constitute and appoint J W Guignard, Bryce R Guignard, April L Lively, Paul J Ciambriello, Jennifer L Mc Carta, Margie L Morris, Allyson Foss, Individually of l.ongwood, I=L, its true and lawful Atiorney(s)-in-Fact Nvitil full power and authority herelly, conferred to sign. seal and execute for and on its behalf bonds,undertakings and other obligatory insh-Urnelits of similar nature - In Unlimited amounts - and to bind it thereby as fully and to the Mine extent as it'such instralnents were signed by a duly authorized officer ofthe corporation and all the acts of said AttorneN,pursuant to the authority hereby given,are hereby ratified and confirmed. 'rhis Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the By-1,aNN Printed oil the reverse hereof.,duly adopted,as indicated,by the shareholders of the corporation. In Witness Whereof, WESTERN SURI-TY COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed by its Vice President and its corporate seat to be hereto aflixed on this t 7th day of September,2012. 0 00'.." WESTERN SURETY �SMAE?N' ' COMPANY S " - 'aLu`F.RnilNt,�Vic President State of South Dakota County ofMinnehaha ss On this 17th day of'Septeniber,2012.belOTe nic personally came Paul'r.Bruflat.to nic known,who.being 1)),me duly sworn.did depose and say; that he resides in the City of Sioux Falls, State of South Dakota; that he is the Vice President of WESTERN SLJRFTY('OMPANY described in and which executed the above instrument,that he knows the sea]of said corporation-,that the seal affixed to the said instrUnlent is such corporate seal,that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporation and that lie signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority, and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporation. MY commission expires + # J.MOBR June23.2015 ;(,,EZANOTARY PUBLIC SEAL SOUTH DAKOTA CERTIFICATE J, Mohr,Notary Public 1, L. Nelson, Assistant Secretary or WESTERN SURETY COMPANY do hereby certify that the Power of Attorney hereinabove set Forth is still in force_and farther certify that the By-Law of the corporatim printed on the reverse hereof is shill in f0l`M In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the seal of the said corpo ra0on this I lis day of err WESTERN SURETY COMPANY 'IMM Form F4280-7-2012 on,Assistant Secretary *Scrivener ' s Error CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this °� day of 2014 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "'City", and 'Wharton- Smith, Inc., of the City of Sanford, County of Seminole, and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor" WITNESSET : That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES (#12-0017-UT) in the amount of the base bid of$2,181,520.00, and the Additive Alternate Bid #4 OF S148,,500.00, for a total of TWO MILLION, THREE HUNDRED THIRTY THOUSAND, TWENTY DOLLARS ( 2,33a,0®4.0(�) *1,2,330,020.00 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a pant of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HERE,BY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION 'WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIMULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUIT CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFORE,MENTIONETD CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. secdonv.dmx Page 3 of 17 7/29,12013 CO TRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation-, and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions, and/or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of X1,000.00„ for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit sp�ecified herein, which sum of$1,000.00_per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. sectionvAocX Page 4 of 17 7/29/201!3 CO1 LT ACT (3) The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.(1701, Florida Statutes (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. Scuionv.docX Page 5 of 17 7/29/2013 CONTRACT (4) IN 'WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day, and year first above written. CITY CAE CLEAR WATER IN PINELLA,S COUNTY, FLORIDA f I3v. � r �� .., (SEAL) Willian P. Nome, II City Manager Attest. ` Countersigned: Rosemarie Call City Clerk Approved"as,to for it: George N. Cretekos � Mayor '.. l Carnilo Soto Assistant City Attorney (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) µ " 4 x . (Co z, to ALL ( ) (The person signing shall, in his oven handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation), Section V.eloc,x Page 6 of 17 7/29/2013 Wharton-Smith, Inc. CONSTRUCTION GROUP ......—----- ............ CORPORATE RESOLUTIOX 1, the undersigned Secretary of Wharton Smith, laic, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Florida, do hereby certify that a meeting of the Board of Directors of said corporation, duly held on January 6, 2014 a quorum being present,the following resolution was adopted and entered upon the regular minute boA of said corporation,is in accordance with the by-laws and is now in full force and effect to-wit: The current list of qualifiers to act for the business organization in all matters connected with its contracting business has now been amended to read: Ronald F. Davoli George E, Smith David V. Hayes Timothy S. Smith Ted C. Hicks Devon A. Lewis Richard L. Betourne, Jr. I HEREBY certify that the foregoing is a true and exact copy of the resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of this Corporation, and that such resolution has not been amended, rriodified, or revoked and is still in force and effect, Signed and sealed this 6th day of January, 2014. (Seal of CoWp .jWjj 4". 4r.,Ci vo evon A. Lewis,Secretary SEA1. D 1 Z (Director� Geor�ge E. ith, Director William R. )n,Director fonald K Davoli, CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVITFOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORATION FORM) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF SEMINOLE On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of Wharton-Smith, Inc., a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business, located at 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, Florida, 32771 (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the a 44% - day of 2014 with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal ----------ql,�Iasbwn r,"and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of-, torpor ti Owner, W.R.F. SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES (#12­0017-UT) That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me AFFIANT This day of 20_. BY: NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: P'REi SIDENT sectionv,docx Page 7 of'f 7 7/29/2013 PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN lid THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Wharton-Sinith, Inc. as Principal, and Western Surety Company as Surety, who's address is R 0, Box 5077,Sioux Falls,SD 57117-5077 —, are held and firnily bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the SUM Of Ten Percent QfAmoup Bid— Dollars ($ --10%of Bid-- ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Wharton-Smith, Inc. as Principal, and Western Surety Company as Surety, for work specified as: Northeast W.R.F. Screw Lift Station Upgrades('12-0017-UT) all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this i i th—day of_February 2014. (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) Corporation CV Prin ci By: Title fir,J J) 0,tv-J'4 vt /CEO e rn Surety orn n S Apiil L. Li n-]Fvct& Resident Agvpt* (The person signing shall, in his own Inquiries: (407) 834-0022 handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, lie must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). Addendum 2 Attachment 4-SectionV(3) Page 8 of 17 7/29/2013 AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Seminole Devon A. Lewis ............. being duty sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of Wharton-Smith, Inc. a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: 750 Monroe Road Sanford Seminole 1,L (Street & Number) (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of Wharton-Smith Inc. (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Ronald F. Davoli is President/CEO .................— (Officer's Name) (Title) --------- of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for Wharton-Smith, Inc. or said corporation by virtue of Board of Directors (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date Devon A. Lewis, Corporate Secretar­r Affiant Sworn to before me this I I day of February 12014. ot�aryy Public G'—" )1 2887 7J2O4 'DAWN K, BRAGG My' Dawn K. Brag, My COMM�sSION#EEO 12887 XPRES October 24,2014 Type/print/stamp name of Notary oiary5ervhce cam �4107)39BE-0 15-5 EE012887 Title or rank, and Serial No., if any Addendum 2 AttachMent 4-SectionV(3) Page 9 of 17 7/2912013 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Seminole, Ronald F. Davoll being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is President/CEO of Wharton-Smith, Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham, that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrai it from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent rtr Affiant Ronald F. Davoli, President/CEO Sworn to and subscribed before me this I I day of February _, 2014. a°` N DAWN K. BRAGS Mazy Public MY coMMiSSION#EE012887 A EXPIRES octaer 24,2014 (4O7);M 153 F1orW!N0tdTYSeFv'C0 Wm Addendum 2 Attachnimt 4- SectionV(3) Page 10 of 17 7/29/2013 PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES (#12-0017-UT) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES (#12-0017-UT) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, inalerials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and famish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: Addendurn 2 Attachment 4-SectionV(3) Page 1 1 of'17 7/29/2013 PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall k sit to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be fort(,�ilcd to become thc property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a �on or certified check on -Western Surety_Company Bank, for the sum of Ten Percent of Amount IficJ- ($jk�L-oLA-movun,t Bid) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as folhm,s: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If finn or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his narne but �flso the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, suplAier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: .Ronald F. Davoli, President/CEO 1644 Eagle Nest Circle, Winter Springs, FL 32708 Devon A. Lewis, Corporate Secretary 1823 Lochshyre Loop, Ocoee, FL 34761 ........... Signature of Bidden: Fonald�F. —Dalvoli, resident/CE(0 (The bidder must indicate whether(orpoyali!q Partnership, Company or Individual). State of Incorporation: Florida Corporate Address: 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771 Addendum 2 Altachinent 4-Sectionv(3) Page 12 of 17 T29/20 3 PROPOSAL (3) The person signing; shall, in his own handwriting;, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he n-toast, by affidavit, show his authority, to Find the corporation. Prinei By: Title: aeN A -v WiL r10 Business Address of Kidder: 750 Monroe Road City and State: Sanford, Florida Zip Code 32771. Dated at 8:00 am , this l l day of February _ A.D., `014, State of Incorporation: Florida Corporate Address: 750 Monroe Road, Sanford, FL 32771. Addendum 2 Attachment 4-SectionV(3) Page 13 of 17 7•`29 2013 CITY OF C LEA RWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW LIFTSTATION UPGRADES (#12-0017-UT) Acta,iowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications, Addendum No. I Date: 2/412014 Addendum No. 2 Date: 2/5/2014 Addendum No. 3 Date: 2/7/2014 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. ............... Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No, Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Wharton-Smith, Inc. Fe 'Di r) (Signature aaf Officer) Ronald F. Davoli, President/CEO (Title of Officer) Febiruary 11, 2014 (Date) ........... Addendum 7 Attachment 4-SectionV(3) Page 14 of 17 7129/20 13 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: NORTHEAST W.R.F. SCREW LIFT STATION UPGRADES (##12-0017-UT) CONTRACTOR: Wharton-Smith, Inn. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ (Nurnbers) BIDDER'S, GRAND TOTAL: � , t (fr e 4 - t 1"nou�L-aJ J &' C� j.......... ..-......__ (Wo ii ds) ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. 41T PRICE "TOTAL —NO. UNIT Screw Lilt Station Upgrades I ]Mobilization/Demobilization and General I Ls Conditions t t 2a. Owner-Direct Purchase of Four Screw 1 LS $61.9,512.00 $619,512.00 Pumps 2b. Screw Pumps Sales Tax I I..s $ 37,220.72 $ 37,220.72 2c. Coordination, Installation, Testing, and I LS 00 0 Contractor Warrant of Screw Pumps � y I � �� I 3 Additional Improvements 1 LS S L5i 100 00— 5, 4 Testing Allowance 1 AL $ 5,000.00 $ 010, pi 5 Record Drawings 1 LS ,Iy ' 6 Removal of Debris frorn the Internal Recycle 75 CY Pump Station cD '1 Subtotal (Bid Item Nos. 1-6)= I 3 �- �iw 7 Owner's 10%� Contingency= M Total (Bid Item Nos. 1-7)= l [ Rase Bid Subtotal (Bid Item Dios. 1-6) = Subtotal Owner 10% Contingency(Bid Item No. 7)_ Base.Bid Grand.Total (Biel Item Nos. 1-7)_ ADDITIVE ALTERNATE 1 (Approval by the Owner and En ineer is Required Prior to Proceeding) ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. UNIT UNIT PRICE TOTAL 0 UUNIT QTY 8a. Owner-Direct Purchase of Screw Pump 1 LS $1.54,878.00 $154,878.00 No. 2 8b, Screw Pumps Sales Tax I I,S $ 9,342.68 $ 9,342.68 8c. Coordination, Installation, Testing, and I I's -)9 Conti-actor Warranty of Screw Pump No. 1 � J Additive Alteate I subtotal (Item Nos. 8a-8c)= .Addendum 2.Attachment 4-5ectionV(3) Page 15 of 17 7r29i201 3 *Scrivener ' s Error . owners J % '(a 1fitt gema m .— 1 1 1 i " YERNAT w a ���� � or to Pruceediq � .�' , ' , o 9b. �9.crcw pill �m�a � ,� � Ian. [--"')—Id" d �artiamtt,mcar� ittQa�� aca �m ��� �— .., wm" 8am~aw��, i Ciwr� . am��i � 019w tt eta �I m�ata . gym C �Na� rra mJam „ (,Over,e r �m _ �' .. . ,m cw i'uarrm�~s � N d ail t or to Proc+ ,�i � m � Owli m -, 1,0 4 �w "tamafitlt,ncr I � ku iint� didi r i�C rau � wC G �t m a a � �a 1 ......��.t� �prpy��i 1 t: w r" �fi rY, �1 r rl "r �r�t .. � ,,,,, 1�m lien " i�uta�m, its i# ra.a � amia�aa � �itp�� ➢ Y � 9Imm "'i awaaa ttr 'artma� �+c roxal' di r E �t fist i n, .. �,. (Approval tite ow mj , e , m e Prior to rmo..ceec ill ...,hvu t * r° i„m b I . tmm� 1 0 " m..........� Addifive 3, ew �tm° d " . , Grwiid I'Mal (Base Bl +Additive,alt r 1 +Addiffi i � Additive Alternate 3-- „. ..� _ THEBIDDER'S GRAND �TOTAL ABOVE I HIS TOTAL L ID BASED IS �,NIT �''i ICE L MI PRICES UM AND THE TIM'X 1,-, T111 fE E QUIRED FOR C1 EC110 ", THIS FIGURE IS FO INFORMATION ONLY AT THE, TIME wCW OPENING 1 U S. "1 HE I NVILI;, MAKE "l'"H T BULA77O " FROM TIJE UNIT, PRICES, AND i',Lii l;' S�U'M PRICE U). IF17HERE IS ANERROR IN THE 17OT I, BYTHE BIDDEO, � IT SHALL. E 1.1ANG D AS ONLY " "1 J.,E U IT PRIC L AND IA)P4IT SUM PR1 , ' SHALL GO VEI , '. ,Aatadim n 4,,. mtir rmV(3) Page 16of l7 71'294201 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION III,ITEM25, IF YOUR BID IS$1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, 2VIA YDEEAI YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant,by virtue of the signature below,certifies that: I The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleurn Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudue List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in hws�ness operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, mainwining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clear-water in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Cornpanies, with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities the Iran Petroleum. Sector List,orQngages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Authorized Signature Ronald F. Davoli Printed Narne President/CEO Title Wharton-Smith, Inc.. ................. Name of Entity/Corporation STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Seminole The foregoin instrument was acknowledged before me on this I I day of February 2014, by Ronald F. l avoli (name of person whose signature is being notarized p� as the President/CEO (title) of Wharton-Smith, Inc. w_® (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described heron —X _, or produced a (type of identification)as identification, and who did/did not take a mat' . ON DAWN K, BRAGG 011 .......... my COMMIMON ft E-EO12887 Notary Public EXPIRES October 24,2014 Dawn K. Bragg (401)111-0153... 91oridallo18,,,5emQo com Printed Name My Commission Expires: October 24, 2014 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Addendurn 2 Attachment 4-SectionV(3) Page 17 ot'17 '7/29/2013 DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE FORM The undersigried vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that Wharton-Sinith, Inc, does: (Name of Business) 1. Publish a statement not Eying employees that the unlawful manufacture,distribution,dispensin&, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. 2. Infonn employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace,any available drug counseling,rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs,and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations, 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection(1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection(1), notify the employees that,as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual set-vices that are under bid,the employee will abide by the ternis of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of,or plea of guilty or noto contenders to, any violation of Chapter 893 or of any controlled substance law of the Unit6i States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five(5)days after such conviction. 5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community,by any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements, Bidder's Signature Ronald F. Davoli, President/CEO February 11, 2014 Date 17L.:1 06 2.036 rev.10'97 Licenses .............. .............. AC# 61 80B69 STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT iOF BUSINESS AND PROPESSI AL REGUIhT1014 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY LICENRE BO&RD SEQ#1,12,D7020,10,55 .... ...... LICE19RE NBR 7A Thv,',a GENERAL CObrl"RAC'rOR Nameld bellow 19 ClKlUrIFIED Uner the pzois:iona of Chaptr 'ZI Exp dilration datvea AUG 31., 20114 e SMITH, GEORGE �E '1w WFIARIPON-SMITH INC 750 MONROE ROAD SANFORD FL 3 2 7 71 RICK SCOTT XrN LAWSON GOVERNOR SY LAW AC# 621IJ3809 STATE OF FLORIDA I)EPARTMEM' C)f BUSIXESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CORSTRUCTION INDU I S!TRY LtC'RNl8lNG BOARD SEQ#1,12071600809 010516 The UNDERGROXW. UTILITY k EXCAY Named belcm IS CERTIFIED Under tbe p,rovial,ons of ChHp tefA/a, Expirl,ation datez: AUG 31, 210ii )'E"".7 DAVOLI RONALD FRANK W'HARTO,N-SMITH INC 750 COONTY' RD 15 El 0 BOX 4711028 LAKE MONROE F'L 3 2 7 4 7-3,02 8 rr KEN LAIWSON G'0V ERNOR SECRETARY AS REGL)HRED BY u,A'W 7'1 711 7, 6173771,771 '7 STATE OF FLORIDA DZPARTKPWr OF BUSINEX9 AND PROFE1,SIONAL REGULATION CONS TRUir."T"t ON INDUSTRY LICENSING BOARD SEQ#L1201702,01203 SMITH, GEORGH H VWARTON-SMITH INC,` 750 MONROE ROAD SANFORD FL 32771 RICK S'COTT rRN LAWSON (R)"VERNOR CNESPLAY AS REQUIRED BY LAW SZCRI',TARY' Licenses . .a w �..o..,, .® ...� o � .� .��..,. .�w,. ,.. AC# 617 7484 STATE OF FLORMA, DEPAR'N N" OF BUSINESS ANT) PYVuCNFESSZONAL N 'rNoNN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY UCFNSINd PILAU D NL m NqnI..... N„����8��'�4«U U4� �N HC,�'�°m p' 'q° �"� � N!la q���� �` r� r��t� „r✓/ ..rte� ,„u SMITH, TIMOTHY N CO'! r/%���/O/�m� WHAR q C Nal l"N NN INC, 1?0 BOX 471028 RICK SCOTT KEN 1,,AWSON A(',# 16180900 STATE OF FLORIDA Nab C 7NN r _. 'Sh��,NNN"NY. p '* AVI d'1, C ONN'N.I C N'OR Named below IS CERTIFIED / "s, 1///9i ncter the provisions of Cha Expiration date: AUa 31, 201 . HEWITT, PATRICK JOHN WHAIVION-AN N ¢NN INC NN ;N�N Nu NND Nx 32751 GOVEIVIOR SECRETARY SEW 1,12062800618 111 i�.N�,�wN�x� IX!hzw N��°w•r�rttawNr��wrN uwN Na ,a�Na'NN, ,�� � r P',bxaN..N. Ca 2NAC'N NN.arCNNN ��% iii MiARTON SMITH INC 493 & PINE MEAT)OM DR, RICK SCOTT KEN 1,A:WSON Licenses a % .ryIEyy p .iirrrrpp,Fr yy1 ,��.pp, ##pyrL,,., y �*p py�y Flt LID rp I<l,H'4�1i�G11 IE.1<y130/14 '4'R"1V rIr I'()N SNrI'll I IN(' 7.it ("l l � 1, Il.l Account#:022717 SANFORD,F 11 32771 ,Z),:.L LA'l'[*.t1 (;d=:ORG'1"1" >"L9;PH C('G.E."s) l.aLm, m, (',I,C032649 j_ 1°�rarnpin ��, W1 C"ll2lll 3lp77 08427 Anxsaml 1'ur:l $45.00 Date P:u:l 07/23/201.1 c)f Stat FIC- - id a P,frlJlOrfl 'r is outhoriTed under the provision 0.T acs r$6 1 ��N��16,04d(r�;torures,to'offer engineering services to the public through o professional Err Orie,er„dole or ens'ecfvnd r Chapter 4"?1m Florida rotuutes.. AudUirntien:2128/2015 CA Lic.No: s it No: 2�.i g�.O1S(7133'3(1 Ce:tiluawrrle of Lurllraricatirrrw lgl_ 2013-241413'C1SWESS TAX Rk"GETP,f 8-1 ss v.m.00 ads Lww wi,rc 22D0; CLIPS BUSINESS fAX REe EIP]E MRIES SEPTEMBER 01623 et LLV— 1.15423G Syw�@7J,'W{X lSltiLakl QFtk rmi1 m 9'SIYPS^w W.,." E] 6'ILNkRRL C©WI1^tL{ .R.CLASS l4 49,5r 2 9auoarmraa'ragr,_ 0 fea taS FS 6419 FL N,f/ 1144;31ra� +Nd LLA PdeWli'nf1E'lflYJ1d31. ,,� L dfi rF C SMIYXI 1 .4 W 1v�MAI1fb vNC ut NROEf M IAItL AIA3NY3tlE..FL 32/4�" .: NW',F,PHONE ONLY RECII"T MUCT 11 CONVICWg4115"OIq PE IIEO IN 11"U"11,1""1511,51,11, ""V110 GMYY W111"Fr'f.L1111 uwwrvm�""w�"m�m�x z ,wrcw �m�m, 2013.2014 BUSWESS MX N C W YduS'nicre,n Plvx'C>mew. Mas,srrv;buemftr,aYry.LmNmlm�emi.FL 3'60' "9"tr51S�ELL PSINESS.TA}RECEIPT EXPIRES UPT[MRER 3tl.2fYld E, ..4P.:;T h{ ;fde342 as®urn NUm�Nwr: ,xem2zr__..._......__..m.m..0i�?n an cG�Naam�FaamNao Cleve 4'�c0wn¢x 4EapnttAt MV'm"/snra L PELPf'ESSIfC"L FIRM OFFICE tyy5y t. Squa.F—IF,' 15C F— i'S EC Y_95AB19'11.AAdfDLu 44 a5 FP.C R!'EA Nk'f 10 LOR'0119 Ip 's W B�dL;'9ll.PSL516W38. ✓v HJ4 FT FWN SAP n1➢ryf III" PO BOX 471C2E ,Jaxc wmNawrt.P1.a!-m/ � .,....._ .. ,. N:h'L&PHONE,ONLY fRE..F!'Y M�11YS7C 5iC 4WN'.SP'IL`41CUSLY FA SPL,4rE99 IN YOUR PLA(';LOF DUSINESS VN�ID)ONLYWMtN3IPNE.D Licenses State of Florida Department of State I certify from the records of this office that WHARTON-SMITH, INC. is a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Florida, filed on April 3, 1984, effective April 2, 1984. The document number of this corporation is G94383. I further certify that said corporation has paid all fees due this office through December 31, 2013, that its most recent annual report/uniform business report was filed on January 16, 2013, and its status is active. I further certify that said corporation has not filed Articles of Dissolution. Given under ney hand and the Great Seal of1h e State of Florida at Talksh asse e, th e Capifti,&is is the Sixteenth day of January,2013 Secretary of State 4"Q4 Authentication TD:CC2747910036 To authenticate this ce"leate,visit the following siteenter this ID,and then follow the instructions displayed. https://efile.sunbiz.orgleertauthver.htrW Licenses ............. ................... nww 2013-2014 Hit k SBOROUGH COUNTY BUSINESS TAX RECEIPT EXPIRES 9-30-2014 wa KT ______7- —__ TAX— OCC CODE Bl TYPE H WASM SURCHARGE 090 010 CONTRACTOR-GENERAL 40,00 1800 RVS�NESS 4912 LASALLE ST LoCAMN TAMPA 33607 NAME SMITH GEORGE E I WHARTON-SMITH INC MAILIW� P 0 BOX 471028 ADDRESS LAKE MONROE FL 32747-1028 BUSINESS TAX RECEIP"'I DOUG BELDEN.TAX COLLECTOR PAID-33969 -6 613-635-5200 081312013—5B4O0 TFfl8E1ECQMESA TAX RECE7A'+'7 WHEN VAODATEO, ............. ............................ --_----- ........................ ........... ....... li lCN FL11�%S 0 IL!N Fli'CONSTktj(:'�K)�� P�NF1�AS� Olt i N�11 Y CONS1 H 0(11k P, Ho"�W� 0 �41,,NSIM�M WO) DlH1(Nk 13OFSTHIA 1 MSCHk�H,11FS TlIA� 9 Gom Ill F,SmM� ll,% I)W' 11,11mmun-Sopkh tim, S lA FF CdA<V 19 144'C'048385 S 1,�C F,(Vk�['a IAS H�Ell)lWilfflik LK1 (jjj�uv PMk�,Lfi l tk' Lk ll.1TV Ikf��J[)A COSUIENSA1 l()N 6 ^,l RAN(F 141 11 11 MS BOARD, INM,�VAN('F VVM�ME,,46111"11M) lN 00k)S UNIV Sr�pfendho,M,2104 N S rANDING Ul'r1 H, SQAIMN^fJ0,2014 Ganda 011, D,a0-OiFlYSUAN0�1 0,11 V2,10 .............. Licenses TAMPA F 6, CIIass Records Ji 491 11 WLASALLESt PO HOX'47102�; Chsis,Records POLL MAIIJ Ilk • Wharton- Smith, Inc. CONSTRUCTION GROUP • CORPORATE RESOLUTION I, the undersigned Secretary of Wharton Smith, Inc., a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Florida, do hereby certify that a meeting of the Board of Directors of said corporation, duly held on January 6, 2014 a quorum being present, the following resolution was adopted and entered upon the regular minute book of said corporation, is in accordance with the by -laws and is now in full force and effect to -wit: The current list of qualifiers to act for the business organization in all matters connected with its contracting business has now been amended to read: Ronald F. Davoli George E. Smith David V. Hayes Timothy S. Smith Ted C. Hicks Devon A. Lewis Richard L. Betourne, Jr. I HEREBY certify that the foregoing is a true and exact copy of the resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of this Corporation, and that such resolution has not been amended, modified, or revoked and is still in force and effect. Signed and sealed this 6th day of January, 2014. (Seal of Comp .�,c'� .O1,pOR4pF' ;Zet Q•i c, SEAL OS . • • .�,'si 021 9a `o`,,e`�e ���sitdntaeti���� George E. S pith, Director William R. on, Director Donald F. Davoli, Director Devon A. Lewis, Secretary